Petroleum Experts

User Manual

IPM
PROSPER
Version 10
May 2008
 PROSPER
IPM - Single Well Model OVERVIEW
by Petroleum Experts Limited

PROSPER is a well performance, design and optimisation program which is part of the
Integrated Production Modelling Toolkit (IPM). This tool is the industry standard well
modelling with the major operators worldwide.

PROSPER is designed to allow the building of reliable and consistent well models, with the
ability to address each aspect of well bore modelling VIZ, PVT (fluid characterisation), VLP
correlations (for calculation of flow-line and tubing pressure loss) and IPR (reservoir
inflow).

PROSPER provides unique matching features, which tune PVT, multiphase flow
correlations and IPR to match measured field data, allowing a consistent well model to be
built prior to use in prediction (sensitivities or artificial lift design). PROSPER enables
detailed surface pipeline performance and design: Flow Regimes, pipeline stability, Slug
Size andFrequency

APPLICATIONS
Design and optimise well completions including multi-lateral, multilayer and horizontal
wells
Design and optimise tubing and pipeline sizes
Design, diagnose and optimise Gas lifted, Hydraulic pumps and ESP wells
Generate lift curves for use in simulators
Calculate pressure losses in wells, flow lines and across chokes
Predict flowing temperatures in wells and pipelines
Monitor well performance to rapidly identify wells requiring remedial action
Calculate total skin and determine breakdown (damage, deviation or
partial penetration)
Unique black oil model for retrograde condensate fluids, accounting
for liquid dropout in the wellbore
Allocate production between wells
 3

Copyright Notice
The copyright in this manual and the associated computer program are the property of Petroleum Experts
Ltd. All rights reserved. Both, this manual and the computer program have been provided pursuant to a
Licence Agreement containing restriction of use.

No part of this manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical or
otherwise, or disclose to third parties without prior written consent from Petroleum Experts Ltd., Spectrum
House, 2 Powderhall Road, Edinburgh, EH7 4GB, Scotland, UK.

Petroleum Experts Ltd. All rights reserved.

IPM Suite, GAP, PROSPER, MBAL, PVTP, REVEAL, RESOLVE, IFM and OpenServer are trademarks of
Petroleum Experts Ltd.

Microsoft (Windows), Windows (NT), Windows (2000) and Windows (XP) are registered trademarks of the
Microsoft Corporation

The software described in this manual is furnished under a licence agreement. The software may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. It is against the law to copy the software on
any medium except as specifically allowed in the license agreement. No part of this documentation may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying,
recording, or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser's personal
use, unless express written consent has been given by Petroleum Experts Limited.

Address:

Petroleum Experts Limited

Spectrum House
2 Powderhall Road
Edinburgh, Scotland
EH7 4GB

Tel : (44 131) 474 7030

Fax : (44 131) 474 7031

email: edinburgh@petex.com
Internet: www.petex.com

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 I PROSPER

Table of Contents
0

Chapter 1 Introduction 2
1 Using PROSPER
................................................................................................................................... 2
2 PROSPER and...................................................................................................................................
Systems Analysis 4
About PROSPER
.......................................................................................................................................................... 6
3 Examples ................................................................................................................................... 8

Chapter 2 File Management 10

1 PROSPER Files
................................................................................................................................... 10
PVT Data (*.PVT)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Input Data (*.SIN)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Analysis Data..........................................................................................................................................................
(*.ANL) 10
Output Data (*.OUT)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 11
Creating a New..........................................................................................................................................................
File 11
Opening an Existing
..........................................................................................................................................................
File 11
Saving a File .......................................................................................................................................................... 12
Copying a File.......................................................................................................................................................... 12
2 Preferences ................................................................................................................................... 12
Main Screen .......................................................................................................................................................... 13
File .......................................................................................................................................................... 15
Plot .......................................................................................................................................................... 16
User Applications
.......................................................................................................................................................... 18
Limits .......................................................................................................................................................... 19
Units .......................................................................................................................................................... 20
Equipment .......................................................................................................................................................... 21
Miscellaneous.......................................................................................................................................................... 21
3 Software Key...................................................................................................................................
Maintenance 22
4 FileList ................................................................................................................................... 25
5 Evaluate OpenServer
...................................................................................................................................
Statement 25
6 User Correlations
................................................................................................................................... 26
7 Printer Setup................................................................................................................................... 28
Preparing to Print
.......................................................................................................................................................... 28
Selecting and..........................................................................................................................................................
configuring a Printer 28
Printing Export
..........................................................................................................................................................
Data 28
Selecting an Exported
..........................................................................................................................................................
Data to Print 30
8 Word Processing
...................................................................................................................................
in PROSPER 30
9 Clipboard Command
................................................................................................................................... 30
10 Command Buttons
................................................................................................................................... 30

Chapter 3 Quick Start Guide 34

1 Example - Naturally
...................................................................................................................................
Flowing Oil Well 34
2 Model Set Up................................................................................................................................... 35
 Contents II

Options .......................................................................................................................................................... 35
PVT Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 36
Equipment Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 41
IPR Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 48
3 Matching of the
...................................................................................................................................
model to a test 52
VLP Matching.......................................................................................................................................................... 53
IPR Matching.......................................................................................................................................................... 61
Checking.........................................................................................................................................................
the Model for High Rate Test 67
4 Running Calculations
................................................................................................................................... 68
Performing a ..........................................................................................................................................................
System Analysis 69
Calculating Gradient
..........................................................................................................................................................
Traverses 76
Generating VLP
..........................................................................................................................................................
Curves for Simulators 79

Chapter 4 Data Input - General 84

1 PROSPER Main
...................................................................................................................................
Menu 84
File .......................................................................................................................................................... 85
Options .......................................................................................................................................................... 85
PVT .......................................................................................................................................................... 85
System .......................................................................................................................................................... 85
Matching .......................................................................................................................................................... 85
Calculation .......................................................................................................................................................... 85
Design .......................................................................................................................................................... 86
Output .......................................................................................................................................................... 86
Wizard .......................................................................................................................................................... 86
Units .......................................................................................................................................................... 86
Help .......................................................................................................................................................... 86
2 Options Selection
................................................................................................................................... 86
Fluid Description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 88
Fluid Type......................................................................................................................................................... 88
Method ......................................................................................................................................................... 88
Equation .........................................................................................................................................................
of State Setup 88
Separator......................................................................................................................................................... 89
Emulsions......................................................................................................................................................... 89
Hydrates ......................................................................................................................................................... 89
Water Viscosity
......................................................................................................................................................... 89
Water Vapour
......................................................................................................................................................... 89
Viscosity .........................................................................................................................................................
model 90
Well .......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Flow Type......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Well Type......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Artificial Lift .......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Method ......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Type ......................................................................................................................................................... 91
Calculation Type.......................................................................................................................................................... 93
Predict ......................................................................................................................................................... 93
Model ......................................................................................................................................................... 93
Calculation......................................................................................................................................................... 94
Output ......................................................................................................................................................... 95
Steam Calculation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 95
Well Completion .......................................................................................................................................................... 95
Type ......................................................................................................................................................... 95
Gravel Pack......................................................................................................................................................... 95

May, 2008 PROSPER Manual

II
 III PROSPER

Reservoir .......................................................................................................................................................... 95
Type ......................................................................................................................................................... 95
Gas Coning......................................................................................................................................................... 96
User Information
..........................................................................................................................................................
and Comments 96

Chapter 5 PVT Data Input 98

1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 98
2 Black Oil - Oil...................................................................................................................................
and Water 99
Input Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 99
Tables .......................................................................................................................................................... 100
Match Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 101
Regression .......................................................................................................................................................... 102
Match ......................................................................................................................................................... 103
Match All ......................................................................................................................................... 103
Parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 103
Viewing the Match ...................................................................................................................................
Parameters 104
Matching FVF...................................................................................................................................
above Bubble Point 104
Correlations.......................................................................................................................................................... 105
Calculate .......................................................................................................................................................... 105
Calculating
.........................................................................................................................................................
PVT Data 105
Displaying
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Calculated Data on the screen 106
Plotting the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculated Data 107
Saving PVT
.........................................................................................................................................................
tables from Calculated Data 108
Save the PVT ..........................................................................................................................................................
Data 108
Open .......................................................................................................................................................... 108
Composition.......................................................................................................................................................... 109
Emulsions .......................................................................................................................................................... 110
Emulsions......................................................................................................................................................... 110
Non-Newtonian..........................................................................................................................................................
Fluid 113
Power Fluid ..........................................................................................................................................................
Data 115
Hydrates Formation
..........................................................................................................................................................
table 116
3 Black Oil - Dry
...................................................................................................................................
And Wet Gas 117
Input Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 117
4 Black Oil - Retrograde
...................................................................................................................................
Condensate 118
Input Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 119
Calculations.......................................................................................................................................................... 120
5 Equation Of...................................................................................................................................
State - All Fluids 120
EOS Model Setup
.......................................................................................................................................................... 122
EOS PVT Input
..........................................................................................................................................................
Data 128
Importing.........................................................................................................................................................
Matched EoS 129
Using the EoS
.......................................................................................................................................................... 129
Generate .........................................................................................................................................................
PVT properties 129
Phase Envelope
......................................................................................................................................................... 132
Target GOR
......................................................................................................................................................... 134

Chapter 6 Equipment Data Input 136

1 Predicting Pressure
...................................................................................................................................
Only 136
Deviation Survey
.......................................................................................................................................................... 137
Filter ......................................................................................................................................................... 140
Surface Equipment
.......................................................................................................................................................... 143
Downhole Equipment
.......................................................................................................................................................... 146
 Contents IV

Temperature..........................................................................................................................................................
Survey 148
Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 149
2 Predicting Pressure
...................................................................................................................................
and Temperature 151
Rough Approximation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 151
Deviation .........................................................................................................................................................
Survey 151
Surface .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 151
Downhole .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 152
Geothermal.........................................................................................................................................................
Gradient 152
Average.........................................................................................................................................................
Heat Capacities 153
Enthalpy Balance
.......................................................................................................................................................... 154
Deviation .........................................................................................................................................................
Survey 155
Surface .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 155
Downhole .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 158
Temperature
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data 160
Drilling and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Completion 161
Lithology......................................................................................................................................................... 162
Databases ......................................................................................................................................................... 163
Improved Approximation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 165
Deviation .........................................................................................................................................................
Survey 166
Surface .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 166
Downhole .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 167
Geothermal.........................................................................................................................................................
Gradient 167
Sea Temperature
.........................................................................................................................................................
Gradient 168

Chapter 7 IPR Data Input 171

1 IPR Single Well
...................................................................................................................................
Data 172
The Main Data
..........................................................................................................................................................
Entry Screen 172
Section Buttons
.......................................................................................................................................................... 173
Action Buttons
.......................................................................................................................................................... 173
Model Selection
..........................................................................................................................................................
Screen 175
Data Input Screen
.......................................................................................................................................................... 176
2 IPR Models ...................................................................................................................................
for Oil Wells 178
P.I. Entry .......................................................................................................................................................... 179
Vogel .......................................................................................................................................................... 180
Composite .......................................................................................................................................................... 180
Darcy .......................................................................................................................................................... 180
Fetkovich .......................................................................................................................................................... 180
Multi-rate Fetkovich
.......................................................................................................................................................... 181
Jones .......................................................................................................................................................... 181
Multi-rate Jones
.......................................................................................................................................................... 181
Transient .......................................................................................................................................................... 182
Hydraulically..........................................................................................................................................................
Fractured Well 182
Horizontal Well
..........................................................................................................................................................
- No Flow Boundaries 183
Horizontal Well
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Constant Pressure Upper Boundary 184
Multi-Layer Inflow
.......................................................................................................................................................... 185
External Entry
.......................................................................................................................................................... 186
Horizontal well
..........................................................................................................................................................
- dP Friction Loss in Wellbore 187
Multi-Layer -..........................................................................................................................................................
dP Loss in Wellbore 190
SkinAide .......................................................................................................................................................... 193
Dual Porosity.......................................................................................................................................................... 193
Horizontal Well
..........................................................................................................................................................
with Transverse Vertical Fractures 193
Thermally Induced
..........................................................................................................................................................
Fracture Model 194
Overview......................................................................................................................................................... 194

May, 2008 PROSPER Manual

IV
V PROSPER

Data Entry
......................................................................................................................................................... 195
Using Relative
..........................................................................................................................................................
Permeabilities in PROSPER 196
Coning Calculation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 200
3 IPR for Gas...................................................................................................................................
and Retrograde Condensate 201
Jones .......................................................................................................................................................... 201
Forchheimer.......................................................................................................................................................... 202
Back Pressure.......................................................................................................................................................... 202
C and n .......................................................................................................................................................... 202
Multi-rate C and
..........................................................................................................................................................
n 203
Multi-rate Jones
.......................................................................................................................................................... 203
External Entry
.......................................................................................................................................................... 203
Petroleum Experts
.......................................................................................................................................................... 203
Hydraulically..........................................................................................................................................................
Fractured Well 205
Horizontal Well
..........................................................................................................................................................
- No-Flow Boundaries 205
Multi-layer Inflow
.......................................................................................................................................................... 205
Horizontal Well
..........................................................................................................................................................
- dP Friction Loss in Wellbore 206
Dual Porosity.......................................................................................................................................................... 206
Horizontal Well
..........................................................................................................................................................
with Transverse Vertical Fractures 206
Multi-Layer -..........................................................................................................................................................
dP Loss in Wellbore 206
Modified Isochronal
..........................................................................................................................................................
Inflow Model 206
Forchheimer..........................................................................................................................................................
with Pseudo Pressure 208
Multirate Forchheimer
..........................................................................................................................................................
with Pseudo Pressure 208
4 Skin Models................................................................................................................................... 208
Mechanical/Geometrical
..........................................................................................................................................................
Skin 208
Deviation/Partial
..........................................................................................................................................................
Penetration Skin 213
5 Gravel Packed
...................................................................................................................................
Completions 214
Gravel Pack ..........................................................................................................................................................
Completion Velocities 217
6 Viscosity Modelling
................................................................................................................................... 218
7 Compaction...................................................................................................................................
Permeability Reduction 219
8 Injection Wells
................................................................................................................................... 221
9 SkinAide ................................................................................................................................... 222
SkinAide Theoretical
..........................................................................................................................................................
Background 222
Position .........................................................................................................................................................
of the producing interval with respect to reservoir geometry 222
Interference
.........................................................................................................................................................
between perforations and the damaged zone 223
The Crushed
.........................................................................................................................................................
Zone 224
Perforation
.........................................................................................................................................................
tunnel which penetrates the formation 224
Perforation
.........................................................................................................................................................
tunnel through the casing and cement 225
Annulus.........................................................................................................................................................
between Casing and Screen 225
Hemispherical
.........................................................................................................................................................
Flow Model 226
Using SkinAide
.......................................................................................................................................................... 227
Flow Model......................................................................................................................................................... 227
Skin Model......................................................................................................................................................... 228
Perforation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data 228
Geometry ......................................................................................................................................................... 228
Petrophysics
......................................................................................................................................................... 230
Damaged .........................................................................................................................................................
Zone 231
Cased Hole......................................................................................................................................................... 232
Crushed.........................................................................................................................................................
Zone 232
Perforations
......................................................................................................................................................... 234
10 Multi-Lateral...................................................................................................................................
Interface 240
Network Interface
.......................................................................................................................................................... 240
 Contents VI

Motivation
......................................................................................................................................................... 240
Interface.........................................................................................................................................................
Overview 240
Network Window ......................................................................................................................................... 241
The Navigator Window ......................................................................................................................................... 244
Toolbar Details......................................................................................................................................... 245
Network Manipulation ......................................................................................................................................... 246
Menu Details ......................................................................................................................................... 246
Visualisation Screens ......................................................................................................................................... 249
Data Entry .......................................................................................................................................................... 250
Overview......................................................................................................................................................... 250
Tie-point.........................................................................................................................................................
and Junction Data 251
Tubing Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 251
Completion
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data 251
Reservoir.........................................................................................................................................................
Data 252
Example of How
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Set Up a Simple System 252
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 252
Place the.........................................................................................................................................................
Nodes in the Network Window 253
Connect.........................................................................................................................................................
the Nodes 253
Enter the.........................................................................................................................................................
Data 254
Visualise.........................................................................................................................................................
/ Calculate 255

Chapter 8 Artificial Lift Data Input 257

1 Gas Lift Input
...................................................................................................................................
Data 257
Fixed Depth ..........................................................................................................................................................
Of Injection 258
Optimum Depth..........................................................................................................................................................
of Injection 258
Valve Depth ..........................................................................................................................................................
Specified 259
Gas Lift (Safety
..........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment) 260
Gas Lift (Allow
..........................................................................................................................................................
injection in Pipe Line above wellhead) 261
2 ESP Input Data
................................................................................................................................... 263
3 HSP Input Data
................................................................................................................................... 264
4 Progressive...................................................................................................................................
Cavity Pumps 265
5 Coiled Tubing
...................................................................................................................................
Gas Lift 266
6 Diluent Injection
................................................................................................................................... 267
7 Jet Pumps ................................................................................................................................... 268
8 Multiphase ...................................................................................................................................
Pumps 269
9 Sucker Rod...................................................................................................................................
Pumps 270

Chapter 9 Matching Menu 273

1 VLP/IPR Match
...................................................................................................................................
and Quality Check 274
VLP Matching
.......................................................................................................................................................... 277
VLP Correlation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Applications 280
IPR Matching
.......................................................................................................................................................... 281
2 Gradient Matching
................................................................................................................................... 284
3 Surface Pipe
...................................................................................................................................
Matching 286
4 Correlation ...................................................................................................................................
Comparison 288
5 QuickLook for
...................................................................................................................................
Gas Lift 291
Input .......................................................................................................................................................... 292
Performing the
..........................................................................................................................................................
QuickLook Calculation 295

May, 2008 PROSPER Manual

VI
 VII PROSPER

6 QuickLook for
...................................................................................................................................
ESP 298
Input .......................................................................................................................................................... 298
Performing the
..........................................................................................................................................................
QuickLook Calculation 300
7 QuickLook for
...................................................................................................................................
HSP 302
Input .......................................................................................................................................................... 303
Performing the
..........................................................................................................................................................
QuickLook Calculation 304
8 Vertical Pipe
...................................................................................................................................
Parameters 307
9 Surface Flow
...................................................................................................................................
line Parameters 307
10 Correlation ...................................................................................................................................
Thresholds 307

Chapter 10 Calculation Menu 309

1 Inflow (IPR)................................................................................................................................... 310
2 System (Ipr...................................................................................................................................
+ Vlp) 314
Left - Hand Intersection
..........................................................................................................................................................
for VLP/IPR curves 316
Sensitivity Variables
..........................................................................................................................................................
Screen 317
Sensitivity
.........................................................................................................................................................
Combinations Screen 319
Calculation Screen
.......................................................................................................................................................... 320
3 Gradient (Traverse)
................................................................................................................................... 330
Options .......................................................................................................................................................... 333
Maximum .........................................................................................................................................................
Grain Diameter 333
Erosional
.........................................................................................................................................................
Velocity Calculation for Sand Laden Fluids 336
Gradient.........................................................................................................................................................
(Traverse)-Modified Turner Equation 338
Pigging ......................................................................................................................................................... 340
4 VLP (Tubing...................................................................................................................................
Curves) 340
VLP (Tubing)..........................................................................................................................................................
Curves - 3 Variables 340
VLP (Tubing)..........................................................................................................................................................
Curves - 4 Variables 345
5 Choke Performance
................................................................................................................................... 348
6 Generate for...................................................................................................................................
GAP 351
7 Bottom Hole...................................................................................................................................
Pressure from Wellhead Pressure 351
References .......................................................................................................................................................... 353
8 Note on Enthalpy
...................................................................................................................................
Balance Model 353

Chapter 11 Design Menu 356

1 Gas Lift Design
................................................................................................................................... 356
Menu Options .......................................................................................................................................................... 356
New Well .......................................................................................................................................................... 357
Setting Up
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Design Problem 358
Gas Lift .........................................................................................................................................................
Valve Selection 364
Performing
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Design (New Well) 364
Existing Mandrels
..........................................................................................................................................................
Design 370
Setting Up
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Design Problem 370
Defining.........................................................................................................................................................
the Depths of Existing Mandrels 371
Gas Lift .........................................................................................................................................................
Valve Selection 373
Performing
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Design (Existing Mandrels) 373
Valve Spacing
......................................................................................................................................................... 377
Designing.........................................................................................................................................................
with Tubing Sensitive Valves 377
Spacing.........................................................................................................................................................
Procedure for Tubing Sensitive Valves 378
Proportional
.........................................................................................................................................................
Valves 379
 Contents VIII

Gas Lift Adjustments

.......................................................................................................................................................... 379
Gaslift Valve..........................................................................................................................................................
Performance 383
Valve Performance
.........................................................................................................................................................
Clearinghouse (VPC) 383
2 Electrical Submersible
...................................................................................................................................
Pump Design 384
ESP Calculate
.......................................................................................................................................................... 386
Checking.........................................................................................................................................................
Suitability of Separator Efficiency 387
ESP Design ..........................................................................................................................................................
(Pump, Motor and Cable Selection) 388
Checking.........................................................................................................................................................
the Pump Design 390
3 Hydraulic Pump
...................................................................................................................................
Design 391
HSP Calculate
.......................................................................................................................................................... 393
HSP Design ..........................................................................................................................................................
(Pump and Turbine Selection) 394
Checking.........................................................................................................................................................
the Pump/Turbine Design 396
4 Progressive...................................................................................................................................
Cavity Pump Design 397
PCP Calculate
.......................................................................................................................................................... 398
PCP Design ..........................................................................................................................................................
(Pump and Rod Selection) 400
5 Coiled Tubing
...................................................................................................................................
GasLift Design 401
6 Jet Pump Design
................................................................................................................................... 403
Jet Pump Calculate
.......................................................................................................................................................... 404
Jet Pump Design
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Pump Selection) 406
7 Sucker Rod...................................................................................................................................
Pump Design 408
Background.......................................................................................................................................................... 408
Design Sucker
..........................................................................................................................................................
Rod Pump 411
Enter Design
.........................................................................................................................................................
Parameters 412
Perform .........................................................................................................................................................
Design 413
Rod Sensitivity
......................................................................................................................................................... 415
8 Artificial Lift...................................................................................................................................
Database 416
Gas Lift Valve
..........................................................................................................................................................
Database 417
Adding a.........................................................................................................................................................
New Valve 418
ESP Database .......................................................................................................................................................... 419
Pump Database
......................................................................................................................................................... 419
Adding a New Pump ......................................................................................................................................... 421
Motor Database
......................................................................................................................................................... 423
Adding a New Motor ......................................................................................................................................... 424
Cables Database
......................................................................................................................................................... 425
Adding a New Cable ......................................................................................................................................... 425
HSP Database .......................................................................................................................................................... 426
Pumps Database
......................................................................................................................................................... 426
Adding a.........................................................................................................................................................
New Pump 427
Turbines.........................................................................................................................................................
Database 427
Adding a.........................................................................................................................................................
New Turbine 428
PCP Database .......................................................................................................................................................... 429
Pumps Database
......................................................................................................................................................... 429
Adding a New Pump ......................................................................................................................................... 431
Sucker Rods
.........................................................................................................................................................
Database 432
Adding a New Sucker .........................................................................................................................................
Rod 433
Jet Pumps Database
.......................................................................................................................................................... 434
Pumps Database
......................................................................................................................................................... 434
Adding a New Pump ......................................................................................................................................... 435
MultiPhase Pumps
..........................................................................................................................................................
Database 436
Pumps Database
......................................................................................................................................................... 436
Adding a.........................................................................................................................................................
New Pump 437
Sucker Rod ..........................................................................................................................................................
Pump 438

May, 2008 PROSPER Manual

VIII
 IX PROSPER

Pump database
......................................................................................................................................................... 438
Adding a New Pump ......................................................................................................................................... 439
Sucker Rods
.........................................................................................................................................................
Database 439
Adding a New Sucker .........................................................................................................................................
Rod 440

Chapter 12 Output 443

1 Report ................................................................................................................................... 443
Setting Up the
..........................................................................................................................................................
Reporting System 443
Reports .......................................................................................................................................................... 444
2 Export ................................................................................................................................... 459
Export Setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 459
3 Plot ................................................................................................................................... 461
Plot Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
Summary 462

Chapter 13 Units 467

1 Units Summary
................................................................................................................................... 467
Unit Systems.......................................................................................................................................................... 468
Changing Unit
..........................................................................................................................................................
Systems for some variables 469
Changing the..........................................................................................................................................................
Units 470
Validation Limits
.......................................................................................................................................................... 470
2 Units Details
................................................................................................................................... 471
3 Units Reset................................................................................................................................... 471

Chapter 14 Wizard 473

1 Running the...................................................................................................................................
Wizard 473
2 Creating/Editing
...................................................................................................................................
a Wizard 474
Notes of OS ..........................................................................................................................................................
strings 475
Wizard examples
.......................................................................................................................................................... 475

Chapter 15 Help 477

1 Finding Information
...................................................................................................................................
in Help 477
Use the Search
..........................................................................................................................................................
feature in Help 477
Use the Help..........................................................................................................................................................
Index 477
Context Sensitive
..........................................................................................................................................................
Help 478
2 Accessing Help
................................................................................................................................... 478
Help Through..........................................................................................................................................................
the Menu 478
Getting Help..........................................................................................................................................................
Using the Mouse 478
Getting Help..........................................................................................................................................................
Using the Keyboard 478
To Minimise..........................................................................................................................................................
Help 478
3 Whats New................................................................................................................................... 478
4 Flow Correlations
................................................................................................................................... 479
5 Open Server................................................................................................................................... 479
6 Help About ...................................................................................................................................
PROSPER 479
7 Web Options
................................................................................................................................... 480

Chapter 16 Appendix 482

1 A - Worked ...................................................................................................................................
Examples 482
 Contents X

Example 1 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Gas Lift Design 482
Model Set .........................................................................................................................................................
Up 483
Edit IPR.........................................................................................................................................................
Model 484
Setting up.........................................................................................................................................................
the Gas Lift Design Parameters 484
Calculating
.........................................................................................................................................................
Sensitivities 490
Example 2 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Well and Flow line Modelling 494
Calculating
.........................................................................................................................................................
the System Solution 496
Plotting the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature Profile 498
Example 3 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature Prediction 499
Temperature
.........................................................................................................................................................
Prediction Model Set up 500
Defining.........................................................................................................................................................
the Equipment Data 502
Calculation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Section 507
Example 4 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
ESP Lifted Well 514
Model Setup
......................................................................................................................................................... 515
Designing .........................................................................................................................................................
the pump 517
Checking .........................................................................................................................................................
the design for different conditions. 521
Example 5 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
HSP Lifted Well 524
Model Set .........................................................................................................................................................
up 525
Designing .........................................................................................................................................................
The Pump 526
Checking .........................................................................................................................................................
the Design for Changed Conditions 528
Example 6 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Jet Pump Design 531
Model Set .........................................................................................................................................................
up 532
PVT Section
......................................................................................................................................................... 532
Inflow performance
.........................................................................................................................................................
relationship 541
Downhole .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 542
Jet Pump .........................................................................................................................................................
Design Calculation 543
Example 7 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Retrograde Condensate Well 547
EoS Condensate
.........................................................................................................................................................
model 548
Entering EOS PVT ......................................................................................................................................... 548
Matching Menu.........................................................................................................................................
/ Correlation Selection 551
Black Oil.........................................................................................................................................................
Condensate PVT 553
Selecting the Options ......................................................................................................................................... 554
Matching/ Correlation .........................................................................................................................................
Selection 555
Example 8 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Gravel Packed Gas Well 557
Gravel Pack
.........................................................................................................................................................
model Set Up 557
Options .........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 557
PVT menu ......................................................................................................................................................... 558
System Menu
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Equip & Inflow) 559
Sensitivity
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculation Menu 563
Example 9 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Horizontal Well - Friction dP 568
Horizontal.........................................................................................................................................................
well Model Set Up 568
Horizontal.........................................................................................................................................................
well IPR Data 568
Coning Calculations
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Horizontal Wells 571
Example 10 -..........................................................................................................................................................
Multi-Layer dP Pressure Loss 574
Multilayer.........................................................................................................................................................
Dp Loss Model Set up 575
Multilayer.........................................................................................................................................................
Dp Loss IPR Data Input 575
STEP1: Defining .........................................................................................................................................
the top of the multi-layer system 576
STEP2: Defining .........................................................................................................................................
the to Top Producing layer 576
STEP3: Defining .........................................................................................................................................
the non producing zone 577
STEP4: Defining .........................................................................................................................................
the to Bottom Producing layer 577
Multilayer.........................................................................................................................................................
Dp Loss Calculation System 580
Example 11-Multilateral
..........................................................................................................................................................
well 584
Options ......................................................................................................................................................... 585
PVT section
......................................................................................................................................................... 586

May, 2008 PROSPER Manual

X
XI PROSPER

Equipment .........................................................................................................................................................
Data 587
Multilateral
.........................................................................................................................................................
IPR 591
Multilateral IPR.........................................................................................................................................
Input section 595
Multilateral IPR.........................................................................................................................................
calculations 610
Multilateral
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculation System 614
Example 12 ..........................................................................................................................................................
- Water injection well 619
Example 13 ..........................................................................................................................................................
- Multilateral oil well 632
Model Set .........................................................................................................................................................
up Multilateral oil well 635
Calculations
.........................................................................................................................................................
Multilateral oil well 647
Example 14 ..........................................................................................................................................................
- PCP lifted well design 652
PCP lifted.........................................................................................................................................................
well design Model Set up 653
PCP lifted.........................................................................................................................................................
well design Input data 653
PCP lifted well .........................................................................................................................................
Calculation System 659
PCP lifted.........................................................................................................................................................
well Database 661
PCP lifted.........................................................................................................................................................
well Design 666
PCP lifted.........................................................................................................................................................
well Calculation System 670
Example 15 ..........................................................................................................................................................
- Condensate Black Oil Model Validation 674
Objectives......................................................................................................................................................... 675
Model Set .........................................................................................................................................................
Up 675
Gradient.........................................................................................................................................................
Traverse Calculation using the EOS 677
Black Oil.........................................................................................................................................................
Model Validation 680
Example 16 ..........................................................................................................................................................
- Sucker rod pump 680
Example 17 -..........................................................................................................................................................
Analysis of a gas lifted well using VLP/IPR matching and QuickLook 699
Gas lift well
.........................................................................................................................................................
analysis Model 700
Gas lift well
.........................................................................................................................................................
analysis VLP/IPR matching 704
Gas lift well
.........................................................................................................................................................
analysis Calculation System 713
2 B - References
................................................................................................................................... 718
PVT Calculations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 718
CO2 Injection
......................................................................................................................................................... 720
PVT Separator
.........................................................................................................................................................
Pressure 720
IPR Calculations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 721
Multiphase Flow..........................................................................................................................................................
Calculations 722
Temperature..........................................................................................................................................................
Calculations 723
Artificial Lift..........................................................................................................................................................
Design 724
3 C - Equations
................................................................................................................................... 724
Black Oil Model
..........................................................................................................................................................
for Condensate 724
Mass Balance
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculations 725
Using the.........................................................................................................................................................
mass balance results to define Condensate Model 728
Estimation
.........................................................................................................................................................
of CGRmin 729
Multiphase Pseudo
..........................................................................................................................................................
Pressure 730
Temperature..........................................................................................................................................................
Models 732
Rough Approximation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature Model 732
Overall Heat Transfer .........................................................................................................................................
Coefficient 733
Enthalpy.........................................................................................................................................................
Balance 734
Default Thermal .........................................................................................................................................
Properties Database 739
Choke Calculation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 740
Multi-Phase ..........................................................................................................................................................
Flow Correlations 741
4 D - Dietz Shape
...................................................................................................................................
Factors 742
5 E - File Formats
................................................................................................................................... 743
Introduction.......................................................................................................................................................... 743
External PVT..........................................................................................................................................................
Tables 743
Lift Curves .......................................................................................................................................................... 744
IPR .......................................................................................................................................................... 745
 Contents XII

ESP PUMPS.......................................................................................................................................................... 746

ESP MOTORS.......................................................................................................................................................... 746
ESP CABLES.......................................................................................................................................................... 747
HSP PUMPS.......................................................................................................................................................... 747
HSP TURBINES
.......................................................................................................................................................... 748
6 F - Glossary................................................................................................................................... 749
7 IPM Equation
...................................................................................................................................
of State and Steam PVT 754
Equation of ..........................................................................................................................................................
State Modelling 754
Binary Coefficients
......................................................................................................................................................... 755
Accentric.........................................................................................................................................................
Factors 757
Volume .........................................................................................................................................................
Shift 759
OmegaA.........................................................................................................................................................
and OmegaB 760
LBC Viscosity ..........................................................................................................................................................
Model 761
Interfacial Tension
.......................................................................................................................................................... 763
Hydrate Modelling
.......................................................................................................................................................... 763
Background
.........................................................................................................................................................
to Hydrates 763
Hydrate .........................................................................................................................................................
Models 765
Hydrate .........................................................................................................................................................
Inhibition 768
Hydrate .........................................................................................................................................................
Reference List 768
Wax modeling .......................................................................................................................................................... 769
Wax Models
......................................................................................................................................................... 769
Wax Model.........................................................................................................................................................
Details 771
Wax Reference
.........................................................................................................................................................
List 775
Separator K ..........................................................................................................................................................
Values 775
K Value .........................................................................................................................................................
Import Export Format 778
Main Dialogs.......................................................................................................................................................... 779
Composition
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog (MBAL,GAP) 780
Composition
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog (PROSPER) 782
Options .........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog 786
Phase Envelope
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculation 792
Phase Envelope .........................................................................................................................................
Plot 794
Plot Profile Dialog ......................................................................................................................................... 795
Equation.........................................................................................................................................................
of State Calculation Range 798
Equation.........................................................................................................................................................
of State Calculation Results 799
Binary Interaction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Coefficient Dialog 800
Properties
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog 800
Target GOR
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog 802
Target GOR Method ......................................................................................................................................... 805
Plotting .......................................................................................................................................................... 807
Changing .........................................................................................................................................................
Plot Colours 810
Changing .........................................................................................................................................................
Plot Scales 812
Changing .........................................................................................................................................................
Plot Fonts 812
Changing .........................................................................................................................................................
Plot Labels 813
Import|Export ..........................................................................................................................................................
a PRP File 814
PRP Export
.........................................................................................................................................................
File Example 815
Steam Calculations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 817
Main Steam
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog 817
Steam Range
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog 818
Steam Results
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog 820
Steam Layout Dialog ......................................................................................................................................... 822
Steam Single
.........................................................................................................................................................
Point Dialog 823
8 H - Importing
...................................................................................................................................
Data from Text Files 825

May, 2008 PROSPER Manual

XII
 XIII PROSPER

Chapter 17 PROSPER Online Help 831

1 Commands................................................................................................................................... 831
System .......................................................................................................................................................... 831
Single Well
.........................................................................................................................................................
Inflow 832
Inflow Performance .........................................................................................................................................
(Gas and Condensate) 832
Forcheimer with ...................................................................................................................................
Pseudo Pressure 832
Multirate Forcheimer ...................................................................................................................................
with Pseudo Pressure 833
Chapter

1
 2 PROSPER

1 Introduction

Welcome to PROSPER, Petroleum Experts Limited's advanced PROduction and S

ystems PERformance analysis software. PROSPER can assist the production or reservoir
engineer to predict tubing and pipeline hydraulics and temperatures with accuracy and
speed. PROSPER's powerful sensitivity calculation features enable existing designs to be
optimised and the effects of future changes in system parameters to be assessed.

By separately modelling each component of the producing well system, then allowing the
User to verify each model subsystem by performance matching, PROSPER ensures that
the calculations are as accurate as possible. Once a system model has been tuned to real
field data, PROSPER can be confidently used to model the well in different scenarios and
to make forward predictions of reservoir pressure based on surface production data.

1.1 Using PROSPER

These are the main features available in PROSPER:

1. PROSPER is a fundamental element in the Integrated Production Model (IPM) as

defined by Petroleum Experts, linking to GAP, the production network optimisation
program for gathering system modelling and MBAL, the reservoir engineering and
modelling tool, for making fully integrated total system modelling and production
forecasting.

2. Its PVT section which can generate fluid properties using standard correlations and
allows them to be modified to better fit measured lab data. PROSPER allows detailed
PVT data in the form of tables to be imported for use in the calculations. A third
option is to use the Equation of State method. This option also allows the User to
enter the equation of state model parameters and uses the standard Peng-Robinson
EOS model to generate properties given a multi-stage separator scheme. With this
option the Users can also import all PVT data in the form of tables, which could have
been generated using their own proprietary EOS models.

3. The tool can be used to model reservoir inflow performance (IPR) for single,
multilayer, or multilateral wells with complex and highly deviated completions,
optimising all aspects of a completion design including perforation details and gravel
packing.

4. It can be used to accurately predict both pressure and temperature profiles in

producing wells and along surface flow lines.

5. The sensitivity calculations capabilities easily allow the engineer to model and
optimise tubing, choke and surface flow line performance.

6. It can be used to design, optimise and troubleshoot gas lifted, coiled tubing, ESP,
PCP, HSP (hydraulic pump), Jet pump and Sucker Rod pump equipped wells.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Introduction 3

7. Its choke calculator can be used to predict flow rates given the choke size, or the
choke size for a specified production rate and of course, the pressure drop across a
known choke at a specified rate. It can also be used to generate choke performance
curves.

8. The multiphase flow correlations implemented can be adjusted to match measured

field data to generate vertical lift performance curves (VLP) for use in simulators and
network models.

9. The tool can utilise externally programmed dynamic link libraries (DLL) for
multiphase flow correlations, Equation of State (EOS) PVT calculations, choke
calculations, Inflow (IPR) models, HSP Gas De-Rating models and proprietary
viscosity models (both Newtonian and Non-Newtonian) .

10. The tool can be used in a matching or predictive mode. Matching of real data is
available in the PVT, IPR, Gradient matching and VLP matching sections.

In matching mode, real data can be entered and matched using non-linear
regression methods to create custom correlations that fit the input data.
In predictive mode, the correlations created can be used to make estimates
of future well performance.

11. PROSPER can be used to model complex (topographically) and extensive (in length)
surface pipelines. Complex steady state slug analysis can also be performed by
taking into account slug build up and decay due to pipeline topography, giving an
indication of expected slug length and frequency. Pigging calculations are also
available

12. The software also accepts Black Oil PVT tables directly from Petroleum Experts
PVTP thermodynamics analysis program. EOS fluid characterisation parameters can
also be directly imported.

13. A flexible units system has been implemented. Data may be input using one set of
units and output using a second set of units. Validation limits and display resolution
can be independently set for each variable type.

14. It has the utility for flagging of potential hydrate formation, if the User chooses this in
the options. The additional input required for this calculation is the hydration
formation tables as a part of PVT. This is available in Petroleum Experts PVTP
thermodynamics analysis program.

15. The following situations can be modelled:

Fluid Type:
Oil and Water (Black oil or Equation of State PVT)
Dry and Wet Gas (Black oil or Equation of State PVT)
Retrograde Condensate (Black Oil or Equation of State PVT)
Emulsion viscosity can be optionally applied for any combination of inflow,
tubing and ESPs or HSPs.
Separation mode: Single or Two Stage separation or Multistage (for
Compositional model)

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 4 PROSPER

Modelling of non-Newtonian fluids for oil wells

Modelling of Condensed Water Vapour for gas wells

Well Flow Configuration:

Tubing or Annular flow or Tubing + Annular flow
Producer or Injector

Artificial Lift Method:

Naturally flowing well
Gas lifted well
Electric submersible pump (ESP)
Hydraulic drive downhole pump (HSP)
Progressive Cavity Pumps
Jet Pumps
Gas Lift with Coiled Tubing
Injection of Diluents
Multiphase Pumps
Sucker Rod Pumps

Prediction Type:
Pressure Only
Pressure and Temperature Offshore
Pressure and Temperature on Land

Temperature Model:
Enthalpy Balance
Rough Approximation
Improved Approximation

Completion:
Cased Hole
Open Hole
Gravel Pack

Reservoir:
Single Well
Multi-lateral Well in a Multi-layered Reservoir
Gas Coning (Rate dependent GOR calculator)

1.2 PROSPER and Systems Analysis

PROSPER can help petroleum producers maximise their production earnings by providing
the means to critically analyse the performance of each producing well. Each well system
component that contributes to overall performance is separately modelled: Inflow
performance, pressure drop in the tubing and pressure losses in the surface gathering
system are individually calculated and performance matched where possible.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Introduction 5

Well potential and producing pressure losses are both dependent on fluid (PVT) properties.
The accuracy of systems analysis calculations is therefore dependent on the accuracy of the
fluid properties model (i.e. PVT). The pressure drop in a pipeline or wellbore is the
summation of 3 components:
Gravity head
Friction loss
Acceleration

i.e.
Dptotal = Dpgravity + Dp friction + Dpacceleration

The gravity component is due to the density of the fluid mixture at each point in the system
and is a complex function of the relative velocity of the phases present. PROSPER makes a
flash computation at each calculation step to determine the proportion of oil, water and gas
present. The no-slip density is then calculated using the proportions of each phase and the
predicted density at each pressure and temperature step.

Industry standard 2-phase correlations are then applied to determine the increase in
apparent fluid density due to the higher vertical velocity of gas compared to oil and water
(slippage). The gravity head loss is proportional to the fluid density corrected for slip. The
slip correction to be applied depends on the flow regime, fluid velocity etc. The need for an
accurate PVT description for predicting the gravity head loss is clear.

Friction losses are controlled by fluid viscosity and geometric factors (pipe diameter and
roughness). In the majority of oilfield applications, (i.e. large elevation difference between
inlet and outlet with liquids present) the gravitational component normally accounts for
around 90% of the overall head loss. Therefore, the total pressure drop function is not
particularly sensitive to the value of the friction loss coefficient.

The acceleration component is usually small except in systems involving significant fluid
expansion. However, it is accounted for in all PROSPER calculations.

Historically, systems analysis software has lumped all flowing pressure loss terms together
and allowed the User to match real data by adjusting the roughness coefficient of the friction
loss term. This will certainly achieve a match for a particular rate, but cannot be expected to
achieve a match over a significant range of rates due to the different dependencies of the
gravity and friction loss terms on liquid velocity.

PROSPER's approach is to first construct a robust PVT model for the reservoir fluid.
Entering laboratory PVT data and adjusting the correlation model until it fits the measured
data improve the accuracy of forward prediction.

Constructing an accurate PVT model confines the uncertainty in the gravity loss term to the
slip correction only.

In the VLP matching phase, PROSPER divides the total pressure loss into friction and
gravity components and uses a non-linear regression technique to separately optimise the
value of each component. Not only does the matching process result in a more accurate
model, it will quickly highlight inconsistencies in either the PVT or equipment description.

Provided sufficiently accurate field data is available, robust PVT, IPR and VLP models can

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 6 PROSPER

be prepared by performance matching. Each model component is separately validated,

therefore dependency on other components of the well model is eliminated. Trouble
shooting changes in production rates is simplified as the matching process can eliminate
many variables that could otherwise confuse the situation.

1.2.1 About PROSPER

PROSPER can predict either Pressure Only or Pressure and Temperature. The
Pressure Only option makes PROSPER a "Systems Analysis" package in the traditional
sense. In Pressure Only mode, the well temperature profile must be input by the User.
Temperature data is normally recorded whenever a pressure survey is made, as the
temperature is required to correct the downhole pressure readings. This type of calculation
is fast and sufficiently accurate for the majority of pressure loss calculation purposes.

The Pressure and Temperature calculation option will generate both temperature and
pressure profiles. Three temperature models are provided. The Rough Approximation
model utilises a User-input overall heat transfer coefficient. It determines the steady state
temperature profile from the mass flow rates of oil, water and gas before commencing the
pressure loss calculations. This method runs quickly, but unless calibrated using measured
temperature data, it is not accurate.

The Enthalpy Balance model calculates the heat transfer coefficients at each calculation
step by considering heat flow and enthalpy changes. The Joule Thompson effect,
convection and radiation are modelled. These calculations require considerably more input
data than for pressure only calculations and must commence from a known temperature and
pressure (the sand face for producers, or wellhead for injectors). Computation times are
longer than for the Rough Approximation option, but this method is predictive and gives
accurate results over a wide range of conditions. The Enthalpy Balance model is
completely transient and can be used to study temperature changes over time.
Temperature prediction is useful for generating temperature profiles in:

long pipelines transporting Retrograde Condensate.

subsea wells with long flowlines
high pressure/temperature exploration wells
predicting temperature/pressure profiles to help predict wax/hydrate deposits

The production riser is properly accounted for by PROSPER. The User-input riser geometry
determines the heat loss coefficients calculated by the program between the seabed and
wellhead.

The Improved Approximation is a full Enthalpy Balance model, with the difference that the
heat exchange coefficient is not calculated but defined by the User along the completion.
Like the Enthalpy Balance model, the Joule Thompson effect is accounted for.

PROSPER is also able to predict condensate liquid drop out using either black oil or
compositional models.

PROSPER uses a "Smart Menu" system. Only data relevant to a particular problem need to
be entered.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Introduction 7

The flow chart below gives an outline of the calculation steps required to carry out a simple
systems analysis using PROSPER.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 8 PROSPER

1.3 Examples
To help illustrate the power of PROSPER, examples are provided with the program.
We suggest to run through them to become familiar with the program and its various
options.

A very useful Quick Start Guide will provide the User with an example showing how to build,
match and use a well model.
Several examples are described in a step-by-step fashion in the Appendix A of the present
User Guide.

All the example files related are in the folder ~\samples\PROSPER , where Petroleum
Experts software in installed. The location of this directory depends on where the program
has been installed.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

Chapter

2
 10 PROSPER

2 File Management

This section describes the menus, options and procedures used in PROSPER to create new
files and open or save existing files. The Units system and how to define printer settings are
also outlined. The menus described in this section are the PROSPER File menu and Units
menu.

The File menu provides additional options such as defining the default data directory, as well
as the facility to establish access links to other programs running under Windows.

PROSPER will (optionally) open the last file accessed when it starts. PROSPER also
displays a file status screen that shows the application options selected in summary format:
input PVT and IPR data, the equipment type summary and the analysis output.

To protect the work, good practise is to save the data on a regular basis. This simple
procedure could potentially prevent hours of input and analysis being lost.

2.1 PROSPER Files

PROSPER uses a flexible file structure that enables data to be easily exchanged between
files and other application programs. In PROSPER information is grouped into the following
categories:
PVT System
Analysis Output
and saved into the following types of data file:

2.1.1 PVT Data (*.PVT)

File containing the well fluid data, PVT match data and any PVT tables entered under the
PVT menu.
It is possible to save PVT files separately under different names, and use them with other
input, analysis and output files in PROSPER. This feature is useful when analysing a
number of wells from the same producing pool.
The .PVT file can be also imported/exported in/from MBAL models.

2.1.2 Input Data (*.SIN)

SIN files contain the options selected under the Options menu, in addition to the well
IPR and equipment data entered under the System menu. When an input file is
opened or saved, the program automatically opens and saves a .PVT file with the
same name.
2.1.3 Analysis Data (*.ANL)
This file contains the analyses and sensitivity input data for the calculations selected under
the Analysis menu. When an analysis file is opened and saved, the program automatically

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 File Management 11

opens and saves a .PVT & .SIN file with the same name. GAP manipulates .ANL files to
batch calculate well lift curves.

2.1.4 Output Data (*.OUT)

This file contains the results of the calculations. When an output file is opened or saved, the
program automatically opens and saves a .PVT, .SIN & .ANL file of the same name.

PROSPER files are ranked by their order of input, which essentially reflects the way data
should be entered into the program, that is from the LEFT to the RIGHT of the PROSPER
menu. It is possible to note that the order of files also corresponds to options on the menu
bar as moving through the program.

The file hierarchy does not prevent the User from creating and combining any number of
input and output data files. Until the User becomes familiar with the program, we
recommend to work with *.OUT files. This can avoid confusion as the program will
automatically open and save the required data files to run a complete analysis cycle.

More experienced users can take advantage of the flexible file structure to combine the data
files from different wells. This "sharing" of data is useful in areas where wells have similar
fluid properties or reservoir IPR's. If disk space is a concern, the data contained in a .ANL
file together with its complementary .PVT and .SIN files can be used to re-create a given set
of calculation outputs, therefore avoiding the need to always save large .OUT files on disk.

For example, if one wants to run an analysis with the PVT data of Well 1, the input data
(*.SIN) data of Well 2, and the analysis data of Well 3, the following steps can be followed to
achieve that:
Open Well 2.SIN
Recall Well 1.PVT under the PVT menu.
Under the Options menu, select the processing options.
Modify the data files if necessary.
Next, select the Save As command and save the data under a new file name.

2.1.5 Creating a New File

While working with PROSPER, new input or output data files can be created at any time. To
create a new file, from the File menu choose the New command. This command does not
actually create a new and separate file, but reinitialises the program input/output data.

2.1.6 Opening an Existing File

Existing data files can be opened quickly and easily at any time during the current working
session. To open a file, from the File menu choose the Open option. It is possible to select
one of the following file types:

Input Data (. SIN)

Input and Analysis Data (. ANL)

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 12 PROSPER

Input, Analysis and Output Data (. OUT)

by using the Files of Type dropdown box.

The file open dialog is exactly the same as in any Windows program.

2.1.7 Saving a File

When files are opened in PROSPER, the program copies the selected file into the
computer's memory. Any changes to the file are made to the copy in memory. In the event
of a power failure or computer crash, these changes would be completely lost. To prevent
this, we recommend to save the data on a regular basis and especially before quitting the
program.

The Save command stores all the changes made in the active file. By default, the Save
command saves a file under its original name and to the drive and directory last selected. A
prompt will be displayed to select one of the following file types:

Input Data (.SIN)

Automatically saves the input file and corresponding .PVT file.

Input and Analysis Data (.ANL)

Automatically saves the analysis data and corresponding .SIN & .PVT data files.

Input, Analysis and Output Data (.OUT)

Automatically saves the output results and corresponding .SIN, .PVT & .ANL files
if a file of the same name exists in the selected directory, the file is overwritten.
To avoid overwriting an existing file, use the Save As command and enter a
different file name.

2.1.8 Copying a File

The Save As command allows to make more than one copy or version of an existing file.

This command is the same as in any other program running under Windows and allows to
save the PROSPER model in any of the file formats (.SIN, .ANL, .OUT).

2.2 Preferences
The Preferences screen is used to customise the program to your particular requirements.
Click Preferences from the File menu to customise PROSPER. Click on the appropriate tab
at the top of the data entry section in order to change the option require. The various tabs
are described below:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 File Management 13

2.2.1 Main Screen

This tab is used to customise the appearance of the PROSPER front screen and all data
entry (dialog) screens.

Dialog Font
This changes the font type and size used to display all data entry screens. This may be
useful to make all dialogs smaller in case of a low-resolution screen or larger to improve
readability in case of a high-resolution screen. Use the Reset button to reset the dialog
screen font to its default value.

Status Screen
Selecting On the screen status information will be continuously displayed and updated
during the program usage. Selecting Off the screen status information screen will not be
displayed (apart from whenever a new file is opened).

Font Height
If the font height is modified then an attempt is made to scale the font so that all information
displayed in each panel on the status screen will be visible. This will vary depending on the
relative size of the program window to the total screen. If the font height is not modified then
some information may not be displayed as the size of the program window is varied.

Screen Font
Use this option to change the font type and size used to display information on the status
(front) screen of the program.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 14 PROSPER

Label Colour
Change the colour used to display labels on the status screen

Text Colour
Change the colour used to display text on the status screen

Background
Change the colour used for the background of the status screen

Box Colour
Change the colour used for the background of each panel on the status screen

Box Shadow
Change the colour used for the 3D shadow effect on the status screen panels

Box Highlight
Change the colour used for the 3D-highlight effect on the status screen panels

FileName Option NEW!!!

Options to display the file name in the main program toolbar. It is possible to visualise the
file name with/without the complete path, or a certain number of characters ot not visualise it
at all. The changes will have effect as soon as a file is loaded

Length of FileName
Active only if the FileName Option Compact Path/File to Specified Length is selected

For all of the above Colour options the Choose button to the right will bring up a dialog
screen to select an appropriate colour.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 File Management 15

2.2.2 File

Use this tab to customise various options relating to file management.

Default Data Directory

The directory where data files are normally stored.

Use the Browse buttons to browse for the appropriate directories.

Default Data Directory Choice

This option determines the directory that is used as the default in file dialog. The choices
are either to always use the default data directory (see above) or to use the directory of the
last file opened or saved.

Reload Last File On Start Up

Specifies whether the last file that the User was working with should be automatically
reloaded on program start up.

Number of File Names Saved

Specifies the number of previously used files that are to be displayed on the file menu.

Location of Import Files

Use this option to specify the default location of the Import files

Import File Directory Choice

Use this option to define the directory that will be pointed every time the Import function is
selected

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 16 PROSPER

Location of Import Filters

Use this option to specify the default location of the Import Filter

Location of Report Output Files

Use this option to specify the default location of output files from the reporting subsystem.

Location of User-Created Report Files

Use this option to specify the default location of user-created report templates from the
reporting subsystem

Confirm Calculations
Switches (on or off) the message that appears at the end of any calculation function.

File Compression
Switches (on or off) file compression for PROSPER files (OUT, ANL, SIN, PVT). Default is
off. File reading and writing is slower with compression on, but less disk space is used by
the file. The user needs to decide the trade-off between speed and disk space.

2.2.3 Plot

Use this tab to set defaults for all aspects of the plot.

Always Use Plot Defaults

Each time a plot is done default values will be used rather than the last selected values for
each particular plot type

X Grid Blocks

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 File Management 17

Number of gaps between grid lines on X-axis. (Range 1-20)

Y Grid Blocks
Number of gaps between grid lines on Y-axis. (Range 1-20)

Plot Labels
Shows or hides the plot labels.

Plot Scales
Shows or hides the plot scales

Plot Legend
Shows or hides the plot legend. If the legend is hidden, the body of the plot will expand to fill
the whole window.

Scaling Method
Endpoint or rounded. Endpoint means the scales are taken from the exact extremities of
the data being plotted. Rounded means that ranges are chosen to surround the data but
with whole numbers ensured for the end points and the gridline intervals.

Grid Line Type

Selects from dotted lines, dashed lines, solid lines or tick marks.

Mouse Readout
Switches the mouse cursor position readout no or off.

Date Stamp Title

Selects to append the current data and time to the plot title or not

Line Thickness
To select the thickness of plotted lines

Vertical Font
Selects the default font for all vertical text (Y-axis)

Horizontal Font
Selects the default font for all horizontal text

Default Colours
Sets the default colour scheme for the plot

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 18 PROSPER

2.2.4 User Applications

This tab allows to add up to four of the Users favourite or most-often used Windows
applications to the PROSPER menu. Although PROSPER has a very flexible reporting
system the User may wish to use a spreadsheet (such as EXCEL), a word processor (such
as WORD) and a presentation package (such as Power Point) to build presentation quality
reports using PROSPER output in a slick and efficient manner.
Any output (plots and reports) produced by PROSPER is automatically copied to the
Clipboard. From there it can easily be pasted into one of the above-mentioned applications
using one simple keystroke. Using the power and flexibility of the chosen application, high
quality reports and presentations can be easily prepared.
All plots can be saved in Windows Metafile format. These can be easily read by a word
processing package or presentation graphics package and give the maximum flexibility for
user customisation.
All reports can be saved in TSV (Tab Separated Variable) format using the Export facility
that means they will automatically be tabulated when read into the favourite spreadsheet.

Enter a description and a command line for each application to be added to the PROSPER
menu.

The description is the data that appears on the menu.

The command line is the full path name of the program to execute.

Use the Browse buttons to browse for the application require. Use the Clear buttons to
initialise the appropriate application information.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 File Management 19

2.2.5 Limits

This tab allows the User to specify limiting values and tolerances for the following
parameters:

- Maximum AOF for OIL

- Maximum AOF for GAS
- Maximum AOF for RETROGRADE CONDENSATE
- Minimum GLR Injected for GAP Performance Curves
- VLP Pressure Display Limit: Twice Reservoir Pressure or Unlimited. This controls the
display of large VLP values in SYSTEM calculations
- HSP calculation settings
- Calculation Step Length. It specifies the calculation step during pressure drop
calculation. If No Use Correlation Step Length is selected (default), the flow correlation
will use its internal step
- Document TPD Files. This option adds up explanatory comments in VLP export files

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 20 PROSPER

2.2.6 Units

This tab allows to specify the default Units Systems to use for new files.

If setting the option "Always Use Default Units" to "Yes", then the units displayed for any file
read in will always be set to the default choice, regardless of the settings in the file.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 File Management 21

2.2.7 Equipment

This option defines the default values for the Pipeline and Tubing Roughness that
will be used in the Equipment Data.
2.2.8 Miscellaneous

The Preferences Screen is used to customise PROSPER to your particular requirements. Click on the
appropriate tab at the top of the data entry section in order to change the option you require.

Done Click on this button to save you changes.

Cancel Click on this button to discard changes made on all tabs in the current edit session..
Help Click on this button to view this screen.

This tab allows you to specify the status of miscellaneous items.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 22 PROSPER

ToolTips Allow (On) or DisAllow (Off) the display of tool tips.

(A tooltip is a common graphical user interface element. It is used in
conjunction with a cursor, usually a mouse pointer. The user hovers the
cursor over an item, without clicking it, and a small box appears with
supplementary information regarding the item being hovered over.)
(This Option is not yet implemented.)
VPC Directory The location of the Gaslift Valve Performance Database. Use the Browse
button to select the directory of your choice

2.3 Software Key Maintenance

The Software Key command activates the Petroleum Experts Remote Utility. This
program allows the user to see what programs are currently enabled, their expiry date, and
user authorisation codes and key number - as can be seen in the screen shot below.
This utility is also used to enter the authorisation codes that will update or activate the
software key where necessary. For reasons of security, Petroleum Experts normally sends
an inactive software device with the application program. The codes needed to activate or
update the software key are sent separately by e-mail.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 File Management 23

This utility is also used to update the software key and to view versions. Software keys must
be updated when new programs or modules are required or the key expiry date changed.

Entering the Authorisation Code

To enter the authorisation codes, click the Update button. The following screen will appear:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 24 PROSPER

Enter the codes you have received from Petroleum Experts from left to right beginning with
the top row. The easiest way to do this is to use the Paste button to copy the codes from the
email sent by Petroleum Experts. Press Continue to activate the codes or Cancel to quit
the code update.

Updating the Software Protection Key

Access to the software automatically ceases when the license expiry date has elapsed. You
are however, reminded several days in advance, which gives you sufficient time to contact
Petroleum Experts to obtain update codes. This occurs when either:
The software license trial period has ended.
The annual software maintenance fee is due.
Software protection keys also need updating when you acquire new Petroleum Experts
software packages. The procedure for updating the software key is the same as described
above. When the appropriate screen appears, enter the codes provided - from left to right
beginning with the top row. Press OK to activate the codes, or Cancel to quit the update.
To view the expiry date for any of the enabled programs, click on the software title.

When you receive new codes, always update every key that belongs to your company.
Subsequent updates may fail if all previously issued codes have not been properly entered
into the key.

You can view the software key driver versions by clicking on the Versions button. The
following screen will appear.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 File Management 25

2.4 FileList
Use this screen to search for PROSPER files anywhere in your system.
Browse a directory and then Load Files to visualise all the PROSPER files contained within
the selected directory. Information about the files will be imported as well.

2.5 Evaluate OpenServer Statement

This option can be used to test the OpenServer commands and variables. In the Evaluate
OpenServer screen a field is available where to input the OS string, which can correspond to
a parameter or to a command:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 26 PROSPER

Type or Paste the OS string in the String field, then select one of basic OS commands
(DoGet, DoSet, DoCommand), if required enter the Value (valid only if using DoSet) and
click Evaluate to perform the function.
In the Returned value it is possible to read the results of the operation.

The buttons Commands, Variables and Functions will access the lists of the strings of the
commands, input/output variables and functions

NEW!!! In the string lists screen it is possible to search for strings by using the
Search function

2.6 User Correlations

PROSPER has been designed to accept outside calculation modules for fluid flow
correlations, Equation of State PVTP calculations, choke models (pressure loss through
restrictions), inflow performance calculations, HSP Gas Derating models, viscosity models.
Users can obtain an authoring kit from Petroleum Experts to enable the building of a
compatible Dynamic Link Library for use in PROSPER.

Before a DLL can be accessed, it must first be installed into PROSPER. This is done by
clicking File User Correlations.
Select either Flow Correlation, Equation of State Model, Choke Correlation, Inflow

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 File Management 27

Performance Model, HSP Gas DeRating Model, Viscosity Model.

PROSPER will display a list of the currently installed DLLs of the selected type. To add a
correlation, click Add and select the appropriate file from the file dialogue. Click OK and it
will be imported into PROSPER.

MODEL EXTENSION
Flow Correlation .COR
Equation of State PVTP .EOS
Model
Choke Correlation .CHK
Inflow Performance Model .RSM
HSP Gas DeRating Model .GDR
Viscosity Model .VSM

Information about particular correlations (name, phases and flow regimes modelled, etc.)
can be obtained by clicking the Info button. A screen similar to the following will be
displayed.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 28 PROSPER

2.7 Printer Setup

2.7.1 Preparing to Print
Once selected a printer and the appropriate set-up options, printing reports is simple. When
ready to print, always verify that the printer is plugged in, on-line and connected to the
machine. The Printer Setup command of the File menu allows to select a printer and define
its set-up options.

2.7.2 Selecting and configuring a Printer

Select the correct printer from the list box provided. Only printers that have been installed
under Windows will be displayed.
The configuration of the printer follows the exact guidelines of any other software running
under Windows.

2.7.3 Printing Export Data

Prior to printing export data, it is always a good idea to save the data file(s). In the unlikely
event that a printer error or some other unforeseen problem occurs, this simple procedure
could prevent the work from being lost.

To print export data, select the Output menu and the Export option. Select the sections to
report on the dialogue box. The program will lead the User through a series of input screens
to set up the required report sections. From the main dialogue box, select a destination for r
data.

The appearance of printed reports is controlled by the export data set-up options that have
been set.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 File Management 29

Click Setup to display the following screen:

Select a suitable font and set the margins etc. that will be used for printed export data. Only
non-proportional fonts are allowed in reports to maintain vertical alignment of the columns.

PROSPER default font is recognised by most print set-ups. To avoid

potential printing problems, always set up the system to use a font that is
supported on the system prior to printing PROSPER export data for the
first time.
Click OK to return to the output screen. Clicking Print initiates generation of the export data
and sends it to the selected destination.

Export data can be sent to the following entities:

Printer - the primary printer as set up under Windows.

File - Creates an ASCII data file and saves it. Clicking Print will display a
dialogue box that requests a file name and destination. Enter a suitable file name (the
program automatically appends a ".PRN" extension) and click OK to save the file. The
Fixed Format option saves a file in a printer ready format that can be imported into a DOS
based word processor or text editor. Use the Tab Delimited format to save a file suitable
for importing directly into a spreadsheet such as EXCEL.
Clipboard - Clicking Print after selecting this option copies the data onto the Windows
clipboard. From the Clipboard, can view, edit and paste the data directly into another
Windows application. E.g. a word processing program. Tab delimited data can be pasted
directly into spreadsheets.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 30 PROSPER

Screen - Clicking Print after selecting this option allows to view the report on the
screen. Scroll through the data using the scrolling thumbs or arrows. When finished
viewing, click OK to return to the main menu.

2.7.4 Selecting an Exported Data to Print

It is not necessary to be in PROSPER to print a report. Provided to have previously
generated a report file (*.PRN), a report can be easily opened and imported into any word or
spreadsheet program. If the Tab Delimited option was selected, this will allow the User to
easily create tables and/or format the data using a word processor.

2.8 Word Processing in PROSPER

The WordPad command on the File menu gives direct access to the Windows word
processing package. This application can be used to make notes of the current analysis for
later inclusion in reports. If no alternative word processing package is available, it is
possible to use WordPad to edit, format and print the reports.

2.9 Clipboard Command

The Clipboard command on the File menu gives direct access to the Windows clipboard
viewer. This feature is useful for checking data input or intermediate results from e.g. gas
lift design calculations that are written to the clipboard by PROSPER.

2.10 Command Buttons

The following command buttons are used in PROSPER.

All This command button is used in the Equipment and Gas Lifted (safety
equipment) option screens. It will select all input parameters and data points
for automated editing.

Calculate Performs the various calculations on the input parameters for the correlations
selected.

Cancel Returns to the previous screen. Any changes or modifications will be ignored
by the system.

Continue Continues to the next input screen. Any changes to the fields will be saved and
retained in memory for later calculations. A warning message will be displayed
when fields requiring input data are left blank.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 File Management 31

Copy To copy existing data points, select the line entries to duplicate and click on C
opy. Next, select the destination line(s) and click on Copy again. Subsequent
line entries will be not be overwritten by this operation.

Correlations Displays the results of any matching performed under the VLP/IPR Match
option.

Delete This command button is used in the Equipment and Gas Lifted (safety
equipment) option screens. It allows to delete individual or several data points.
To delete, select the line entries to erase and click on Delete. If one wishes to
delete all existing line entries, click All and then Delete. The program will clear
the input screen.

Done Returns to the previous menu. Any changes or modifications will be retained in
memory by the program.

Edit This command button is used in the main Equipment screen. One or more
items can be modified at a time. When used with 'All', all items will be selected
for editing.

Export Brings up the Data Export interface. This will be specific to the data on the
active window.

Help Provides on screen help for PROSPER. For general information, press the
'ALT' and 'H' keys together in the Main menu, or the Index button under any
help screen. Specific help screens are also available for each window.

Import Calls up the general import interface that allows to grab data from any text file.
This button will usually be found where tabular data is to be input.

Insert This allows to add one or several data points providing there are sufficient entry
fields. Select the line number where to add a new entry and click on Insert.
The program will move existing line entries down to accommodate the inserted
line(s).

Main Returns to the Main Application Menu. Any changes or modifications will be
saved and retained in memory by the program.

Match Displays a variable screen where match data can be entered in order to adjust
existing correlations to fit real data.

Move Allows to re-arrange data points. Select the line(s) to transfer and click on Mo
ve. Next, select the destination line(s) and click on Move again. Subsequent
line entries will be moved down to accommodate the transferred line(s).

Plot Plots any calculated results and displays them on screen. Hard copies of the
screen display can be printed by selecting the Hardcopy command button on
the Plot screen.

Recall Allows to recall and existing PVTP file. The User will be prompted for the
directory and name of the file.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 32 PROSPER

Report Calls up the reporting interface with a report that is specific to the active
window. This is generally found on windows that display the results of
calculations. It is then possible to choose to print this report. The report is
generated from a system report template.

Reset Resets the Match parameters in order to reinstate the original textbook
correlations.

Save Saves a current PVTP file. If this is a new data file, the User will be prompted
for a file name.
Summary Displays a summary screen of the input equipment parameters or system units.

The following command buttons are used in the Plot Menu and Plot screens.

Clipboard Sends black and white or colour copies of the screen plot to the Windows
Clipboard where it may be retrieved by a word processing program for inclusion
in reports.

Colours Allows to define the screen display colours of r plot labels, scales, grids, etc.

Finish Returns to the previous menu or screen.

Hardcopy Generates black and white or colour print copies of the screen plot. It is
automatically sent to the device selected in \.

Labels Allows to label r plot. All plot labels are stored in memory and saved when
Output files are generated.

Replot Re-displays the original screen.

Scales Allows to re-define the minimum and maximum values for the X and Y plot
axes.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

Chapter

3
 34 PROSPER

3 Quick Start Guide

This chapter provides the User with an example that shows the basic features of PROSPER.
Particular focus is given to:
- Model setup and input data
- Matching and quality check of the model
- Utilising the model to determine the well performance with changing conditions,
generate flowing gradients and Vertical Lift Performance curves for GAP and a wide
range of reservoir simulators

Example - Naturally Flowing Oil Well

Model Set Up
Options
PVT Data
Equipment Data
IPR Data
Matching of the model to a test
VLP Matching
IPR Matching
Checking the Model for High Rate Test
Performing a System Analysis
Calculating Gradient Traverses
Generating VLP Curves for Simulators

3.1 Example - Naturally Flowing Oil Well

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/oilwell.out

The main objectives of this example are to show:

How to set up a PROSPER model for an oil well
How to match the PVT model to lab data
How to match the model to a well test
How to perform calculation of well performance, gradient traverse and vertical lift
performance curves
Export lift curves to GAP and third party software

This example demonstrates how to:

Match the PVT correlations to real data.
Match the multiphase flow correlations to real data using VLP matching.
Use IPR matching to determine reservoir pressure.
Run a system analysis with sensitivities.
Run a pressure versus depth gradient calculation.
Generate vertical lift tables for a reservoir simulator.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 35

3.2 Model Set Up

Begin by starting the program. From the PROSPER main menu, select FileNew to
reinitialise the program input and output files. The New menu item under File is only
available if a file has already been loaded.

The PROSPER main screen is divided into 5 main sections:

Options
PVT Data
Equipment Data
IPR Data
Calculation Summary

The first 4 sections are input data screens, whilst the last contains all the calculation and
design features.
Each of these sections is directly accessible from the PROSPER main screen by double
clicking on them, or from the menu toolbar, where their access is ordered from left to right,
top to bottom. This order reflects the recommended workflow to follow to set up the model.
In the following we will use the menu toolbar.

3.2.1 Options
To begin setting up the system options, select Options Options or double-click on the
SUMMARY DATA area and make the following selections:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 36 PROSPER

Fluid Oil and Water

PVT method Black Oil
Separator Single-stage Separator
Flow type Tubing Flow
Emulsions No
Well type Producer
Lift method Naturally flowing Well
Predicting Pressure and temperature (Offshore)
Model Rough approximation
Calculation range Full System
Display Show calculating data
Completion Cased hole
Gravel Pack No

Then click Done to exit this screen.

This completes the main system setup and re-initialises the program. If the status screen is
being displayed, the main system areas (SUMMARY DATA, PVT DATA, IPR DATA,
EQUIPMENT DATA and CALCULATION SUMMARY) can be now easily accessed.

3.2.2 PVT Data

The purpose of this section is to demonstrate how to enter the PVT model and to match the
PVT correlations to real PVT data.

The steps we will follow are the following:

1. Enter PVT Black Oil model
2. Enter PVT match data
3. Match the PVT Black Oil correlations to the PVT match data entered and
choose the best correlation
The last step can be also used to quality check the input data.

1. Enter Black Oil model

In the following table there are the parameters characterising the Black Oil model for this
example:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 37

Solution GOR 820 scf/STB

Oil Gravity 34API

Gas Gravity 0.833

Water Salinity 150000 ppm

% H2S 0

% CO2 0

%N2 0

The solution GOR is the gas dissolved in the oil at the original bubble point
pressure. If the well also produces free gas, it should not be included here.

In order to enter the Black Oil model, access the PVT section by selecting PVTInput Data
from the menu toolbar

2. Enter PVT match data

In the PVT main section click Match Data and enter the laboratory measured PVT flash

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 38 PROSPER

data. Up to 5 tables can be entered at different temperatures.

Enter the following match data:

Temperature 210 deg F

Bubble Point 3256 psig

Pressure 3256 psig

GOR 820 scf/STB

Oil FVF 1.491 RB/STB

Oil Viscosity 0.435 cP

In this very simple example we are entering only data referring to the bubble point, but bear
in mind that in each table data up to 10 values of pressure can be entered.

Once entered the above data, click Done to return to the main PVT Data input screen.

3. Match the PVT Black Oil correlations to the PVT match data entered and choose the
best correlation

The following step is to tune the black oil correlations in order to match the lab data entered.
In this way we make sure that the PVT model we are going to use reproduces measured
data.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 39

To match the correlations to the laboratory measured data, from the main PVT input data
screen select Regression:

Then Select Match All to run the regression calculation.

At this point the program performs a non-linear regression to adjust the correlations to best
fit the laboratory data by applying a multiplier (Parameter 1) and a shift (Parameter 2) to
each the correlations. Click OK when the regression is finished.

To access the calculated match parameters select Parameters:

This table reports the list of match parameters for all the PVT properties for each correlation.
Please note that additional match parameters (Parameter 3 and 4) have been introduced to
allow the FVF to be independently tuned below (P1 and P2) and above (P3 and P4) the
bubble point.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 40 PROSPER

The less correction a correlation requires to fit the measured data, the better it is.
In particular, the closer to 1 is Parameter 1, the better the correlation.

Note that the displayed standard deviation shows how well the matching process converges:
the higher the Standard Deviation, the worse the matching. (If the standard deviation is zero
it will be displayed as blank).

Inspecting the above reported table, Standing has for this example the best overall fit for Pb,
GOR and FVF whilst Beggs et al fits best for the oil viscosity. Therefore, Standing will be
selected to correlate Pb, GOR and FVF and Beggs et al for the oil viscosity.

Click Done to exit screen.

Make sure that Standing and Beggs et al have been selected in the Correlations input box in
the main PVT panel:

To be noticed also the flashing green message PVT is Matched showing that the PVT
model has been matched.

The matched data can be plotted by clicking Plot from the regression menu as in the
example below:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 41

All further calculations will be performed using the matched PVT data unless the match
parameters are subsequently reset from the Correlations menu

This completes the PVT input and matching process.

3.2.3 Equipment Data

The next task is to define the downhole and surface equipment.

For this example, this is the completion to model and the Deviation Survey table:

Measured Depth True Vertical

(feet) Depth
(feet)
0 0
4300 4273
4600 4528
4900 4800
11300 10350

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 42 PROSPER

11400 10430

The equipment to specify in PROSPER is the one that the fluid sees from the bottomhole
up to the wellhead. The bottomhole corresponds at the top of the perforations and is the
point at which the Vertical Lift Performance curves (VLP) and the Inflow Performance
Relationships (IPR) are referred.

In this case the equipment to be entered is from top to bottom:

Tubing 3.958 from 0 ft MD to 1000 ft MD
3" SSSV @ 1000 ft MD
Tubing 3.958 from 1000 ft MD to 11000 ft MD
Casing 6 from 11000 ft MD to 11400 ft MD
To enter the equipment data select SystemEquipment from the main menu:

It is possible to enter the data screen by screen, or, more comfortably, go through the entry
screens automatically starting with the well deviation survey. To do so, select first All, then
Edit.
The first screen displayed is the Deviation Survey:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 43

While entering the deviation survey, PROSPER calculates automatically the cumulative
displacement and the angle of the well. It is also possible to plot the well profile. In the
deviation survey up to 18 points can be enter. If more points are available we can enter them
by clicking on the Filter button. (The Filter section has been design to filter 18 points from a
maximum of 1000 points).

Once the deviation is entered, click on Done to go to the Surface Equipment screen:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 44 PROSPER

This screen allows the User to describe the equipment of a surface pipeline. For this
example, leave blank and click on Cancel to go on to the Downhole Equipment screen:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 45

To select the equipment (Tubing, Casing, SSSV, etc.) click in the Type filed and select from
the drop-down menu.
As already pointed out previously, only the equipment in which the fluid flows must be
entered. Note that the Xmas tree elevation has been taken to be the same as the deviation
survey reference.

Descriptive information about the downhole equipment can be written in the label fields as
reminder.

Click Done to advance to the Geothermal Gradient screen and enter the following:

Measured Fluid
Depth Temperature
(feet) (deg F)
0 45
11400 210

Overall heat transfer coefficient : 8 BTU/hr/ft2/F

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 46 PROSPER

Then Done to go to the next screen, which reports the Average Heat Capacities:

Click Done to accept the default value.

This completes the equipment input for the well.

It is possible to visualise the deviation and equipment entered by clicking on Summary:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 47

And then Draw Downhole:

This is a very useful tool to assess eventual mistyping.

Click Main to return to the PROSPER main screen (status screen).

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 48 PROSPER

3.2.4 IPR Data

The next task is to enter the Inflow Performance model.
To do that, select from the main menu SystemInflow performance.
The IPR input screen is then displayed:

In this screen the IPR model can be selected and some fundamental reservoir parameters
are entered.

Select the Darcy IPR method and enter the following in the IPR Select Model screen:

Mechanical / Geometrical Skin Enter skin by hand

Reservoir pressure 5000 psig (Average reservoir
pressure)
Reservoir temperature 210 deg F
Water Cut 0%
Total GOR 820 scf/STB
Relative Permeability No

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 49

The following section to access is the Input Data screen. The Input Data screen contains all
the parameters characterising the selected Inflow model and the Geometrical Skin entry.

Click on the Input Data button in the top right hand corner of the window, then enter the
following reservoir data:
Reservoir Permeability 50 md
Reservoir Thickness 200 feet
Drainage Area 500 acres
Dietz Shape Factor 31.6 (for a circular drainage area)
Wellbore Radius 0.354 feet

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 50 PROSPER

Then click of the Mech/Geom Skin tab and enter a Skin of 4.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 51

Click Calculate to display the following IPR plot:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 52 PROSPER

This completes the IPR definition.

The suggestion is always to calculate the IPR whenever something is changed in the IPR
section.
The Formation PI reported in the plot is not an equivalent PI, it is the PI without including
skin.
The AOF reported has only meaning for producer wells.

Return to the main menu by clicking Main.

3.3 Matching of the model to a test

The objective of this section is to show the User how to match the just built PROSPER
model to well test data.
The matching process consists of two main steps:

Matching of the VLP. The multiphase flow correlation will be tuned in order to
match a downhole pressure measurement

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 53

Matching of the IPR. The IPR will be tuned so that the intersection VLP/IPR will
match the production rate as per well test

3.3.1 VLP Matching

The matching of the multiphase flow correlation will be carried out following these steps:
1. Enter the well test data
2. Compare the multiphase flow correlations (QC) and select the best correlation
3. Match the correlation to the test

1. Enter the well test data

The matching of the well model to a well test is performed within the VLP/IPR matching
section. In order to access this section, from the main menu toolbar select Matching
MatchingVLP/IPR (Quality Check):

This screen contains a table that can host up to 1000 well tests.
Enter here the well test data, which for this example are:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 54 PROSPER

THP THT Water Liquid Gauge Gauge GOR GOR Reservoi

Cut Rate Depth Pressur Free r
[psig] [deg F] [%] [STB/d] [ft] e [scf/STB] [scf/STB] pressure
[psig] [psig]

930 134 15 7200 11000 3940 820 0 5000

2. Compare the multiphase flow correlations (QC) and select the best correlation
Before running the comparison of the correlations, it is possible to tune the temperature
prediction model (in this case Rough Approximation) to match the temperature
measurement of the test. To do that, select the test by clicking on its row number:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 55

And then click on Estimate U value. The program will calculate the value of the overall heat
exchange coefficient that matches the well test temperature measurement:

Click Ok, then Done to go to the main panel. Then go to the Geothermal Gradient screen in
the Equipment Data area and enter the just determined U value:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 56 PROSPER

At this point it is possible to run the correlation comparison.

As done above, select the test and then select Correlation Comparison. The program will
first report the U value entered in the Geothermal Gradient, then OK and on the right hand
side select the correlation to compare.
In this case we will select: Hagedorn Brown, Fancher Brown, Petroleum Experts 2,
Petroleum Experts 4, and Duns and Ros Modified.
The two correlations Fancher Brown and Duns and Ros Modified are used only for quality
check purpose. In fact:

- Fancher Brown is a no-slip correlation, and as such underestimates the pressure

drop along the completion. This represents the minimum limit for the pressure
gradient.
- Duns and Ros Modified, instead, in case of slug flow, overestimates the pressure
drop. This means that, if the flow regime is slug, this correlation represents the
maximum limit for the pressure gradient.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 57

If the test data are consistent, the test point should be comprised within the boundaries
provided by these two correlations. If not, the data should be reviewed.
Further details on the flow correlations can be found in menu HelpFlow Correlations.

Then Calculate and Calculate again. The program will determine the pressure gradient
traverses for the selected correlations. Plot to visualise the gradients and the well test:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 58 PROSPER

From the analysis of this plot two main considerations can be done:
- The well test measurement lies within the boundaries set by the two correlations
Fancher-Brown and Duns and Ros Modified. This means that model and the test has
been quality checked.
- Zooming the plot (draw a box around the desired area) it is possible to notice that
PE2 is the closest correlation

Result: the best correlation to use to match this test is Petroleum Experts 2.

3. Match the correlation to the test

Once chosen the best correlation, it is possible to adjust the correlation to best fit the
downhole pressure measurement.
The program does this using a non-linear regression technique which applies multipliers to
the gravity (Parameter 1) and friction (Parameter 2) components of the pressure drop
predicted by the multiphase flow correlation.

To carry out a VLP match, in the VLP/IPR Matching screen select Match VLP as shown
below:

In the displayed Match screen select the correlations to match (in this case PE2) from the

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 59

list and click on match:

The program will regress in order to determine a set of match parameters that fit the test.
Click on Statistics to access the results of the regression:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 60 PROSPER

Note on the match parameters: if the data is consistent, these two parameters should be
close to unity within 10% of tolerance. If the difference is bigger, then the test data used for
the matching and the model should be reviewed.

Once matched a correlation, the two match parameters (P1 and P2) will be appended to the
correlation name to indicate that the correlation selected has been matched (Petroleum
Experts 2 1.00 0.99 or Petroleum Experts 2 P1 P2)

This completes the VLP matching process.

Click on DoneDone to go back to the VLP/IPR matching screen.

When more than one test data points are available for flow correlation
calibration, it is recommended to use the following procedure:

Use minimum number of test points (possibly one) to calibrate the

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 61

correlation.

Check how well the calibrated model predicts the other test points
(those not used in calibration).

This ensures reliability of the model in predictive mode.

3.3.2 IPR Matching

This step ensures that PROSPER model can reproduce the well test.

The IPR is tuned so that the intersection of VLP and IPR fit the well test rate measurement.

To run the IPR matching click on VLP/IPR:

In the following screen select the just matched correlation and click on Calculate:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 62 PROSPER

PROSPER will compute the VLP curves for the match data (WHP, flow rate, water cut etc.)
using the matched VLP correlation. The solution rate and BHP obtained is display on the
bottom right hand side.

PROSPER will use the selected VLP correlation (matched if available) to

calculate the flowing pressure at the intake node depth. This is a
convenient way to correct flowing pressures from gauge depth to the
sand face. The calculated flowing pressure can be entered directly in a
Vogel IPR if required.

Click on the Plot button to inspect in the plot the solution obtained and compare it to the well
test.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 63

Click on the plot and drag to create a box including the VLP/IPR intersection in order to
zoom in. The well test rate is 7200 stb/day, the intersection of the system is 7292.6 stb/day.
We will now adjust the IPR to better match the test points
The available parameters for matching depend on the IPR model in use. For the
Darcy-IPR model, permeability, skin or reservoir pressure could be used.
For this example, we will assume that the well P.I. has not changed - but we do not
have a recent reservoir pressure.
We will match the IPR by adjusting the reservoir pressure.

In the VLP/IPR Matching section modify the reservoir pressure from 5000 psig to 4982 psig
as shown in the next screen shot:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 64 PROSPER

Click on VLP/IPR button. Click on Calculate to refresh the results with the new reservoir
pressure.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 65

Click on Plot to inspect the intersection of the VLP/IPR.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 66 PROSPER

In the plot menu toolbar select Finish. The reservoir pressure found has to be updated in the
IPR section to update the PROSPER model.
Click on the IPR button to go to the IPR section.

In the IPR section modify the reservoir pressure of 4982 psig and water cut of 15%.

In case we would like to modify any other IPR parameter (reservoir permeability, reservoir
thickness, skin, etc) we can click on Input Data to access those variables.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 67

The PROSPER well model is now matched and the adjusted variable (Reservoir pressure)
has been updated.

The model is now ready for calculations or validation against further tests.

3.3.2.1 Checking the Model for High Rate Test

Before the model is used used for predictive runs, we will check how well it reproduces the
high rate test, without any matching.

To do so, go to the VLP/ IPR Matching Input data screen.

Enter the high rate test results as shown below in row 2:

THP THT Water Liquid Gauge Gauge Reservoir GOR GOR

Cut Rate Depth Pressur pressure Free
[psig] [deg F] [%] [STB/d] [ft] e [psig] [scf/STB] [scf/STB]
[psig]

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 68 PROSPER

290 157 15 12000 11000 3330 4982 820 0

Go straight to the matching of the IPR:

Click on VLP/IPR.
Click on Calculate, with PE2 selected as correlation to compute the VLP curves for
both the test cases.
Click on Plot to inspect the intersection of VLP/IPR of the two test points entered.

This gives the following plot:

3.4 Running Calculations

This section illustrates how to use the model to perform various calculations:

System (Ipr+Vlp). This calculation allows to determine the well production and run
sensitivities
Gradient Traverse. This calculation allows to determine the profile of pressure,
temperature, velocities, etc. along the wellbore and run sensitivities
VLP. This calculation determines lift curves that can be exported to simulators (GAP,
REVEAL, MBAL and a series of third party numerical simulators)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 69

3.4.1 Performing a System Analysis

Now that the PVT, VLP and IPR have been matched to measured data, we can move
onwards and use the model to perform a system analysis. It can be determine the well
performance given the reservoir and the flowing conditions (WHP, Water Cut, GOR) using
according to the principles of nodal analysis.

1. Performing a simple nodal analysis

To perform this calculation, select from the menu toolbar CalculationSystem (Ipr+Vlp) 3
Variables.
For this example, we will run a System calculation given the following flowing conditions:

First Node
Water Cut GOR
Pressure
[%] [scf/STB]
[psig]

250 15 820

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 70 PROSPER

Other entries:

The surface flow line correlation has no effect in this particular case as no
surface pipe is part of the model.
Select Petroleum Experts 2 for the vertical lift multiphase flow correlation (note
the match parameters have been appended at the end of the name)
Select Bottom Node as Solution Node. This selects the bottomhole as solution
node
Select Automatic Linear for the rate method. This divides the internal [0, AOF]
in 20 values linearly spaced

Click on ContinueContinue (for the moment we skip the Select Variables screen) and then
Calculate.
One the calculation is finished the results with the calculated IPR and VLP and the solution
are displayed:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 71

On the right hand side the solution rate and flowing pressures and temperatures are
reported. To plot the VLP/IPR, select Plot:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 72 PROSPER

2. Running sensitivities
It is possible to determine the behaviour of the well with changing conditions. To achieve
that, sensitivities can be performed on a number of parameters like WC, GOR, Reservoir
Pressure, and so on.

For this example we will run sensitivities on Water Cut, Skin and Tubing/Pipe diameter.
Ranges of these parameters:

Parameter Range
Water cut 0, 40, 80 %
Skin 0,2,4
Tubing /Pipe Diameter 3.958, 4.892

To run sensitivities, go back to the Select Variables screen, select the variable in each
combo-box and enter the above reported ranges:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 73

Note: The Tubing/Pipe diameter sensitivity can only be entered under the last variable (3rd
variable).

Then Continue.

The program now asks between which nodes should the tubing size sensitivity be run:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 74 PROSPER

Select the Xmas tree as First Node and the bottom of the production tubing (@11,000 ft) as
Last Node with the combo boxes.
Click on Continue then Calculate to begin the system analysis calculation.

Once the calculations have finished, click Plot to take a look at the VLP and IPR curves
plotted for the range of sensitivity variables as follows:

Click Finish and return to the system calculation screen.

The solutions points are accessible on the CALCULATION OUTPUT screen in the Solution
area by selecting the concerned sensitivity variables.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 75

It is possible to generate plots that show how the solution changes with changing sensitivity
parameters by using the Sensitivity plotting feature.

For example supposing that we want a plot of Liquid rate produced against Water Cut
parametric in the skin for a given value of the diameter, select Sensitivity from the
Calculation screen and in the plot manu toolbar select Variables and then choose as
requested:

Then Done and the sensitivity plot is displayed:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 76 PROSPER

These results show that for the 3.958" ID tubing a liquid production gain of around
1100-1200 STB/day is possible by removing the skin for various water cuts.

3.4.2 Calculating Gradient Traverses

Having generated the system solution, it is possible to generate a gradient plot at any of the
solution operating points to determine the flowing gradients and flow regimes in the well
bore.

This can be done in two ways: by clicking Sensitivity PvD on the System Calculation screen
or from the main menu by selecting Calculation Gradient (Traverse).

To generate a gradient plot at one of the operating rate/pressure solution points, select the
solution for the desired conditions by using the little arrows next to the variable on the right
hand side, for example:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 77

Then click on Sensitivity PvD and click Continue and Calculate:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 78 PROSPER

This calculation will determine the pressure gradient along the wellbore for the conditions
corresponding to the solution point.
Selecting Plot the traverse is plotted:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 79

Click on Main then File | Save As and save the file as Oilwell.out.

3.4.3 Generating VLP Curves for Simulators

To generate VLPs for an oil producer for a range of THP, WC and GOR, from the menu
toolbar select CalculationVLP(Tubing Curves) 3 Variables.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 80 PROSPER

In the first screen enter any value for Top Node Pressure, Water Cut and GOR: as
sensitivities will be run to generate the curves for a range of sensitivity parameters, the
values in the first screen will be overwritten by the sensitivity values entered.

If permanent down-hole gauges are installed in the well, the gauge depth can be entered
under Gauge depth. The VLP calculation will report the bottom hole pressure and the gauge
depth pressure.

Then Continue and enter the following sensitivity parameters:

Parameter Range
First Node Pressure 200, 600, 1000, 3000 psig

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Quick Start Guide 81

Water Cut 0, 40, 80 %

Gas Oil ratio 400, 820, 2000 scf/STB

Then Continue and Calculate.

Once the curves have been calculated, you can plot and export them by selecting Export Lift
Curve. This feature allows to export the curves in several formats that can be used by a wide
selection of simulators:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 82 PROSPER

To export the curves to GAP or MBAL (.TPD format), select Petroleum Experts GAP/MBAL, then
click on Continue, enter a file name and click on Save to save the lift curves as a .tpd file.

NOTE: In order to guarantee good quality for the sets of VLP curves generated,
the recommendation is to:

- enter ranges of rates and sensitivity parameters as wide as possible, to cover

all the possible operating conditions the well will encounter during its life

- use as many values as possible for the rates (max 20 values) and sensitivity
parameters (max 10 values)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

Chapter

4
 84 PROSPER

4 Data Input - General

This section describes the PROSPER main menu and the input data required before an
analysis can be performed. Data should be entered by working through the PROSPER
menus following the logic order from left to right and top to bottom. The following menus are
described in this section:
Main menu
Options menu

4.1 PROSPER Main Menu

All PROSPER functions are listed as menu options. Simply select the required menu and
choose an item from the list displayed. This will activate an option or display the relevant
screen.

Problem solving with PROSPER is approached systematically by working from left to right
through the main menu. Calculation menus are activated only when the necessary input
data has been entered.

To start PROSPER, select the appropriate icon and press or double-click the program icon.
A screen similar to the following will appear:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Data Input - General 85

The menu options across the top of the screen are the PROSPER main menu options.
Each is described below.

4.1.1 File
The File menu is a management menu with commands that enables to open, save or create
new data files.
It is possible to use this menu to define the default data directory, printer set-ups options and
hook in external DLLs. A facility for accessing other Windows programs via PROSPER is
also provided.

4.1.2 Options
The Options menu is the starting point of PROSPER and the key to the program.
Use this menu to define the application and principal well features such as - prediction
method, artificial lift type and fluid type. The options selected are unique to the current file
and apply until changed by the user, or another file is recalled. These options also
determine the subsequent screens, menus and commands that are displayed.

4.1.3 PVT
Use the PVT menu to define well fluid properties and select fluid property correlations.
PVT correlations can be modified to match laboratory-measured data using a non-linear
regression technique. Alternatively, detailed PVT data may be entered in tables.

4.1.4 System
The System menu is used to define the well's downhole and surface equipment as well as
the reservoir inflow performance.
When applicable, Gas Lift, ESP, HSP, PCP and other artificial lift methods equipment data
are entered in this menu.

4.1.5 Matching
The Matching menu allows comparison of field data with calculated pressure drops in well
tubing and surface piping. All available correlations can be compared to allow selection of
the model that best suits the field conditions.

4.1.6 Calculation
The Calculation menu provides with the relevant calculation options. Calculations to
determine well performance, pressure and temperature profiles in the wellbore, perform
sensitivity analyses, make gradient comparisons and generate lift curve tables are available

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 86 PROSPER

in this menu.

4.1.7 Design
ESP, HSP, PCP, Jet Pumps, Sucker Rod Pumps, Multiphase Pumps sizing as well as gas
lift mandrel placement and valve setting pressure calculations, coiled tubing and diluents
injection are available from the Design menu. Access to the databases that hold gas lift
valves, ESP, HSP, PCP, Jet pumps, Sucker Rod Pumps (NEW!!!) equipment characteristics
is via the Design menu also.

4.1.8 Output
The Output menu is used to generate reports, to export data and to plot data. Report
templates are provided and user templates can also be defined. The data used can be input
data, analysis data, results or plots. Reports can be saved in various file formats (RTF, TXT
and native) and can be displayed or sent to a printer. Export data can be viewed on screen,
sent to the Windows clipboard, sent to a printer or saved in a file. Plots can be printed
directly, saved to a report file or a Windows metafile. Selected plots can also be sent to the
clipboard where they can be retrieved by other Windows-based programs.

4.1.9 Wizard
This menu accesses the wizard area of PROSPER. This allows to Create/Edit and Run
wizards that allow the User to build and run models step-by-step guided fashion.

4.1.10 Units
This menu is used to define the input and output units of measurement. A flexible system of
units is provided allowing to customise the internal units system.

4.1.11 Help
Provides on-line help for PROSPER. The User can get help on specific tasks, fields or
commands. Help is also given on the keyboard and miscellaneous Windows commands.

4.2 Options Selection

The Options menu is used to define the characteristics of the well. The options selected
establish the input data required and the calculation options available. The selections made
apply to the current session. The data entry screens, input fields and variables are limited to
those relevant to the particular application. Input options may be changed at any stage of
the processing. New choices may require other information to be supplied. Therefore the

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Data Input - General 87

User is advised to ensure that all relevant input is still valid for the new option selection.

To access the Options menu, point to the menu name and click the mouse or press ALT+O.

The following data entry screen will appear:

The entry screen is divided in two main sections - System options and User information.

Under the System options section, define the well characteristics such as fluid type, well
completion, lift method, etc. These selections determine information that will be required to
enter later. The lower section of the screen comprises the header information and
comments that identify the well and will appear on the report and screen plot titles.

Option Selection
To select an option, click on the arrow to the right of the required field. The list of available
choices will be displayed.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 88 PROSPER

4.2.1 Fluid Description

4.2.1.1 Fluid Type

Oil and Water (Black Oil Model or Compositional)
Oil and/or Water fluids

Dry and Wet Gas (Black Oil Model or Compositional)

Dry and Wet Gas is handled under the assumption that condensation occurs at the
separator. The liquid is put back into the gas as an equivalent gas quantity. The
pressure drop is therefore calculated on the basis of a single-phase gas, unless
water is present.

Retrograde Condensate (Black Oil Model or Compositional)

This fluid type accounts for the condensate drop out in the tubing.

4.2.1.2 Method
Black Oil
This option uses industry standard Black Oil models. Five correlations are
available for oil producers. For gas condensate systems an internally developed
model is used. These correlations can be adjusted to match measured data using
non-linear regression.
Equation of State
Reservoir fluid is modelled by pseudo components having user-specified
properties. The two equation of state models Peng-Robinson and
Soave-Redlich-Kwong are available in PROSPER to predict PVT properties.
User EoS DLLs can also be linked into PROSPER.

4.2.1.3 Equation of State Setup

This button is active when Equation of State Method has been selected and can be used to
access all the options related to the use of the Equation of State:
EoS Model (Peng-Robinson or Soave-Redlich-Kwong)
Optimisation Mode (None, Low and Medium)
Volume Shift enable/disable
Reference Pressure and Temperature
Path to Surface and Recycle: Flash Straight to Stock Tank, Use
Separator Train, Use K values
Target GOR Method (Use Separator Fluids or Use Fluid from PSAT)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Data Input - General 89

4.2.1.4 Separator
Single Stage
This option is available for black oil option for following fluids:
Oil and water
Dry and Wet Gas
Two Stage
This option is available for Black oil model in case of Oil and Water fluid type only.
Separator and tank properties are entered and recombined by PROSPER.
Multi-Stage
This option is available for:
- Retrograde Condensate Black Oil model
- Equation of State Method
Up to 10 stages of separation can be modelled for compositional applications.

4.2.1.5 Emulsions
No or Emulsion + Pump viscosity correction
Select Emulsion + Pump viscosity correction to allow input of Emulsion viscosity
in the PVT section. This option must be selected to turn on pump viscosity
corrections.

4.2.1.6 Hydrates
Disable Warning or Enable Warning
Select Enable Warning to allow flagging of hydrates formation in calculation
screens. To use this feature, go to the PVT section and enter or import the
hydrates formation table.

4.2.1.7 Water Viscosity

Use Default Correlation or Use Pressure Corrected Correlation
When the default correlation is used, the water viscosity will be sensitive to the
water salinity and temperature. When the pressure corrected correlation is used,
the water viscosity will be sensitive to the water salinity, temperature and
pressure.

4.2.1.8 Water Vapour

No Calculation or Calculate Condensed Water Vapour
This option is available for Dry and Wet Gas and Retrograde Condensate fluid
types with PVT Black Oil model. If Calculate Condensed Water Vapour is

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 90 PROSPER

selected, the condensation of water vapour will be taken into account when
performing pressure drop calculation.

4.2.1.9 Viscosity model

By default the fluid is considered Newtonian. If desired, non-Newtonian effects can be
modelled by selecting Non-Newtonian and entering in the PVT section rheologic properties
of the fluid.

4.2.2 Well
4.2.2.1 Flow Type
Tubing Flow
This option models flow through a circular cross sectional area (flow in tubing/pipe)
Annular Flow
This option models production up the casing / tubing annulus
Tubing + Annular Flow
This option models production up the tubing, the annulus space, or tubing and
annulus simultaneously

4.2.2.2 Well Type

Producer
this option model production wells
Injector
This is a generic injector well. The fluid to be injected can be specified by the User.
Gas injectors can be modelled by selecting this option
Water Injector
Injection of single-phase water

CO2 Injection

4.2.3 Artificial Lift

4.2.3.1 Method
The following 9 artificial lift method options are available when Oil is selected as a fluid type.

None
No artificial Lift selected
Gas Lift
Three different approaches are provided. Annular gas lift is handled by PROSPER.
If the Flow Type is Annular Flow and a Gas Lift method is selected, then
PROSPER automatically
switches to model gas injection down the tubing, and production up the annulus
Options available: No Friction Loss in the Annulus, Friction Loss in the Annulus,
Safety Equipment
Electrical Submersible Pump

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Data Input - General 91

An ESP installation can be analysed or designed using this option

Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pump
A HSP installation can be analysed or designed using this option
Progressive Cavity Pumps
A PCP installation can be analysed or designed using this option
Coiled Tubing Gas Lift
Coiled Tubing with gas lift can be analysed or designed using this option
Diluent Injection
Injection of a given rate of diluent in the tubing can be modelled
Jet Pump
A Jet Pump installation can be analysed or designed using this option
Multiphase Pump
Framo multiphase pump can be analysed
Sucker Rod Pumps
A Sucker Rod Pump installation can be analysed and designed

4.2.3.2 Type
If Gas Lift is the chosen method, then the following types are available.
No Friction Loss In Annulus
It is the classic approach for the annulus gas gradient. The pressure drop due to
friction in the annulus is ignored and the gas gradient is determined by the top
casing pressure and the temperature profile.
Friction Loss In Annulus
The pressure drop due to friction in the annulus is taken into account, but the top
casing pressure is assumed constant. If this option is selected the tubing
equipment screens will automatically change and require tubing OD and casing
ID data to be entered.
Safety Equipment
Surface delivery lines, chokes, the gas lift injection string and safety valves in the
annulus are taken into account. Top casing pressures will change with injection
rate.

If Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are
available.
Commingled Annular Supply
The power fluid for the turbine is supplied via the annulus and returns to surface,
commingled with the produced fluid via the tubing.
Commingled Tubing Supply
The power fluid for the turbine is supplied via the tubing and returns to surface,
commingled with the produced fluid via the annulus.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 92 PROSPER

Closed Loop Supply

The power fluid for the turbine is supplied via the outer annulus and returns to
surface via the inner annulus. The reservoir fluid is produced through the tubing.
There is no commingling of produced and power fluids.

If Progressive Cavity Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are available.
Sucker Rod Drive
The program will assume to have a surface drive head from which require rods in
order to move the rotor across the pump.
Downhole motor drive
The program assumes to have a downhole motor instead of surface drive motor.

If Coiled Tubing Gas Lift is the chosen method, then the following types are available.
No Friction Loss in Coiled Tubing
Friction losses along the coiled tubing are neglected.
Friction Loss in Coiled Tubing
Friction losses along the coiled tubing are accounted for.

If Diluent Injection is the chosen method, then the following types are available:
Tubing Injection-Annular Production
The power fluid is injected in the tubing and the production flows through the
annulus
Annular Injection-Tubing Production
The power fluid is injected in the annulus and the production flows through the
tubing

If Jet Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are available:
Tubing Injection-Annular Production
The power fluid is injected in the tubing and the production flows through the
annulus
Annular Injection-Tubing Production
The power fluid is injected in the annulus and the production flows through the
tubing

If Multiphase Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are available:
Framo Pumps

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Data Input - General 93

4.2.4 Calculation Type

4.2.4.1 Predict
The program is capable of predicting either pressure only or pressure and temperature
changes simultaneously.
Pressure Only
If this option is selected, the flowing temperature profile must be entered. This
calculation option is fast and can provide accurate pressure profiles, however, it
does not account for changes of temperature due to variation of operating
conditions.
Pressure and Temperature (On Land and Offshore)
This option will calculate both pressure and temperature profiles using the
method specified in Temperature Model.

4.2.4.2 Model
Three models for temperature calculations are available:

Rough Approximation
Calculates the heat loss from the well to the surroundings using an overall
heat transfer coefficient, the temperature difference between the fluids and
the surrounding formation and the average heat capacity of the well fluids.
The geothermal gradient entry screen is used to input formation temperatures
(e.g. from logging runs) at measured depth points. A minimum of the surface
and first node temperatures are required. Temperatures entered should be
the extrapolated static temperatures, and should not be confused with the
entry of measured flowing temperatures required for the Predicting pressure
only case.

The Rough Approximation temperature model requires calibration using

measured temperature data. It is not accurate in a predictive mode.

Enthalpy Balance
This rigorous thermodynamic model considers heat transfer by conduction,
radiation, and forced and free convection. Heat transfer coefficients are
calculated using values held in a user-definable database. The temperature
prediction calculations are transient, allowing sensitivities against flowing time
to be run. This temperature model requires considerably more input data and
computation time for either Predicting Pressure Only or the Rough
Approximation temperature model.

The production riser is properly taken into account. Therefore the heat loss
prediction between the seabed and wellhead will be accurate. Due to
increased computation times, we recommend that this option be used only
when temperature prediction rather than pressure loss is the required result
(for e.g. process calculations and material selection).

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 94 PROSPER

The Enthalpy Balance temperature model is capable of accurate flowing

temperature prediction for a wide range of conditions.
The temperature prediction is useful for generating temperature profiles in:
long pipelines
subsea wells
high pressure/temperature exploration wells
predicting temperature/pressure profiles to help predict wax/hydrate
deposits.
These models also account for Joule-Thompson Effects.
The temperature calculation must commence from a known condition. This is
usually the reservoir pressure and temperature. As a consequence,
calculating from a downstream node (unknown temperature) to an upstream
node (known temperature) is not meaningful

Improved Approximation
As the Enthalpy Balance model, this is also a full enthalpy balance pressure
and temperature prediction model, with the difference that the term of the
enthalpy balance concerning the heat exchange with the surroundings (which
includes free and forced convection, conduction and radiation) is simplified by
a heat loss term characterised by an overall heat exchange coefficient.
For this reason data related to the completion hardware and thermal
properties are not necessary.
Like any enthalpy balance model, Joule-Thomson Effect is also accounted
for.
These characteristics make this model particularly useful when an accurate
calculation of temperature is sought for and only a few data on the completion
are available.
The geothermal gradient entry screen is used to input formation temperatures
(e.g. from logging runs) at measured depth points. A temperature gradient in
the sea can be entered for offshore applications. A minimum of the surface
and first node temperatures are required. Temperatures entered should be
the extrapolated static temperatures, and should not be confused with the
entry of measured flowing temperatures required for the Predicting pressure
only case.

The Improved Approximation temperature model requires calibration using

measured temperature data. It is not accurate in a predictive mode.

4.2.4.3 Calculation
Full System
Calculations for pipelines, tubing and reservoir
Pipeline Only

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Data Input - General 95

Calculations for pipelines only

4.2.4.4 Output
Show calculating Data
During a calculation it displays the calculated values
Hide calculating Data
Select Hide to speed up calculations by not updating calculation screen displays.
This will automatically be set to Hide when run from GAP

4.2.5 Steam Calculation

NEW!!!
When the fluid type is set to Oil & Water and one of the enthalpy balance models (Improved
Approximation or Enthalpy Balance) is selected, the option to eable/disable the steam
calculations is available.
No Steam Calculations
Allow Steam Calculations

4.2.6 Well Completion

4.2.6.1 Type
Cased Hole or Open Hole
This selection determines the appropriate IPR Completion models to use. In
particular Cased Hole enables the availability of Skin models to calculate the skin
factor, whilst Open Hole disables the availability of Skin models.

4.2.6.2 Gravel Pack

Yes or No
Gravel pack will be included in the model when Yes is selected.

4.2.7 Reservoir
4.2.7.1 Type
Single Branch
This option allows to model single branch IPRs. The IPR screen comes with various
standard inflow models from which the user selects one.
Multilateral Well
Enables the Multilateral IPR model. For the multi-lateral selection, the IPR screen
requires detailed drawing of the downhole completion.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 96 PROSPER

4.2.7.2 Gas Coning

Yes or No
Rate dependant GOR will be modelled and calculated when Yes is selected.
This option is only available for Single Branch type wells.

4.2.8 User Information and Comments

These fields are optional. The details entered here provide the User information that
identifies the well model in the screen plots and printed reports. The Comments area is
used to enter free format text describing the details of the analysis. A Date stamp feature is
provided to mark either the comment text or the header data for future reference.

We recommend that comments be used to summarise any assumptions made in the

analysis. Whenever an existing model is modified, appending a summary of changes and a
date stamp will greatly assist current and future users working with the file. This information
can be displayed on the main PROSPER screen by selecting the appropriate option in the
Preferences Section (Main Screen Tab - Status screen option).

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

Chapter

5
 98 PROSPER

5 PVT Data Input

5.1 Introduction
To predict pressure and temperature changes from the reservoir, along the well bore and
flow line tubular, it is necessary to accurately predict fluid properties as a function of
pressure and temperature. The User must enter data that fully describes the fluid properties
or enables the program to calculate them. There are four possible approaches:

- Correlations: Where only basic PVT data is available, the program uses traditional black
oil correlations, such as Glaso, Beal, Petrosky etc. A unique black oil model is available for
condensates and details of this can be found later in this guide as well as the PROSPER
manual.

- Matching: Where both basic fluid data and some PVT laboratory measurements are
available, the program can modify the black oil correlations to best-fit the measured data
using a non-linear regression technique.

- Tables: Where detailed PVT laboratory data is provided, MBAL uses this data instead of
the calculated properties. This data is entered in table format (PVT tables), and can be
supplied either manually or imported from an outside source. So called black oil tables can
be generated from an EOS model and then be imported and used in MBAL.

- Compositional: Where the full Equation of State description of the fluid is available and all
the PVT can be obtained from a Peng-Robinson or a Soave Redlich Kwong description of
the fluid phase behaviour.

Note with regards to the PVT definitions:

Use of Tables: Tables are usually generated using one fluid composition which
implies a single GOR for the fluid. This will therefore not provide the right fluid
description when we have injection of hydrocarbons in the reservoir or when the
reservoir pressure drops below the bubble/dew point.

Use of EOS: The basic equations of state are not predictive unless matched to
measured lab data. Care has to be taken in order to make sure that the EOS has been
matched and is applicable for the range of Pressures and Temperatures to be
investigated.

The program also allows fluid properties to be calculated and plotted for specified pressure
and temperature ranges. The PVT menu has three options - Report, Input and Export.
Select Report to inspect previously entered data, Export to save data to a text file, or Input to
set up a new problem or edit an existing one.

Recommended Steps

Only Limited PVT Data Available (Minimum required for correlations)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 99

Enter data as requested on PVT input data screen and select correlations that
are known to best fit the region or oil type.

Limited PVT Data and Laboratory Measured Data Available

Enter the basic black oil data requested in the PVT input data screen.
Enter PVT laboratory data in the Match Data data menu. The laboratory PVT
data and the fluid properties entered on the data input screen must be consistent.
Flash Data must be used. Up to 5 tables of laboratory measurements made at
different temperatures may be entered. Use the Tables buttons to switch
between tables. Click OK to return to the PVT input screen.
At this point it is possible to Calculate PVT properties using a correlation and Plot
the calculated and match data to see how closely the non-optimised correlation
fits.
Select Regression, then Match All. A non-linear regression will be performed to
best fit each correlation to the measured lab data. Once the calculation is
finished, select Parameters and identify the correlation that best fits the
measured data. This correlation should then be selected and this modified
correlation will be used in all further calculations of fluid property data. The fit
parameters are the multiplier and shift applied to the correlation in order to fit the
lab data. If the correlation were a perfect fit to the match data, Parameter 1
would be set to 1.0 and Parameter 2 would be zero.
In order to see how well the tuned correlations fit the data, on the regression
screen there is plot utility, which will plot the variable values from the matched
correlations, and the data entered simultaneously, to allow the User to see how
good the fit is. Select Plot to display both the calculated and measured PVT data.
Select the Variables option on the plot menu bar to choose the fluid property
data to display.

5.2 Black Oil - Oil and Water

5.2.1 Input Data
Select the PVT Input option from the main menu to display the following PVT Input data
screen:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 100 PROSPER

Enter the required data in the fields provided. Movement from one box to another can be
done using the TAB key. Next, select a Pb, Rs and Bo correlation and a viscosity correlation
to use then click OK.

Enter the oil solution GOR. This should not include free gas production. For gas
production in wells producing injection or gas cap gas the solution GOR should
still be entered. The balance of free gas production is accounted for elsewhere.

Mole Percent CO2, N2 and H2S refers to the separator gas stream composition.
CO2 Injection

When an "Oil and Water" model is used to describe the fluid, the viscosity
correlation used by default for gas viscosity calculations is the Lee correlation.

For some details about the input parameters, refer to the Glossary (Appendix F).

5.2.2 Tables
In PROSPER the PVT data can also be entered as tables by clicking Tables from the main
PVT input screen. Up to fifty separate tables may be entered, each at a different
temperature. The program will use the data from the tables in all further calculations

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 101

provided the Use Tables option has been selected on the input data screen. This option
should be used only when extensive table data is available for a range of temperatures.

Rather than entering the values by hand, PROSPER can read in tables of Black Oil PVT
properties. To do this, click the Import button from the Tables screen, and PROSPER will
prompt for the name of an ASCII file containing the PVT data. Petroleum Experts PVT
Package PVTp can be used to calculate and export Black Oil PVT tables. An example of
the PVT Table import file format is given in Appendix E.

Alternatively, data can be passed directly from Excel on a table-only basis using the Clip
button. The Clip button will paste the copied data from Excel into the selected PVT table.

PROSPER interpolates the entered table data and if the entered data is
incomplete i.e., one table containing only a single row of values will result in
interpolation errors.

Information on how to import the data from a ASCII File can be found in Appendix H -
Importing Data from Text Files.

5.2.3 Match Data

Click the Match Data button and enter PVT laboratory measured data to match to as shown
on the example screen below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 102 PROSPER

Since gas evolution in the tubing is a constant composition process, Flash data, not
differential liberation data should be used for matching. For each match data table, enter
the temperature and bubble point, then enter pressure versus gas oil ratio, oil FVF and oil
viscosity. Where data is incomplete or not available, leave the field blank. Use the GOR and
FVF at bubble point plus the viscosity if available. Enter only the minimum number of points
to ensure a good match.

Where only differential liberation PVT data is available, a PVT simulation program
like Petroleum Experts' PVT package PVTp can be used to calculate the flash
properties using a model that has been matched to the lab data.

Better results for sparse laboratory PVT data sets are usually obtained using correlations
matched to the available lab data rather than using a PVT table lookup.

5.2.4 Regression
This option is used to perform the non-linear regression, which adjusts the correlations to
best-fit laboratory measured PVT data. The non-linear regression matching technique can
be used on up to five PVT match tables, each with a different temperature. The following
PVT properties can be used as match variables:
Pb Bubble point pressure.
GOR Gas oil ratio versus pressure.
Oil FVF Oil formation volume factor versus pressure.
Oil viscosity Oil viscosity versus pressure.
It is not necessary to match on all properties for all applications. In cases where the PVT
data is incomplete or of poor quality, better results can often be obtained by matching on the

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 103

best characterised parameters only. However, because bubble point can be difficult to
accurately predict from correlations, it is recommended that, where possible, it is used as a
match parameter. The minimum data required to perform a regression match is the bubble
point and GOR.

The form of the correlations for FVF is different above and below the bubble point.
If the FVF at bubble point is not available, the regression may not achieve good
results. When matching the oil FVF, always enter data at the bubble point. Do not
enter many match points only use the minimum number to define the shape of the
correlation curves. In most cases, only data at the bubble point is required.

5.2.4.1 Match
From the Regression screen, individual correlations can be matched to selected measured
PVT data by:
Selecting the correlations
Selecting the fluid properties to match to
Clicking Match

5.2.4.1.1 Match All

All correlations can be matched to all the fluid property data in one keystroke by selecting
the Match All command button.

5.2.4.1.2 Parameters
Having performed the matching process, the match parameters are displayed by clicking the
Parameters button. The non-linear regression technique applies a multiplier - Parameter 1,
and a shift - Parameter 2 to the correlations. The standard deviation is also displayed, which

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 104 PROSPER

represents the overall closeness of fit. The lower the standard deviation, the better the fit.
The best overall model is the one that has Parameter 1 closest to unity.
5.2.4.1.2.1 Viewing the Match Parameters
The Parameters button displays the PVT correlations parameters screen. This shows the
match parameters and the standard deviation for each matched correlation. Use these
statistics to select the best correlation for the data set and conditions pertaining to the
application. A plot should be made (refer calculation and plot sections) and a visual check
of the fit quality performed before making the final correlation selection. The match
parameters can be reset i.e. returned to the un-matched state by selecting the reset option.
The following is an example of a correlation parameters screen:

5.2.4.1.2.2 Matching FVF above Bubble Point

The standard correlations do not always accurately model the FVF above bubble point
(especially for heavy or waxy oils). Additional match parameters (Parameter 3 and 4) have
been introduced to allow the FVF to be independently tuned below (P1 and P2) and above
(P3 and P4) the bubble point.

In all circumstances, always enter match data at the bubble point to ensure that no
discontinuities occur.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 105

5.2.5 Correlations
This options displays the match parameters and standard deviations for each matched
correlation. See the Match section for a more detailed explanation.

5.2.6 Calculate
In order to make a plot or listing of fluid property data, PROSPER must first calculate the
values over a specified range of temperatures and pressures. Using the calculated data
points, plots of fluid properties versus temperature or pressure can be generated. The
following is an example of the PVT Calculations screen. If the correlations have been
matched, then the fluid properties will be calculated using the modified correlations.

The calculation procedure is optional and used only to generate fluid property data
for display and quality control purposes. During the computation of a pressure
traverse, PROSPER calculates fluid properties at each pressure and temperature
step or node as required by the application.

5.2.6.1 Calculating PVT Data

The Calculate button access the PVT calculator, which can be used to perform calculation
of PVT properties with varying Pressure and Temperature.

To generate tables and plots of PVT data:

Select Correlations (use the best matched one)
Select Automatic generation of Data Points
Enter the temperature range and number of steps
Enter the pressure range and number of steps

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 106 PROSPER

Click OK
Click Calculate to compute PVT data for the entire range of pressures and
temperatures required by the modelling application. The following calculation
screen will be displayed:

The PVT section can be used as a convenient calculator by entering User selected data
points, then entering specific temperatures and pressures to calculate fluid properties.

5.2.6.2 Displaying the Calculated Data on the screen

The calculated data is displayed on the screen as default. Options to choose the calculated
variables to be displayed are available by using Layout button in the PVT Calculation
Results screen. Selecting Layout displays the list of all calculated variables that can be
selected to customise viewing.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 107

5.2.6.3 Plotting the Calculated Data

The calculated data can be displayed on a plot. The variables, which are plotted, are
defined under the Variables option on the plot. After performing a PVT calculation click Plot
from the PVT calculation screen. Display the selected results by following this procedure:

Click Variables.
Select Pressure for the X-axis.
Select GOR for the Y-axis.
Click OK to display a plot showing both the calculated values and the measured values
similar to the following:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 108 PROSPER

Carefully examine the PVT plots for consistency with the match data. If necessary, select a
different correlation and repeat the PVT calculations until satisfactory results have been
obtained.

5.2.6.4 Saving PVT tables from Calculated Data

The calculated data can be saved in the form of .ptb files by the button Save PTB provided
at top of the calculation results screen.

There is also the possibility of transferring the displayed calculation to the Tables by
pressing on the Tables button.

5.2.7 Save the PVT Data

This option allows a PVT data set to be saved under a separate name. A dialogue box will
appear prompting to name the PVT file. The PVT extension is automatically provided by the
program. If this step is omitted, the program will automatically save the (matched) PVT data
in a .PVT file with the same name as the input (.SIN) file.

5.2.8 Open
This option allows a previously saved PVT data set to be recalled into the open file. A
dialogue box will appear prompting to select a PVT file. If this step is carried out after
recalling a .SIN file, this will overwrite the PVT data from the original file.

For multi-well projects, set up matched PVT models for each producing area first.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008
 PVT Data Input 109

This will save time and reduce the potential for error by recalling the relevant PVT
data into each well file.

5.2.9 Composition
In the PVT Input Data screen, click the Composition button, and PROSPER will use the
PVT properties (Oil Gravity, GOR) to estimate the composition of the reservoir fluid. The
estimated composition is used internally by PROSPER to calculate thermodynamic
properties needed in the choke and enthalpy balance temperature models. The following is
an example of an estimated Black Oil composition:

Click BI Coefficients and PROSPER will display the Binary Interaction coefficients to be
used in an EOS description of the fluid. An example BI Coefficients display is shown below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 110 PROSPER

Estimation of reservoir fluid composition is available for Oil and Retrograde Condensate
fluids.

5.2.10 Emulsions
If Options | Emulsions is selected PROSPER allows selection of the emulsion occurrence
in the system from the PVT input dialogue. This tells PROSPER where the viscosity
corrections will take place during calculation

The Flowline Emulsion Data button opens the Emulsion Data entry screen.

Water cut can be entered at this point that will then be used to calculate the emulsion
viscosity in the PVT calculation section.
5.2.10.1Emulsions
PROSPER can model the effect of Oil/Water emulsions on mixture viscosity for Black Oil
PVT systems. The behaviour of emulsions in producing well equipment is not well
understood. Emulsion PVT in PROSPER provides a means to assess possible effects of
increased emulsion viscosity by curve fitting experimentally determined data. It must be
emphasised that the method is empirical and does not represent any rigorous model of
emulsion behaviour.

In the laboratory, stable emulsions can be prepared from many crude oil / water systems.
Emulsion samples discovered in surface separation equipment do not necessarily imply that
emulsions are present in the well. Field experience shows that the effect of emulsions is
usually less than predicted by laboratory tests. Emulsion PVT should be used with caution
and only when it is certain that emulsions are present and it is necessary to evaluate their
effect on calculated pressures.

To enable emulsion PVT in PROSPER, the Emulsion option must first be selected on the
Options screen. Emulsion viscosity will replace the mixture viscosity for selected elements
of the production system. Experimental or empirical emulsion viscosity data can be entered

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 111

and curve-fitted using non-linear regression. The fitted curve is used to optionally replace
the oil/water mixture viscosity in IPR, VLP and pump calculations. When selected, emulsion
viscosity for the User-entered value of water cut will be substituted for the fluid mixture
viscosity.

Drop down the Emulsion box and select from the following:
No viscosity corrections
Turns off emulsion viscosity corrections

Everywhere
Emulsion viscosity for IPR, VLP and pump if present

Tubing and Pipe

Emulsion viscosity for casing, tubing and pump if present

Pump only
Emulsion viscosity for pump only

Pump and Above

Emulsion viscosity in pump and tubing above pump

Tubing + Pipe (not pump)

Emulsion viscosity in tubing and pipe only
The selection of system elements affected by emulsion can be changed at a later time

Even if No Emulsion Corrections has been selected on the PVT screen, pump
viscosity corrections will be applied whenever Options Emulsions is selected.
Produced fluid viscosity, not emulsion viscosity, will then be used for corrections.

To set up the emulsion model, select Emulsion Everywhere, (otherwise emulsion viscosity
will not be active for the PVT calculations) then click the Emulsion Data button and the
following screen will be displayed.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 112 PROSPER

The screen is divided into 3 sections:

Emulsion Data Experimental data for matching
Experimental Parameters Experimental base conditions
Match Parameters Results of regression

The pressure and temperature that correspond to the experimental conditions are entered in
Experimental Parameters. This enables PROSPER to correct the emulsion viscosity for
temperature and pressure.

Emulsions Everywhere must be selected before plotting the emulsion viscosity

curve. The emulsion viscosity entered for zero water cut should be compatible
with the 100% oil viscosity at the experimental temperature and pressure.

Emulsion viscosity is modelled as a function of water cut in 3 stages:

Sharp increase at low water cut
Plateau with a constant maximum viscosity for intermediate water cuts
Tail that declines to the viscosity of water after the plateau
The parameters Left and Right Water Cut for Maximum Viscosity define the maximum
plateau region. To calculate emulsion viscosity:
Enter pairs of water cut and emulsion viscosity data points in the Emulsion Data
table.
Enter the Experimental Parameters
Click the Match button.
When the regression has stopped, click Plot to display the matched mixture viscosity:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 113

Match data is plotted as crosses, whereas the calculated viscosity is shown as a solid line.

When Emulsions Everywhere have been selected, the calculated Oil Viscosity in the PVT
section will be replaced by the emulsion viscosity for the value of Water Cut entered.

5.2.11 Non-Newtonian Fluid

PROSPER can model the effect of non-Newtonian fluids.
The implementation of the model is based on drilling fluid models developed by TotalFinaElf.

A fluid whose viscosity is not constant at all shear rates and does not behave like a
Newtonian fluid would fall into this category. This will enable foams in heavy oils to be
modelled more accurately. Most drilling fluids are non-Newtonian.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 114 PROSPER

To enter the required non-Newtonian fluid viscosity data, select Rheological Parameters
from the PVT Input Data screen:

The model is based on the Herschel-Bulkley shear model:

= 0 +K n

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 115

where:
= Shear Stress
0 = Yield Stress
K = Consistency Index
= Shear Rate
n = Shear Thinning Index

For further details about how the viscosity model is used to determine the apparent viscosity,
please refer to the Help on-line of PROSPER.

5.2.12 Power Fluid Data

If one of the following Artificial Lift Methods have been selected: HSP (Hydraulic
Submersible Pump), Diluent Injection or Jet Pump, then additional details of the power fluid
must be supplied to estimate the fluid properties.

There are two choices for power fluid type:

Water (not available for Diluent Injection)

Other Fluid

If Water is selected, then the only other data required is the salinity of the power fluid. The
program will then estimate fluid properties using the normal water PVT model.

If Other Fluid is selected, then tables of fluid properties need to be entered that PROSPER
will use for interpolation. The program will never extrapolate so please ensure that the table
data covers the expected ranges of pressures and temperatures. Click the Properties
button and the following screen will be displayed.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 116 PROSPER

Tables of data for up to 10 temperatures may be entered. Please ensure that the tables
span the expected range of conditions that will be encountered.

The Generate feature allows to automatically calculate the tables using the PVT
model in the main screen.
If a PVT model is available for the power fluid, the suggestion is the following:

1. Enter in the PVT main screen the fluid black oil properties

2. Use Generate to create the tables modelling the power fluid

3. Enter in the main screen the black oil parameters for the produced fluid

5.2.13 Hydrates Formation table

If the Hydrates | Enable Warning option has been selected in the main program Options,
then a hydrate pressure temperature look-up table must be entered.

Click the Hydrates button and the following entry screen will be displayed.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 117

Enter here the hydrate formation phase envelope conditions.

Up to one hundred data points may be entered. Please ensure that the table spans within
the expected range of conditions that will be encountered.

5.3 Black Oil - Dry And Wet Gas

All the condensate drop out is assumed to occur at the separator. Free water production in
the tubing is considered. For pressure drop calculations, an equivalent gas rate is used
which allows for the condensate by ensuring that a mass balance is observed.

5.3.1 Input Data

When Dry and Wet Gas is selected as the PVT option, the following Input data screen is
displayed:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 118 PROSPER

The bottom-right part of the screen will only appear when the option Calculate Condensate
Water Vapour is selected in the Options | Water Viscosity section. If this option is
selected, the effects of condensation of water vapour on the pressure drop calculation in the
tubing / pipeline will be taken into account.

This model applies to most gas wells. The condensate production is included in the gas
stream as an increase in density - the flow remains single-phase gas plus free water if
present. The Separator Pressure is used to estimate the GE (Gas Equivalent Rate). The
separator temperature is assumed to be the same as the top node temperature. If there is
significant hydrocarbon liquid drop out in the tubing, a retrograde condensate model should
be used.

The Gray VLP correlation has an internal PVT routine that models the effect of
liquid dropout in the tubing. This overrides the Dry and Wet gas PVT.

Produced gas is generally saturated with water at reservoir pressure and

temperature. Some water of condensation always drops out at the separator.
This water has a minimal effect on calculated bottom hole pressures. The WGR
considers free water production at the sandface.

Please refer to the PVT Matching Data section. Matching operations are carried
out as for oil PVT.

5.4 Black Oil - Retrograde Condensate

The PROSPER Retrograde condensate (Black Oil) model has been developed in house by
Petroleum Experts. This model predicts liquid drop out taking place in the tubing. The
reservoir gas gravity is determined using the principle of mass balance for an equivalent
density of the oil.

The black oil condensate model must not be matched as previously done for oils. This is
because the black oil model for condensate in PROSPER uses a mathematical model and
matching could throw the model out of bounds.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 119

The equations used are given in Appendix C.

5.4.1 Input Data

When Retrograde Condensate (Black oil) PVT is selected the following input data screen is
displayed:

Enter the required data.

Note:
If tank GOR and tank gas gravity is unknown, they can be left at 0. The unmeasured tank
gas rate should be estimated using a suitable correlation and added to the separator gas.
For such cases, the total produced GOR should be entered under separator GOR.
Condensate gravity is at standard conditions.

If the separator pressure is above dew point, then there can be no liquid
production. When the dew point is unknown, set it to the reservoir pressure.
PROSPER handles conflicting input data by dropping the separator pressure to
atmospheric, and increasing the separator gas gravity as required accounting for
the liquid production indicated by the Separator GOR. The mass balance is
respected at all times.

The black oil condensate model must not be matched as previously done for oils.
This is because the black oil model for condensate in PROSPER uses a
mathematical model and matching could throw the model out of bounds.

Please review the condensate validation example A15 found in Appendix A of the
PROSPER User Guide.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 120 PROSPER

5.4.2 Calculations
Fluid property data can be calculated for a specified range of temperatures and pressures.
If the correlations have been matched, then the matched correlations will be used for the
calculations. Plots of fluid properties versus temperature or pressure can be generated.

The calculated PVT property values should be compared to constant composition

expansion (CCE) data, as this process best describes the evolution of the fluid in
the tubing.

As calculated pressures (e.g. VLP) approach the convergence pressure, the

solution calculations slow down. This PVT method is only applicable below the
convergence pressure.

5.5 Equation Of State - All Fluids

This PVT option allows PROSPER to calculate the vapour fraction and fluid physical
properties using an equation of state (EOS) description for the reservoir fluid.
Peng-Robinson and Soave Redlich Kwong EOS models are available in PROSPER, also
User EOS PVT modules can also be linked to PROSPER. The PVT calculation method is
identical for all reservoir fluid types (i.e. oil and water, condensate or gas). The fluid type
selected will affect the choice of IPR and VLP models as well as the range of available
sensitivity variables.

Equations of State were developed to give a mathematical relationship between pressure,

volume and temperature. They were originally put forward as a method of interpreting the
non-ideal nature of many pure substances. With time, this role has been extended
successfully to predicting the properties of simple and complex mixtures.

The equations used in PROSPER are derived from Van der Waals Equation and in common
with it represent the total pressure as a summation of an attractive and a repulsive element:

P total = P repulsive - P attractive

The classic Van der Waals equation describes this relationship as

where b represents the hard-sphere volume of the molecules and a the intermolecular
attraction.

The two cubic Equations of State which are available in PROSPER are:

1) Peng-Robinson (PR)EoS:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 121

and,

2) Soave-Redlich-Kwong(SRK)EoS:

All cubic Equations of State can be rewritten as a function of the compressibility factor Z e.g.
the Peng Robinson equation becomes:

and for SRK

where

and

The PVT calculation method is identical for all reservoir fluid types i.e., oil and water,
condensate or gas.

The choice of fluid type affects the choice of IPR and VLP models as well as the range of
available sensitivity variables.

A Note about using the EOS option

PROSPER can handle pressure drop calculations using EOS PVT in two distinct ways:
It can calculate fluid properties at each calculation step from the EOS explicitly. This
option eliminates any potential interpolation errors, as the EOS is used to calculate
fluid properties at the exact node pressure and temperature. The additional
computing overhead required by this method increases calculation times.
If PVT tables have been generated using the EoS, selecting the Interpolated from
Generated Tables option instructs PROSPER to look up and interpolate the tables.
The tables must be calculated over a sufficient number of points that cover the entire
range of pressures and temperatures to reduce interpolation errors. For problems
that require it, the Use Tables option allows an EOS fluid description to be used
without significantly increasing computation times.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 122 PROSPER

PROSPER will determine whether the reservoir fluid is an oil or a gas condensate
within the EOS PVT calculations. Since the VLP correlations are approached
differently depending on whether a gas or oil is being produced, when running
calculations, if the fluid type recognised during the calculations is different to the
fluid type specified in the main program Options screen, the program will display a
warning message

5.5.1 EOS Model Setup

The EOS fluid mode options must be consistent with the entered compositional data for
PROSPER to calculate.

The EoS options can now be set up by selecting EoS Setup:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 123

The following main EOS options can be pre-set:

EoS Model
Select one of the available EoS equations: Peng-Robinson or Soave-Redlich-Kwong.

Optimisation Mode
Over the past few years, our PVT experts have been working on ways to speed up the
calculation of properties from an EOS model. Speed is one of the main issues with fully
compositional models and the options in this field will define the speed of calculations.
The objective of this option is to speed up the calculations without penalising the accuracy
the results. The Medium mode is the fastest (up to 80 times)

Volume Shift
Option to enable/disable the use of Volume Shift in the EoS.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 124 PROSPER

Path to Surface
This Option specifies the path the fluid follows down to standard condition.
This is essential when calculating volumetric properties like FVF or GOR, which are path
dependent. The amount of gas and liquid resulting from the calculations will be different
depending on the path the fluid will take to standard conditions. These are the available
options:
Flash Straight to Stock Tank
Use Separator Train
Use K values
The Use K Values option is an addition to the compositional modelling that allows
modelling the process based on K-values (equilibrium ratios). This can allow process
calculations from systems more complex than separation to be represented as
Pseudo separators and can be obtained from process simulators.
To import the K values select Import KValues:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 125

K-values can be entered by hand or also generated in PVTp by performing a simple

separator experiment, and then exported. The procedure is shown below:

Once the calculations are complete, under the Analysis tab the Export K-Values button can
be used:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 126 PROSPER

Now the program will allow the User to export a *.pks file that can be imported in PROSPER
containing all the information with regards to separator stages and K values.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 127

These options should reflect the EOS available for the fluid (from PVTP for
example) and the process (path) the fluid follows to standard conditions
(which will affect the volumes and quality of the resulting fluid)

Target GOR Method

A single composition will only provide a single value of GOR through a defined separator
train. There are applications when other GOR values are required e.g. in the production of
lift curves. This calculation takes the gas and oil derived from the fluid and recombines them
until it reaches the target value.
There are two methods available to the user. The difference between them lies in the source
of the gas and liquid to be mixed.
Use Separator fluids
uses the dead oil and accumulated separator gas to create the mixture
Use fluid from PSAT
finds the saturation pressure of the fluid. The program then flashes just below PSAT to

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 128 PROSPER

obtain an oil and gas composition. These are mixed to achieve the target GOR. It
should be noted that this retricts any target that can be found to the RS of the
oil below PSAT and the GOR of the equivalent gas. Although more restricted, this
mixture better reflects the case of an oil entraining gas cap gas etc.

5.5.2 EOS PVT Input Data

A sample EOS PVT input screen is shown below:

The EOS fluid model is activated via the Options Summary screen where the various EOS
options can be selected. The Options can also be changed from the EoS main screen by
selecting Change.

This screen requires input of pseudo component concentrations and properties (critical
temperature, pressure and volume, acentric factor, molecular weight and specific gravity).
Up to 30 pseudo components can be entered. Entry of Critical Volume, Volume Shift,
Boiling Point Temperature and Parachor are optional.

Use of regressed critical volume data will improve the quality of calculated liquid viscosities.
Where critical volume data is unavailable, PROSPER uses a correlation to estimate the
values. The Parachor is used for surface tension calculation. Binary interaction components
are entered on a screen similar to that shown below by clicking on the BI coeffs button from
the EOS input screen.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 129

After entering the interaction coefficients, click OK to return to the input screen. Then click
Generate to display a screen requesting the range of pressures and temperatures and the
number of pressure and temperature steps to calculate.

5.5.2.1 Importing Matched EoS

The EoS model can also be imported by using the ImportPRP feature.
The .PRP file contains all the information necessary to the EoS: EoS parameters, BI
Coefficients, Options, Separator train, etc., and can be generated using Petroleum Experts
PVTp.

5.5.3 Using the EoS

5.5.3.1 Generate PVT properties

The fluid properties can be generated using the EoS in different ways:
Calculated directly from the EoS
Interpolate the properties from Tables generated by the EoS itself

The first option is the most accurate, though the slowest.

Choose the desired option from the menu available in the left bottom of the EoS window.

Performing CCE calculations

Calculate the PVT fluid properties using the EOS directly by clicking Generate.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 130 PROSPER

Enter the range of temperatures and pressures and Calculate | Calculate.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 131

Display the results by clicking Plot

Properties
Click the Properties button and the program will determine the equivalent black oil
properties by flashing the fluid to atmospheric (i.e. standard) conditions using the separator
scheme entered in the main screen.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 132 PROSPER

Production rates entered in PROSPER when using EOS PVT assume the
produced fluid is flashed directly to atmosphere. e.g. for oil, enter the production
rate that results in the correct wellhead mass flow rate when the oil gravity is the
same as shown by the Properties calculation.

Before importing PVT data, first ensure that PROSPER is using the correct units
for pressure and temperature.

The EOS option in PROSPER is not intended to be used as a fully featured PVT
package. For maximum accuracy and computational efficiency, it is
recommended that compositional data be grouped and matched to lab data using
a program such as Petroleum Experts PVTP Package and the resulting
pseudo-component properties used in PROSPER. The accuracy of well pressure
loss calculations depends on the accuracy of density predictions. Unless the EOS
densities have been carefully matched to lab data over a sufficient range of
temperatures and pressures, VLP calculations using EOS PVT will not be
accurate.

The Gray VLP correlations internal PVT will override the EOS PVT.

5.5.3.2 Phase Envelope

Generating the Phase Envelope
The phase envelope can be displayed by selecting the Phase Envelope button.
In this section the Phase Envelope can be calculated:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PVT Data Input 133

The Plot button displays the calculated Envelope:

PROSPER will automatically calculate the Cricondentherm, Cricondenbar and where

applicable, the critical point.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 134 PROSPER

The EOS input screen allows pseudo component data to be imported directly from data files
such as those generated by Petroleum Experts' PVT package PVTp or other programs.
Simply click Import and select the appropriate file from the dialogue box. Once fluid
properties have been generated, they can be saved in a .PVT file by clicking the Save button
and entering a file name when prompted.

Calculate Hydrate...Wax
This utility allows to calculate the Hydrate formation curve, along with the wax occurrence
temperature.
The Hydrate formation curve and wax formation temperature plot will be displayed along
with the phase envelope.
5.5.3.3 Target GOR
This feature allows to calculate the recombined fluid composition characterised by a GOR
different to the Original Composition GOR:

Enter the new GOR in the Target GOR field and the Calculate, and the program will use the
Target GOR method defined in the main EoS options in order to determine the new
composition.
The Calculated composition is reported in the Calculated column.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

Chapter

6
 136 PROSPER

6 Equipment Data Input

This section describes the menu option used to define the well's hardware, deviation survey
and flowing temperature profile. The program requests only the data required by the O
ptions that have been selected.
The data required for temperature prediction depends on the temperature model used. For
the Rough Approximation and Improved Approximation, there is little additional data
required. For the rigorous Enthalpy Balance temperature model, it is necessary to
completely define the well environment, including all casing strings, cement tops, formation
lithology etc.

A Note about Depth References.

Depths in PROSPER for downhole and surface equipment are referenced to zero

on the deviation survey screen. Calculated pressures are then referenced to the
Xmas tree (if no surface equipment has been entered) or Manifold (if surface
equipment has been entered). Therefore, when PROSPER well models are
combined in a field-wide system model, the depth references that were used in
the individual PROSPER models are not important. In the field model, however,
the depth of each well's Top Node must be known with respect to a common
reference.

For subsea systems, any depth reference (e.g. sea level, drill floor, ground level)

can be used. If ground level is used, then a tied back well would have a negative
wellhead elevation. To minimise the potential for errors in correcting the depths, it
is recommended to use the same reference as used for the deviation survey data.

6.1 Predicting Pressure Only

When predicting Pressure only, click System Equipment to display the following input
screen:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 137

To start data entry for a new application, click All Edit. PROSPER will then display all the
relevant input screens in sequence.
If data has already been entered, clicking the Summary command button will display a
summary of the current equipment.
To go back and edit one particular equipment item, click on the button beside the
appropriate item.
Data can be entered for the surface equipment and then include or exclude it temporarily
from any calculation by setting the Disable Surface Equipment choice box at the bottom of
the screen to Yes.

6.1.1 Deviation Survey

From the well deviation survey, select a few depth points that mark significant changes in
deviation. Enter pairs of data points for measured depth (MD) and the corresponding true
vertical depth (TVD). Up to 18 pairs of data points can be entered.

The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that have
been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be simultaneously
selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import data from a wide variety
of sources.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 138 PROSPER

There is a Measured Depth to True Vertical Depth (and the reverse is true) at the

bottom.
If the user wishes to find the TVD at a given MD, just enter the MD value in the
relevant space and select Calculate. If the User wishes to find the MD at a given
TVD, just enter the TVD value in the relevant space and select Calculate

Once depths have been entered, plot the well profile by selecting Plot. A plot similar to the
one below will be displayed:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 139

The reference depth used by PROSPER for all calculations is zero in the
Deviation Survey table. The Deviation Survey table is interpolated to determine
the difference in TVD between any two well nodes. MD and TVD data must be at
least as deep as the bottomhole tubing depth; PROSPER will not calculate
beyond the last depth in the table.

Deviation survey data entry is required also for vertical wells - enter 0,0 for the
surface reference and an MD the same as the TVD of the intake node. The
deviation survey has to start with 0 measured depth and 0 TVD. Due to this
reason, the reference depth (where TVD = 0) has to be at or above the wellhead.

For a sub-sea well (with or without pipeline), if the reference depth is selected in
such a way that it is above the wellhead (at the mean sea level for instance), we
can actually assume an imaginary vertical path in the deviation survey table down
to the wellhead. We do not need to include the pipeline measured depth in the
deviation survey. The deviation survey describes the deviation of the downhole
equipment only.

Horizontal wells with deviation angles greater than 90 degrees from vertical can
be entered. PROSPER will issue a warning that the TVD of one node is less than
the previous one, but well profile plots and calculations will proceed as normal.

For Horizontal wells the deviation survey may be entered only up to the heel of the

well, as the well from the heel all the way up to the toe is a part of the inflow
description.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 140 PROSPER

6.1.1.1 Filter
When more than 18 points are available, the Filter allows a determined number of points
(up to 18) that best-fit the entered points (see figure below).

In the Raw Data table (figure above) enter the data from the survey.

It is possible to copy the table by selecting the first row (click on the number 1)

and Paste from the Clipboard

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 141

These are the function buttons:

Calculate Angle Calculates the angle of deviation from the vertical

Reset Deletes the entered data
Filter Calculates a number of points which fit the deviation table entered on
the left. Check the fitting by hitting on Plot. If this is not ok, change
some parameters (like for example the
angle step)
Transfer Transfers the calculated points to the main Deviation Survey screen

When selecting Filter, the program will fit up to 18 points in order to reproduce the well
trajectory previously imported:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 142 PROSPER

The Plot function allows to quality check the fitting. In the plot the well entered trajectory (in
red) is plotted along with the fitted points (in green):

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 143

6.1.2 Surface Equipment

The Surface Equipment screen is used to enter surface flowline, choke and pipe fitting data
as shown below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 144 PROSPER

Fittings have been added to the surface equipment section of PROSPER to account for the
various pressure losses associated with pipe fittings throughout a given system:

PROSPER defines surface equipment as the pipe work between the production manifold
and the upstream side of the wellhead choke. The production manifold is regarded by
PROSPER as presenting a constant back-pressure, regardless of flow rate. If systems
analysis is to be performed relative to the wellhead, (i.e. gathering system pressure losses
are neglected) then no surface equipment input is required.

The surface equipment model can be described using the following 2 elements:

Pipe
Choke

The manifold is set as the first equipment type automatically by PROSPER. Surface
equipment geometry can be entered either as pairs of X, Y co-ordinates relative to the
manifold or the Xmas Tree, Reverse X, Y (Y co-ordinates deeper than the reference depth
are negative) or TVD of the upstream end and the length of the pipe segment.

The difference in TVD between the ends of a pipe segment is used to calculate gravity head
losses. The internal diameter (ID), roughness and pipe length entered determine the friction
pressure loss. The flowing temperatures for each upstream node must also be entered
when calculation option Pressure only is selected.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to several identical
wells being connected to a production manifold via a common surface flow line. The fluid

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 145

velocity in the flowline is multiplied by the value entered increasing the frictional pressure
losses. For most applications it should be left at its default value of 1.

As an example, the pressure drop in a flowline connected to 3 identical wells

could be modelled using a pipeline rate multiplier of 3. 2 parallel flowlines having
identical dimensions can be modelled by entering the actual dimensions for one
pipe and a pipeline rate multiplier of 0.5. It is also possible to vary the rate
multiplier along the pipeline to simulate varying sections of dual pipelines for
example.

The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that have
been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be simultaneously
selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import data from a wide variety
of sources. Up to 200 pipe segments can be entered, enabling the user to model very long
pipelines.

PROSPER multi-phase choke pressure loss correlation accounts for both critical and
sub-critical flow. We would recommend the use of the ELF Choke correlation that it similar
to the Petroleum Experts method and is more robust in extreme conditions.

Ensure that the length of each pipe segment is equal to or greater than the

difference in TVD between its ends.

The downhole and surface equipment entries must describe a continuous system.
The TVD and temperature of the upstream end of the last pipeline segment

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 146 PROSPER

should be equal to the Xmas tree TVD and temperature. In X,Y co-ordinates, the
Y co-ordinate of the last pipe segment must be the same elevation as the
wellhead TVD. (i.e. same magnitude, but opposite sign)

To check that the surface equipment description is accurate, click Plot to display a plot of
the pipe elevation as follows:

6.1.3 Downhole Equipment

The Downhole Equipment screen enables the downhole tubing string data to be entered.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 147

The Downhole Equipment screen will change automatically depending on the options
selected in the Options menu screen. For example, if Annular Flow has been selected, the
tubing screen will require Casing I.D. and Tubing O.D. to be entered.

The tubing string can be modelled using the following element types:

Tubing
SSSV
Restriction
Casing

PROSPER automatically inserts the Xmas tree as the first downhole equipment item. To
describe the tubing string, work from the shallowest depth downwards, entering the bottom
depth of changes in tubing diameter, ID and roughness factor.

An SSSV is considered to have no length, and is modelled as a sharp-edged

orifice inserted between adjacent tubing string elements. A restriction is handled

identically to an SSSV. The pressure loss calculations in PROSPER account for
choking as sonic flow velocity is approached.

Casing is treated the same as tubing for pressure drop calculations. Downhole equipment
details should be entered down to the producing interval being analysed. The deepest depth
entries for the tubing, deviation survey and temperature should be consistent.

Below the uppermost producing perforation, the flow profile (as measured by a

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 148 PROSPER

production logging tool) depends on layer productivity etc. The uppermost

producing perforation is the deepest point in the well passing 100% of the
production. Below this point, the calculated frictional pressure gradient may be
over-estimated in high rate wells having small I.D. completions.

To select tubing string elements to build up the tubing string description, click on the list box
arrows to the right of the item fields and select the equipment from the drop-down list. The
editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that have
been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be simultaneously
selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import data from a wide variety
of sources. Up to 18 tubing string elements can be input. For complex completions, simplify
the data entry by entering only the major elements that dominate the overall tubing pressure
drop.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to intermittent
sections of dual completion. The fluid velocity in the tubing is multiplied by the value entered
- thereby increasing the frictional pressure losses. For standard single tubing completions it
should be left at its default value of 1.

6.1.4 Temperature Survey

This screen enables entry of the flowing temperature profile of the well. If no bottom hole
flowing pressure survey data is available, the static reservoir temperature at the mid-point of
perforations and the wellhead flowing temperature can be used. A minimum of two depth /
temperature points is required.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 149

The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that have
been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be simultaneously
selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import data from a wide variety
of sources.

PROSPER interpolates temperatures from the survey data for depths within the
table limits, and uses linear extrapolation elsewhere. To eliminate potential
errors, ensure that a temperature is entered for the deepest node depth. It is
recommended that the maximum temperature survey depth, deviation survey
depth and intake node depths are all consistent.

6.1.5 Summary
Before leaving the System Equipment screen, the accuracy of the equipment description
should be checked by making an equipment summary. Click Summary to display the
summary screen.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 150 PROSPER

Selecting the appropriate button from the Summary screen can draw a sketch of the
surface and downhole equipment. Select Draw Downhole to display a sketch similar to the
following:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 151

6.2 Predicting Pressure and Temperature

The Equipment data entry screens vary depending on the Temperature model selected in
the main program Options.

6.2.1 Rough Approximation

Equipment entry for the Rough Approximation temperature model varies little from the
Predicting Pressure Only option. Click on SystemEquipment to display the following input
screen:

To start data entry for a new application, click All Edit. PROSPER will then display all the
relevant input screens in sequence. If data has already been entered, clicking the S
ummary command button will display a schematic summary of the current equipment.

To go back and edit one particular equipment item, click on the button beside the
appropriate item. Data can be entered for the surface equipment and then include or
exclude it temporarily from any calculation by using the Disable Surface Equipment choice
box at the bottom of the screen.

6.2.1.1 Deviation Survey

Enter data as per Pressure Only case.

6.2.1.2 Surface Equipment

Surface Equipment is the same as for Predicting Pressure Only except for the requirement
to enter the temperature of the pipe surroundings and an overall heat transfer coefficient.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 152 PROSPER

The heat transfer coefficient should not be confused with the pipe thermal conductivity. The
overall heat transfer coefficient accounts for the heat flow through the production tubing,
annulus and insulation (if present) to the surroundings. Heat transfer by forced and free
convection, conduction and radiation must all be accounted for in the value of the overall
heat transfer coefficient. In PROSPER, the overall heat transfer coefficient is referenced to
the pipe inside diameter.

6.2.1.3 Downhole Equipment

The Downhole Equipment is the same as for Predicting Pressure Only. The casing between
the producing perforations and the tubing shoe is considered to be part of the Downhole
Equipment for the Rough Approximation temperature option. Therefore the casing details
should be entered in the Downhole Equipment. Please refer to Predicting Pressure Only
section for more details.

6.2.1.4 Geothermal Gradient

This is where the Rough Approximation temperature model differs most from the Pressure
Only case. PROSPER requires the formation temperature profile to be entered on this
screen:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 153

Enter static formation temperatures from e.g. extrapolation of temperatures

recorded on logging runs - NOT flowing well bore temperatures.

As for surface equipment, enter an overall heat transfer coefficient that describes the
resistance to heat flow by all mechanisms (convection, radiation and conduction) from the
well to its surroundings. The Enthalpy Balance temperature model is a convenient way to
determine average heat transfer coefficients. The heat transfer area is referenced to the
pipe inside diameter.

6.2.1.5 Average Heat Capacities

To edit Average Heat Capacities, click its check box then click Edit to display the
following dialogue:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 154 PROSPER

Enter values that correspond to average conditions in the well. Note that for oil, and
especially gas that Cp values are strong functions of both temperature and pressure.

The default values will often give reasonable results in moderate GOR oil
wells. However, actual Cp values for oil and gas vary widely. Do not rely
on the defaults - obtain good estimates of Cp, or use the Enthalpy
Balance method where accurate temperature prediction is required.

6.2.2 Enthalpy Balance

To commence data entry for a new application, click All / Edit. PROSPER will then
display all the input screens in sequence. If data has already been entered, clicking
the Summary command button will display a summary of the current equipment. To
go back and edit one particular equipment item, click the button on the left of the
appropriate item.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 155

6.2.2.1 Deviation Survey

Enter data as per Pressure Only case.

6.2.2.2 Surface Equipment

An example of the surface equipment screen is shown below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 156 PROSPER

To calculate heat losses, additional data such as outside diameter, material type and
insulation (if used) are required to be input. The surface equipment model can utilise
the following equipment types:

Line pipe
Coated pipeline
Flexible tubes
User selected
Choke

To allow for pipe bends, etc., enter an equivalent length/diameter. The choke
calculation handles both sub-critical and critical flow. The program will calculate the
temperature drop across the choke. Descriptive labels for each element can be
entered in the Label field if desired. Labels appear on reports and calculation
screens. Surface equipment geometry can be optionally entered as TVD of the
upstream end of the pipe segment and length or as X, Y (from the manifold or the
Xmas Tree) co-ordinate pairs. Refer to Section 6.1.2 above for more details.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to several
wells being connected to a production manifold via a common surface flow line. The
fluid velocity in the flowline is multiplied by the value entered - thereby increasing the
frictional pressure losses. For most applications it should be left at its default value
of 1. As an example, the pressure drop in a flowline connected to 3 identical wells
could be modelled using a pipeline rate multiplier of 3. 2 parallel flowlines having
identical dimensions can be modelled by entering the actual dimensions for one pipe

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 157

and a pipeline rate multiplier of 0.5. It is also possible to vary the rate multiplier along
the pipeline to simulate varying sections of dual pipelines for example.

The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that
have been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be
simultaneously selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import
data from a wide variety of sources. Up to 200 pipe segments can be entered,
enabling the user to model very long pipelines.
Pipe insulation (e.g. concrete, foam or bitumen) can be modelled. To define the pipe
insulation click the Enter button to display the following screen:

Select the required insulation type from the drop-down list, then enter the thickness.
Enter the insulation beginning with the innermost layer. PROSPER uses the thermal
properties in its database to calculate the thermal conductivity of the composite
insulation. Click OK to return to the surface equipment screen. Different insulations
can be entered for each section of the flowline as required. The calculated
composite thermal conductivity is referenced to the pipe inside diameter. Pipes can
be laid on the surface (burial depth = 0) or buried. The diagram below shows the

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 158 PROSPER

burial depth geometry.

The burial depth is the distance between the soil surface and the bottom of the pipe
(including insulation, if present). The pipe is partially buried if the burial depth < O.D.
of the insulated pipe.

Ensure that the flowline pipe geometry is consistent with the pipe burial
depth. If necessary, insert another node and change the burial depth for
e.g. the riser.

The soil conductivity around buried surface pipes is taken from the
Thermal Properties database for the shallowest rock type entered in the
Litho logy screen. In previous PROSPER releases, the soil conductivity
was fixed at 3.5 W/m/K.

6.2.2.3 Downhole Equipment

The downhole equipment section is used to describe the production tubing, SSSV
and restrictions. The following equipment items are available:

Mild steel tubing

Plastic coated tubing
Stainless steel (either 13% or 25% chromium)
SSSV
Restrictions

The thermal properties database for downhole equipment elements can be edited or
added to if required. Pressure and temperature changes across subsurface safety

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 159

valves and restrictions (nipples) are correctly modelled. The following is an example
of a downhole equipment data input screen:

For the Enthalpy Balance temperature model the casing dimensions and material
type are entered under Drilling and Completion, so the downhole equipment
description is required only for the tubing string.

To select tubing string elements to build up the tubing string description, click on the
list box arrows to the right of the item fields and make the appropriate selection from
the drop-down list. The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate
on data records that have been selected by clicking on their row number button(s).
All records can be simultaneously selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import
button to import data from a wide variety of sources. Up to 18 tubing string elements
can be input. For complex completions, simplify the data entry by entering only the
major elements that dominate the overall tubing pressure drop.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to
intermittent sections of dual completions. The fluid velocity in the tubing is multiplied
by the value entered - thereby increasing the frictional pressure losses. For standard
single tubing completions it should be left at its default value of 1.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 160 PROSPER

6.2.2.4 Temperature Data

The Temperature Data section is required for the calculations of heat loss for
surface flow lines and wellbore. Data must be entered according to the screen
shown below depending on whether prediction is being done offshore or on land.

in the Temperature Data screen enter the temperature gradient in the formation (just
like in the Geothermal Gradient section for Rough Approximation), and the
temperature profile in the sea, along with the sea velocity.
If the surface equipment is exposed to air, the data concerning to the air
temperature, humidity and velocity will be accounted for the temperature calculation

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 161

6.2.2.5 Drilling and Completion

This data is used to calculate the heat transfer coefficients down hole. If the
offshore option has been selected, the marine riser parameters must be entered in
this section. Entries must be from TOP to BOTTOM. Thus, the riser will be the first
entry.

The screen below shows an offshore well with a 30" OD riser run to a seabed depth
of 400 ft. The well also has a 7" OD liner run to 14000 ft with the liner top set at
11000 ft.

The completion fluid Liquid and Gas properties can have a significant effect on the
heat loss through the annulus. If pressure is maintained on the annulus, the mud
weight used should be modified to reflect the actual annulus pressure at the packer
depth. If the well is being gas lifted, the program assumes that the annulus is full of
gas down to the injection point.

The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that
have been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be
simultaneously selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import
data from a wide variety of sources.

Ensure the Tubing OD is less than the Casing ID.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited
 162 PROSPER

For complex completions fluids, select the appropriate Customised Options from
the main Drilling and Completions section. Completion fluid property data will be
entered via look-up table data. Figure 6-14 shows the data required when selecting
the Completion Fluid Gas Type | Customised option from the drilling and
completions section.

Five temperature dependent tables of properties can be entered. Please ensure that
the table will span the expected range of pressure- temperature conditions. The
program will not extrapolate outside the range of the input table. Use the Import
button to import data from a wide variety of sources.

6.2.2.6 Lithology
The program contains a database of thermal properties for various rock types
including Sandstone, Shale, Limestone, Dolomite, Halite and others. The thermal
properties database can be edited and added to as required. If detailed lithology
data is available it should be entered in the screen as shown below. If no data is
available, use shale from surface to total depth.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 163

The reservoir temperature and pressure should be entered for the production
reference depth. The formation temperature gradient is interpolated between the
reservoir and surface environment temperatures.

The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that
have been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be
simultaneously selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import
data from a wide variety of sources.

Thermal properties for buried pipelines are taken from the shallowest
formation type entered in the Lithology screen.

6.2.2.7 Databases

This optional feature is used to access the thermal properties databases for editing
or addition of user-defined materials. Select Databases and click Edit and the
following selection screen will be displayed:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 164 PROSPER

Enter appropriate values for the Conductivity of cement and casing.

Depending on the selection, PROSPER expects input of thermal conductivity,

emissivity, specific heat capacity, specific gravity or density. An example of the I
nsulation Types database screen is shown below:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 165

Check that the units are correct prior to entering the thermal properties.

Edited values remain in memory and become part of a particular well model file
when the file is saved. To permanently save edited values or new user-defined
entries for use in other projects click the Save button to keep them in the database.
The Reset button is used to return all entries to their default values.

6.2.3 Improved Approximation

Equipment entry for the Improved Approximation temperature model varies little from
the Rough Approximation option. Click on System Equipment to display the
following input screen:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 166 PROSPER

To start data entry for a new application, click All Edit. PROSPER will then display all
the relevant input screens in sequence. If data has already been entered, clicking
the Summary command button will display a summary of the current equipment. To
go back and edit one particular equipment item, click on the button beside the
appropriate item.

Data can be entered for the surface equipment and then include or exclude it
temporarily from any calculation by using the Disable Surface Equipment choice
box at the bottom of the Equipment Data screen.

6.2.3.1 Deviation Survey

Enter data as per Pressure Only case.

6.2.3.2 Surface Equipment

Surface Equipment is the same as for Predicting Pressure Only except for the
requirement to enter the overall heat transfer coefficient an the surrounding
temperature.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 167

The heat transfer coefficient can be specified for each pipe segment and should not
be confused with the pipe thermal conductivity.

The heat transfer coefficient accounts for the heat flow through the production
tubing, annulus and insulation (if present) to the surroundings. Heat transfer by
forced and free convection, conduction and radiation must all be accounted for in the
value of the overall heat transfer coefficient. In PROSPER, the overall heat transfer
coefficient is referenced to the pipe inside diameter.
6.2.3.3 Downhole Equipment
The Downhole Equipment is the same as for Predicting Pressure Only.

6.2.3.4 Geothermal Gradient

PROSPER requires the formation temperature profile together with the heat transfer
coefficient to be entered on this screen:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 168 PROSPER

Enter static formation temperatures from e.g. extrapolation of temperatures

recorded on logging runs - NOT flowing well bore temperatures.

As for surface equipment, enter an overall heat transfer coefficient that describes the
resistance to heat flow by all mechanisms (convection, radiation and conduction)
from the well to its surroundings. This value can vary throughout the formation. The
Enthalpy Balance temperature model is a convenient way to determine average heat
transfer coefficients. The heat transfer area is referenced to the pipe inside
diameter.

6.2.3.5 Sea Temperature Gradient

To edit Sea Temperature Gradient, click its check box then click Edit to display the
following dialogue:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Equipment Data Input 169

Enter the data to describe to temperature gradient in the sea. Up to 20 points may
be entered. Use the Import button to retrieve the data from a wide variety of sources

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

Chapter

7
 IPR Data Input 171

7 IPR Data Input

This section describes how PROSPER defines the reservoir inflow performance. The
following table lists the Inflow Performance options:

IPR Oil & Dry & Retrograde

Method Water Wet Gas Condensate
Back Pressure
C and n
Composite
Darcy
Dual Porosity
External Entry
Fetkovich
Forchheimer
Forchheimer with Pseudo - Pressure
NEW!!!
Multirate Forchheimer with Pseudo -
Pressure NEW!!!
Horizontal well - No Flow Boundaries
Horizontal well - Constant Pressure
upper boundary
Horizontal well - dP friction
Horizontal well - transverse vertical
fractures
Hydraulically fractured
Jones
Multi-lateral
Multi-layer
Multi-layer - dP Loss
Multi-rate C and n
Multi-rate Fetkovich
Multi-rate Jones
Modified Isochronal IPR
Petroleum Experts

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 172 PROSPER

P.I. Entry
SkinAide
Thermally Induced Fracture
(injection only)
Transient
Vogel

7.1 IPR Single Well Data

The data for inflow performance models is entered using a single master screen. All the
sub-screens relevant to a set of model choices are accessible through clicking on buttons on
the main screen and on a tabbed interface in a data input screen. This means that data for
different models are entered concurrently and can be compared before selecting the
Calculate option. The generic features of the single well data entry screen are used in the
multilateral interface for data entry to those network items with sufficiently large data
structures (namely tubing, completion and reservoir).

Click System Inflow Performance in the main menu and the main data entry screen will
appear.

7.1.1 The Main Data Entry Screen

The screen consists of three parts.

1. Section Buttons. At the top right of the dialog screen are two buttons, labelled Select
Model and Input Data. These allow switching between screens that control model
selection and detailed data input. The former also contains data pertaining to all models
(such as reservoir pressure and temperature), and the latter manages the data input
specific to the chosen model. The selection buttons have the same function in the
multilateral data entry screens.

2. Action Buttons. To the left of the section buttons is a set of buttons that perform various
actions such as Calculate. Only the left-most group appears in the multilateral data entry
screens.

3. Model Selection Screen. The child screen is the area below the action and section
buttons and contains either the model selection or the data input screens. The same
occurs in the multilateral interface, although the actual model selection and data input
screens are different.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 173

7.1.2 Section Buttons

As well as switching between the model selection and data input screens the section buttons
also indicate the validation status of the screens. The selection of one screen or the other is
shown by the indentation of the button for that screen and the validity of the data is flagged
by the colour. Green means that all the required data are entered and within the numerical
range for the units chosen; where appropriate, extra consistency checks have also been
carried out. Red implies that either there is insufficient data entered or it is out of
range/inconsistent. In addition, if no models at all are selected the Select Model and Input
Data buttons are marked invalid. Also, if not enough models are selected the Select Model
button is marked invalid (e.g. a reservoir but no skin model).

7.1.3 Action Buttons

Done
This button exits the screen after saving and validating all the data pertaining to the chosen
models. If the data are not valid an option of remaining in the IPR edit screen and reviewing
the validation errors that are listed in a validation error dialog is provided. This also occurs
after the validation in the Calculate, Transfer Data and Save Results button commands. If
the IPR section is exited with invalid data left in the input then all calculation options using
IPR data and models are disabled.

Cancel

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 174 PROSPER

This exits the screen and restores the data to its state at the start of the main edit session.

Validate
Checks the data on the current child screen for validity. If the data are not valid, the
validation dialog will appear with diagnostic messages.

Reset
This replaces the data of the current child screen with the data that was current when the
screen was entered.

Help
This displays information relevant to the current child screen.

Calculate
Saves and validates all the data pertaining to the chosen models (e.g. Darcy reservoir model
and Enter Skin By Hand) then runs the correct calculation routine if the data are valid. On
successful completion of the calculation the results are automatically plotted.

Plot
Will produce a plot screen appropriate to the current reservoir model (for example, a Darcy
plot) and plot the data from the last Calculate command.

Report
Enters the PROSPER Reporting System. The report produced will depend on the current
model choices. A fuller description of the reporting is found in Chapter 12.

Export
Can export current data (input and results) to the printer, a file, the clipboard or the screen.
It thus forms another method of reporting and is described more fully in Chapter 13.

Test Data NEW!!!

Allows to enter the test data (rate vs Bottom Hole Pressure) that will be then
displayed in the IPR plot

Sensitivity NEW!!!
Allows to perform sensitivities on the various parameters affecting the IPR

Transfer Data
Saves and validates all the current data before opening a standard File Save As dialog that
provides an opportunity to save the data to file in MBAL input format (.MIP).

If PROSPER has been opened from a session in GAP then the data are posted
to GAP instead. The transfer button does not prompt for creation of a .MIP file.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 175

Save Results
This option is only enabled when PROSPER is run from GAP. On a successful validation
options to either over-write the current file or to save the PROSPER file using File Save As
options are provided.

GAP
This option is only enabled when PROSPER is run from GAP. It shuts down the IPR screen
and minimises PROSPER, thus bringing GAP to the forefront.

Note that the Save and Validate sequence carried out by several of the action
button commands does not actually save to file but transfers data from the
context of the IPR data screen to the PROSPER data structure in memory.
Hence, files should regularly be saved to avoid losing work due to power failures
or crashes.

7.1.4 Model Selection Screen

An example of the model selection screen for the Oil and Water fluid choice can be seen in
the screen dump of the main data screen (Figure 7.1).

This part of the IPR input screen controls the choice of almost all the tabbed dialogs that will
be seen in the subsequent data input screen.
There are four major selections done in this screen. These are:

Selection of Reservoir Inflow Model

o For each fluid various single well IPR models available are listed and the User
makes a selection.

Selection of mechanical/geometrical skin

o The User has the option of entering the skin by hand or using one of the
analytical models to model the completion skin.

Selection of deviation / partial penetration skin

o There are two skin models and these become available if a analytical skin model
of mechanical / geometric skin calculation has been used.

Reservoir input
o The User also specifies the pressure, temperature, producing GOR and water cut
at this screen.

Relative permeability.
o This option can be set to Yes or No in case of oils. If set to Yes, the User has the
option of defining a set of relative permeability curves, which will be used to
change productivity of the system with changing water cut.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 176 PROSPER

The gravel pack selection and the type of completion (cased or open hole) are
chosen from the main Options screen (in the PROSPER main menu) but some
reservoir models have internal gravel pack data entries instead.

In case gas coning option has been selected in main options, for oils the coning
button is displayed to allow the activation of a dialog screen in which parameters
for the calculation of rate-dependent GOR's can be entered

If the fluid is a gas or a condensate the format of the screen is very similar; only the
reservoir and other model input selections vary for example, in gas systems, we have CGR
and WGR instead of GOR and WC.

The choice of reservoir models governs which subsidiary models (principally skin) are
enabled. Thus, horizontal well models do not require a deviation skin data entry and some
of the more complex reservoir models (e.g. multi-layer with dP friction loss) contain their own
skin and gravel pack models.

7.1.5 Data Input Screen

The data input screen contains a set of data entry tabbed dialogs that become available
depending on the selected IPR model.

Only one dialog is displayed at any one time, corresponding to the tab selected as
shown in the figure below

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 177

The tabs are labelled as follows:

Reservoir Model
Mech/Geom Skin
Dev/PP Skin
Gravel Pack
Relative Perm
Viscosity

The tabs are coloured according to the validity of the data on the corresponding
dialogs.

If the tab is green, then the data are valid for the current system set-up.

If it is red, then the data are invalid or empty.

If the tab is grey, then this tab is not applicable to the current reservoir
model (or model selection) and so is inaccessible.

The various screens, accessible by the bottom tabs comprise the dialog screens,
where the input parameters for the selection are entered. Laid in the area below
the Section and Action buttons. In the case of the model selection screen it is
mainly occupied with ways of choosing models, namely three list boxes, a

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 178 PROSPER

drop-down list box and a push button.

For example Figure 7.2 shows a Darcy reservoir model dialog encapsulated in the data input
screen contained in the main entry screen.
The Reservoir Model tab is marked invalid (due to the unlikely reservoir thickness of
1 feet).

The Dev/PP Skin tab and relative permeability tabs are marked disabled. In this
case it is because the Enter Skin By Hand option is selected which is assumed to
contain the deviation and partial penetration information. In the latter case relative
permeability is simply not selected (see Figure 7.1, showing the model selection
screen).

Notes on Data Validation:

On each of the IPR Input screens there is a validate button. Pressing this button
invokes a checking routine which flags for the any invalid entries.

Notes on Data Entry in IPR section

In all the IPR input screens, for various options, the data may be required to be entered in
one of the following ways:

Entering a value against a blank field

Pressing a push button, which takes us further into another screen, where actual
data required is entered as indicated against Dietz calculator on Figure 7-2.
Using a drop-down list.

Some models require data entered for multiple layers (e.g. multi-layer and
multi-layer with dP friction loss) and/or multiple completion zones (e.g. horizontal
well with dP friction loss and Wong-Clifford deviation/partial penetration skin
model).
In dialogs with grid entry it is also possible to select, copy, cut and paste blocks of
the table, using mouse drag operations and the buttons provided on the screen.
As the data in a table are typically interdependent some consistency validation
checks are carried out in addition to the range validation.

7.2 IPR Models for Oil Wells

The IPR model chosen depends upon the available data and the type of inflow sensitivities
to be performed. Some of the main highlights are

There are twenty inflow options, including the multi-lateral method described in
Section 7.8, are available.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 179

The average reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature must be entered for all
inflow performance models, except for multi-rate models.

From the Multi-rate models the average reservoir pressure can be back
calculated.

If test data is available it can be entered and plotted against the calculated inflow.

Well skin can be either directly entered or calculated using the Locke, Macleod or
Karakas and Tariq methods for a mechanical/geometrical skin, and the
Cinco/Martin-Bronz or Wong-Clifford methods for a deviation/partial penetration
skin.

Relative permeability curves are optionally used together with fluid viscosities
(from PVT) to calculate the total fluid mobility for a given water cut. The
calculated IPR can be matched to measured data and used to calculate IPR
pressures for any rate and water cut. Relative permeability can be applied to all
oil IPR models in PROSPER.

Frictional pressure losses between multiple producing zones are accounted for in
the Horizontal Well - friction dP and Multi layer - friction dP. A network algorithm
determines the production from each zone while accounting for flowing pressure
losses to find the total well production.

These models can be combined with gravel pack and relative permeability
models if the option is enabled (the former in the Options screen from the
PROSPER main menu and the latter from the IPR main data entry screen).

Once a specific model is chosen and data entered for it, after which an IPR can be
calculated using the Calculate button. The following sections list various inflow models that
are available for oil wells.

7.2.1 P.I. Entry

A straight-line inflow model is used above the bubble point based on the equation shown below. The
Vogel empirical solution is used below the bubble point, the test point being the rate calculated using
the following equation at bottom hole pressure equal to bubble point. The User input productivity index
(PI) is used to calculate the IPR. The IPR rates are always Liquid Rates. Hence the PI refers to Liquid
Rate.

Q = J ( Pr - Pb )

Where J is the Productivity Index, expressed as STB/(day psi).

(P.I. Entry replaces the Straight-line IPR in older releases of PROSPER.)

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 180 PROSPER

7.2.2 Vogel
The program uses the straight-line inflow relationship above the bubble point and the Vogel
empirical solution below the bubble point. A single flowing bottom hole pressure and surface
test rate is used to calculate the IPR, below the bubble point. From this IPR the rate and
bubble point pressure are used to evaluate the PI for the straight-line part of the inflow
above the bubble point.

When calculating IPR sensitivities for reservoir pressure, PROSPER retains the correct well
productivity. Otherwise, changing the reservoir pressure changes the Vogel well
productivity.

2
Q Pwf Pwf
= 1 - 0.2 - 0.8
Qmax Pr Pr

7.2.3 Composite
This is an extension of the Vogel inflow solution (Petrobras method) that accounts for water
cut.

Vogel essentially decreases the inflow below bubble point because of gas formation.
However, if the water cut is higher the inflow potential will increase and approach a
straight-line IPR due to single-phase flow. The composite model captures this by using the
following formulation.

A test flow rate, flowing bottomhole pressure and water cut are required to be entered.

7.2.4 Darcy
The program uses the Darcy inflow equation above the bubble point and the Vogel solution
below the bubble point. Required input is:

Reservoir permeability (total permeability at the prevailing water cut and GOR)
Reservoir thickness (thickness of producing reservoir rock, i.e. vertical thickness of net
pay interval)
Drainage area
Well bore radius
Dietz shape factor (to account for the shape of the drainage area)

7.2.5 Fetkovich
The Fetkovich equation for oil is a modified form of the Darcy equation, which allows for two
phase flow below the bubble point. The Fetkovich equation can be expressed as:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 181

2 2
Q = J ( Pr - Pb ) + J ' ( Pr - Pwf )

Enter the same inputs as for the Darcy example plus the relative permeability for oil. Skin
can be entered either by hand or calculated using Locke's, Macleod's or the Karakas and
Tariq method.

7.2.6 Multi-rate Fetkovich

This method uses a non-linear regression to fit the Fetkovich model for up to 10 test points.
The model is expressed as:

Q = C (( Pr2 - Pwf2 ) / 1000) n

The fit values of C and n are posted on the IPR plot. If the reservoir pressure is not
available, the program will calculate it. For producing wells, enter a reservoir pressure lower
than the measured flowing bottomhole pressures. The program will dismiss the reservoir
pressure that has been entered and calculate it. For injection wells, input a reservoir
pressure higher than the test pressures entered. The program will then calculate the
reservoir pressure.

7.2.7 Jones
The Jones equation for oil is a modified form of the Darcy equation, which allows for both
Darcy and non-Darcy pressure drops. The Jones equation can be expressed in the form:

( Pr - Pwf ) = aQ 2 + bQ

Where "a" and "b" are calculated from reservoir properties or can be determined from a
multi-rate test. The same data as for the Darcy model plus the perforated interval is
required. Skin can be directly entered or calculated using the available methods.

7.2.8 Multi-rate Jones

This method uses a non-linear regression to fit for up to 10 test points for the Jones model.

i.e.
( Pr - Pwf ) = aQ 2 + bQ

If reservoir pressure is to be calculated see Multi-rate Fetkovich above.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 182 PROSPER

7.2.9 Transient
This IPR method takes into account the change of deliverability with time. This method can
be particularly important for tight reservoirs. Both the Darcy and Jones equations assume
that the well has reached pseudo-steady state flow conditions. In tight reservoirs, the
transient equation can be used to determine the inflow performance as a function of flowing
time. Once the flowing time is long enough for pseudo-steady state flow to develop within
the drainage radius, the Darcy inflow model is then used. Enter the same data as the Darcy
example plus:

Porosity (Enter the reservoir porosity)

Time (Time in days, must be greater than 0.5 days)

The transient IPR equation is:

Time is the flowing time since the last reservoir pressure equalisation up to the time of the
analysis. If the flowing time exceeds , the deliverability is evaluated using , which is
equivalent to using the pseudo-steady state Darcy model.

7.2.10 Hydraulically Fractured Well

The hydraulically fractured well inflow model can be used to run sensitivities on
hydraulic fracture designs. The model is transient and is particularly useful in
determining the transient deliverability of a well after stimulation.

Gravel packs can be combined with the hydraulically fractured well IPR to model
Frac-Packed wells

Required data input is:

Reservoir permeability (Total permeability)

Formation thickness (Thickness of producing reservoir rock)
Drainage area
Well bore radius
Dietz shape factor (Depends on the shape of the drainage area)
Time (Inflow is transient in early time)
Fracture height
Fracture half length
Dimensionless fracture conductivity

Skin: The skin value that the user enters on the "Mech/Geom Skin" screen in
combination with the hydraulically fractured IPR model is the fracture face skin.
This user-entered skin represents possible damage in the fracture and therefore

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 183

should not be negative.

7.2.11 Horizontal Well - No Flow Boundaries

This steady-state inflow model is based on the work of Kuchuk and Goode. It assumes that
the horizontal well is draining a closed rectangular drainage volume that is bounded by
sealing surfaces. The well can be placed anywhere within the drainage region. The
pressure drop along the well bore itself is not taken into account. This model may not be
suitable for long horizontal sections drilled in high productivity reservoirs. Horizontal well -
friction dP IPR should be used in such cases. Enter:

The definitions of symbols for various parameters to PROSPER horizontal well

model are as per this manual and not necessarily on basis of the reference paper.

Reservoir permeability (Total permeability at prevailing water cut)

Reservoir thickness (Thickness of producing reservoir rock h)
Well bore radius
Horizontal anisotropy (Ratio of Ky/Kx where Kx is permeability in
the direction of the horizontal well and Ky is the permeability perpendicular to the
horizontal well)
Vertical anisotropy (Ratio of Kz/Ky where Kz is the vertical
permeability)
Length of well (Horizontal section L)
Length of drainage area (Reservoir dimension parallel to well Lx)
Width of drainage area (Reservoir dimension perpendicular to
well Ly)
Distance from length edge to centre of well (Xw)
Distance from width edge to centre of well (Yw)
Distance from bottom of reservoir to centre of well (Zw)

A sketch outlining the main geometric parameters is shown below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 184 PROSPER

7.2.12 Horizontal Well - Constant Pressure Upper Boundary

The reservoir geometry is the same as for the No Flow Boundaries case, except for a
constant pressure upper boundary. The pressure drop along the well bore itself is not taken
into account. This model requires the same input data as the Horizontal Well - Bounded
Reservoir model above. The plots below compares PROSPER calculated IPR values with
those obtained by Kuchuk and Goode for a well in the centre of a 4000 by 4000 square
reservoir.

PROSPER Horizontal Well IPR

vs Fine Grid Simulation
35

Anisotropy

30 h = 50'
0.01 zw = 25'
rw = 0.25'
kh = 50 md
25 0.1 vis = 1 cp

1.0
P.I. (BOPD/psi)

20
Simulator - Lines
PROSPER - Symbols

15

4000'
10
4000'

0
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5
L1/2/Lx

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 185

7.2.13 Multi-Layer Inflow

The multi-layer inflow model allows up to 50 discrete reservoir layers to be entered as shown
in the following example input screen:

Each layer can have different reservoir pressures, inflow models and fluid properties. The
oil gravity, GOR and water cut may be entered for each layer. The produced fluid properties
in the well bore are determined from the summation of the individual layer contributions.
The summation accounts for cross flow between layers having different pressures. Each
layer can be gravel packed if desired. Both Injectors and Producers can be modelled. For
cases where the zones are separated by significant depth or friction pressure losses are
significant, the Multi-layer - dP Loss network IPR model should be used.

If PVT matching has been used in the PVT section, it is assumed that it was
performed on the commingled layer fluids. The fit parameters generated will be
applied to all PVT calculations for all layers in determining the combined inflow
performance.

To use the Multi-Layer IPR, enter the reservoir temperature then click Input Data to enter the
tab-controlled screen, and then click on the Reservoir Model tab button. For each layer,
select the inflow model from: Darcy, Multi-rate Jones, or PI Entry methods then enter the
layer PVT properties, average pressures, thickness and skins. For each layer, click the
Layer Data button and enter the information required by the inflow model.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 186 PROSPER

To facilitate rapid comparison of flow rates using different completion options,

select a Null IPR type for a layer i.e., from the Layer Model drop-down dialogue
box select the blank (no text) option. This effectively turns the layer off. To
return it to production, re-select the original IPR type, and the layer parameters
etc. will be re-instated when the IPR is re-calculated.

The Multi-Layer IPR solves the combined

contribution from each producing layer at
the intake node. This effectively places
each layer at the same depth. The
reservoir pressure entered for each layer
should therefore be referenced to the intake
node depth.

7.2.14 External Entry

This option allows an externally generated IPR data set to be imported or directly entered.
Up to five tables can be entered to allow sensitivities to be calculated on any arbitrary set of
variables. For example, IPRs for a range of reservoir pressures calculated by a simulator
could be input using this option.

An example of an external entry IPR input screen is shown below:

External IPR tables can also be imported from ASCII files. The file format is given in
Appendix E of the PROSPER User Guide.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 187

7.2.15 Horizontal well - dP Friction Loss in Wellbore

To adequately model horizontal well inflow in high permeability reservoirs, it is necessary to
account for pressure loss along the horizontal section. PROSPER divides the horizontal
section into 20 sections and a network algorithm solves for zone production and well bore
pressure. Pressure loss between zones is accounted for. The Horizontal well - dP Friction
input screen is shown below:

The reservoir parameters entered in the upper section of the screen determine the overall
well productivity using the selected model. The zone parameters are used by the network
algorithm to re-scale the overall productivity on a zone-by-zone basis. A description of the
input parameters follows:

Reservoir Parameters
Horizontal Well Model (Model used for overall well productivity)
Reservoir permeability (Total permeability at prevailing water cut)
Reservoir thickness (Thickness of producing reservoir rock h)
Well bore radius (Radius of open hole rw)
Horizontal anisotropy (Ratio of Ky/Kx where Kx is permeability in the direction of the
horizontal well and Ky is the permeability perpendicular to the horizontal well)
Vertical anisotropy (Ratio of Kz/Ky where Kz is the vertical permeability)
Length of well (Horizontal section L)
Length of drainage area (Reservoir dimension parallel to well Lx)
Width of drainage area (Reservoir dimension perpendicular to well Ly)
Distance from length edge to centre of well (Xw)
Distance from width edge to centre of well (Yw)
Distance from bottom of reservoir to centre of well (Zw)

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 188 PROSPER

The horizontal well models available are:

Kuckuk and Goode (bounded and constant pressure boundary)
Babu & Odeh
Goode / Wilkinson partial completion (bounded and constant pressure boundary)
The reservoir parameters are entered as for the original infinite conductivity (no pressure
loss) horizontal well model.

Geometric definitions vary between published horizontal well inflow models.

Ensure that geometric parameters entered in PROSPER are consistent with the
above definitions. Refer to the Horizontal Well IPR sketch for details.

Zone Parameters
Data for up to 20 zones can be entered. The required inputs are as follows:

Zone Type (Blank, Perforated or Open Hole)

Skin method (Enter by Hand, or Karakas & Tariq for perforated zones)
Gravel Pack (Yes or No)
Zone Length (Length of zone along the well)
Zone Permeability (Average permeability at the prevailing water cut)
Flowing Radius (Internal radius of the completion tubing)
Zone Roughness (Roughness for zone friction calculation)

These parameters describe the local permeability and the flow path along the well bore.
Click the Zone Data button to enter details such as skin and perforation parameters. If the
Skin Method is Enter by Hand, the skin and open hole radius are required. If Karakas &
Tariq is selected, then enter the perforation details as in Section 7.4.1 and PROSPER will
estimate the zone skin. If the zone is to be gravel packed, this data is entered under Zone
Data.

To allow comparison of the IPR with and without friction losses, setting the zone
roughness to zero turns off the friction pressure drop calculation entirely rather
than calculating friction for a smooth pipe

Coning Calculations in Horizontal wells

The Ben Dikken and Chaperon correlations prediction of critical coning rates for gas, water
or gas and water have been implemented. From the Horizontal well - dP Friction data entry
screen click Coning to display the Coning Calculations screen:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 189

Enter a production rate and porosity then select the required coning calculation method.
Click Calculate to find the critical rate and time to breakthrough for the rate entered. The
pressure along the well bore for the specified rate is calculated and displayed by clicking P
lot.

The production contribution from each zone can be displayed as:

Rate per Unit Length

Percentage production
Cumulative percentage production
An example of a rate per unit length plot is shown below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 190 PROSPER

The Horizontal Well - friction dP IPR models the pressure at the heel of the well
as a function of pressure. The intake node is therefore the heel of the well. The
heel should be the last node entered in System Equipment and Deviation Survey
tables - it is not necessary to enter details of the horizontal producing section
except in the IPR.

7.2.16 Multi-Layer - dP Loss in Wellbore

The Multi-Layer dP Loss in Wellbore model can be used to model the production from multi-
layered reservoir systems where pressure losses in the wellbore are significant.
PROSPER iterates until the production from each zone and the well pressures converge at
the solution rate.
The effect of pressure drop between zones and cross flow is accounted for. An example of
a Multi-Layer - dP Loss input screen is shown below:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 191

This screen allows for the entry of up to 50 layers. To enter PVT, IPR data (permeability, test
rates etc. depending on the IPR model selected) and layer skin, click the appropriate button
to display the input screen. The depth entered for TOP is the depth for which the IPR is to
be evaluated. This is normally the same as the deepest depth entered in System
Equipment, but it can be set to surface or other value.

The input data required are:

Layer Type (Either Blank, Perforated or Open Hole)

Measured Depth (Measured depth of the bottom of layer n)
True Vertical Depth (TVD of the bottom of layer n)
Layer Pressure (Pressure at the bottom of layer n)
Layer Flowing Radius (Well radius for calculating inter layer pressure drops)
The layer flowing radius is the radius of the pipe connecting
the layers i.e., 0.5 x tubing I.D. The wellbore radius (rw) is the radius of the drill bit.
Layer IPR Model (Select from Darcy, Multi-rate Jones, P.I. Entry)
Layer Skin Model (Enter by Hand or Karakas & Tariq)
Layer Gravel Pack (Yes or No)
Layer PVT Data (GOR, Oil and Gas Gravity plus Water Cut)
Layer Parameters (Relevant parameters for the selected IPR model)
Layer Skin (Relevant parameters for the selected IPR model)

The IPR at surface can be calculated by entering the surface elevation for TOP depth and a
blank zone from surface to the shallowest producing zone. Use blank zones with
appropriate reduced I.D. to simulate the effect of sliding sleeves and flow controls in a
multi-zone completion. Click Calculate and the IPR for each layer and the summation will be
calculated and displayed on a plot as follows:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 192 PROSPER

To list the layer production in detail, click Results and scroll through the layer results one by
one. An example results screen is shown below:

Scroll from the selection menu to view the results for each of the layers.
Gravel pack and well skin etc. can be seen by scrolling to the right of the results table.
Negative layer production rates indicate cross-flow into the layer.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 193

If a zero roughness is entered, then inter-layer pressure drops are not computed.
The layer pressures are then equivalent to a potential referred to the depth of the
TOP layer. The calculations are then equivalent to the simpler Multi-Layer IPR
without dP model.

The multilayer option is now available for dry gas and gas condensate model

7.2.17 SkinAide
The Elf inflow and skin calculation method is incorporated in PROSPER. API perforation
characteristics can be used to estimate perforation damage given casing and formation
properties. A detailed description of SkinAide is given in Section 7.7.

7.2.18 Dual Porosity

This model is useful for naturally fractured reservoirs where the matrix (formation) porosity is
greater than the fracture porosity and the matrix permeability is much smaller than the
fracture permeability, but not negligible. It requires the entry of the following parameters:
fracture permeability, reservoir thickness, drainage area, well-bore radius, porosity, time,
storativity ratio and interporosity coefficient. The latter two parameters are defined as
follows:

1. Storativity ratio, w = ff cf / ( ff cf + fm cm)

where ff is the fracture porosity, cf is the fracture compressibility, fm is the matrix porosity
and cm is the matrix compressibility.

2. Interporosity, l = a km rew^2 /kf

where a is a shape factor (see Warren, J.E. and Root, P.J.: "The Behaviour of Naturally
Fractured Reservoirs.", SPE 426, SPEJ (Sept. 1963), 245-255.), km is matrix permeability,
rew^2 is effective well radius squared and kf is fracture permeability.

7.2.19 Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fractures

The horizontal well with transverse vertical fractures is based on a model proposed by T.M.
Herge and Leif Larsen in the SPE paper 28845. The model is based on a relationship
between the effective wellbore radius, fracture conductivity, fracture size, wellbore radius
and number of fractures; the correlation also calculates the distance between fractures.

Once the effective wellbore radius is determined the model calculates the well productivity
the same way the horizontal well with no-flow-boundaries is calculated.
This is for use with wells that are stimulated with one or more transverse vertical fractures.
It is assumed that the fractures are circular, the well goes through their centre and they are

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 194 PROSPER

evenly spaced. If there is one fracture it is in the middle of the well. The data to be entered
are the same as those for a horizontal well, along with the fracture half-length and its
dimensionless conductivity.
The following points describe the method of performing the calculations.

The fracture half length, fracture conductivity, and number of fractures are used to
calculate an equivalent wellbore radius. This calculation is based on the technique
developed by Hegre and Larsen (SPE 28845)

The effective wellbore radius is then used in the Horizontal Well No Flow Boundary
model to compute the IPR of the well.

For the Horizontal Well - Transverse Vertical Fracture model, in some cases where the
equivalent wellbore radius approaches or exceeds the input reservoir thickness, the well is
effectively located on the edge or outside the defined drainage area leading to reduction in
AOF with increasing vertical anisotropy.

7.2.20 Thermally Induced Fracture Model

7.2.20.1Overview

This IPR model is enabled when Well Type Injector is set in the main program Options.
The algorithm follows the framework outlined in: SPE 30777, Thermally Induced Fractures:
A Field-Proven Analytical Model. SPE Reservoir Evaluation & Engineering, February 1998.
J-L. Detienne, Max Creusot, Nicolas Kessler, Bernard Sahuquet and J-L. Bergerot.
Information was also assembled from SPE 7964 (radial reservoir temperature profile) and
SPE 11332 (coefficient for thermo-elastic stress equation). Note that the temperature profile
derivation uses the same basis as the work of de Lauwerier referred to in SPE 30777.

SPE 7964: Analytical Definition of the Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient, A. B. Zolotukhin.
SPE 11332: The Effect of Thermo-elastic Stresses on Injection Well Fracturing, T.K. Perkins
and J.A. Gonzalez.

This model is concerned with the thermo-mechanical effects induced by injecting cold water
into a hot reservoir. The method first tests whether a calculated Pwf rises above the reservoir
stress around the well bore. If this occurs then a fracture is assumed to propagate and the
Pwf at the fracture tip is equated to the reservoir stress (i.e. equilibrium) by iterating on the
fracture length. The fractures effect is incorporated in a skin term, and two stress effects
are considered; a thermo-elastic one (varies with injection temperature) and a poro-elastic
one (varies with Pwf). The stress at the wellbore is calculated by adding these effects to the
initial reservoir stress. The Pwf is calculated using varying fluid and geometric properties
(inner and outer radii) and a Darcy-like model in three circular zones. The first (inner) is
water that is still cool, the second is water that has warmed up, and the third (outer) is the
original reservoir.

The IPR calculated by this model consists, therefore, of two different zones with a
break-point where the fracturing occurs. See the following figure.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 195

The model is not valid for uncontrolled hydraulic fracturing where the fracture length may be
several hundred feet. The fracture should not extend beyond the so-called cooled injection
zone, the extent of which is calculated using the temperature profile referred to above.

7.2.20.2Data Entry

The Thermally Induced Fracture model reservoir data screen is split into two tabbed
screens, one handling 'Injecitivity Index' parameters, and one handling 'Thermo-mechanical'
parameters. Also, it is required to enter the injected fluid temperature in the model selection
screen.

PVT parameter
Injected Fluid Temperature

Injectivity Index Parameters

Reservoir permeability (Total permeability)
Formation thickness (Thickness of producing formations)
Drainage area
DIETZ shape factor (Depends on the shape of the drainage area).
Wellbore radius
Porosity (Enter the reservoir porosity)
Time (Time in days, must be greater than 0.5 days)
Mean Historical Injection Rate

Thermo-mechanical Parameters
Initial Reservoir Stress
Sweep Efficiency
Injected Fluid Specific Heat Capacity

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 196 PROSPER

Overall Reservoir Conductivity

Overall Reservoir Specific Heat Capacity
Overall Reservoir Density
Top and Bottom Surroundings Conductivity
Top and Bottom Surroundings Specific Heat Capacity
Top and Bottom Surroundings Density
Reservoir Thermal Expansion (thermo-elastic correlating coefficient, relates
temperature perturbation to stress perturbation)
Biot's Constant (poro-elastic correlating coefficient, relates pressure perturbation to
stress perturbation)
Poisson's Ratio
Reservoir Young's Modulus

7.2.21 Using Relative Permeabilities in PROSPER

For oil wells, the effects of changing relative permeability on the IPR can be taken into
account. From the model selection screen, select a suitable IPR method then enter the
reservoir temperature and pressure. If relative permeability effects are not to be considered
then select No. To use relative permeability, select Yes.

If use relative permeability is selected, the PI will be corrected by multiplying the ratio of the
liquid mobilities. The liquid mobility is dependent on the water cut. Given the relative
permeability curves, they can be used together with fluid viscosity (PVT) to calculate the
total fluid mobility at different water cut.

The test water cut and the test reservoir pressure are used to determine the phase
saturations and viscosity at the original PI. With the use of relative permeability curves, the
liquid mobility at the test (reference point) can be calculated from:

The water saturation can always be estimated based on the relative permeability curve and
the water cut entered. At a particular reservoir pressure and water cut, the mobility (M) can
be calculated.

The corrected productivity index will be:

This value of corrected PI will be used to generate the IPR.

The possible reduction in liquid mobility due to any increase in the gas saturation is not
accounted for in this option. Hence, If use relative permeability is selected, there is a further
option to consider Vogel correction for GOR using the Standing Method (Reference: K. E.
Brown & H. Dale Beggs The technology of artificial lift methods Volume 1). The Vogel
correction takes into account the effect of increasing gas saturation on the well PI. It
requires the entry of a test GOR value. The GOR entered is taken as the total produced
GOR. Based on the PVT, then this used to calculate a free gas saturation Sg.

The Sw is calculated on basis of test water cut and test reservoir pressure. So is calculated
from

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 197

Once the phase saturation and viscosities are known the PI is estimated from total liquid
mobility ratios as indicated above.

When relative permeability is set to No the oil and water mobility values are calculated on
basis of the assumption that the free gas down hole is zero. The oil saturation is calculated
as:

Based on these phase saturations, the PI correction is made.

After selecting the relative permeability option, we then go to the Relative Permeability
tabbed dialog in the data input screen. The child screen is shown in the following figure.

For Inflow Models like Darcy with a relative permeability correction, enter a water
cut during test equal to 0, if the permeability entered in the reservoir input data is
true single phase permeability of the rock.

Enter the residual saturation, endpoint relative permeability and Corey exponent for both oil
and water. A Corey exponent of 1.0 defines straight-line relative permeability curves.
Values greater than 1 give a concave upwards curve i.e. delayed water breakthrough.
Corey exponents less than 1 define a concave downwards relative permeability curve i.e.
early water breakthrough.

Matching measured and calculated IPR pressures establishes the well productivity for the
prevailing water cut. Click on Plot to bring up the following plot in the standard plot window.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 198 PROSPER

To enter lab relative permeability, click Test Data to display the following screen:

Enter the test data and click OK to display the plot again. If necessary, adjust the values of

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 199

Corey exponents for oil and water until PROSPER's calculated relative permeability curves
fit the measured data points.

Having entered and verified the relative permeability data, click Finish to quit the plot. Next,
enter the necessary data for the particular IPR method selected and click on Calculate to
calculate and display a plot of the system IPR. The program automatically calculates the
well Absolute Open Flow Potential (AOF).

To compare measured test pressures and calculated IPR pressures, click Test data and
enter rates and sandface pressures as on the following screen:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 200 PROSPER

When relative permeability is being used, water cuts for both the test data and that used to
calculate the IPR curve are required. The water cut during test value will be carried over
from the relative permeability input screen. The water cut for calculation value can be
subsequently changed to evaluate the effect on the calculated IPR.

7.2.22 Coning Calculation

In addition to the coning model implemented for the Horizontal Well with dP Friction Loss
model, a gas coning option can be chosen from the Options screen in the main menu. This
applies to all oil IPR models. It modifies the solution GOR by multiplying it by a weighting
factor greater than 1, which is a positive function of the liquid rate. The output is a total, or
produced, GOR. The model implemented was originally developed for high permeability
reservoirs (see Urbanczyk, C.H, and Wattenbarger, R.A., "Optimization of Well Rates under
Gas Coning Conditions.", SPE Advanced Technology Series, Vol. 2, No. 2, April 1994).

The following data are required to calculate the total GOR from a rate:

Reservoir permeability
Perforation height (vertical distance from perforation top to bottom)
Vertical anisotropy

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 201

Vertical distance from perforation top to gas-oil contact

Three correlating parameters: F1, F3 and an exponent

If the gas coning is enabled then a Coning button appears on the model selection dialog
screen. Clicking on this brings up a dialog that allows the correlating parameters to be
tuned. There is an automatic matching facility, which calculates F3 from the other data and
a (rate, GOR) coordinate. Also, the GOR can be calculated from different rates whilst in this
screen in order to verify the parameters.

It is recommended that this model be calibrated against measure rate versus

produced GOR data before using it as a predictive tool.

7.3 IPR for Gas and Retrograde Condensate

Sixteen inflow options are available, including a multi-lateral inflow model. The choice
depends upon the information available and the type of sensitivities that will be done. If
multi-rate test data is available, the modelled IPR can be matched to the measured data.

As for oil, Gas inflow models are divided between design and production applications.
Calculated IPR models can be used to estimate productivity for different completion options.
Other models are available for estimating productivity from measured flowing pressures.

The average reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature must be entered for all inflow
performance models, however both the Multi-rate C and n and Multi-rate Jones models can
be used to calculate the reservoir pressure from production test data.

7.3.1 Jones
The Jones equation for gas is a modified form of the Darcy equation, which allows for both
laminar and non-Darcy flow pressure drops. The Jones equation can be expressed in the
form:

PR2 - Pw2f = a Q 2 + b Q

Where "a" and "b" are calculated from reservoir properties or can be determined from a
multi-rate test. Required data entry is:

Reservoir permeability (Total permeability)

Formation thickness (Thickness of producing reservoir rock)
Drainage area
Wellbore radius
Dietz shape factor (Depends on the shape of the drainage area)

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 202 PROSPER

The Jones IPR model is discouraged to use with high reservoir pressures as the
assumption of the model is to keep 1 / Z constant at pressures >2400psig.

7.3.2 Forchheimer
The Forchheimer equation expresses the inflow performance in terms of a laminar and a
non-Darcy pressure drop coefficients expressed as:

PR2 - Pw2f = a Q 2 + b Q

The "a" and "b" factors are input parameters for the Forchheimer IPR model.

7.3.3 Back Pressure

In this form of the back pressure equation:

Q = C (P R2 - Pw2f ) n

C is determined from the reservoir pressure and reservoir properties. Required input data
are:

Reservoir permeability (Total permeability)

Formation thickness (Thickness of producing reservoir rock)
Drainage area
Wellbore radius (Open hole radius)
Dietz shape factor (Depends on the shape of the drainage area)
Exponent n (Between 0.5 and 1)

7.3.4 C and n
This is the common form of the back pressure equation:

Q = C (P R2 - Pw2f ) n

C and n can be determined from a plot of: Q versus (Pr2-Pwf2) on log-log paper. n is the
inverse of the slope and varies between 1 for Darcy flow to 0.5 for completely non-Darcy
flow. This option allows direct entry of C and n.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 203

7.3.5 Multi-rate C and n

Up to 10 test points can be entered and they will be fitted to the C and n back pressure
equation for gas:
Q = C (P R2 - Pw2f ) n
The fit values of C and n are posted on the IPR plot and listed in the IPR report. The
program will automatically calculate the reservoir pressure if it is not available.

It is advised to enter more than one test point. Using a single data point can
generate a non-representative IPR profile.

7.3.6 Multi-rate Jones

Up to 10 test points can be entered and they will be fitted to the Jones equation for gas
expressed as:

The fit values of a and b are posted on the IPR plot and listed in the IPR report. The
multi-rate Jones IPR is a convenient way to determine a and b from well tests. These values
can be entered in the Forcheimer IPR for calculating IPR sensitivities.

The program will automatically calculate the reservoir pressure if it is not available. For
producing wells, input a reservoir pressure lower than the measured pressures. The
program will dismiss the reservoir pressure entered and calculate one. For injection wells,
input a reservoir pressure higher than one of the pressures entered. The program will
calculate the reservoir pressure.

Note for injection wells. If flow test data for a producer has been fitted, the well
will have the correct IPR if it is then converted to an injector.

7.3.7 External Entry

Refer to External Entry for Oil.

7.3.8 Petroleum Experts

The Petroleum Experts inflow option uses a multi-phase pseudo pressure function to model
the reduction in well productivity resulting from increasing liquid saturation in condensate
wells. It assumes that no condensate banking occurs and that all the condensate that drops
out is produced. Transient effects on P.I. are accounted for.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 204 PROSPER

The following data is required to be entered:

Reservoir permeability(Either total, or effective permeability at connate water saturation)
Formation thickness (Thickness of producing reservoir rock)
Drainage area
Dietz shape factor (Depends on the shape of the drainage area)
Wellbore radius (Open hole well radius)
Perforated interval
Porosity (Average over producing section)
Time (Refer to Transient IPR for Oil - Section 7.2.9)
Connate water saturation (Used in relative permeability calcs. - see below)
Permeability entered (Either total or effective at Swc)
Non-Darcy coefficient (Enter by hand or PROSPER can calculate it)

The non-Darcy coefficient can be entered from a well test where available or calculated
using a correlation.

The following diagram illustrates how PROSPER treats total and effective permeability in the

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 205

Petroleum Experts IPR model:

Petroleum Experts IPR

Relative Permeability Method
Krl
1
0.9 Krg' Krg when effective permeability is entered
Relative Permeability

0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5 Krg when total permeability is entered
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1 Slc
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Liquid Saturation

The mass flow rate of each phase is directly proportional to its mobility (k/m), Krs can be
determined using PVT and the surface production rates. This technique is used to
determine the reduction in productivity as a function of the produced liquid ratios. The
derivation of the technique and details of the equations used are given in Appendix C.

7.3.9 Hydraulically Fractured Well

Please refer to Hydraulically Fractured IPR model in the Oil IPR section. Additional input
data for gas and condensate applications are connate water saturation, a non-Darcy flow
factor and either relative permeability to gas or total permeability.

Skin: The skin value that the user enters on the "Mech/Geom Skin" screen in combination
with the hydraulically fractured IPR model is the fracture face skin. This user-entered skin
represents possible damage in the fracture and therefore should not be negative.

7.3.10 Horizontal Well - No-Flow Boundaries

Please refer to Horizontal Wells in OIL IPR section. Additional input data for gas and
condensate applications are connate water saturation, a non-Darcy flow factor and either
relative permeability to gas or total permeability.

7.3.11 Multi-layer Inflow

The multi-layer inflow model allows up to 50 discrete reservoir layers to be entered each with
different reservoir pressures, inflow models and fluid properties. Each layer can be gravel
packed if desired. Both Injectors and Producers can be modelled.

The gas gravity, CGR and WGR must be entered for each layer. The produced fluid in the
well bore is equivalent to the summation of the individual layer contributions. Refer to
Multi-layer Inflow for Oil for more details.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 206 PROSPER

7.3.12 Horizontal Well - dP Friction Loss in Wellbore

Refer to Horizontal Well - dP Friction for Oil. For Gas, PROSPER uses the Petroleum Experts
IPR method for steady-state flow. The Reservoir porosity and connate water saturation are
required to be input in addition to the parameters described in the Horizontal Well- dP
friction loss model in the Oil IPR section.

7.3.13 Dual Porosity

Please refer to the Dual Porosity model in the IPR for Oil section. Additional input data for
gas and condensate applications are connate water saturation, a non-Darcy flow factor and
either relative permeability to gas or total permeability.

7.3.14 Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fractures

Please refer to Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fractures in the IPR for Oil section.
Additional input data for gas and condensate applications are connate water saturation, a
non-Darcy flow factor and either relative permeability to gas or total permeability.

7.3.15 Multi-Layer - dP Loss in Wellbore

The Multi-Layer dP Loss in Wellbore model can be used to model the production from multi-
layered gas reservoir systems.
Refer to the Multi-Layer dP Loss model for oil wells for further details.

7.3.16 Modified Isochronal Inflow Model

A type of deliverability test conducted in gas wells to generate a stabilized gas deliverability
curve (IPR). This test overcomes the limitation of the isochronal test, which requires long
shut-in times to reach the average reservoir pressure.

In the modified isochronal test, the shut-in periods are of equal duration, as are the flowing
periods. The final shut-in pressure before the beginning of the new flow is used as an
approximation of the average reservoir pressure. The same procedure is typically repeated
four times. A stabilized point (pseudosteady state) is usually obtained at the end of the test.

Modified isochronal tests are commonly used in gas wells, because they require less time
and money to produce results comparable to the isochronal test. This IPR model is based
on standard Back Pressure Model

( 2
Qg = C Pres - Pwf )
2 n

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 207

0 703kh
when n = 1 C=
(
m gTZ log e 0606
rw
re
)
The flow at any selected rate should be continued long enough for the reservoir to approach
steady-state (stabilized) conditions. The time to reach stabilized conditions is called the
readjustment time. For wells with wide well spacing (large drainage radius values), low
permeabilities, or high gas compressibilities (low reservoir pressures), large readjustment
times can be expected. In cases where the readjustment time exceeds the duration of each
test, the test data can be corrected to isochronal conditions and then to stabilized conditions
as described below.

When a well is tested from an initial steady state shut-in condition, the increase in drainage
radius with time is not dependent upon the rate. Therefore, separate flow tests conducted
for the same length of time will reach the same drainage radius.

When a well is not shut-in between tests until steady state is reached, successive tests will
indicate values of (P2res P2wf) which are too large because of the increasing drainage
radius. For the general case, a table of correction factors to be applied to (P2res P2wf) to
obtain an isochronal performance curve from conventional performance data can be
calculated as follows:

Flow Correlation Factors

The back pressure equation coefficients C and 'n' are obtained by non-linear regression
using the isochronally corrected data. 'n', the reciprocal of the slope of this line, is
constrained to a value between 0.5 and 1.

Although 'n' is constant, the coefficient 'C' is not the same at stabilized flow conditions as it is
at isochronal conditions. It is calculated using the same technique as before, regressing on
C and keeping n constant, after adjusting the isochronal (P2res - P2wf) values to stabilized
conditions using a variation of the following equation.
1
n
re
2 log10 0 60
rw
2 2
( Pres - Pwf ) stab =
log10 (0 25t d )iso
(P
res
2
- Pwf
2
)
iso

The time to stabilisation is calculated as follows:

2
0 1pre f (1 - S wc ) m g
t stab =
4 39e - 6 Pres K rg

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 208 PROSPER

7.3.17 Forchheimer with Pseudo Pressure

NEW!!!
This IPR model is based on the Forcheimer IPR using pseudo-pressure function instead of
pressure:

y R -y wf = aQ + bQ 2

where the pseudo-pressure function Y is defined as:

Pi P
i = 2 dP
0 Z

a and b are the input parameters for the IPR model.

NOTE: The a and b parameters for the Pseudo Pressure Forcheimer IPR are not the same
as the a and b parameters used in the pressure squared Forcheimer IPR.

7.3.18 Multirate Forchheimer with Pseudo Pressure

NEW!!!
This IPR is based on the Forchheimer IPR with pseudo-pressure (refer to previous section):

YR2 - Yw2f = a Q 2 + b Q

The a and b parameters are here determined by means of multi-rate tests data.

7.4 Skin Models

PROSPER divides the total skin into two parts. These are:

Mechanical / Geometric Skin.

Deviation / Partial Penetration

The skin values could be either:

Entered by Hand
Calculated Using Models.

7.4.1 Mechanical/Geometrical Skin

Enter Skin by Hand
If a reliable skin value is available from transient well testing, then this value should be
directly entered by selecting the "Enter by hand" option.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 209

It is assumed that this value will contain deviation and partial penetration
information.

In case the entered skin is only mechanical skin, there is an option of enabling the
Wong and Clifford model for deviation and partial penetration in the input screen
for the skin itself.

Skin Evaluation using Models

PROSPER provides 3 methods of estimating a mechanical/geometrical skin factor using
input parameters such as perforation geometry, depth of damage etc.

The skin estimation models provided in PROSPER are those of:

Locke
McLeod
Karakas and Tariq

The required input parameters are often difficult to accurately define, therefore the absolute
value of the calculated skin often cannot be precisely predicted. The power of these
techniques is their ability to assess the relative importance of completion options on the
overall value of well skin.

The Elf SkinAide inflow method can also be used to estimate skin pressure drops for cased-
and open-hole completions with and without gravel packs.

PROSPER can also be used to estimate the value of the skin pressure drop across the
completion and the proportion of the total pressure drop attributable to the various
completion elements.
Karakas and Tariq has been found to give good results in many field applications. The
following input data are required:

Reservoir permeability (Effective permeability at connate water saturation)

Perforation diameter (Entry hole diameter)
Shots per foot
Perforation length (Effective perf. length in formation)
Damaged zone thickness (Thickness of invasion)
Damaged zone permeability (Permeability in invaded zone)
Crushed zone thickness (Crushing associated with perforation)
Crushed zone permeability (Reduced permeability near perf. tunnel)
Shot phasing
Vertical permeability
Wellbore radius (Enter the open hole radius, not casing I.D.)

An example of the input data for the Karakas and Tariq method is shown below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 210 PROSPER

A sketch outlining the main geometric variables is shown in the figure below.

Enter the requested data and, having entered some reservoir model data, press Calculate
to display an IPR plot. The plot shows the pressure drop resulting from the total skin as well
a breakdown of the individual factors contributing to the total skin as per the following
example. The individual factors to be plotted can be chosen from the Variables menu

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 211

option of the plot window.

This plot is useful to assess the efficiency of a particular perforating program by allowing the
User to instantly assess the completion pressure loss resulting from different perforation
options. For gravel packed wells, the value of skin posted on the plot does not include the
gravel pack skin. Click Results on the IPR plot screen to display the breakdown of dP's
resulting from each completion element.
Enhancement to the skin modelling options in PROSPER is the ability to apply the API RP43
to determine the actual length and diameter of perforations (Figure 7-25).

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 212 PROSPER

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 213

Note on Skin:
Locke's technique is valid for shots per foot of 1,2,4,6,8,10,12,and 16.

7.4.2 Deviation/Partial Penetration Skin

In PROSPER three models are available to model the Deviation and Partial Penetration
Skin:

Cinco / Martin-Bronz
Wong-Clifford
Cinco (2) / Martin-Bronz

The Cinco / Martin-Bronz requires the following data:

Deviation angle of well
Partial penetration fraction
Formation vertical permeability
The Cinco / Martin-Bronz is based on two correlations. The Deviation Skin is calculated
using the Cinco's method, whereas the Partial Penetration skin is calculated using the
Martin-Bronz method.
The Cinco / Martin-Bronz model does not consider the anisotropy in the reservoir, that is, it
considers the reservoir as isotropic. The Vertical Permeability entered in the Deviation and
Partial Penetration Skin is only used for calculating the Partial Penetration.

This model is based on a correlation. The validity of this extends to wells up to 65 degrees.
For a higher deviation well the Wong Clifford Model should be used

The Wong-Clifford model can compute a skin for multiple completions. The Wong-Clifford
model does not have a separate calculation for the deviation & partial penetration skin - it is
a point source solution that calculates a skin that combines all of the skin effects in one
value. This total skin is placed in the Deviation skin column and the partial penetration skin is
set to zero.

This model requires the following data entered:

1. Reservoir parameters:
Formation vertical thickness
Well-bore radius
Drainage area
Dietz shape factor
Formation vertical permeability ratio
Local vertical permeability ratio
Horizontal distance from well to reservoir edge
Depth of top of reservoir

2. Completion parameters the following for each completion:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 214 PROSPER

Completion start measured depth

Completion end measured depth
Completion start true depth
Completion end true depth

The Cinco (2) / Martin-Bronz model is similar to the Cinco / Martin - Bronz model.
The difference between the two models is that the Cinco (2) / Martin-Bronz model
also considers the anisotropy in the reservoir. The vertical permeability entered in
the Deviation and Partial Penetration screen is used to calculate the Deviation Skin.

7.5 Gravel Packed Completions

PROSPER models gravel packed completions as a concentric cylinder having a User
specified permeability connected to the well bore via perforations of specified diameter. By
sensitising on perforation spacing and diameter, the effect of pressure drop due to flow
concentration on well performance can be investigated. Likewise, the effect of varying
gravel length (i.e. the thickness of gravel between the OD of the screen and the ID of the
original open hole) on skin can be evaluated. A sample gravel pack data input screen for a
cased hole is shown below:

The following data input is required:

Gravel pack permeability (Enter the in-site permeability for the gravel)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 215

Perforation diameter (Diameter of perforation tunnel)

Shots per foot
Gravel pack length
Perforation interval
Perforation efficiency
Beta (Turbulence) (NEW!!!)
Method (NEW!!!)
(Distance from the screen O.D. to the sandface)
(This affects the flow velocity in the perforations only)
(Proportion of perforations that are open and effective)
(Select if the Non-Darcy factor is Calculated or Entered)
(Single Phase or Multiphase)

NEW!!! The Multi Phase Method consists of using phase-weighted fluid properties
during gravel pack pressure drop calculations. This option is only active in case
of Oil fluid type.
The Single Phase method is the classic method which utilises the main fluid type
properties (i.e. Oil properties in case of oil fluid).

On the right side of the screen a table shows typical permeability data for different types of
gravels.

The pressure drop across a gravel pack is computed using a summation of a Darcy and a
non-Darcy component. For a cased oil well, the pressure drop due to the gravel pack
(dPgravel) is calculated using the Jones IPR equation:

dP GRAVELPACK = a Q2 + b Q

Where:
a = The non-Darcy term,
Q = The total liquid rate and
b = The Darcy term

Intermediate calculations are required prior to computing the dPgravel value and consider
the following variables:
Kg = Gravel Pack Permeability
= 1.47E7/Kg^0.55
PerfDi = Perforation Diameter
SPF = Shots per ft
PRFINT = Perforation Interval
AOTF = Area Open To Flow = (Perf dia / 24)2 * SPF * Perf Interval
o = Oil Viscosity in cp
Bo = oil FVF
o = Oil Density
L = Gravel pack length

The Darcy (B-term) and the non-Darcy (A-term) are calculated

a-Term = 9.08E-13* *Bo2* o *L/12/AOTF2

b-term = o *Bo*L/12/(1.127E-3*Kg*AOTF).

This dP may then be transformed into skin using an appropriate relationship.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 216 PROSPER

The main geometric parameters are shown on the following sketch:

Skin can be calculated using one of the methods described in Section 7.3 or directly
entered. Note that partial completion skin is included in the total well skin, and is not
affected by adjusting the gravel pack completion parameters. The total well skin as
measured by a well test prior to gravel packing should be entered. Click Calculate when
finished entering data and an IPR plot similar to that below will be presented (the plotting of
the individual dP components can be chosen from the Variables menu in the plot window):

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 217

The contribution of the gravel pack to the total skin pressure drop can be readily seen on the
IPR plot. The value of skin posted on the IPR plot does not include the gravel pack skin.
Click Results on the IPR plot screen to display the breakdown of dP's resulting from each
completion element. Sensitivities can be calculated on factors such as gravel pack
thickness, shots per foot etc. to evaluate the effectiveness of gravel pack designs. Gravel
packed completions are also available in the Multi-layer IPR model.

The PROSPER gravel pack model allows for non-Darcy (i.e. dP proportional to rate
squared) effects within the gravel pack and the resulting rate dependent skin. Lift curves for
gravel packed wells generated using PROSPER can be calculated from the sandface,
through the completion, and back to the production manifold. This more correctly models
the IPR as compared to simply imposing an additional skin to allow for the gravel pack
pressure loss as is done in many reservoir simulators.

Gravel packs can be combined with the Hydraulically Fractured Well IPR to
model Frac-Pack completions.

A summary of the main IPR equations is given in Appendix C.

7.5.1 Gravel Pack Completion Velocities

NEW!!!
In the IPR results (accessible from the Plot view, Results menu) the velocities at the
Casing (Vc) and at the Screen (Vs) are available, along with the Gravel Pack A and
B factors:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 218 PROSPER

The gravel pack velocities have been incorporated in Version 6 of the IPM Suite of
tools.

Vc is the velocity of the fluid at the entry point of the casing.

It is calculated by dividing the flow rate of the fluid with the area of flow at the casing.

These velocity calculations were implemented at the request of clients who require
these velocities for gravel pack design.

7.6 Viscosity Modelling

This screen is activated only when the fluid option Non-Newtonian fluid is selected.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 219

Enter in this screen the required parameters:

Wellbore radius
Drainage Area
Reservoir Thickness
Reservoir porosity
Connate Water Saturation

These parameters are used to determine an equivalent flowing radius that will be used by
the program to estimate the pressure drop due to the friction in the reservoir.
The dP friction will take in account of the fluid apparent viscosity (which is velocity -
dependent) calculated by the Non-Newtonian viscosity model.

7.7 Compaction Permeability Reduction

The Compaction Permeability Reduction option is an analytical model to estimate the change of
Reservoir Permeability due to reservoir compaction effects.
The correction is carried out by means of a correction factor that will be then applied to the
permeability

Corr = (1 + C f ) (P R - PRi ) N

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 220 PROSPER

where:
Corr = Permeability Correction Factor
Cf = Rock Compressibility
PR = Current Reservoir Pressure
PRi = Initial Reservoir Pressure
N = Compaction Model Exponent

This option can be enabled in the main IPR section:

The option will activate a new TAB screen in the Input Data section where the basic model inputs are
required:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 221

The input data required by the model are:

Initial Reservoir Pressure
Reservoir Compressibility
Compaction Model Exponent

7.8 Injection Wells

Irrespective of the inflow model used, Injection well IPR calculations are complicated by a
number of factors as compared to producers:
Injected fluid temperature at the sandface is a function of surface temperature,
injection rate history and well configuration.
Relative permeability to injected fluid is required.
Injectivity changes with time as the fluid bank is pushed back away from the well.
Fracturing (mechanical or thermally induced) often occurs.
Adequate results for injection well IPR can be obtained by reducing the reservoir
temperature on the IPR input screen to near the estimated sandface injection temperature.
The Enthalpy Balance temperature model can be used to estimate injected fluid
temperatures. PROSPER uses the reservoir pressure and temperature to estimate fluid
PVT properties in IPR calculations.

Most of the IPR pressure drop occurs near to the well. With this in mind, use an effective
permeability appropriate to the given conditions. For empirical inflow models such as Vogel
and Multi-Rate methods, the effect of cold injection fluid viscosity is accounted for in the
pressure points. Changing the reservoir temperature will have no effect in these cases.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 222 PROSPER

7.9 SkinAide
The SkinAide inflow method has been developed by Elf Aquamarine and acknowledgement
is given for its inclusion in PROSPER. The following description is based on information
provided by Elf.

7.9.1 SkinAide Theoretical Background

Consider the case of a partially penetrating, deviated well, cased and perforated and
equipped with a gravel pack. The total pressure drop around such a well corresponds to the
pressure difference between:
- an equipotential surface at the external limit of the reservoir drainage area, and
- another equipotential surface corresponding to the screen.
This total pressure drop is due to a number of features. Moving downstream from the
external limit of the drainage area towards the well:
- the position of the producing interval with respect to the reservoir geometry (due to
partial penetration and deviation).
- the damaged zone.
- interference between the different perforations.
- the crushed zone surrounding the perforation tunnels.
- gravel in the perforation tunnels.
- gravel in the annulus between the screen and the casing.
Pressure drops between equipotential surfaces can be added to one another, and the
conceptual model corresponds to an attempt to simplify the problem by finding equipotential
surfaces.

7.9.1.1 Position of the producing interval with respect to reservoir geometry

The pressure drop due to the position of the producing interval with respect to the reservoir
geometry can be considered to be independent of the pressure drop surrounding the well
completion in so far as one can imagine an equipotential cylindrical surface with, say, a 2 m
radius, separating the two regions.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 223

This pressure drop is calculated in SkinAide using a reservoir engineering correlation.

7.9.1.2 Interference between perforations and the damaged zone

Moving downstream, the next feature encountered is the interference between perforations
and the damaged zone. If the perforation tunnel emerges from the damaged zone, the
damaged zone has much less influence than if the perforation remains entirely within the
damaged zone.

The pressure drop due to interference between perforations and the damaged zone is
calculated using the Karakas and Tariq correlation.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 224 PROSPER

7.9.1.3 The Crushed Zone

The downstream limit of the previous feature is the crushed zone. The outside surface of the
crushed zone, and the inner surface of the perforation tunnel are both assumed to be
equipotentials. As a result flow in both the crushed-only and the crushed-and-damaged
zones is radial.

Pressure drops in the crushed zone can be calculated analytically.

7.9.1.4 Perforation tunnel which penetrates the formation

The next feature downstream is flow in that part of the perforation tunnel which penetrates
the formation. We use the flux into the tunnel previously calculated for radial flow in the
crushed zone to calculate the flow profile along the tunnel :

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 225

This situation can be solved analytically.

7.9.1.5 Perforation tunnel through the casing and cement

Moving yet further downstream, two equipotentials can be drawn, one at the external surface
of the cement, the other on the inside of the casing:

This linear flow can be solved analytically.

7.9.1.6 Annulus between Casing and Screen

The last feature is the region between the equipotential at the opening of the perforation
tunnel in the casing, and the screen.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 226 PROSPER

An approximate analytical solution has been found for flow in this region.

7.9.1.7 Hemispherical Flow Model

The conventional linear perforation model assumes that the surface of the perforation tunnel
is an equipotential surface. This assumption breaks down when permeability of gravel in the
tunnel becomes sufficiently low. When permeability in the tunnel becomes sufficiently small,
flow in the reservoir approaches hemispherical flow towards the perforation mouth.

Flow takes place

- in the reservoir beyond the crushed and the damaged zones
- in the damaged zone
- in the crushed-and-damaged zone
- in the perforation tunnel itself.
Analytical solutions to hemispherical flow have been developed to represent this model,
which can be considered to be an upper bound to the conventional linear perforation model.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 227

7.9.2 Using SkinAide

When the SkinAide IPR model is selected, the following IPR Input screen is presented:

Select the required options for the Flow and Skin models plus Perforation Data. The options
are listed below:

7.9.2.1 Flow Model

Steady State - corresponds to a constant flux at the outer reservoir boundary. The inflow at
the external boundary is equal to the well flow rate. This boundary condition corresponds to
pressure maintenance by natural (aquifer influx, gas cap drive) or artificial (gas or water
injection). The steady state productivity equation is:

Semi Steady State - corresponds to no-flow at the outer reservoir boundary. This
boundary condition corresponds to reservoir depletion with no pressure maintenance.
The radial flow Productivity Index equation for semi-steady state is:
These equations differ only in the constant 3/4 vs 1/2 for steady state flow. These radial
flow equations can be generalised for other drainage geometries.

Pe, the static reservoir pressure is the average pressure in the well drainage
area, not the pressure at the external boundary. Pe is used in the
Productivity Index equation:

The reservoir pressure should be entered at the same reference datum as

the intake node depth.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 228 PROSPER

7.9.2.2 Skin Model

Linear Flow - Skin pressure drop is calculated assuming that flow is predominantly linear
towards the well. This is the normal situation for a well completed across most of the
reservoir.

Hemispherical Flow - Skin pressure drop is calculated assuming a hemispherical flow

geometry. This situation occurs for single perforations or wells having extreme partial
completion effects.
Flow Giving Minimum dP - Skin pressure drop is calculated assuming flow is always along
the path of lowest resistance. (i.e. between linear and hemispherical flow)

7.9.2.3 Perforation Data

In-Situ Geometry Entered - The dimension of the actual perforations in the reservoir are
entered.
API Test Data Edition 4 - API perforation gun data are entered and SkinAide estimates the
downhole perforation geometry.
API Test Data Edition 5 - API perforation gun data are entered and SkinAide estimates the
downhole perforation geometry. This option utilises more recently defined gun test
specifications.

Having selected the required options, SkinAide requires data entry in the following
categories:

Geometry (Reservoir dimensions)

Petrophysics (Reservoir permeability etc.)
Damaged Zone (Damaged zone properties)
Cased Hole (casing dimensions)
Crushed Zone (Crushed zone properties)
Perforations (Gun and perforation geometry)
Gravel Pack (Only for Gravel Packed wells)

The data required can vary according to the options selected. Click each data entry button
in turn and enter the data as follows:

7.9.2.4 Geometry
Reservoir Thickness - Enter the thickness normal to the bedding plane in dipping
reservoirs. When thin shales are distributed throughout a heterogeneous reservoir, use
the net sand thickness.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 229

Completed Interval - Enter the perforated interval as measured along the wellbore.

Distance to Top of Completion - This parameter affects partial completion skin and is
measured along the wellbore. If gross sand thickness is used for reservoir thickness,
enter the actual distance to the top perforation (dimension h1 in the above sketch). When
using net sand, restrict the distance to net sand intervals.
Drainage Area - Area drained by the subject well
Dietz Shape Factor - Allows for drainage area shape and well placement.

Hole Diameter - Open hole drilled diameter. Use bit size or caliper measured size where
applicable. Perforation length, damage depth are measured beyond the hole diameter.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 230 PROSPER

Deviation - Average angle between the well axis and vertical.

7.9.2.5 Petrophysics
Horizontal Permeability - Reservoir permeability measured parallel to the cap rock (along the
bedding plane).

Vertical Permeability - Reservoir permeability measured perpendicular to the horizontal

permeability in the vicinity of the completed interval. Used to determine anisotropy ratio
near the perforations. Values can be taken from core analysis.
Vertical Permeability for Geometrical Skin - Reservoir permeability for the bulk reservoir
measured perpendicular to the horizontal permeability. Determines the anisotropy ratio
between the completed interval and the remainder of the reservoir.
Porosity - Used in the high velocity flow coefficient correlation:
Where:
k Reservoir horizontal permeability
f Reservoir porosity
a,b,c Constants
Correlations are used to estimate the values used in the high velocity flow equation.
Field specific correlations can be prepared from well test analysis.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 231

Turbulence coefficient a - multiplier for the overall turbulence coefficient. Dimensions

are reciprocal distance.
Permeability exponent b - Permeability raised to this power. Default is -1.33. Note, the
exponent value entered corresponds to permeability in millidarcies regardless of the
current unit set.
Porosity exponent c - Porosity raised to this power. Default is 0.0. Note the exponent
value assumes the porosity is a fraction, regardless of the current unit set.
High velocity flow pressure drops arise from acceleration and deceleration of reservoir fluids
as they pass through pore throats as in the following diagram:

7.9.2.6 Damaged Zone

The damaged zone is modelled as an annulus surrounding the wellbore in which
permeability and porosity have been impaired during the drilling and completion process.
The depth of damage is measured beyond the drilled hole.

In anisotropic reservoirs, formation damage is deeper in the low permeability direction than
the high permeability. An elliptic damaged zone forms in such cases. SkinAide assumes a
circular damaged zone irrespective of reservoir anisotropy.

Damaged Zone Thickness - Since damaged zone skin is controlled by the ratio of
perforation tunnel length to damaged zone depth, enter a damage zone depth that

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 232 PROSPER

respects this relationship.

Damaged Zone Permeability - Determines the ratio of damaged zone to reservoir
permeability. Estimating the true value is not straightforward, however, the undamaged
reservoir permeability could be used as a starting point.
Damaged Zone Porosity - Porosity to be used in the high velocity flow coefficient
correlation.

7.9.2.7 Cased Hole

The casing dimensions are used to correct the API perforation length for field conditions.
The casing I.D. is calculated from the O.D. and casing weight.

External Casing Diameter - Enter nominal casing diameter opposite the completed
interval.
Casing Weight - Enter nominal casing weight per unit length opposite the completed
interval.

7.9.2.8 Crushed Zone

Shaped charge perforating creates a cavity filled by charge debris and surrounded by a zone
of reservoir rock that has been altered by the high pressure / high temperature jet. Charge
debris is removed by perforation washing or underbalanced perforating - the crushed zone
remains. SkinAide recognises separate properties for the crushed zone in the undisturbed
reservoir and damaged zone.

Most of the high velocity flow pressure loss occurs in the crushed zone and is added to the
loss in the reservoir. Note that if a zero crushed zone thickness is entered, no high flow

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 233

velocity pressure drops are calculated.

Crushed Zone Thickness - Thickness of perforation altered zone. The default value is
0.5 inches.
Crushed Zone Permeability - Reduced permeability for crushed zone within the virgin
reservoir.
Crushed Zone Porosity - Porosity in the crushed zone for estimation of high pressure
flow losses.
Crushed + Damaged Zone Permeability - Permeability for the crushed zone within the
damaged zone.
Crushed + Damaged Zone Porosity - Porosity for the crushed zone within the damaged
zone.
Permeability in the crushed and damaged zone is introduced by the ratio:
Rcrushed and damaged = Crushed and damaged zone (horizontal) permeability /
undisturbed formation (horizontal) permeability.
The same anisotropy ratio opposite the completion interval as applies to the
undisturbed formation is used for the crushed and damaged zone permeability. It is
suggested that the crushed and damaged zone permeability ratio should be the
product:
Rcrushed and damaged = RdamagedRcrushed only.
Where the ratio for the damaged zone:
Rdamaged = damaged (horizontal) permeability / undisturbed formation
(horizontal) permeability
and the crushed-only zone:
Rcrushed only = only crushed zone (horizontal) permeability / undisturbed
formation (horizontal) permeability.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 234 PROSPER

7.9.2.9 Perforations
The perforation data input depends on the option selected. If In-Situ Geometry is selected,
the actual perforation sizes are required. Alternatively, API test data can be entered for a
particular gun, and SkinAide will estimate the perforation geometry considering completion
and reservoir variables such as compressive strength and casing size.

Common Perforation Parameters

Perforation Efficiency - The number of producing perforations is the product of
perforation efficiency, shot density and the length of the completed interval. Perforation
efficiency is used to account for ineffective perforations such as those shot into shaly
beds. If gross sand is used to define reservoir geometry, the maximum perforation
efficiency should be the ratio of net/gross reservoir sand. If net sand is used, the
perforation efficiency does not need to be further modified.

Shot Density - Nominal shots per foot for the selected perforating gun.
Gun Phasing - Angle between two adjacent perforating charges. Affects interference
between perforation tunnels.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 235

Angle Between Vertical Plane and Perforations - For anisotropic reservoirs, the angle
between the perforation tunnels and the direction of maximum permeability influences
productivity. When 0 or 180 guns are selected, perforations are all aligned with the low
side of the hole. For other gun phasings, SkinAide assumes an angle of 45.

In-Situ Geometry Entered

Tunnel Length - Length of effective perforation in the reservoir formation i.e. beyond the
cement sheath.

Tunnel Diameter - Diameter of effective perforation in the reservoir formation.

Cavity Entrance Diameter - Not active - use Tunnel Diameter. SkinAide presently uses a
cylindrical model for perforations. Future versions will allow a cone-shaped perforation
geometry.
Cavity Tip Diameter - Not active - use Tunnel Diameter. SkinAide presently uses a
cylindrical model for perforations. Future versions will allow a cone-shaped perforation
geometry.

API Test DataThe correction from test data to In-Situ conditions is influenced by the API test
series selected. The form of data input is identical for both options.
API RP 43/2 Total Target Penetration - Length of perforation in Berea sandstone target.
If RP 43/2 data is unavailable, use 2/3 of API RP43/1 cement target TTP.
API RP 43/1 Entry Hole Diameter - Entry hole diameter for steel / cement target test.
Note that the steel quality changes between Editions 4 and 5 of the API test
specifications. Ensure the relevant data is entered.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 236 PROSPER

Gun diameter - Gun diameter is used to correct API perforation test results for stand-off.
Reservoir Uniaxial Compressive Strength - Compressive strength is used to calculate
in-situ perforation dimensions. Typical values of reservoir uniaxial compressive strength
are given in the following table:

Lithology Reservoir Uniaxial

Compressive Strength
(psi) (bar)
Loose sand 150 10
Sand which crumbles by hand 750 50
Sandstone from which sand grains can be peeled by 1500 100
hand
Well cemented sandstone 3750 250
Well cemented limestone 3750 250

Rock Density - Enter apparent In-Situ rock density as measured by a density log, not the
density of the minerals (e.g. Quartz) that comprise the formation grains.
Casing Elastic Limit - Used for correction of API data to In-situ perforation dimensions.
The elastic limit in thousands of psi corresponds to the pipe steel quality. e.g. N80
casing has an elastic limit stress of 80,000 psi.
Reservoir Stress - Used for correction of API data to In-situ perforation dimensions.
Stress is assumed to be Isotropic. Generally the minimum effective stress (frac
gradient) is suitable.

Gravel Packs in SkinAideWhen the Gravel Pack option has been selected, additional data
entry is required to describe the pack geometry and properties. Separate gravel properties
can be entered for the annular gravel pack and the sand in the perforation tunnels. This
allows mixing of formation and pack sand to be simulated.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 237

Screen Outside Diameter - The space between the screen O.D. and the drilled hole
diameter is occupied by gravel.
Annulus Gravel Permeability - Permeability of gravel in the space between the screen
and the open hole. Gravel size is specified in terms of mesh size. e.g. 20/40 mesh
gravel will pass a sieve with 1/20 inch holes, but not pass a 1/40 inch sieve. Average
laboratory measured permeability values for various gravel sizes are given in the
following table:

Gravel Mesh Lab Permeability

Type (Darcies)
Ottawa Sand 12/20 500
20/40 150
30/50 90
40/60 60
50/70 30
Carbolite 20/40 350
16/20 500
Isopac 20/40 110

Annulus Gravel Porosity - Used in calculation of high velocity flow coefficient in the
gravel pack.
Tunnel Gravel Permeability - Used to reduce the permeability of sand in the perforation
tunnels due to mixing of formation and gravel pack sand.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 238 PROSPER

Tunnel Gravel Porosity - Used to reduce the porosity of sand in the perforation tunnels.

The inflow and skin pressure drop are computed by clicking the Calculate button once all the
relevant input data have been entered and Plot to display the results. To evaluate the
contribution of individual completion components in the inflow performance, click Variables
and select the parameters to display as in the following screen example:

Select the required variables by clicking their check boxes. Click Done to display the results:

Skin Components

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 239

The conceptual models used to calculate the total skin factor include :
- a contribution due to the position of the producing interval with respect to reservoir
geometry, called geometric skin Sgeometric
- contributions due to pressure losses close to the actual wellbore, beginning with the
pressure loss due to the damaged zone and ending with pressure loss in the
casing/screen annulus for gravel packed wells. This contribution to the total skin is
called the completion skin Scompletion.
The total skin is the sum of the two components
Stotal =Sgeometric + Scompletion
The contribution Scompletion to the total skin is particularly convenient when using reservoir
engineering equations. However Scompletion does not necessarily reflect the quality of the
completion itself. Indeed, imagine two wells with identical completions, producing reservoirs
with identical properties, the thickness of one reservoir is double that of the other:

Scompletion = a k h DPcompletion / ( Q m B )
Since DPcompletion is identical but reservoir thickness h differs by a factor 2, applying the above
relation leads to values of Scompletion, which differ, by a factor 2.

Mechanical skins are defined so as to reflect the quality of well completion. In the formula for
mechanical skins, the vertical reservoir thickness h is replaced by the length of the
producing interval (measured along the wellbore) hp :
Smechanical = a k hp DPskin / ( Q m B )
where, for oil wells,
SI US French
a depends on units 2p 7.07 10-3 0.0536
k permeability m2 mD mD
hp length of the completed interval m ft m
DPskin DPreal well - DPidealized well Pa psi bar
Q flowrate (standard conditions) m3/s bpd m3/d
m viscosity (reservoir conditions) Pa.s cP cP
B fluid formation volume factor v/v v/v v/v
Total and mechanical skins are related by the simple formula :
Smechanical / hp = Scompletion / h

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 240 PROSPER

7.10 Multi-Lateral Interface

7.10.1 Network Interface
7.10.1.1Motivation

Furthermore, to provide a consistency with other Petroleum Experts products the interface
has the same look and feel as the one in GAP.

7.10.1.2Interface Overview

The multilateral data entry screen is accessed by choosing System | Inflow Performance
from the PROSPER main menu, as with the single well IPR. However, before that the
multilateral option must be chosen in the Options screen, also accessed from the main
menu. The main screen is depicted in Figure 7.55.

The User interface consists of a framework window that contains several child windows, as
well as the menu and toolbar from which commands are issued. The child windows include
the network windows that contain the system network drawing, the navigator window that
can assist in the viewing of large networks and up to three visualisation windows, which can
show the multilateral network drawn to scale from three orthogonal points of view.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 241

Four main components of the interface are identified, as indicated on the diagram above,
which are described in more detail in the following sections:

1. Network window the window on which the system network is drawn.

2. Navigator window contains a full schematic that can be used to help navigation about
large systems.

3. Menu bar and toolbar. The menu bar is used for issuing commands to PROSPER and
the interface; it contains an abridged set of commands compared to a normal application
framework window because it is a subsidiary window of the main programme. The toolbar
contains menu accelerators, icons for selecting and manipulating network nodes and
links, and icons for zooming or unzooming on the network window.

4. Visualisation screen up to three windows showing front, side and top views of the
multilateral network.

7.10.1.2.1 Network Window

The network window is the main window on which the multilateral network is displayed and
manipulated. More than one network window can be displayed at one time; this means that
different views of the same system are available simultaneously, which can be of help in

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 242 PROSPER

editing large networks.

The system window is used to draw, edit, and view the system. The network nodes are
represented by coloured icons. The different actions that can be performed on this window
are obtained by clicking the right hand mouse button within the area of the system window,
which brings up a menu. Alternatively, the same set of actions can be performed using the
toolbar or the menu, which are described below.

Addition of Network Nodes and Links

To add an item to the system, activate the required network item type from the toolbar or by
using the right hand mouse button menu. The cursor will change to indicate that a network
item selection has been made. Click on the screen at the point to insert the element. A
network node will be created and an icon to represent it. A label dialog will appear
prompting for a name. If the element is not labelled, a default label is provided which can be
edited later using the icon right hand mouse button menu.

Only the four left most items in the toolbar (tie-point, junction, completion and tank/reservoir)
are nodes: links, the fifth item, are added differently by dragging between two nodes.
Depending on a set of connection rules, the connection will be made or not and the correct
type of link will be chosen. For example, reservoirs can only be attached to completions and
the type of link is logical; in other cases the link is a piece of tubing. These rules are
reviewed in the description of toolbar items. The network is hierarchical and arrows drawn
on the links indicate the direction of the connections (which is normally the same direction as
increasing vertical depth). Each icon is given a characteristic colour, depending on the
network item it represents. The colours and items are: red (tie-point), green (junction),
yellow (completion), blue (reservoir) and pink (tubing).

Zoom/Unzoom
To zoom or unzoom, first select the appropriate icon from the toolbar or from the right hand
mouse menu, as described above. To zoom in on an area, hold the left hand mouse button
while sweeping the mouse cursor over the area of interest. Alternatively, click once at a point
in the system, and the programme will zoom or unzoom on that point using a fixed scaling
factor (which may be adjusted using the Preferences dialog in the Preferences menu).

To revert to a full system view at any time, double-click the left hand mouse button at any
point in the window (except on an icon). The view will re-scale to show the whole of the
system.

Mask/Unmask
To mask or unmask, first select the appropriate icon from the toolbar or from the right hand
mouse menu, as described above. To mask a node, click on itwith mask selected; to
unmask it click on it with unmask selected. Masking removes a node from the calculation
without removing it and its associated data from the network (which deleting does). Masking
is useful for simulating the effect of removing or adding in completions. Note that masking a
branch will have the effect of masking those below it in the hierarchy.

Moving Items
Select the move option from the toolbar or from the right hand mouse menu. To move a
single item, place the mouse cursor above it and hold down the left mouse button while

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 243

dragging the mouse cursor to the desired new location. To move a group, select an area as
with the zoom option and then hold down the left mouse button with the mouse cursor in the
window before dragging the whole group to a new location. Items stay selected after a
group move but can be de-selected using the select option.

Deletion of Items
Select the delete icon from the toolbar or from the right hand mouse menu. Groups of items
may be deleted by group-selecting them as above, but with the delete option chosen. NB:
deletion of a node deletes the data associated with it so this option should be used with
caution. To delete a pure (non data-carrying) link re-do it.

Selection of Items
To select an item or items, first choose the select icon (black arrow) from the toolbar or from
the right hand mouse menu, the selected item will change colour. Group selections can be
achieved by first selecting the select icon then drag the left hand mouse button over the area
of interest. The select option is a toggle, so it can select or de-select items. Group
selections can be used to turn off the selection actioned by a group move.

Editing of Items
If a network item carries data it has an icon associated with it and can be edited by double
clicking on it provided that none of zoom/unzoom, move, delete or select are chosen.
Editing of network item data is covered in the section on Data Entry.

Right Hand Mouse Button Actions

Utility menus will appear when the right hand mouse button is clicked anywhere in the
system view. The normal menu appears when the button is clicked over an empty space. It
contains the commands to add and manipulate network items as well as commands to bring
up dialog screens to change fonts and icon sizes. If it is clicked over a network icon, a
shorter menu will appear with a number of network item specific functions, such as the
ability to change the icon size and label, and delete and select.

Panning
To move the view around the system, move the cursor close to the edge of the view in the
direction the system will be moved. The cursor will change to an arrow. Clicking the left hand
mouse button will move the system view by a fixed amount depending on the current scaling
factor. To pan quickly, hold the mouse button down and, after a short time, the pan action
will 'auto-repeat'.

Popup Status Information

If no toolbar (or equivalent menu item) is chosen as the mouse is moved over the network
icons, a small window will appear and show basic status information for the node in
question. The pop-up status window allows the validity status of a network item to be
checked without entering the data entry screen. This is optional: to switch this function off go
to the Preferences screen. To select nothing, toggle the currently selected toolbar or menu
items, or choose the blank option from the drop-down list box in the toolbar.

Changing Icon Sizes / System Fonts

These functions are also available from the right hand mouse menu. See the section on
menu details for more information.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 244 PROSPER

Other Window Actions

Minimise: Click this button to minimise the window in the multilateral main
window.

Maximise: Click this button to maximise the window to fill the multilateral main
window.

Close: Click this button to remove the window from the workspace.

System menu: This contains various functions allowing the window to be maximised,
minimised, moved, etc.

7.10.1.2.2 The Navigator Window

This window can be used to aid in navigation about a large system. It will always consist of a
system schematic that is independent of any zooming on a system window. In addition to the
network, it contains a tracking rectangle that encloses the portion of the system currently
under view in the system window.

The tracking rectangle has two functions. If the focus is currently on a network window, this
rectangle surrounds the area of the network that that view is displaying. Alternatively, the
rectangle may be used to create new views of the network if the navigator window is
currently in focus. When the mouse is moved over the rectangle, the cursor changes to
allow resizing of the rectangle. In this way, the navigator window facilitates creating views in
areas of interest. Double-clicking the left hand mouse button in the area will create a new
system view displaying the selected area, although resized to preserve a sensible aspect
ratio.

Right Hand Mouse Button Menu

Clicking the right hand mouse button within the navigator window will produce a utility menu.
This contains the following functions:

Navigator On Top: By default, the navigator is always on top of all system views. This can
be changed by selecting this item from the menu.

Hide Window: The navigator can be hidden using this option and, once removed, will not
appear in subsequent sessions until reopened from the Window menu. The navigator can
also be hidden by clicking on the cross button at the top right hand corner of the window or
by using the Window menu option.

New Window: Another way of producing a new view (see above).

Icon Sizes: Invokes the Icon Sizes dialog (see below).

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 245

7.10.1.2.3 Toolbar Details

The toolbar is located below the main menu at the top of the main window. It consists of a
row of icons (described below) which act as accelerators to the menu functions accessed
from the Tools menu or most of those called from the right hand mouse button in the
network window.

The functions of the various buttons are described below. A quick description can be gained
for a given button by holding the mouse cursor over the button for a moment. A small yellow
box with a short description will appear.

Network Item Set-up

The functionality of the network items buttons is duplicated in the drop-down list: a selection
from this list will cause the appropriate button on the toolbar to be shown as depressed.
When a network item button is selected, the cursor, when over a system window, will be
drawn to represent the current selection. Click once on the system window to cause a new
node of the required type to be created at the chosen point. A label dialog will appear to
allowing the node to be labelled; leaving the label blank results in default node naming. This
can be edited later by clicking the right hand mouse button on the icon created.

Connections between nodes are created by choosing the Link button and holding down the
mouse left hand button whilst dragging between the nodes. There is a connection hierarchy,
which is represented by the branching of a parent branch into one or more child branches, in
the same way that the multilateral well branches out physically. Indicate the direction of the
hierarchy for junction-completion or completion-completion connections by the order in
which they are joined up.

Tie-point. This is the node for which the IPR is solved and is located at the top
of the system (in vertical depth and hierarchically). Hence, the tie-point can only
be a start point.
Junction. The main purpose of the junction is to be a branching node. It can
only have one link into it (from a tie-point, completion or other junction) but any
number coming out.
Completion. This contains both tubing and completion information. It is
attached below a tie-point, junction or another completion. It can only have one
link into it and branches out to either a junction or another completion. It can
also be logically attached (no direction implied) to any number of reservoirs (but
at least one).
Tank/reservoir. This represents a reservoir source and is logically attached to
any number of completions (but at least one).
Link. Connecting to a junction, the link becomes a tubing node and contains
data. Going into a completion, the tubing information is in the completion and
the link is blank only indicating the hierarchical relationship between the nodes
it connects with an arrow. Finally, when connecting a completion and a
reservoir, the link is logical and not hierarchical. Note that re-doing a link
between two nodes will delete it.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 246 PROSPER

7.10.1.2.4 Network Manipulation

Zoom in/out. When 'zoom in/out' is selected, a zoom can be achieved either by
clicking the mouse on the system window, which will zoom in/out a fixed amount
and set the centre of the view to the position clicked. If zoom in is selected,
sweeping an area with the mouse will zoom in on the area selected. The aspect
ratio will be retained when an area zoom is performed.
Mask/Unmask an item. After masking is selected specific items can be
removed from the network for calculation purposes without deleting them. This
is particularly useful for seeing the effect of removing a completion item.
Delete a node. After this is selected, the node may be deleted by clicking on the
item in the system window. The icon automatically becomes unselected
following a deletion to prevent accidental deletion of further nodes. To delete a
pure (non data-carrying) link re-do it.
Move a node. After this is selected, a node may be moved by clicking on the
item in the system window and then, with the mouse button depressed, dragging
the item to the new position. A group of nodes may also be selected and
moved.
Select a node. After this is pressed, a node may be selected/de-selected by
clicking on the item in the system window. The item will reverse its colour to
indicate selection/de-selection.

7.10.1.2.5 Menu Details

Finish
Done exits the screen but validates the multilateral structure and data first. If the structure
is not valid a warning message appears providing the opportunity to remain in the
multilateral screen. One can exit the data screen, however, the data are marked invalid.
Cancel leaves the multilateral screen, restoring the network to its state at the start of the
edit session.

Tools
These are equivalent to items to the right of, and indeed inside, the drop-down list box in the
tool bar and have been explained above.

Analyse
This menu contains options to plot and report the IPR results in a similar way to those in the
Single Well IPR. The multi-lateral is treated as one reservoir model option, such as the
multi-layer with dP friction loss. There is also a Calculate option, which brings up the dialog
in the following figure.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 247

The Calculate screen gives the option of calculating one IPR point or a curve. In the former
case pressure can be calculated from a rate or rate from a pressure. In the latter case,
pressure is calculated for a range of rates up to the AOF, as with other IPR calculations.
From this screen it is possible to specify the number of IPR points (maximum 20) and the
minimum pressure to calculate to. These are to help speed up calculations if appropriate.
Results of the points for curve calculation will be reported at the bottom section of the
screen. Also, having a bearing on calculation speed is the switch between infinite and finite
conductivity modes of calculation. In the latter case the pressure drop in the tubing is taken
into account. Before carrying out the calculation, the network structure is validated and any
errors are reported in the white list box in the middle section of the screen. If the structure is
not valid the calculation is not carried out. The Details button is used to display pressure and
rate-related parameters with respect to the measured and vertical tubing depths of each
branch.
During a calculation, diagnostic information is reported to the list box. Also, a Cancel button
is placed above the Calculate button to allow stopping the calculation. The buttons to the
left of the list box perform the functions in the Analyse menu, except Help, which brings up
this section. The push button Done exits the screen.

Visualise
These items are dealt with in the section on visualisation screens.

Preferences

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 248 PROSPER

The preferences dialog is gained from the Preferences item of the frame window menu. It
allows customisation of a set of User-interface variables for subsequent PROSPER
sessions. The following options are available:

Enable Flyover Status Information. If this is checked then a status box appear as the
mouse is moved over the network item icons.

Auto-repeat delay when panning. When panning, the left-hand mouse button may be
held down to auto-repeat the action. The value given in this field represents the time (in
ms) before the auto-repeat action starts from when the mouse button is clicked.

Fraction of screen to pan per click. This represents the resolution of panning.

Zoom/unzoom factor. A single click in a system window while the zoom or unzoom icons
are active results in a fixed scaling to be applied to the view, while the centre of the view
is changed to the position in which the mouse was clicked. The value entered in this field
is the fixed scaling factor, and as such should be greater than one.

Background. The background bitmap that is displayed on the background of the main
window (by default this is a PE logo with contact information) may be changed. Select
the required bitmap by pressing the button to the right of the field. The bitmap will only
be loaded after shut down and restarting the multilateral main screen.

Output
Printer Setup - to set up the printer if not already done.
Print - prints the current child window as a hard-copy, metafile or to the clipboard, whether a
network window or a visualisation screen.

Window Menu
New Window. This creates a new system view. The new view is zoomed out to include
all the components.
Close All. Shuts down all system windows in the application.
Cascade. This reorganises the system windows into a cascade.
Tile. Tiles the system windows.
Toggle toolbar display. This will remove the toolbar if it is currently displayed, and
vice-versa. If the toolbar is not displayed, toolbar commands can be accessed via the
right hand mouse button on the system view window.
Toggle navigator display. Displays or hides the navigator window.

Below this is a list of currently active system windows. The current focus window may be
changed by clicking on one.

Help
Brings up this information on the network interface.

Other Items
Apart from the preferences it is possible to change other aspects of the User interface:
namely font and icon sizes.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 249

Network Fonts
Fonts used in the network drawing may be changed. To do this, select the Fonts option from
the menu obtained following a right hand mouse button click in the system window. This will
bring up a font selection dialog. Select the required font and style and press OK. The new
font will be applied to all network drawings and also to labels in the visualisation windows.

Icon Sizes
The sizes of the icons used to represent the network nodes can be changed. Select the Icon
Sizes option from the menu obtained following a right hand mouse button click in the system
window. The following dialog will appear:

The dialog consists of a slider with a data entry field, which contains the current icon size
(this defaults to 50 out of an arbitrary 0 100 range for a new file). Change the icon size by
adjusting the slider or entering a new size in the entry field. Check the Automatic Update
box to update the system window with the new size as the slider is moved.

When the new icon size is entered, click on This View or All Views. In the latter case the
change will be applied to all network windows. In the former case, only the currently active
network view will be changed. The new icon size will not be saved; i.e. all changes will be
lost when the current file is exited.

7.10.1.2.6 Visualisation Screens

These screens supply three 2-D views (front, side and top) of the 3-D multilateral object.
The salient visual objects (tie-points, junctions, tubing, completions and reservoirs) are
drawn symbolically but they are spaced to scale. The screens are updated whenever a
network item is edited and has a valid data set and whenever an item is deleted or becomes
invalid. The visualisation objects are given the same colour as their equivalent network
objects (e.g. blue for reservoirs), and are identified by the same labels as in the network
structure.

The geometry used is left-handed Cartesian. It is assumed that the positive x axis is along
the direction of zero azimuth, positive y is at 90 degrees and positive z is in the direction of
increasing depth. The front view shows the (x, z) plane, where y is increasing going into the
screen and consequently positive z corresponds to moving down the screen and positive x
corresponds to moving to the right. The side view shows the (y, z) plane, where x increases
coming out of the screen, z increases going down the screen and y increases going to the
right. The top view shows the (y, x) plane where z is increasing going into the screen, x

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 250 PROSPER

increases going down the screen and y increases going to the right.

The screens are brought up using the Visualise menu. One of the three views (front, side
and top) or all of them can be activated using the appropriate menu command. If all the
views are shown then they are tiled with any active network windows. The title bar of each
view window shows the extent of the network for the plane in question. The co-ordinates are
shown with respect to the start of a (hypothetical) straight tubing, which enters the tie-point
in the direction of zero azimuth and has measured and vertical depths equivalent to those of
the tie-points. In a similar way to the network window one can pan across a visualisation
window by moving the mouse cursor close to one of the window edges and clicking on the
left button when the panning cursor appears. The fraction of the screen traversed and the
auto-repeat delay are controlled by the same options as in the network window (chosen from
the Preferences dialog).

Right-hand Mouse Button Menu

Using the right hand mouse button on a view screen one can choose to display the
co-ordinates of any of the visual objects. The displayed coordinates can be written over one
another, it is sometimes better to view them separately. By default, the reservoir depths are
displayed at the start of a session. The next group of functions from this menu contains
zoom, unzoom and restore. The latter option resets the scale factor and the view origins
(which can be moved by panning) to the default values. The zoom factor is the same as that
used for the network window and is set in the Preferences dialog. Finally, the way the
picture is drawn can be altered. Normally, the zooming not only changes the extent of the
drawing seen but also magnifies the objects (network items and text) drawn. Switch off the
magnify mode if zooming into a cluttered area as this will allow more objects to fit in. Also,
the network drawing is normally scaled to fit the window, irrespective of the relative extents
to the two axes. Choosing the draw to scale option stretches the drawing in the direction
with the greater physical extent (so it no longer fits in the window).

7.10.2 Data Entry

7.10.2.1Overview

The data associated with any network item is accessed by double-clicking on its icon when
none of the network manipulation options (zoom/unzoom, delete, move and select) have
been chosen. This brings up a screen with editable data fields in it.

Apart from the tie-point and junction data screens, the main data entry screen for each node
is similar to that of the single well main data entry screen (see Section 7.1). However, the
reservoir data input child screen does not have any tab buttons in it. The main data screens
differ from the single well case in the action buttons: only the left-most group - Done,
Cancel, Reset, Validate and Help - are available. Their function is the same as in the single
well case. Hence, the differences between the single well IPR data entry and the similar
multilateral ones lie in the model selection and data input child screens.

Given the hierarchical nature of the network, editing a parent branch causes the starting
points (e.g. depths) of child branches to be initialised. Those data fields that are initialised
from outside a particular network item are set read-only (coloured cyan) when the screen to
edit that net item is brought up. Hence, in order to edit a net item and fill it with valid data it
is normally necessary to have edited the parent branch first. However, it is not a

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 251

requirement to edit the network in hierarchical order as any child net item can be filled with
invalid data and saved before editing its parent.

Another difference from the single well IPR is that in each screen, on the right hand side,
there is a list box containing a drawing of the network where the data carrying nodes are
sorted hierarchically, by type or alphabetically according to a right-hand mouse button menu
selection. By clicking on the line corresponding to a node the given screen is closed and the
screen belonging to the node clicked on is opened.

7.10.2.2Tie-point and Junction Data

The tie-point data consist of a measured and vertical depth, with an implied azimuth of 0.
The junction data are the same but are read-only. A junction must always be hierarchically
below another network item, so its data are entered automatically from its parent. As
mentioned earlier a junction mainly forms a branching point.

7.10.2.3Tubing Data

Model Selection Screen

The model selection screen for tubing has options to select horizontal and vertical
correlations, choke models, flow types (tubing or annular) and correlation threshold details.
None of the options affect the general format of the data input screen but the flow type
affects the details of the equipment tabbed dialog in the data input screen.

Data Input Screen

There are two tabbed dialogs in this data input screen, which allow the entry of a deviation
survey and equipment descriptions. These dialogs contain tables very similar to the ones
encountered by selecting System | Equipment from the PROSPER main menu and then the
Deviation Survey and Downhole Equipment push buttons. In the case of the deviation
survey there is an additional azimuth entry.

7.10.2.4Completion Data

The completion data screen represents tubing and a completion. Hence, it is a superset of
the tubing data screen and is the same except for one extra tabbed dialog in the data input
screen, for completion data. This dialog has fields in it similar to the single well IPR
Wong-Clifford model for describing a deviated completion (completion zone start and end
measured and true depths) as well as a field for entering a local (mechanical/geometric) skin
value. There is a drop-down list box in the fifth column, which allows the skin to be
calculated using the Karakas & Tariq method. The selection of Karakas and Tariq enables
the push button in the last column, which brings up an appropriate data entry screen when
clicked upon with the mouse left button. On entering valid data and exiting that screen with
Done the skin value is calculated and entered in the skin data column.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 252 PROSPER

7.10.2.5Reservoir Data

Model Selection Screen

The model selection screen contains a model selection list box for selecting a Darcy-like
reservoir model as well as several data entry fields for entering PVT and geometrical data
used by all the models.

Data Input Screen

The data input screens contain a single sub-dialog pertaining to the model chosen. These
are similar to the equivalent models in the single well case.

Consistency Validation
Beyond the consistency enforced by the validation of individual network items as they are
edited and the automatic entry of some child branch data from parents, there are other
checks carried out on a complete structure whose nodes are individually valid:

There must be no more than one tie-point in a network; other loose items are ignored.
The top node must be a tie-point.
All branches must end in a completion; completions must be attached to at least one
reservoir.
Reservoirs should not overlap in depth (in the current model they are assumed to be
layers).

7.10.3 Example of How to Set Up a Simple System

7.10.3.1Introduction

The purpose of this exercise is to enter some geometrical data for the simple multilateral in
the following back of an envelope sketch (Figure 7.58) and then visualise it using the V
isualise menu. It is assumed that the fluid selected is Oil and Water and the units system
is oilfield units. We will also show the procedure for running a calculation, to which purpose
some default PVT and geometric data should be entered in the reservoir screens. The
multilateral has two branches, with one branch having an azimuth of 170 with respect to the
other. The zig-zag lines indicate completions and the areas between the horizontal
straight-lines are layers/reservoirs. Note that one tubing branch contains two completions
and goes through two reservoirs. This will be modelled as one completion node and
logically attached to two reservoirs. The point at (12000, 10000) feet will serve as a
tie-point.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 253

(0, 0) = (measured depth, vertical depth)

(12000, 10000)
10000 feet (12100, 10020)
(12200, 10020)
Kh = 100 mD

(12400, 10100)
10100 feet

Azimuth = 170 deg.

Azimuth = 0 deg.

10200 feet
(13000, 10210) (13000, 10220)
Kh = 50 mD

(14000, 10220)

(14000, 10280)
10300 feet

Figure 758 Sketch of a Multi-lateral Network

7.10.3.2Place the Nodes in the Network Window

The nodes needed are one tie-point (as always), a junction (to model the branching), two
completions (although there are three zones, the data for two will be contained in one node),
and two reservoirs. Each node can be selected from one of the following:

1. Using the Tools | Add Item option in the frame window menu.

2. Clicking on the appropriate icon in the toolbar.

3. Selecting the required option from the drop-down list box in the toolbar.

4. Using the right hand mouse button menu.

Once the appropriate node addition option has been selected, click somewhere in the blank
network window to create an icon. Allow the programme to attach a default label to the
node by not entering one. Do this for all the required nodes listed above.

7.10.3.3Connect the Nodes

Before doing the connections, space the nodes and arrange them in height order with the
tie-point at the top, followed by the junction, followed by the completions and put the
reservoirs at the bottom. Keep the completions and reservoirs at the same horizontal level
with C1 and R1 on the left. Now select the link option and drag the mouse cursor (with the
left button down) between the following icons in order to make the connections: TP1-J1,

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 254 PROSPER

J1-C1, J1-C2, C1-R1, C2-R1 and C2-R2. Note that between the tie-point and the junction a
tubing icon is drawn to indicate that this link contains tubing data. The order of the
connections J1-C1 and J2-C2 are important for the reverse would imply that the completions
were above the junction hierarchically.

7.10.3.4Enter the Data

To enter data, double-click on an icon to bring up a screen.

Tie-point (TP1)
Enter 12000 feet and 10000 feet for measured and vertical depth respectively and then click
on Done.

Tubing (T1)
Make sure that Flow Type is Tubing Flow on the model selection screen and a suitable
value (0.354 ft) is entered for well-bore radius. Then leave the model selection screen with
its other defaults and enter the data input screen using the button Input Data in the top right
hand corner. In the Deviation tabbed dialog enter the three numbers:

12100 10020 0

in the white boxes in row 2. Now enter the Equipment tabbed dialog by clicking on that
tab. In row 1 choose Tubing from the drop-down list box and then enter the four numbers:

12100 0.7 0.0006 1

in the white boxes in row 1. Click on Done to finish.

Junction (J1)
The co-ordinates (12100, 10020) should already be entered in the junction net item.

Completions (C1 and C2)

The model selection screens should be as with T1 except a Dietz shape factor should be
entered (e.g. 31.6). The other screens should have their white spaces filled as follows. In
the equipment screens the first row drop-down list box should always be set to Tubing.

C1 Deviation
13000 10210 170 (row 2)
14000 10280 170 (row 3)
C1 Equipment
14000 0.7 0.0006 1 (row 1)
C1 Completion Info.
13000 14000 10210 10280 1 (row 1)

C2 Deviation
12400 10100 0 (row 2)
13000 10220 0 (row 3)
14000 10220 0 (row 4)
C2 Equipment

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 IPR Data Input 255

14000 0.7 0.0006 1 (row 1)

C2 Completion Info.
12200 12400 10020 10100 1 (row 1)
13000 14000 10220 10220 1 (row 2)

Reservoirs (R1 and R2)

For both reservoirs select Darcy as the model. The edit fields for entry of the data for this
model should appear on clicking on Input Data. In order to agree with the specifications of
the sketch enter the following data:
R1
Reservoir Top Depth: 10200 feet
Reservoir Permeability: 50 md
Reservoir Thickness: 100 feet
R2
Reservoir Top Depth: 10000 feet
Reservoir Permeability: 100 md
Reservoir Thickness: 100 feet

The other fields in the model selection and data input screens (for both reservoirs) should be
entered with some reasonable numbers. For example: pressure (5000), temperature (200),
salinity (150000), water cut (15), GOR (800), gas gravity (0.9), oil gravity (30), vertical
permeability (10) and drainage area (500).

7.10.3.5Visualise / Calculate

Choosing Visualise |Front should show a picture similar to the one in the sketch in Figure
7-55.
Also, providing the data has been entered correctly, the network structure should be valid;
this can be verified by going to the screen brought up by the Analyse| Calculate menu
command and choosing one of the calculations.
Note that this exercise is not meant to represent a real case but only a reasonable set of
data that the program can process.

The comments below will describe what calculations are performed when a system
calculation needs to be performed and the Multilateral model is used.

a) PROSPER uses the already generated IPR with Analyze | Calculate | Calculate to
get the intersection between VLP and IPR first.

b) The solution FBHP from step a) is then used to refine the solution rate by performing
a single point calculation like Analyze | Calculate | Calculate | Calculation One
Point and this point uses the solution flowing bottom hole pressure

This means that whenever a change is made, the Analyze | Calculate | Calculate routine
needs to be re-run before performing a system calculation so that an updated IPR can be
used.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

Chapter

8
 Artificial Lift Data Input 257

8 Artificial Lift Data Input

This section describes how to enter the description of artificial lift equipment in a well for
calculating a systems analysis. The Design section describes how to select suitable gas lift,
ESP, HSP, PCP and jet pump equipment for new or existing wells.

8.1 Gas Lift Input Data

This option is available only when Gas Lift has been selected as the lift method in the
Options menu. To analyse an existing gas lifted well, the equipment details must be entered
in the Gas Lift Data section that becomes viewable after selecting gas lift from Options. To
design a new gas lift installation, skip the System Gaslift data menu and go directly to
Design Gaslift Design (New Well). Note that the gas lift design section has been revised to
give users greater flexibility in choice of design methods.

The required input depends on the choice of casing pressure calculation method. These are
the options available that can be selected in the general options:

No Friction Loss in Annuls

No flowing pressure losses occur in the annulus. A static gas gradient in the
casing is assumed. This model should be used for the majority of gas lift
installations.

Friction Loss in Annuls

The friction pressure drop in the casing is calculated. Input of both tubing
O.D. and casing I.D. is required to define the annulus geometry.

Safety Equipment
Friction pressure losses are calculated in the surface piping, tubing/casing
annulus and an annular safety valve where fitted.

To analyse an existing installation, the gas lift details that need to be entered will depend
upon the particular gas lift method that has been selected.

Firstly select the gas lift system type on the Options menu, then enter the gaslift data by
selecting Gaslift data on the System menu.
Enter the required lift gas composition data. It is possible to model CO2 or N2 as the
injected gas. For example, to model CO2 injection enter Gaslift Gas Gravity = 1.53 and Mole
percent CO2 = 100%.

Select one of three gas lift methods available. The methods currently available are:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 258 PROSPER

8.1.1 Fixed Depth Of Injection

When this method is selected, only the depth of injection will be asked for.

The program assumes that the casing pressure is sufficient to inject lift gas at the
specified depth to achieve the GLR injection target.

The GLR injected can be subsequently overwritten with entered calculation sensitivity
variables. If the GLR injected is unknown, leave it set to zero. The GLR to inject is set using
Sensitivity variables GLR injected or Injection gas rate in the Calculation section.

8.1.2 Optimum Depth of Injection

When this method is selected enter the maximum depth of injection, the dP across the gas
lift valve and the top casing pressure and PROSPER will iterate to calculate the optimum
injection depth for changing well conditions.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Artificial Lift Data Input 259

For the Gas lifted (safety equipment) option, the compressor discharge pressure is
requested instead of the casing pressure.

Use Optimum Depth of Injection to evaluate the potential increase in production

due to gas lift without the need to perform a detailed design and spacing the
unloading valves.

8.1.3 Valve Depth Specified

Enter the measured depth of the gas lift valves. The program automatically calculates which
valve opens for particular liquid and gas injection rates.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 260 PROSPER

If a gas lift design has already been done, or the mandrel depths have been entered for a
Gaslift QuickLook Calculation, the valve details can be copied across using the Transfer
button.

The Casing pressure entered should be the available injection system pressure
for the current operating conditions If calculating sensitivities for a new casing
pressure operated design, always subtract the dP to close valves for each
unloading valve above the operating valve from the design casing pressure.

8.1.4 Gas Lift (Safety Equipment)

For the Gas Lifted (safety equipment) option, the annular safety valve pressure losses are
calculated using the valve depth and bean diameter entered on the System Gaslift Data
screen as follows:

The safety equipment data can be entered by accessing the Safety Equipment button in this
screen.
The details of the surface injection system are used to calculate the casing head pressure
as a function of gas injection rate and compressor output pressure. Frictional losses in the
annulus are taken into account when calculating the casing pressure at each gas lift valve
depth. The safety valve pressure loss is clearly seen on the following gradient plot:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Artificial Lift Data Input 261

8.1.5 Gas Lift (Allow injection in Pipe Line above wellhead)

This option implemented allows to model gas injection in a pipeline. To enable this option,
select Pipeline Only in the Options Summary and Gas Lift in the Artificial Lift method.

To specify the position of the gas lift valve, in the surface equipment data select this feature
in the equipment type combo box , as shown below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 262 PROSPER

And in the Gas Lift Data enter the properties of the gas and the GLR injected:

It is possible to model CO2 or N2 as the injected gas. For Example, to model CO2
injection enter the Gaslift Gas Gravity as 1.53 and enter Mole percent CO2 as
100%.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Artificial Lift Data Input 263

8.2 ESP Input Data

If Electrical Submersible Pump has been selected as the well lift method on the Options
screen, then Electric Submersible Pumps. will be active on the System input menu. If a new
ESP design is being performed, the equipment has not yet been sized, so skip the ESP
Input section entirely and move directly to Design on the main PROSPER tool bar. For
analysis and optimisation of an existing ESP installation, enter the data on the ESP input
data screen as requested:

The Pump wear factor is used to account for deviation from the manufacturer's published
performance curves due to wear etc.

For example, entering 0.05 causes the program to scale the pump head curves
down by 5% (i.e. head is 95% of the database value).

Entering 0 causes the program to use the database curves directly.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 264 PROSPER

A negative number can be entered to simulate a particular pump that performs

better than the database curve.

When a downhole gas separator is run, the GOR of the oil above the separator will be lower
than the produced oil GOR. Depending on the completion, the separated gas is produced
up the annulus or a separate tubing string. Both casing I.D. and tubing O.D. are required to
be input on the System Equipment Downhole Equipment.

8.3 HSP Input Data

If Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pump has been selected as the well lift method on the Options
screen, then Hydraulic Submersible Pumps will be active on the System input menu. If a
new HPS design is being done, the equipment has not yet been sized, so skip the HSP Input
section entirely and select Design from the main PROSPER tool bar. For analysis and
optimisation of an existing HSP installation, enter the data on the HSP input data screen as
requested:

The Pump wear factor is defined as in the ESP pumps, as seen in the previous section.

Turbine speed is assumed to be the same as the Pump speed. The % Power Fluid of

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Artificial Lift Data Input 265

Reservoir Fluid defines what fraction of the total produced liquids the power fluid represents.

A figure of 100% means that the amount of power fluid used to drive the turbine is
the same as the amount of produced reservoir fluids.

8.4 Progressive Cavity Pumps

If the PCP option has been selected as the well lift method on the Options screen,
then the progressive cavity Pump option will be active on the System input menu.
If a new PCP design is being done, the equipment has not yet been sized, so skip the PCP
Input section entirely and select Design from the main PROSPER menu. For analysis and
optimisation of an existing PCP installation, enter the data on the PCP input data screen as
requested:

In order to select the correspondent pump and rods, the pump database must be set up first.
The section devoted to the PCP design will describe how to enter the correspondent pump
and rods database.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 266 PROSPER

8.5 Coiled Tubing Gas Lift

This option is available only when Gas Lift with coil tubing is selected as the lift method in
the Options menu.

To analyse an existing installation, enter the data in the Coiled Tubing Data section, as
shown below:

Two lift methods are available: Specified Injection Depth and Optimum Injection Depth.
Please refer to the Gas Lift section above for further details.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Artificial Lift Data Input 267

8.6 Diluent Injection

This technology is used to enhance the production of heavy, viscous crude oil, in some
cases making previously not producible hydrocarbon reserves economically recoverable.

With diluent injection, the light hydrocarbon diluent reduces crude viscosity and improves its
flow characteristics.

When Diluent injection is selected as Artificial Lift Method, Diluent Injection is active in the S
ystem menu.
The only input data required are injection rate and depth:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 268 PROSPER

8.7 Jet Pumps

If Jet Pump has been selected as the well lift method on the Options screen, then Jet Pumps
will be active on the System input menu. If a new Jet Pump design is being done, the
equipment has not yet been sized, so skip the Jet Pump Input section entirely and select
Design from the main PROSPER tool bar.

For analysis and optimisation of an existing Jet Pump installation, enter the data on the input
data screen as requested:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Artificial Lift Data Input 269

In this section the User has to select the Pump and enter specify its position and maximum
size along with injection rate and pressure.
The loss coefficients are also required. These coefficients are a measure of the energy loss
due to the friction in the above quoted sections of the pump.
The coefficients are provided by the Jet Pump manufacturers.

8.8 Multiphase Pumps

When Multiphase Pump (FRAMO Pumps) has been selected as the well lift method on the
Options screen, to perform the analysis and optimisation of an existing FRAMO Pump
installation, enter the data on the input data screen as requested:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 270 PROSPER

The Pump Wear Factor is defined in the same way as in the ESP pumps. Please refer to
that section for details.
Other input data are the power available, the pump configuration (single pump or pumps in
parallel) and the pump model.

8.9 Sucker Rod Pumps

If Sucker Rod Pump has been selected as the well lift method on the Options screen, then
Sucker Rod Pumps will be active on the System input menu.
If a new SRP design is being performed, the equipment has not yet been sized, so skip the
Sucker Rod Pumps Input section entirely and move directly to Design on the main
PROSPER tool bar.
For analysis and optimisation of an existing SRP installation, enter the data in the System
Sucker Rod Pumps input data screen as requested:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Artificial Lift Data Input 271

The input data screen is directly connected to the database for the Sucker Rod Pumps.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

Chapter

9
 Matching Menu 273

9 Matching Menu
The PROSPER Matching menu is mainly used for the following objectives:

- Input data and model quality control

- Fine adjustment of the model parameters to enable well models to reproduce
observed data
- In case of artificial lift, system diagnostics and troubleshooting

A properly matched model is a pre-requisite for accurate performance prediction.

The Quality Control exercises like Correlation comparison are based on

what is possible according to the principles of fundamental physics.

The Matching menu offers the following calculation options:

VLP / IPR Matching

This option enables the User to tune the well bore multiphase flow correlations to fit
measured downhole pressures and rates. Up to 1000 well tests can be stored and
used for matching purposes.
Once the VLP is matched, the IPR can be adjusted to match observed rates and
pressures also.

Gradient Matching
Existing correlations can be modified using non-linear regression to best fit a
gradient survey. Comparison of the fit parameters will identify which correlation
required the least adjustment to match the measured data.

This should be used only if for a given rate more than one measurement is
available along the production string.

Pipeline Matching
The program uses actual wellhead and manifold pressures together with
temperature data points to match surface pressure drop correlations. Separate
screens allow the match parameters to be viewed and the best match selected.

Correlation Comparison
This is the primary step in quality control of measured well test data.
This option allows pressure gradient plots to be generated with different correlations
to be compared with measured gradient survey data. The comparison enables the
User to:
- Understand if the measurements make sense, that is to say, violate or not
the principles of physics

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 274 PROSPER

- Select the flow correlation that best fits the experimental measurement
Correlation Comparison is a fundamental step in the quality check of the model.

QuickLook
This feature is active only if an artificial lift method (Gas Lift, ESP or HSP) is
selected.
It allows calculation of the pressure gradient in an artificially lifted well for a quick
check of lift performance.

For gas lifted wells, valve opening and closing pressures are calculated to permit
troubleshooting gas lift installations.

For ESP and HSP wells, the performance of the ESP and HSP can be checked.

Correlation Parameters
The tubing and pipeline match parameters can be inspected reset or entered by
hand using this menu option. This capability is useful for troubleshooting, or to input
match parameters determined previously.

Correlation Thresholds
This option allows the User to specify a threshold angle for both tubing and pipeline
correlations at which the program will automatically change to another (specified)
correlation. This option will enable vertical risers in sub sea completions to be
modelled more accurately.

VLP Matching is not available for Enthalpy Balance temperature model

applications. For Enthalpy Balance applications requiring VLP matching,
use the Predicting Pressure Only, or the Rough/Improved Approximation
temperature model, to perform the correlation matching. Once the
matching operation has been completed, return to System and re-activate
the Enthalpy Balance option. The VLP match parameters will be carried
over.

9.1 VLP/IPR Match and Quality Check

This feature enables the User to adjust the multiphase flow correlations to match
flowing bottom hole pressure surveys or production logging runs.
Up to 1000 pressure tests can be stored and used for matching. VLP/IPR Match
allows data to be matched over a range of rates as well as depths.

The Gas Oil Ratio is the solution GOR. If the reservoir is under-saturated,
there is no free gas production at the sand face and the GOR free should

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 275

be set to zero.

The Gas Oil Ratio can also be entered as Total GOR (Solution + Free
GOR). In this case the GOR Free can be entered as nil. The program will
determine how much gas is in solution and how much in the free phase
according to the PVT.

The required input data are:

A comment can be entered for the test. Also, each test can be
Test Point Date and
associated to a date stamp
Comment
Flowing pressure for test rate entered.
Tubing Head Pressure
Flowing temperature at test rate. Usually has only a minor effect.
Tubing Head Temperature
Test water cut. (WGR for Gas or Condensate)
Water Cut
Enter either Oil or Liquid rates as selected. (Oil Wells Only)
Rate
Depth of measured pressure data point.
Gauge Depth
Measured pressure at test flow rate.
Gauge Pressure

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 276 PROSPER

Pressure of the reservoir when the test was taken. This field will not be
Reservoir Pressure
displayed if your IPR model is Multi Layer or Multi Lateral
Solution GOR (Oil) , CGR (Gas) or Separator GOR (Condensate)
GOR
Free gas production from a gas cap or injection breakthrough. The
GOR Free
measured total GOR during the test (including the tank gas) must equal
GOR + GOR Free. (Oil Well Only)
Rate of lift gas injection (gas lifted wells only).
Gaslift Gas Rate
Depth of operating valve (gas lifted wells only) .A good bottom hole
Injection Depth
pressure match will not be obtained if an incorrect injection depth is
used.
ESP lifted wells only
Operating Frequency
ESP Lifted wells only
Pump Wear Factor

The Test Point Date and Comment fields are provided to allow the optional entry of
notes to identify the match data set. Examples would be test date, source of
pressure data, comments on test quality etc.

This input screen has a number of features to simplify data manipulation. The
selection buttons on the left hand side are used to select data points for further
editing. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the required buttons to select multiple
points. Copy copies the selected points into memory and onto the Windows
clipboard. Click the selection button of the desired destination and click Paste to
copy the data to the new location. Insert shifts the data down to make room for new
entries. The Delete button deletes the selected records. Data from this table can be
copied to or from the Windows clipboard. Therefore, test data can be read in from a
Windows based spreadsheet by first copying it to the clipboard, and then pasting it
directly into the table.

Bad or inconsistent data points occasionally prevent the program obtaining a good
match. The Disable button causes a selected data record to be ignored in the
matching process. Disabled records are dimmed in the VLP matching screen.
Disabled points can be re-included in the matching process by first selecting the
point and clicking on Enable. By sequentially disabling suspect data points,
potentially inaccurate test points can be identified and eliminated from the match.

If the temperature prediction method is Rough Approximation, the User

can now use the Estimate U value button to estimate the overall heat
transfer coefficient for the selected well test. The procedure is:
Click on the button to the left of the well test data that we wish to
estimate the overall heat transfer coefficient.
Click on the Estimate U value button
PROSPER will estimate the overall heat transfer coefficient that

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 277

matches the wellhead temperature of the well test.

The User can then go to the Geothermal Gradient section to change
the overall heat transfer coefficient value.

The User can now use the Correlation Comparison button to transfer the
selected well test data to the correlation comparison section. The
procedure is:
Click on the button to the left of the well test data that we wish to
perform correlation comparison on.
Click on the Correlation Comparison button
PROSPER will bring us to the correlation comparison screen and at
the same time, populate the correlation comparison screen with the
selected well test data.

New!!! In the current version of PROSPER for each well test it is possible
to enter a date stamp and the reservoir pressure at the time of the test.

This feature can be used to store the actual reservoir conditions and allow
the User to get back in time and check old tests.

NEW!!! Accessing QuickLook

When Gas Lift, ESP, or HSP artificial lift method is in use, from the VLP/IPR
matching screen it is possible to access the QuickLook section

9.1.1 VLP Matching

To compute the VLP match, click Match VLP to display the VLP matching screen.
Select the correlations to match or just click All to match all correlations. An example
screen is shown below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 278 PROSPER

Click the Statistics button to examine the match parameters as shown on the
example screen below:

If necessary, match parameters can be edited or directly entered on this screen.

This should be done with extreme caution and only if previous work on similar wells
has yielded consistent match parameters or to apply match parameters for the same
well in a different PROSPER application.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 279

PROSPER uses a non-linear regression to tune the VLP correlations to best match
the measured data. It does this by calculating a pressure traverse using a
correlation and determining the error between measured and calculated pressures.
The gravity and friction terms of the pressure loss equations are then adjusted and
the process repeated until the measured and calculated results agree within 1 psi, or
50 iterations have been completed.

Notes on Matching Parameters

Parameter 1 is the multiplier for the gravity term in the pressure drop
correlation
Parameter 2 is the multiplier for the friction term.
If all the data are consistent, these two parameters should be within a 10%
tolerance from the unity.
If PROSPER has to adjust Parameter 1 by more than +-10%, then there is
probably an inconsistency between the fluid density predicted by the PVT
model and the field data (rates/pressures).
If PROSPER has to adjust Parameter 2 by more than +-10%, then probably
the value of the roughness entered in the equipment is incorrect.

In cases the PVT has been correctly matched, the greatest source of uncertainty in
the VLP calculation for oil wells is usually the hold-up correlation. PROSPER will
attempt to make a gravity component (Parameter 1) match by adjusting the hold-up
correlation. If a match is not obtained with a Parameter 1 more than 5% away from
1.0, the density is adjusted. For single phase applications, no hold-up correction is
possible, so any significant deviation from 1.0 for Parameter 1 indicates a PVT
problem.

If Parameter 2 requires a large correction, then it is likely that the equipment

description is in error, or the flow rates are incorrect. As the effect of a shift in the
friction component on the overall pressure loss is less than for the gravity term, a
larger range in the value of Parameter 2 is expected.

Once the matching process is complete, the match parameters will be shown
alongside each of the correlations that have been matched. Use the standard
deviations and the magnitude of corrections made to both parameters to aid the
selection of matched correlation.

Use the Correlation Comparison option of the Matching menu to compare the
optimised (matched) correlations with measured test data. To ensure that the
process has been successful, check that the matched VLP traverses plot close to
the measured pressure data points.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 280 PROSPER

PROSPER VLP matching provides a logically consistent means to adjust flow

correlations to reproduce field measured pressures. Combined with IPR
matching, PROSPER provides the means to create a robust well model that is
capable of reproducing observed pressures and rates. This is a necessary
condition for making accurate performance predictions and optimisation
studies.

9.1.1.1 VLP Correlation Applications

Fancher Brown is a no-slip hold-up correlation that is provided for use as a quality
control. It gives the lowest possible value of VLP since it neglects gas/liquid slip it
should always predict a pressure, which is less than the measured value. Even if it
gives a good match to the measured down hole pressures, Fancher Brown should
not be used for quantitative work. Measured data falling to the left of Fancher
Brown on the correlation comparison plot indicates a problem with fluid density (i.e.
PVT) or field pressure data. This is thus essentially, a correlation for quality
control purposes.

For oil wells, Hagedorn Brown performs well for slug flow at moderate to high
production rates but well loading is poorly predicted. Hagedorn Brown should not be
used for condensates and whenever mist flow is the main flow regime. Hagedorn
Brown under predicts VLP at low rates and should not be used for predicting
minimum stable rates.

Duns and Ros Modified usually performs well in mist flow cases and should be
used in high GOR oil and condensate wells. It tends to over-predict VLP in oil wells.
Despite this, the minimum stable rate indicated by the minimum of the VLP curve is
often a good estimate.

Duns and Ros Original is the original published method, without the enhancements
applied in the primary Duns and Ros correlation. The primary Duns and Ros
correlation in PROSPER has been enhanced and optimised for use with
condensates.

Petroleum Experts correlation combines the best features of existing correlations. It uses
the Gould et al flow map and the Hagedorn Brown correlation in slug flow, and Duns
and Ros for mist flow. In the transition regime, a combination of slug and mist
results is used.

Petroleum Experts 2 includes the features of the PE correlation plus original work on
predicting low-rate VLPs and well stability.

Petroleum Experts 3 includes the features of the PE2 correlation plus original work for
viscous, volatile and foamy oils.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 281

Petroleum Experts 4 is an advanced mechanistic model for any angled wells (including
downhill flow) suitable for any fluid (including Retrograde Condensate).

Orkiszewski correlation often gives a good match to measured data. However, its
formulation includes a discontinuity in its calculation method. The discontinuity can
cause instability during the pressure matching process; therefore we do not
encourage its use.

Beggs and Brill is primarily a pipeline correlation. It generally over-predicts

pressure drops in vertical and deviated wells.

Gray correlation gives good results in gas wells for condensate ratios up to around
50 bbl/MMscf and high produced water ratios. Gray contains its own internal PVT
model which over-rides PROSPERs normal PVT calculations.

Hydro 3P (internal) is a mechanistic model and considers three phase flow.

For very high liquid dropout wells, use a Retrograde Condensate PVT and
the Duns and Ros correlation.

There is no universal rule for selecting the best flow correlation for a given
application. It is recommended that the Correlation Comparison always be
carried out. By inspecting the predicted flow regimes and pressure results,
the User can select the correlation that best models the physical situation.

Further details can be found in the PROSPER Help menu, under HelpFlow
Correlations. References about multiphase flow are reported in Appendix B.

9.1.2 IPR Matching

This feature allows the User to check the consistency of the flowing bottom hole
pressure data used in the VLP match and to adjust the IPR, if required, to match
measured data. Inconsistencies in test data resulting from e.g. changing reservoir
pressures can be easily identified.
Clicking VLP/IPR from the VLP/IPR Matching screen will display the following VLP
Matching Adjust IPR screen:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 282 PROSPER

Select the desired correlation and then click Calculate, and PROSPER will calculate
the VLP for a range of rates and pressure at the sand face for each of the active test
points that have been entered on the VLP Matching screen. Once this calculation is
completed, click Plot and the VLP/IPR plot will be displayed along with the test point:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 283

The errors between calculated and measured data are shown on the side of the plot.
If the test points are not consistent with the IPR model, the skin, etc. can be
adjusted until a match is obtained. To modify the data of the IPR, select IPR, which
will access the IPR input screen.

NEW!!! During the adjustment of the IPR, to modify the value of the
Reservoir Pressure, change the reservoir pressure entered in the test data
screen

Inconsistent test data points will be easily identified on this plot. Clicking Finish
returns to the Adjust IPR screen. Matching both the VLP and IPR to actual test data
ensures that the PROSPER well model is capable of accurately reproducing the
currently known producing conditions.

An IPR is required when automatic rate calculation is used for VLP or

system calculations. IPR data must be present before commencing a
VLP/IPR Match.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 284 PROSPER

NEW!!! In the VLP Matching - Adjust IPR screen the option to

allow/disallow Left-Hand Intersection is available. This option can be used
in cases like Gas Coning

9.2 Gradient Matching

This facility enables to modify the existing correlations to fit to a measured pressure
gradient survey. It can also be used, as a quality control to identify which correlation
required the least adjustment to obtain a fit. From the Matching menu, select G
radient (traverse) matching. The following screen will appear:

The first node pressure is entered in the Input Parameters section - do not include it
in the Match Data table. The Transfer button copies the measured gradient data
from the Correlation comparison data. The same guidelines for GOR apply as for
VLP/IPR Matching. Enter the required data and click Match. The following will be
displayed:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 285

Select the correlations to be matched by clicking on them, and then click Match to
start the matching routine. Parameter 1 is the correction factor applied to the gravity
component of pressure drop whilst Parameter 2 is the factor applied to the frictional
element of pressure drop. The match algorithm continues until the standard error is
less than 1 psi, or 50 iterations have been performed. The adjusted correlation and
measured pressures can be visually compared by clicking Plot. A graph similar to
the following is displayed:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 286 PROSPER

The match points appear as blue squares in the figure reported above.
The calculated pressure gradient can be inspected by clicking View. Click the S
tatistics button to display the match parameters. Use the statistics and knowledge of
well conditions and correlation performance to guide the choice of VLP correlation.
Once a correlation has been matched, the match parameters are appended to the
correlation name for all subsequent operations. Should it be necessary to adjust or
clear the match parameters, click the Reset button for a particular correlation, or use
the Reset All button to reset all correlations to their un-matched state.

Best results are usually obtained by using VLP matching. Gradient

matching should only be used for specialised artificial lift applications and
where many pressure Vs depth data points are available.

9.3 Surface Pipe Matching

This option is used to match measured data with the calculated pressure drop from
the wellhead to the manifold. This option is useful only if surface equipment has
been entered in System Equipment. Select Surface pipe matching from the M
atching menu to display the following input screen:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 287

The User can now use the Correlation Comparison button to transfer the
selected pipeline test data to the pipeline correlation comparison section.
The procedure is:
Click on the button to the left of the pipeline test data that we wish to
perform correlation comparison on.
Click on the Correlation Comparison button
PROSPER will bring us to the pipeline correlation comparison screen
and at the same time, populate the correlation comparison screen
with the selected pipeline test data.

Enter measured manifold and tubing head pressures for a range of rates and click M
atch to enter the calculation screen. Select the correlations to match in the same
manner as for Gradient matching. All editing and calculation controls operate as
described under Gradient matching. Once the matching is complete, click OK to
return to the main menu.

If the system description has no elevation difference between the wellhead

and manifold, there can be no gravitational component of the correlated
pressure drop. Therefore, Parameter 1 cannot be optimised, so it remains
at the default value of 1.0 for such cases.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 288 PROSPER

9.4 Correlation Comparison

This module allows a pressure gradient (traverse) to be calculated at a specified
surface rate using any of the standard correlations. Actual measured pressures can
be input and plotted on the same graph for comparison with the pressure calculated
from the correlations. The correlations may be modified or unmodified (Matched or
Unmatched).

Click Matching Correlation comparison to display the following data entry screen:

Note that in Correlation comparison, the first node is the wellhead only if
there is no surface equipment or it has been disabled.

Enter the surface flowing conditions at which to compare the flowing gradients
calculations for the selected Vertical Lift correlations. Select a surface equipment

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 289

correlation then click on the required Vertical Lift correlations to select a number of
them from the list. Please remember that the lowest and highest pressure drops are
given by Fancher and Brown (no slip) and Duns and Ross Modified (highest
pressure drop in the slug flow regime) for oil wells. These can serve as quality check
boundaries for downhole measurements. Fancher Brown should never be used for
actual calculations.

Ensure that the rate type is correct for the specific application.
The value of GOR should reflect the current solution GOR and at no time
should exceed the initial solution GOR.
The GOR Free variable is used to model the effect of free gas production
from a gas cap or injection gas breakthrough. Leave GOR Free set to zero
if there is no free gas production.
The sum of GOR and GOR Free should equal the producing GOR.

Pressure data from a gradient survey can be entered versus depth in the measured
data boxes. The Transfer button copies the measured depths and pressures from
the Gradient Match section.

For gas lifted wells, both the injection depth and gas lift injection rate are
required to be input.
Note that the producing GOR should not include the lift gas injection.

When the input data is complete, click on Calculate to display the calculations
screen, then press the Calculate button to compute the pressure gradient in tabular
form as shown below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 290 PROSPER

The results of individual correlations can be examined sequentially by clicking the

arrows beside the Correlation field.

For all the correlation selected for calculations, use the scroll thumb below the
results box to access the results of calculations.

PROSPER displays the following parameters as a function of depth:

Temperature, Pressure.
Total Pressure Gradient, Static gradient, Friction Gradient.
Flow regime, Liquid Hold up, Water Hold up, cumulative hold ups.
Slip Liquid Velocity, Superficial Liquid Velocity, Slip Gas Velocity, Superficial
Gas Velocity, Slip Water Velocity, Superficial Water Velocity.
Mixture Density, Gas density, Oil density, Water density.
Frictional Pressure Loss, Gravity Pressure Loss
Pipe Diameter, Angle of the tubing From Vertical, calculation Node Length
Liquid Viscosity, Gas Viscosity, water viscosity, oil viscosity, Gas-Liquid IFT,
Gas-Water IFT, Gas-Oil IFT, Oil-Water IFT
C Factor and the max size of sand grain that can be transported
Cumulative volumes of phases till that depth.

A visual comparison of all selected correlations and the test data is easily made by

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 291

clicking on the Plot button. The plot can be output or saved using the standard
features of PROSPER and Windows. An example comparison plot is shown below:

This plot is a useful quality check on the PVT and field production data. The
Fancher Brown correlation does not allow for gas/liquid slippage, therefore it should
always predict a pressure that is less than the measured value. Measured data
falling to the left of Fancher Brown on the gradient comparison plot indicates a
problem with fluid density (i.e. PVT) or the field data (pressure or rate). The use of
the gradient comparison plot is recommended to help identify flow regimes and
assess input data quality.

9.5 QuickLook for Gas Lift

The QuickLook option is based on the principle of calculating well pressure traverses
in opposite directions beginning from known conditions at the surface and sand face.
If the assumptions regarding well conditions (e.g. gas injection rates and depth,
water cuts, IPR etc.) are correct, the two calculated traverses would overlay.

Troubleshooting a gas lifted well is performed by considering a range of

assumptions, until a consistent calculation model can be obtained. By varying

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 292 PROSPER

artificial lift and production parameters in turn, the experienced User can determine if
the well is behaving as designed, or identify potential reasons to explain the
deviation from design conditions.

9.5.1 Input
The gas lift QuickLook is accessed from the Matching menu. Clicking QuickLook
from the Matching menu displays the following screen:

The surface measurements section contains two columns for data input.

For analysing a particular well at a particular flowing condition, enter data in

the Minimum column only.

For unstable wells, enter the minimum and maximum conditions to be

considered. The program will calculate using average values.

If unloading valve details have been entered, their opening and closing pressures will
be shown on the plot also.

The parameters required to be entered are:

Tubing head pressure Enter expected flowing pressure for the well.

Tubing head temperature Used only for comparison purposes.

Liquid rate Enter current flow rate.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 293

Water cut Enter current value.

Total gas rate Enter total gas production through the separator - including the lift gas
contained in the produced well stream.

Gas injection rate Enter current injection rate.

Casing head pressure Enter current surface gas injection pressure.

Orifice diameter Enter diameter of orifice where gas is entering the string. This diameter
is used to estimate the pressure drop between casing and tubing at the
injection depth. For wells having multiple injecting orifices at the same
depth, enter an equivalent area.

Injection depth Enter expected depth of injection.

Vertical flow correlation Select the most appropriate correlation for the application. Use a
matched correlation where available.

Dome Pressure Correction When set to Yes, the improved high-pressure dome pressure
above 1200 psi temperature method is used.

To compare measured and calculated pressures to those calculated by the Q

uickLook, click Downhole, and enter the pressure survey data in the following
screen:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 294 PROSPER

The purpose of this section is to check that all the data is consistent. The static
gradient can also be displayed on the plot by entering two static pressure
measurement points. Downhole measurement entry is optional.

If a static pressure is entered on the downhole measurement screen, this

will be used to calculate the sand face pressure from the IPR.

For PROSPER to determine which gas lift valves should be open and closed for the
current producing conditions, the valve depths and characteristics must first be
entered. Click Valves from the QuickLook screen to display the following:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 295

The valve type (casing or tubing sensitive), setting depth, port size, R-value and
dome pressure at 60 F are required to calculate whether valves are open or closed.
Opening pressure etc. fields will be blank until a QuickLook calculation has been
performed. Entering the valve data for the QuickLook is optional.

As an alternative to entering them by hand, gas lift valve characteristics can be

transferred from other sections of PROSPER. Click the Transfer button on the Valves
data entry screen, and the User will be prompted to select the source of valve data.
Select either From Gas lift valves, or From Gas lift design to pick up the depths that
have been previously entered in Equipment Gaslift. After Transferring the valve
depths, select the valve type for each depth. To manually investigate the effects of
changing R-values and dome pressures, these values may be edited or entered by
hand.

9.5.2 Performing the QuickLook Calculation

Once the required (diagnostic) and optional (Downhole & Valves) data have been
entered, click Calculate to display the calculation screen and Calculate again to
begin the computation of the gradients. PROSPER begins by calculating from the top
down, and then repeats the calculation from the sand face up.

Select between the up pass and down pass using the buttons located beside the
Case box as in the following example:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 296 PROSPER

In the Results box, the program displays the theoretical dP across the injecting valve
together with the casing pressure theoretically required to balance the flowing tubing
pressure at the injection depth plus the dP across the orifice.

Click Plot to display the two computed gradients plus the valve opening and closing
pressures on the same graph:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 297

This plot enables the User to see at a glance which valves should be open or closed,
and how changes in operating pressures would impact on the valves. The results
box displays the following computed values:

Flowing BHP From the IPR at the current flow rate.

Static BHP Reservoir pressure input.

Tubing pressure at valve Fluid side pressure at injection depth.

Casing pressure at valve Gas side pressure at injection depth.

Temperature at valve Interpolated for Predicting pressure only option. Can also be
calculated using the Rough Approximation temperature option.

GOR Calculated from production and injection rates and PVT.

GOR Free Calculated from production and injection rates and PVT.

dP across valve Pressure loss resulting from injection through the valve orifice.

Theoretical casing pressure Pressure at surface back calculated from the tubing pressure at
injection depth plus the dP across the operating valve less the gas
pressure traverse back to surface.

Producing draw down Difference in static and flowing sand face pressures.

Equivalent P.I. When flowing above bubble point, the production rate divided by

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 298 PROSPER

the producing draw down.

Critical flow rate Injection rate required for sonic velocity through the orifice.

% Critical flow rate Actual injection rate as a fraction of the critical rate.

9.6 QuickLook for ESP

The ESP QuickLook principle is identical to that for gas lift wells, i.e. pressure
traverses are calculated from top to bottom and vice-versa. If the assumptions
regarding well and ESP conditions (e.g. pump frequency, wear factor, water cuts,
wellhead pressure, IPR etc.) are correct, the two calculated traverses will overlay. In
addition, an energy balance is performed across the electrical system allowing
surface voltage and power to be calculated and compared to measured data.

Historically, ESP wells have been difficult to diagnose (particularly with limited down
hole pressure data) because of uncertainties below (IPR), across (pump head) and
above (tubing hydraulics) the pump. Using the ESP QuickLook, conditions in each of
these areas can be analysed separately.

9.6.1 Input
The ESP QuickLook is accessed from the Matching menu. Clicking QuickLook from
the Matching menu displays the following screen:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 299

Select the required pump, motor and cable from the buttons at the top of the screen.

Enter well test parameters as follows:

Tubing head pressure
Liquid rate
Water Cut
Produced GOR (solution GOR plus free gas)
Static Bottom Hole Pressure (reservoir pressure)

Enter measured data as follows:

Surface current, voltage and power (Self-explanatory)

Downhole pressure data Enter gauge data if available, usually pump intake and pump
discharge pressures

Enter ESP related parameters as follows:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 300 PROSPER

Pump depth (Self-explanatory)

Operating frequency (Self-explanatory)
Length of cable Used to calculate surface voltage. Normally the same as the pump depth,
but could be much longer for sub sea ESP wells.
Gas separation Enter the percentage of free gas at the pump intake that is separated and
efficiency flows up the annulus.
Number of stages (Self-explanatory)
Pump wear factor Enter the fraction that represents degradation of pump head. Zero is no
wear, one indicates no head will be developed. This can be used to model
pumps stages that are worn due to sand or scale production or any other
factor that downgrades pump performance.
Enter correlation Select the most appropriate flow correlation for the application. Use a
matched correlation where available

9.6.2 Performing the QuickLook Calculation

Click Calculate to display the calculation screen and Calculate again to begin the
computation of the pressure traverses.

Note that PROSPER always calculates from the bottom up for ESP systems
since, in order to find the tubing GOR above the pump, conditions at the
pump intake where gas separation takes place must be known. The
calculation of the downward pressure traverse from the entered tubing
head pressure is therefore iterative.

Select between the up pass and down pass using the buttons located beside the
Case box as in the following example:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 301

Click Plot to display the pressure traverses and the calculated pump intake and
discharge pressures, down hole average rate across the pump (RB/day), free gas
fraction at the pump intake and electrical parameters:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 302 PROSPER

If the well bore, inflow and ESP assumptions are all correct, the two pressure
traverses will overlay and the measured and calculated intake and discharge
pressures and surface voltages should coincide.

The following guidelines may be useful in diagnosing ESP wells:

The pump discharge pressure is the tie point for the system. First match
the pump discharge pressure (if available) from the top down traverse. The
pump discharge pressure depends only on the weight and frictional
resistance to the flow rate through the tubing to surface.

Next match the pump intake pressure from the top down traverse. If the
calculated and measured pressure differential (head) across the pump is
different, then the assumptions of pump wear, fluid density (water cut) and
pump frequency should be examined.

The top down traverse will now give the resulting bottom hole flowing
pressure. This should be compared with the bottom up calculation and will
indicate any discrepancy with the inflow performance module assumptions.

9.7 QuickLook for HSP

The HSP QuickLook principle is identical to that for ESP wells, i.e. pressure
traverses are calculated from top to bottom and vice-versa. If the assumptions

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 303

regarding well and HSP conditions (e.g. pump and turbine speed, wear factor, water
cuts, wellhead pressure, IPR etc.) are correct, the two calculated traverses will
overlay.

9.7.1 Input
The HSP QuickLook is accessed from the Matching menu. Clicking QuickLook from
the Matching menu displays the following screen:

Select the required pump and turbine from the buttons at the top of the screen.

Enter well test parameters as follows:

Tubing head pressure
Liquid rate
Water Cut
Produced GOR (solution GOR plus free gas)
Static Bottom Hole Pressure (reservoir pressure)

Enter measured data as follows:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 304 PROSPER

Downhole pressure data Enter gauge data if available, usually pump intake and pump
discharge pressures

Enter HSP related parameters as follows:

Pump depth (Self-explanatory)
Pump Speed (Self-explanatory)
% of Total Production For Power This defines what fraction of the total produced liquids the
Fluid power fluid represents.
Number of Pump stages (Self-explanatory)
Pump wear factor Enter the fraction that represents degradation of pump head.
Zero is no wear, one indicates no head will be developed.
Number of Turbine Stages (Self-explanatory)
Enter correlation Select the most appropriate flow correlation for the specific
application. Use a matched correlation where available

9.7.2 Performing the QuickLook Calculation

Click Calculate to display the calculation screen and Calculate again to begin the
computation of the pressure traverses. Note that PROSPER always calculates from
the bottom up for HSP systems since, in order to find the tubing GOR above the
pump, conditions at the pump intake where fluid mixing takes place must be known.
The calculation of the downward pressure traverse from the entered tubing head
pressure is therefore iterative.

Select between the up pass and down pass using the buttons located beside the
Case box as in the following example:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 305

Click Plot to display the pressure traverses and the calculated pump intake and
discharge pressures, down hole average rate across the pump (RB/day) and pump
and turbine parameters:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 306 PROSPER

If the well bore, inflow and pump and turbine assumptions are all correct, the two
pressure traverses will overlay and the measured and calculated intake and
discharge pressures and surface voltages should coincide.

The following guidelines may be useful in diagnosing HSP wells:

The pump discharge pressure is the tie point for the system. First match
the pump discharge pressure (if available) from the top down traverse. The
pump discharge pressure depends only on the weight and frictional
resistance to the flow rate through the tubing to surface.

Next match the pump intake pressure from the top down traverse. If the
calculated and measured pressure differential (head) across the pump is
different, then the assumptions of pump wear, fluid density (water cut) and
pump speed should be examined.

The top down traverse will now give the resulting bottom hole flowing
pressure. This should be compared with the bottom up calculation and will
indicate any discrepancy with the inflow performance module assumptions.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Matching Menu 307

9.8 Vertical Pipe Parameters

This option allows the match parameters for the tubing pressure drop correlations to
be accessed. They can be reset to their un-matched values, or new values entered
directly.

9.9 Surface Flow line Parameters

This option allows the match parameters for the surface piping pressure drop
correlations to be accessed. They can be reset to their un-matched values, or new
values entered directly.

9.10 Correlation Thresholds

This option allows the User to specify alternative correlations to use for tubing or
pipeline when the angle (from the vertical for tubing and from the horizontal for
pipelines) exceeds a User-specified threshold value. This option is useful for
modelling the riser for a long sub sea tieback or for a highly deviated surface
pipeline. Enter the appropriate angles and correlations. Select Yes to the question
Use Threshold Angle to enable the feature. When enabled, the calculation screens
will indicate that this option is active.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

Chapter

10
 Calculation Menu 309

10 Calculation Menu

This chapter describes all the calculation methods available in PROSPER and how
to calculate system production rates, run sensitivity analyses, generate lift curve
tables etc. The available calculation types are:

Inflow (IPR)
This option calculates the IPR, that is to say, the relationship between tubing intake
rate and the bottomhole flowing pressure (BHFP). The Inflow calculation allows to
quickly run sensitivities without the need to calculate the system solution rate. This
is especially convenient for e.g. frac program design, gravel pack design, perforation
programming.

System (Ipr+Vlp)
This option will calculate both the tubing outflow (VLP) and tubing inflow (IPR) curves
and determine the system operating rate and bottom hole flowing pressure. It also
allows to perform sensitivity analyses with a wide range of variables. Sensitivity plots
can easily be generated.
Two options are available: 3 variables (for naturally flowing wells) and 4 variables.

Gradient (Traverse)
This option enables you to generate gradient plots. If the correlations have been
matched, the gradients will be generated using the tuned correlations.

VLP (Tubing curves)

This option enables the generation of VLP curves that can be exported for use in
various commercial reservoir simulators and Petroleum Experts' MBAL and GAP
programs.
Two options are available: 3 variables (for naturally flowing wells) and 4 variables (for
artificially lifted wells).

Choke Performance
This is a convenient choke calculator for flow rates, pressure drop or choke settings.
Choke Performance Curves can be visualised (NEW!!!).

Generate for GAP

Allows to automatically calculate well performance data for gas lifted or naturally
flowing wells for use in Petroleum Experts GAP production system network modelling
program. Not available when Enthalpy Balance is in use.

Bottom Hole Pressure from Wellhead Pressure

This option allows to calculate flowing bottom hole pressure from the wellhead
pressure. This method is only available when using the Pressure and Temperature
and Rough Approximation options.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 310 PROSPER

NEW!!! In previous versions of PROSPER when the Temperature model

was set to Enthalpy Balance, different types of calculations were available.
In the current version of PROSPER, instead, the same main calculation
types (Inflow, System, Gradient, VLP and Choke Performance) are
available for Rough Approximation, Improved Approximation and Enthalpy
Balance temperature models.

The selection of lift method and IPR model also affects the available
sensitivity variables and specialised calculations.

10.1 Inflow (IPR)

This calculation type enables the User to determine the IPR as the reservoir and
fluid parameters change.

To select this calculation type, choose Calculation Inflow (IPR) from the main menu
toolbar.

A few data on the fluid quality are required, along with the selection of the rate range
for which to run the calculation.

As far as the rate method is concerned, select one of the following:

Automatic Linear
The program works out the AOF (IPR Absolute Open Flow) for various
sensitivity variables entered and for each AOF creates 20 evenly spaced rates

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 311

for sand face pressures calculations.

Automatic Geometric
As for Automatic Linear, it works out the AOF for various sensitivity variables
entered and for each AOF creates 20 geometrically spaced rates for sand
face pressures calculations.

Use this option when evaluating minimum stable flow rates.

User selected
You can either enter a table of up to 20 rates directly, or PROSPER will G
enerate them for you. Click Generate from the User Selected rate entry
screen and the following screen will be presented:

Enter values for the first and last rates in the table plus the number of entries
required. Depending on the selection of Linear or Geometric spacing, PROSPER will
calculate the required rate table.
Use the Try button for the preview of the entered range and Done to confirm.

User selected rates can be useful when using the AOF is inappropriate for
the range of sensitivity variables to be considered.

Click OK, then if a sensitivity analysis is to be performed, enter values for up to 3

sensitivity variables as on the following screen example:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 312 PROSPER

The range of Inflow variables available depend on the particular IPR model entered
in System Inflow performance.
For each of the selected variables enter the values by hand, or click Generate to
have PROSPER calculate a range of values as follows. The Generate feature is
exactly the same as the one for the Rate Method entry.

Leaving the sensitivity variable screen empty will run the calculation with the
default parameters entered in the main IPR section.

The Combinations button can be used to enter particular scenarios to calculate.

Refer to Sensitivity Combinations in the section related to System Calculation for
more details.

Once set up the Inflow sensitivity variables, click OK Calculate to calculate the IPR
pressures. The results will be reported in a table:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 313

In the Variables area scroll teh various parameter to display the desired sensitivity.
The results can be exported to different destinations (like for example the Clipboard)
by selecting Export.
Clicking on Report will instead export the results to a Report sheet.

Click Plot to display a screen similar to the following:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 314 PROSPER

On this plot by pressing on the VARIABLES option on the menu bar, you
can get a display of all the variables that have been calculated during IPR
calculations, like skin, dP skin etc. These can be plotted as well.

10.2 System (Ipr + Vlp)

The Calculation System (Ipr +Vlp) calculation type enables the User to determine
the production of a well and the flowing parameters (like BHP, dP, etc.) as the
reservoir and fluid parameters change, according the principles of nodal analysis.

To enter the System Calculation area select CalculationSystem (Ipr+Vlp) from the
menu toolbar.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 315

The first input screen requires the Top Node Pressure and the data concerning the
fluid quality (e.g. WC and GOR) and allows to select correlations for surface and
downhole equipment as well as select a rate method.

The Top Node represents the downstream end of the system, hence it is:
- The manifold if surface equipment is included in the system
- The wellhead if no surface equipment is included in the system

The Solution Node represents the point at which the nodal analysis is
performed. Three options are available:
- Bottom Node. It is the bottomhole, that is, the deepest point in the
downhole equipment
- Top Node. See definition in the previous note

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 316 PROSPER

- Well Head. It is the Xmas Tree, that is, the upper point of the
downhole equipment.
According to the last two definitions, if no surface equipment is included,
Top Node and Well Head represent the same point.

As far as the Rate Method is concerned, refer to the previous section for details.

The Solution Rate reported is given by the VLP and IPR curves
intersection. These curves are interpolated between the selected
calculation rates and so the result may change according to the rate values
used.

It is important that an appropriate rates range and distribution is selected

according to each case in order to avoid significant interpolation errors.

An IPR is required for both Automatic rate methods. For wells having very
high AOFs (e.g. horizontal wells) the well rate is determined mainly by the
tubing size. Manual rate selection may give better results in such cases.

10.2.1 Left - Hand Intersection for VLP/IPR curves

Normally VLP/IPR intersections that occur when the tubing pressures are declining
(on the LHS) are considered to represent unstable flow and are usually ignored.
When Gas Coning occurs, however the GOR is changing constantly for different
rates and it is possible to have two solutions and for the LHS intersection to
represent stable flow. This option allows to consider or not the left-hand intersection.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 317

10.2.2 Sensitivity Variables Screen

Once entered the main input data, select Continue to access the sensitivity variables
screen.
This is organized exactly in the same way as in the Inflow calculation, hence refer to
Section 10.1.1 for details on the use of this entry screen.

In IPM 5 two types of System calculation are available: 3 variables

and 4 variables, depending on the number of sensitivity variables the
User wants to perform the analysis.
4 variables are used in general to analyse artificially lifted wells.

Only the sensitivity variables relevant to the chosen system will be available. For
example, if a well is gas lifted you will be given the option of gas injection rate as a
variable. This option will not be available if the well is naturally flowing.

Tubing diameter sensitivity is only available under Variable 3.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 318 PROSPER

When tubing diameter is entered as a sensitivity variable, selecting Continue

displays a screen where the User can input the range of nodes over which the
sensitivity is calculated:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 319

Normally tubing diameter should not be varied in the casing below the tubing shoe.
This option is also useful for determining e.g. the effect of increasing tubing size
above a safety valve while keeping the diameter of the rest of the tubing string
diameter constant.

10.2.2.1Sensitivity Combinations Screen

The Combinations option allows the User to enter specific combinations of field data
(or hypothetical cases) then allow the program to calculate the unknowns. An
example of a Combinations screen is shown below:

If no liquid rates are entered, the program uses the current list of rates
(either internally calculated or User input) and calculates the solution for
the combination of sensitivity variables for each of up to 10 cases.

If liquid rates are entered in the Combinations screen, these take

precedence. The program will then find the VLP and IPR pressures for
each combination of sensitivity variables.

Note that a solution rate is not computed in this case.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 320 PROSPER

Once sensitivity values have been entered in either the Combinations or Variables
screen, click Continue to display the calculation screen. Sensitivity values
temporarily overwrite variable values that have been entered on other screens. For
example: Pressure at first node, water cut.

10.2.3 Calculation Screen

Click Calculate to start the system solution calculations. A calculation screen
example is shown below:

On the right hand side there are the results of the system calculation: solution rates,
FBHP, WHP, WHT, etc.
On the left hand side, instead, there are the calculated parameters related to VLP
and IPR. Scroll to the right to read the results.

In the Variables area it is possible to scroll the different cases or the values of the
sensitivity variables for which the calculation were performed.

Details of Solutions

To examine the solution in more detail, click the Solution Details button. Individual

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 321

solution points can be viewed by clicking on the arrow buttons located beside each
sensitivity variable. Outflow or Inflow solutions can be viewed as shown in the
following sample screen:

In the case of wells with ESP, HSP, PCP or Jet Pump, the solution details contain all
the results related to the pump.

Plotting Results
The results can be plotted by clicking Plot. The System plot will appear as follows:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 322 PROSPER

The system plot summarises all the calculations. Each VLP and IPR curve is
identified by up to 3 numbers posted beside them. The variable names and the
corresponding number labels are shown in the panel to the right of the plot. In the
above example, Curve 1,0,0 is for 4500 psig reservoir pressure, 0 % water cut and 4
STB/day/psi productivity index.

To plot the solution rates and pressures versus the selected variables, click S
ensitivity and a sensitivity plot will be displayed. To select sensitivity variables to
plot, click Variables and make your selection on the following screen, for example:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 323

The Sensitivity screen allows you to choose X- and Y-axis variables. Click OK to
view the Sensitivity plot. The program automatically plots the sensitivity values of
the X-axis variable. If variable Combinations have been used, the sensitivity cases
will be automatically plotted.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 324 PROSPER

The pressure gradient for any particular solution rate can be calculated by clicking S
ensitivity PvD (Sensitivity Pressure vs. Depth).

Performing Gradient Calculations for a Given Solution

For each of the solutions calculated it is possible to determine the correspondent
gradient. To do so, in the System Calculation screen select Sensitivity PvD:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 325

Select the desired case by scrolling on the variables, and then Continue and C
alculate to generate the gradient. The results are displayed on the following screen
example:

Click Plot to display the Gradient vs. TVD or Measured Depth:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 326 PROSPER

Click Variables on the plot screen to select which variables to plot.

By clicking the Extended button, a greater range of plot variables can be accessed.
Virtually any combination of computed results can be plotted against each other.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 327

Return to the standard choice of plot variables by clicking the Original button.

The plots are held in memory until overwritten by a new set of calculations. Plots
can also be displayed or output by selecting Plot from the main menu. The Units
menu can be used to change the display units if required.

Special Note for ESP, HSP, PCP and Jet Pump Applications
When calculating a System solution for a pump equipped well, in the Solution Point
screen lists details of the pump solution such as pump intake pressure etc. (See
example pump solution in the screen below)

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 328 PROSPER

Figure 1020
ESP Solution Point

Clicking Pump Plot on the pump solution screen displays the sensitivity solutions
plotted over the pump characteristic curves (this is available only for ESP and HSP).
As shown by the example screen below, the effects of the sensitivity variables on
the pump operating point can be readily evaluated.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 329

This plot is a powerful tool for evaluating how an ESP design can accommodate
future changes of well conditions.

All pump (both ESP & HSP) designs should be validated by calculating
sensitivities and ensuring that efficient operation at the design rate can be
achieved over the entire range of expected well and pump efficiency
conditions.

For pump (both ESP & HSP) equipped wells, the Sens. PvD gradient calculation
shows the pressure increase across the pump. An example gradient plot is shown
below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 330 PROSPER

10.3 Gradient (Traverse)

The Calculation Gradient (traverse) feature allows the User to calculate flowing
pressure gradient curves at a specified flow rate for varying reservoir and fluid
conditions.

These curves can be compared with published pressure traverse curves or actual
well data. Pressure traverses can also computed for combinations of sensitivity
variables. The effect of changing tubing sizes, SSSV I.D. etc. can be evaluated
visually by plotting the gradient results.

To commence the Gradient calculation, click Calculation Gradient (traverse) from

the main menu and the following screen will be displayed:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 331

Enter the required data, mostly the same as the one requested by System
calculation, plus the first and the last node for the calculation, which will determine
the section of completion for which to run the gradient calculation.

Then select Continue to access the Sensitivity Variables (or Combinations) screen.
Refer to previous sections for the description of this area.

Selecting Continue again will access the calculation screen. In this screen the User
can select the flow correlations for the downhole and the slug method:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 332 PROSPER

Click Calculate to compute flowing gradients for all the sensitivity cases. Once the
calculations have been completed, the results tables can be inspected by clicking
the respective variable arrows until the desired variable combination is visible.

Important
The Gradient calculation results report very useful parameters
concerning details on the DP calculation, PVT data, mass flow
rates and in the case of pipeline gradients, characteristic
parameters of slugs, etc.

A plot of the gradient results similar to that below can be displayed by then clicking
the Plot button:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 333

Gradients can be plotted for the well and flow line separately or combined on the one
plot. Details on the plotting features are available in Section 10.1.1.

10.3.1 Options
Every time a Gradient calculation is performed, a number of post-process
calculations are carried out, like for example maximum grain size, erosional velocity,
liquid loading (Turner velocity) and pigging calculations.

The parameters affecting these calculations can be accessed in any Calculation

screen by means of Options button.

This screen can also be accessed from the main menu toolbar by selecting System
Solids.

10.3.1.1Maximum Grain Diameter

This calculation determines the maximum size of sand grain that can be dragged
away by the producing fluid. The calculated Maximum Grain Diameter is reported in
the results table at each calculation step.

The model implemented in PROSPER is based on internal BP work.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 334 PROSPER

The model is based upon a series of equations derived by Thomas (Reference 3) to

calculate the friction velocity at the limit of solid transport in a liquid / solid system.

Sand will be lifted to the wellhead only if the velocity of the fluid in the wellbore is
greater than the Critical Transport Velocity.

This velocity is function of sand particle size, shape and density and the fluid density
and viscosity.

Two different equations are used: one for oil wells and one for gas well:

1. Oil Wells

The equation used in this case is more applicable to laminar flow, conditions
that are likely to be encountered in oil and / or water wells.

Where:

- V = Critical Transport Velocity (cm/sec)

equivalent to Superficial Fluid Velocities in PROSPER

- N = Dynamic Fluid Viscosity (poise)

equivalent to Mixture Viscosity in PROSPER

- g = Gravity (980 cm/sec^2)

- r = Particle Radius (cm)

This is the parameter calculated by PROSPER

- = Fluid Density (gm/cm^3)

- By default, PROSPER uses a 2.65g/cc sand density. This can be changed

in the System | Solids section of the main PROSPER menu.

- = Particle Density (gm/cm^3)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 335

2. Gas Wells

The equation used in this case is applicable to high gas flows and does not
include a factor for viscosity: viscosity has only an insignificant effect on lifting
sand.

Where:

- V = Critical Transport Velocity (ft/sec)

Equivalent to Superficial Fluid Velocities in PROSPER

- = Fluid Density (lb/ft^3)

- = Particle Density (lb/ft^3)

By default, PROSPER uses a 2.65g/cc sand density. This can be changed

in the System | Solids section of the main PROSPER menu.

- g = Gravity (32.2 ft/sec^2)

- d = Particle diameter (ft)

This is the parameter calculated by PROSPER

- Cd = Drag coefficient for the particle essentially a function of particle

shape at high Reynolds numbers. Cd value for sand grain is 0.85.

In both the oil/water and gas cases, PROSPER knows the fluid velocity in the
wellbore. Therefore, it will calculate the maximum particle diameter that can be
transported by the well flow.

These calculations are important when an attempt is made to cut back the
production rate so that the well will stop producing sand and will help determine if the
formation sand may be accumulating at the bottom of the well.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 336 PROSPER

References:

1. Fairhurst.CP Sand Transport in the South East Forties Pipe Line, BHRA,
1983

2. Smith.M A Model for Predicting Solids Transport in near Horizontal

Multi-Phase Oil and Gas Pipe Lines, XFE report 8/2/1993

3. Wasp, Kenny & Gandhi Solid-Liquid Flow Slurry Pipe Line Transportation,
Gulf Publishing Company, Clausthal, Germany 1979

10.3.1.2Erosional Velocity Calculation for Sand Laden Fluids

When gradient traverse calculations are performed the program will estimate the
correspondent value of erosional velocity.

Erosion can be caused by the repeated impact of solid particles on tubing and
pipelines. To avoid this we attempt to estimate the velocity at which erosion will
occur.

Normal practise is to use equation of API 14 E. This can be unreliable especially for
clean production where the limiting value of C (125) can be too restrictive. In
practice, values of 1000 for C have been recorded in pipes where no erosion has
been detected.

A Conoco paper (An Alternative to API14E Erosional Velocity Limits for Sand Laden
Fluids) challenges API14E on the basis that it can be very conservative for clean
service and is not applicable for conditions where corrosion or sand are present. It
proposes a simple alternative approach that has been verified by a comparison with
several multi-phase flow loop tests that cover a broad range of liquid-gas ratios and
sand concentrations. Values of S for different components are proposed in the paper

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 337

The constants C and S for the two formulations can be customised by selecting S
ystemSolids and tab button Erosional Velocity or the Options button in any
calculation screen.

PROSPER calculates the erosional velocity for solid-free fluid using the API-14E
method and the entered C value. If the sand production rate has been specified,
PROSPER will calculate the erosional velocity using both the API-14E and Conoco
methods and will then compare the results and will use the computed lower-value of
erosional velocity. To review the computed erosional velocity values using the
Conoco method set the value of C sufficiently high until the values do not change
for changing values of C.

After gradient calculations are performed, scroll right on the results screen to view
the erosional velocity values.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 338 PROSPER

In PROSPER, the C value is calculated and displayed and it is the

responsibility of the User to work out whether for this C value, erosion will
occur or not depending upon the expected operating conditions.

10.3.1.3Gradient (Traverse)-Modified Turner Equation

The Turner Equation is used to study the continuous removal of liquid from gas
wells.
This equation is used to determine the minimum velocity of the producing fluid
necessary to drag away the droplets of liquid. The original formulation of the
equation is the following:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 339

This formulation has been found to be not necessarily reliable.

The original Turner Constant was 20.4. Using the Petroleum Experts 4 mechanistic
model it has been found that 2.04 gives much more reliable results in a wide range
of examples.
This constant can be however changed by the User by selecting SystemSolids from
the main menu, or the Options button and the Liquid Loading tab screen within any
calculation screen.

Results of the calculation of the Turner velocity are reported in the Gradient

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 340 PROSPER

calculation results table, as reported in the figure above.

10.3.1.4Pigging
This calculation can be used to describe the pigging characteristics of the flow in
pipelines.

Assuming 100% removal efficiency of a sphere and that all the liquid removed by the
sphere is in the form of a continuous slug, the pigged slug volume can be estimated
by integrating the difference between the liquid hold-up and the no-slip hold-up in the
pipeline. Also the time to produce the slug can be calculated from

These are the additional results reported in the Gradient Traverse results table:
Pigged Slug Length
Pigged Slug Volume (cumulative pigged slug volume for the given pipe
element node)
Time to Produce Pigged Slug Length
Time for Pigged Slug to reach Outlet

Pigging Efficiency can be entered by User.

10.4 VLP (Tubing Curves)

An important PROSPER application is generating tubing lift curves for use in reservoir
and total system simulators.
Two options of calculation are available:
- VLP curves 3 Variables. The lift curves can be generated for a set of 3
sensitivity variables. The option is used for naturally flowing wells.
- VLP curves 4 Variables. The lift curves can be generated for a set of 4
sensitivity variables. The option is used for artificially lifted wells.

10.4.1 VLP (Tubing) Curves - 3 Variables

To generate lift curves for naturally flowing wells select Calculation VLP (tubing
curves) 3 Variables from the menu toolbar.
The input screen entry are similar to the ones required by System calculation (refer

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 341

to the correspondent section for reference). The values of Top Node Pressure,
Water Cut and GOR entered in this screen will be neglected if these variables will be
selected as sensitivity parameters.

When User Selected rates are used, you can enter rates in terms of Liquid, Oil or
Gas. The results will be given in terms of the specified rate type, but depending on
the type of well, PROSPER will first convert the rates to equivalent oil or gas to
calculate the VLP pressure. This feature can be used when preparing lift curves for
high GOR oil wells. Remember when using gas rates, that increasing the water cut
will also increase the liquid production rate. Extreme VLP pressures can easily
result.

Gauge Data: The information on the Gauge Data is used for Integrated Field
Management (IFM) Applications. These can be left blank for use in IPM suite of
tools.

Click Continue to access the Select Variables screen and set up the required

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 342 PROSPER

sensitivity variables.
To generate lift curves for simulator (like Eclipse) for an oil well, the VLP is generally
calculated for the following sensitivity variables:
Variable 1: Pressure at first node
Variable 2: Water cut
Variable 3: Gas Oil Ratio

An example calculation variables screen for generating lift curves is shown below:

Select the variables required by your external application and enter a list of values
for each. Click Continue to access the calculation screen, then select Calculate to
generate the lift curves. An example lift curve calculation screen is shown below:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 343

The calculated VLP results can now be exported to a number of external application
programs. Once the calculations have been completed, click Plot to visually check
the results and Export Lift Curves to access the export selection screen.
Currently, PROSPER supports the following export formats:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 344 PROSPER

Schlumberger - ECLIPSE .ECL

Welldrill - SIMCO 3 .SIM
ExxonMobil - Pegasus .MOB
SSI COMP4 .CP4
FranLab FRAGOR .FRA
SSI COMP3 .CP4
LandMark - VIP .VIP
Roxar - MORE .MOR
Petroleum Experts GAP/MBAL .TPD
Shell - MoReS .MRS
BeCip - ATHOS .ATH
Amoco - GCOMP .GCM
Chevron-CHEARS .CHE
ExxonMobil-EMPOWER .Hyd
ConocoPhillips-PSim .WBH
CMG-IMEX/GEM .IMX

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 345

PROSPER appends the export file with a suffix corresponding to the selected file
format as shown in the table above. Depending on the export format selected, the
User will be prompted for a file name and additional data such as table number, flow
table I.D. etc. Refer to the simulator documentation for further details.

Simulators have varying requirements for VLP sensitivity variables. If

the correct variables have not been selected for calculation,
PROSPER may not be able to correctly export the VLP file. Pay
particular attention to GLR and GORs.

To model artificially lifted wells, reservoir simulators require 4 variable

lift curves. Refer to the following section for details.

10.4.2 VLP (Tubing) Curves - 4 Variables

To model artificially lifted wells, an additional sensitivity variable is required. This
option allows calculation of four variable sensitivities (provided the total number of
sensitivity combinations is less than 10,000) and export of lift curves for gas lifted
and ESP, HSP, etc. equipped wells. Set up, calculation and export of 4 variable
tubing curves follows the same procedures as described above (Section 10.1.6.1) for
regular tubing curves.

An example of a 4 variable VLP calculation for a gas lifted well is shown on the
following screen:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 346 PROSPER

A Note on Preparing Lift Curves

Because of the large number of calculations that must be performed, preparing lift
curves can be a time consuming process, so it is important to obtain good results at
the first attempt. Due to the extreme range of flowing conditions that must be
covered by the lift curve tables, problems with the computations are occasionally
encountered. The following discussion covers some of the points that should be
addressed when planning a lift curve calculation run.
Finding a VLP correlation that performs well for the entire range of rates that
must be spanned by the lift curves can be difficult. Some correlations handle
slug flow (e.g. Hagedorn Brown) but fail in the mist flow regime e.g. after injection
gas breakthrough. Care must be exercised in selecting correlations to ensure

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 347

that the wells are properly represented over the most important range of flow
rates to be modelled in the simulation.
Problems can occur for extremes of water cut and GOR. e.g. if the oil production
rate is fixed, the liquid production rate becomes very high as the water cut
approaches 100%. To maintain lift in a high water cut well, a specific GLR is
required. If injection gas is expressed in terms of GOR injected, the required
GOR approaches infinity as the water cut approaches 100%. A huge range of
GOR injected is therefore required to model the well. The use of liquid rates and
injection GLRs in oil well lift curve tables is recommended to avoid such
problems.
Depending on the particular simulator used, it is not possible to pass the variable
names or units between programs. Users are reminded to ensure that the
sensitivity variables and output units used in PROSPER are consistent with those
expected by the simulator. In particular, gas units (MMscf Vs Mscf), gas lift (GLR
Vs Gas Lift Injection Rate) and rates (Oil Vs Liquid) should be checked.
PVT correlations should only be used within the range of temperature and
pressure for which they were derived. Occasionally, combinations of tubing
curve variables require an excessive VLP pressure to pass the specified rate,
and the PVT correlation may fail. Occasionally, PROSPER may halt rather than
continuing the calculation with a fictitious result. You may have to revise the
range of variables or select a different PVT correlation in such cases. Beware of
chokes and restrictions in the equipment description that may result in excessive
calculated pressure drops. If using externally generated PVT tables, they must
span the entire calculation range. Make sure that GOR is constant above bubble
point, and the FVF is decreasing.
Provided you enter the rates by hand, it is not necessary to enter an IPR to
calculate VLP tables. PROSPER needs the IPR to find the calculation rates if an
Automatic rate method has been selected. Automatic rate selection is not
available for 4 Variable VLP calculations.
Oil well lift curves can now be calculated in terms of gas rates for specialised
applications. Make sure that the liquid rates that result from your choice of GOR,
water cut etc. does not result in impossible liquid rates. Be especially careful
when there are chokes and restrictions in the system.

A Note on preparing lift curves for ESP equipped wells

There are 2 options available for generating ESP lift curves:

Tubing Curves (standard)

'Lift curves for Simulators'

The 'Tubing Curves (Standard)' option will prompt the user to enter the bottom hole
pressure, i.e. the first node pressure corresponds to the bottom hole pressure.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 348 PROSPER

PROSPER will perform the calculations from the deepest node (i.e. bottom hole) to
the pump depth. Using the pump performance curves, Pump Head is calculated for
the given frequency, water cut etc. and therefore the Pump Discharge Pressure can
be calculated. PROSPER then determines the PVT of the oil above the pump after
accounting for possible gas separation. The pressure drop above the pump is then
calculated to find the top node arrival pressure. These calculations are performed for
each required production rate. The VLP Pressure value indicated corresponds to the
Pressure at the end point of the system; i.e. if there is no surface equipments
entered, the VLP Pressure will correspond to the wellhead pressure, if surface
equipment is entered, then VLP Pressure will correspond to the Manifold Pressure.

'Lift Curves for Simulators' require tables of rates and BHPs ordered by THP. The
Lift curves for Simulators option allows input of Top Node pressure, water cut,
operating frequency etc. PROSPER iterates to find the pressure at the deepest node
(VLP) for the given top node pressure. For this case the Top Node Pressure will
correspond to the Wellhead Pressure (if there are no surface equipments entered) or
the Manifold Pressure (If there are surface equipments entered). the VLP Pressure
will correspond to the Bottom Hole Pressure or the pressure at the last point in the
downhole equipment section.

VLP lift curves for simulators or Petroleum Experts applications (GAP and
MBAL) can be batch generated for groups of wells by PROSPER from
GAP. Refer to the GAP documentation for details.

10.5 Choke Performance

This is a general purpose choke performance calculator. Only PVT data input is
required to calculate flow rates given the choke size and pressures, choke setting to
achieve a specified flow rate etc. To access the choke performance calculator, click
Calculation Choke Performance and the following selection screen may be
displayed (depending on the Choke Method selected):

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 349

Calculation Options
Select your required calculation option from the following:
Predict Mass Flow Rate
PROSPER determines the flow rate for specified choke opening and
inlet and outlet pressures

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 350 PROSPER

Predict Pressure Drop

PROSPER calculates the pressure drop across a specified choke
opening for a given flow rate and inlet pressure

Predict Choke Valve Setting

PROSPER finds the choke size for a specified rate and inlet an outlet
pressures.

Choke Method
Select a choke calculation method from the following options:
Petroleum Experts
This is an in-house developed choke model based on Perkins work (SPE
206333).
HYDRO
There are 3 distinct methods for modelling specific choke equipment. Until
performance testing is completed and documentation issued, these choke
methods should not be used.
ELF
A model based on Perkins (SPE 206333) approach along with discharge
coefficients determined by the author (Stephane Rastoin of ELF Aquitaine
at TUALP). This is also the recommended method used to calculate
pressure drops down hole for SSSVs and restrictions. It should be used
for the majority of applications.

Enter the following data:

GOR This value overrides the GOR entered on the PVT data
screen.
Water Cut
Inlet Pressure Pressure upstream of the choke
Inlet Temperature Upstream temperature
Outlet Pressure Downstream pressure
Outlet Temperature Downstream temperature
Choke setting Orifice size

Click Calculate, and PROSPER will calculate the liquid and mass flow rates. Similar
screens are used to enter data for the dP and Choke Setting prediction options. For
critical flow conditions, it may take some time for the calculation to converge.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 351

NEW!!! If the ELF Choke model is selected, after a calculation the

Choke Performance Curve is plotted at the bottom of the screen

Selecting the choke model in PROSPER

To select the choke model to be used to model chokes, SSSVs and
Restrictions, access the Surface Equipment screen and select from
the drop-down menu Choke Method the desired model

NEW!!! When one of the enthalpy balance temperature models

(Improved Approximation or Enthalpy Balance) is selected, the
choke calculation will account for changes of temperature due to
Joule-Thomson effect

10.6 Generate for GAP

This option is used to calculate well performance curves for Petroleum Experts General
Allocation Program (GAP).

PROSPER can be run from within GAP in a batch mode for generating performance
curves for groups of wells or independently of GAP by selecting this option.

PROSPER will automatically calculate solutions for gas lifted or naturally flowing
wells. If the solutions are then saved in a .OUT file, GAP can pick up the data
required to calculate performance curves at a later time. For more information, refer
to the GAP documentation.

10.7 Bottom Hole Pressure from Wellhead Pressure

This option allows to calculate flowing bottom hole pressure from the wellhead
pressure. This method is only available when using the Rough Approximation option.

Input data required are gas, water and oil rate information as well as wellhead
temperature and pressure.
This information can be in one of several formats (e.g. Liquid rate, WC and GOR,
etc.) and the correct format for your data can be selected at the top of the
appropriate columns. If the data type in a particular column is changed while there is
data already in that particular column, then the data will be converted to the new
type.
In the case of gas lifted wells the gas lift gas rate is required and in the case of ESP
lifted wells the pump frequency must be entered.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 352 PROSPER

The table is quite large allowing to start off with up to 16000 rows of data which is
automatically expandable up to 32000 rows. The data can be scrolled with the
scrollbar at the right hand side of the screen.

Appropriate vertical lift and surface pipe correlations can be selected at the bottom
of the screen.

Selecting the import button allows you to bring in data from an outside source. Table
data can be saved to file using the export button and plots using either time or the
log of time can also be viewed and exported using the plot feature. Within the plot
screen data can be enabled or disabled point by point or in a block manner by using
the right-click mouse button.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Calculation Menu 353

Data can be ordered with relation to time by using the sort button. This will also
remove any blank rows between data in the table.

10.7.1 References

SPE PAPER 22870

Modelling of Well bore Heat Losses in Directional Wells Under Changing Injection
Conditions
K Chu and S Thakur, Amoco Production Co.

10.8 Note on Enthalpy Balance Model

The Predicting Pressure and Temperature analysis option can be used to generate
temperature and pressure profiles in producing wells.

This rigorous thermodynamic model Enthalpy Balance considers heat transfer by

conduction, radiation, forced and free convection. Heat transfer coefficients are
calculated using thermodynamic data held in a User-definable database. The
temperature prediction calculations are transient, allowing sensitivities against
flowing time to be run for both wells and pipelines. This temperature model requires
considerably more input data and computation time for either Predicting Pressure
Only or the Rough or Improved Approximation temperature models. Enthalpy
Balance should be applied only when the desired result is the temperature. The

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 354 PROSPER

additional computational effort cannot be justified for pressure loss calculations.

Both pressure and temperature losses across chokes and restrictions are accounted
for. A theoretical outline of the Enthalpy Balance model is given in Appendix C.

Temperature prediction is useful for generating temperature profiles in:

pipelines
sub sea wells
high pressure/temperature exploration wells
predicting temperature/pressure profiles to help predict wax/hydrate
deposits.
accounting for Joule-Thompson effects

PROSPER 's Enthalpy Balance temperature model is one of the most accurate
temperature prediction methods available.

The Enthalpy Balance (or Improved Approximation) temperature

calculations must commence from a known condition. This is usually the
reservoir pressure and temperature. As a consequence, calculating from a
downstream node (unknown temperature) to an upstream node (known
temperature) is not meaningful. For injectors, calculations commence from
the known wellhead pressure and temperature.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

Chapter

11
 356 PROSPER

11 Design Menu
The Design Menu enables the User to perform various artificial lift designs.
From this menu the User can access the design modules for the following artificial lift
technologies:

Gas Lift
Electrical Submersible Pump
Hydraulic Pump
Progressive Cavity Pump
Coiled Tubing GasLift
Jet Pump
Sucker Rod Pump

The design menu is active only if an artificial lift method has been selected
in the main Options screen.
The design option will correspond to the artificial lift method selection in the
main Option screen.
Artificial lift design is not enabled when the Enthalpy Balance temperature
model is in use.

From the Design menu the Database containing all the information about gas lift
valves, ESP pumps, motors, cables, etc. is accessible. A dedicated section is
reported at the end of the chapter.

In the following sections each of the design options are illustrated.

11.1 Gas Lift Design

The gas lift design can be used to design and optimise the design of gas lifted wells.
The program will determine the spacing and size of unloading valves and calculate
the valve test rack setting pressures.

Designs can also be performed for existing wells having mandrels installed at fixed
depths.
Design performance can be evaluated using the Gas Lift QuickLook (as seen in
Chapter 9) or calculating system sensitivities.

11.1.1 Menu Options

If gas lift was selected as a lift method in the Options menu the following additional
options will be available in the DesignGaslift menu:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 357

New Well
Existing Mandrels
Gas Lift Adjustments
The gas lift design section of the program can be used to determine the optimum
gas lift equipment for a given well. PROSPER calculates the maximum production
rate possible, the corresponding optimum gas lift rate, the valve spacing and size to
unload the well and the test rack setting pressure for each valve for surface
calibration.

Designs can also be prepared for wells having mandrels already set at fixed depths.

Before the User can proceed ahead with artificial lift design, PVT, downhole
equipment and IPR information must be input.

11.1.2 New Well

Selecting Design Gas Lift New well from the Design menu will display the Gas
Lift Design input screen:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 358 PROSPER

In this screen it is possible to enter the input data for the gas lift design task.
The input data screen is divided into several areas. The Input parameters panel is
used to enter the design operating conditions. The other panels allow the User to
enter the design options for a given application.

11.1.2.1Setting Up the Design Problem

Setting the artificial lift design problems is defining the various parameters in Figure
11-1. These are described below:

Design Rate Method

Entered By User
Use this option when designing for a given production rate and gas lift gas
injection rate or when modelling the performance of an existing installation. If
Check Conformance with IPR is selected, the program will modify the rate and
the gas injection rate, if necessary, to honour the IPR.
If a maximum production calculation has been previously done, the lift gas and
design production rates can be User Entered. The design rate can be entered
either in terms of liquid or oil production only. The design lift gas injection is
entered as the Maximum gas available.
Calculated from Maximum production
PROSPER will find the maximum possible oil production rate by determining both
the optimum gas injection rate and depth. This is achieved by calculating the oil
production for a given GLR injected and increasing the GLR until the optimum is
found.

Calculated from Maximum revenue

Using User-entered economic parameters for oil and sales gas revenue,
produced water processing and lift gas cost, the program will find the gas lift
design that maximises total revenue (oil and gas revenue less water and
injection gas processing costs). The same search procedure as for Maximum
production is carried out using the cost function in place of the oil production
rate.

For both Maximum production and Maximum revenue design methods, a

maximum liquid rate is required to be input. This allows the User to honour
production constraints imposed by surface facilities or off take targets.

Input Parameters
Having set up the calculation options, enter values for the following variables on the

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 359

Input Parameters panel:

Maximum gas available

Set to the maximum gas available at normal operating pressure for
maximum rate or revenue methods.
For Entered by User designs, set to the actual injection for the design
production rate.

Maximum gas during unloading

Enter the maximum gas available at the unloading pressure for
unloading the shallowest valve.

Flowing top node pressure

If surface equipment has been entered, this is the manifold pressure
Otherwise, enter the flowing wellhead pressure.

Unloading top node pressure

Enter a lower unloading pressure if e.g. the separator is bypassed
during unloading
Otherwise leave set the same as flowing top node pressure.

Operating injection pressure

Available gas injection system pressure available at the casing head.
This is not the final operating injection pressure.
If the Safety equipment option has been selected, pressure losses
along surface pipes are computed also.

Kick off injection pressure

Leave set to normal injection system pressure unless an auxiliary
source of high pressure kicks off gas is available.
This pressure is used to space the first unloading valve. If a sufficiently
high pressure is entered, then no unloading valves will be needed.

Desired dP across valve

User selected design pressure loss across valve orifice to ensure well
and gas injection system pressure stability. Usually in the order of
100-200 psi.

Maximum Depth of Injection

Constrains the maximum injection depth to be shallower than the

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 360 PROSPER

production packer.

Water cut
Design producing water cut.

Minimum Spacing
Sets the minimum spacing between valves. Use 200 - 400 ft normally.

Static gradient of load fluid

Density of fluid to be balanced by casing pressure during unloading.

Minimum transfer dP
Only active when Ignoring IPR for Unloading has been selected. If
set to zero, unloading valve trims will be sized to inject sufficient gas to
lower the unloading tubing pressure to the transfer pressure at the
valve depth.
Increasing the value of Minimum transfer dP will lower the unloading
GLR injected and reduce trim sizes.

Referring to the sketch (Figure 11.2) below, the transfer pressure is:
(Pmin) = Ppd - (Ppd - Pid) * % minimum transfer dP /100
Increasing the injection GLR shifts the tubing gradient during unloading closer
to the objective gradient line (i.e. to the left). The unloading valve trim is sized
for the GLR corresponding to the required transfer pressure. Values of 5 to
25% are commonly used.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 361

Unloading valve trim sizing depends on whether or not the IPR is used
to determine well flow rates while unloading. Existing Users should
review this section carefully.

Maximum port size

Depends on valve series selected. PROSPER will select multiple orifice
valves for high gas injection rates if the design injection cannot be
passed by one valve of Maximum port size.

Safety For Closure Of Last Unloading Valve

Extra dP to ensure that the last unloading valve before the orifice is
closed

NEW!!!
Thornhill-Craver ReRating- DeRating Percentage for Valves and for Orifice

This coefficient is used to scale down the maximum gas injection rate
that can be flowed through a valve or the orifice. As the maximum gas

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 362 PROSPER

rate is decreased, this means that to flow the same gas rate as the
original case (with no de-rating), larger valve or orifice should be used

Valve Type
Casing sensitive valves
o Enter the minimum casing pressure drop to close valves.
Tubing sensitive valves
o Enter the percentage difference in Pcasing - Pwh to close valves.
Proportional response valves Proportional
o PROSPER determines the closing pressure as part of the design
calculations.

Valve Settings (Casing pressure operated valves only)

For casing pressure operated valves, there are 3 options for setting valve dome
pressures:
Pvc = Gas Pressure
PROSPER in this case sets valve dome pressures to balance the casing
pressure at depth. Unloading valves will close when the casing pressure
drops below this value. A small value of Casing Pressure to Close Valves will
ensure that the unloading valves will remain shut.

This design method ensures maximum injection depth and hence maximises
production rates.

All Valves Pvo = Gas Pressure

Dome pressures are set so that valves open with the design casing pressure
at depth. The casing pressure must be reduced by at least R(Pvo - Pt) to close
valves for this option. PROSPER designs using the maximum of dP to close
valves or the calculated closing pressure drop. This method reduces the
available injection pressure and will result in lower production rates.

This is the recommended design setting when designing new wells.

First Valve Pvo = Gas Pressure
The first valve dome pressure is set to open on the design casing pressure at
depth. Subsequent valves are set to close on design casing pressure. This
method gives additional safety for the opening of the first unloading valve without

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 363

sacrificing available pressure for the deeper unloading valves.

Pmin - Pmax
Enter fraction of TEF

Injection Point
Before the gas lift design is performed, the User can decide if the operating valve is
a gas lift valve or an orifice.

Dome Pressure Correction above 1200 psi

There are two equations for dome pressure temperature correction for dome
pressures above 1200 psi.
No
PROSPER will use the standard API temperature correction method for all
pressures. This method is known to be inaccurate at high pressures. The option is
provided for convenience in comparing results from hand calculations etc.

Yes
The API method is used below 1200 psi, and an improved algorithm is used above
1200 psi. This is the default and recommended option.

Check Rate Conformance with IPR

When selected, PROSPER will re-calculate the system solution rate at each step in
the design process to ensure that the design rate can be met. This prevents for
example, a design being done for an unrealistic Enter by User rate.

For speed in comparing designs, this option can be set to No. However,
the User must be aware that the design rate may not be able to be met by
the well.

Vertical Lift Correlation

Select the most appropriate correlation for your application. Matched VLP
correlations should be used when available.

Surface Pipe Correlation

Select the most appropriate correlation for your application. Surface pipes (when
entered in surface equipment) form part of the gas lift system in PROSPER and are
accounted for when calculating unloading pressures and flowing pressure losses.
This can be important for sub-sea systems where the flow line head can be
significant.

Using IPR for Unloading

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 364 PROSPER

Yes
This is the recommended PROSPER unloading valve trim sizing method.
Unloading valves are sized to achieve a minimum flowing gradient above the
valve assuming that the load fluid is being produced. The IPR is used to
calculate the well production rates during unloading. Minimum transfer dP (as
explained under inputs below) is ignored for this option.
No
This is the standard hand-calculation method. Unloading valve trims are
sized to achieve the GLR required to lower the tubing pressure to the transfer
pressure. The GLR is based on the full design production rate - the actual
production rate during unloading is not calculated. This results in the
selection of larger valve trims. Minimum transfer dP is used to increase the
transfer pressure, thereby reducing the unloading gas requirement and valve
trim size.

Orifice Sizing On
Two options are available:
Calculated dP at Orifice
Min dP Across Orifice

11.1.2.2Gas Lift Valve Selection

Once the design problem has been set, the next stage is to tell PROSPER the kind of
valves that will be picked up from database for design.

On the right-hand side of the input Gas Lift Design input screen there is a navigator
window that allows selecting the type of valves to use in the design from an internal
database.

Please refer to the end of this chapter for an illustration of how to access
and edit the database for the gas lift valves

11.1.2.3Performing the Design (New Well)

Once the input data has been defined and the valves type selected, click Continue to
access the Gas Lift design screen. The following example is for casing sensitive
valves:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 365

A screen similar to that above will be displayed if design for Maximum

Rate or Maximum Revenue has been selected.

If the design rate is Entered by User, the upper (Rate calculation) part of
the screen is not displayed.

Displaying the Well Performance Curves / Finding Design Rate (New Well)
The first step is to find the design production rate.
Click Get Rate. PROSPER will calculate the Gas Lift Performance
Curve and determine the optimum Gas Lift injection rate and maximum
oil production rate.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 366 PROSPER

The Get Rate process calculates oil production as a function of gas

injected.
When the calculations have finished, the results can be displayed in the form of a
well performance curve by clicking Plot. A graph similar to the following will appear:

The target design rate and GLR injected can be read off the performance curve plot.
The design rate is:

The maximum oil production shown in the Performance curve plot, provided
that the available gas injection and liquid production rate limits have not been
exceeded.
In case the maximum gas available is exceeded by the highest oil rate on the
plot, the oil rate corresponding to maximum available gas is taken as design
rate.
PROSPER will design for the maximum oil production rate entered in the main
input screen, if it exceeds the rate calculated from the performance curve.

The performance curves can span several flow regimes. Discontinuities

in some flow correlations may cause occasional curve fitting problems.
In such cases, a correlation such as Hagedorn Brown may give better
results.

Calculating Valve Spacing

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 367

To perform the valve spacing, click Design.

The program will then determine the depth of the operating valve and the
spacing for the unloading valves. Depending on the design settings, this will
usually take more than one pass.
On the first pass, the injection and unloading valve depths are determined
assuming no casing pressure drop to close valves.
Having determined the number of valves to use, the operating valve depth is
revised to reflect the new operating casing pressure.
The spacing procedure is repeated using the revised operating casing
pressure until the number of unloading valves and their setting depths no
longer change.

When Check Rate Conformance with IPR is set to Yes, PROSPER

re-calculates the solution rate and reduces the design rate if necessary.
The final design production and Gas Lift injection rates are displayed on
the design gradient plot.

Displaying the Position of the Unloading Valves

To display the position of the unloading valves and the final design condition, click Pl
ot. A plot similar to the following will be displayed:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 368 PROSPER

The plot shows the tubing and casing pressure gradients for the design rate plus the
position of the operating and unloading valves. The unloading fluid gradients are
plotted also. The design data box lists the Actual production and injection rates
together with the operating surface casing pressure.

Results
To display the valve details click Results and the table with the results will be
displayed.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 369

Click on Calculate to calculate the Dome Pressure and the TestRack Opening
Pressure (valve setting pressure at 60C).

The valve depths, tubing pressure, unloading gas injection rate and trim
sizes are shown in the left screen panel.

Valve types are identified as Valve for unloading valves or Orifice for the
last mandrel if the injection point is selected as orifice. No opening or
dome pressure calculations are made for the orifice.

The design parameters such as valve depth, opening and closing pressures, orifice
size etc. are displayed in the table. Use the scroll thumb below the table to scroll
right to see items e.g. R-value, not visible in the display window.

NEW!!! Design Sensitivity on Port Size

By selecting Change Valve it is possible to re-calculate the parameters
associated to the valve sizes.

Once a design has been completed, its performance should be checked

over the range of expected well conditions. Transfer the gas lift design and
valve setting details into Equipment Gas Lift, then use Calculation System

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 370 PROSPER

to compute sensitivities. Alternatively, Matching Quicklook can be used to

evaluate a design.

11.1.3 Existing Mandrels Design

This option enables the User to design gas lifted artificial lift systems for existing
installations.
To perform the fixed mandrel depth design, click Design | Gas lift design |
Existing mandrels. The following input screen will be displayed:

This screen is similar to the Gas lift Design (New well) screen, except that the
variables relating to spacing the valves have been removed.

11.1.3.1Setting Up the Design Problem

Setting the artificial lift design problems is defining the various fields in the figure
above reported.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 371

Please refer to the previous section for the description of the entry fields.

For this design type options for the choice of the first valve can be selected:

First Valve Choice

Completion Fluid to SurfaceUnloading valves will be placed assuming that
completion fluid fills up the entire well and thus must be unloaded from the
entire well.
This is the most conservative unloading requirement and is the default
option.
Completion Fluid Level Calculated PROSPER estimates the standing liquid level
from the reservoir pressure and static pressure gradient. Any mandrels that are
above this depth will be set with Dummy valves.
This approach can save valves for low pressure reservoirs. The User
must be certain that work over fluids can leak off to balance the reservoir
pressure

Minimum Squeeze PI Method (ELF)This method can be used when the well
productivity is sufficient to ensure that completion fluids can be squeezed into
the formation during unloading. An unloading tubing gradient is calculated by
taking the static reservoir pressure and increasing the injected GLR, until the
gradient arrives at the design top node pressure. Unloading valves are spaced
by comparing this tubing gradient with the available casing pressure at depth.

This method can be used when the well productivity is sufficient to

ensure that completion fluids can be squeezed into the formation during
unloading.

11.1.3.2Defining the Depths of Existing Mandrels

After setting up the input for the design problems, next, click Mandrels and enter the
measured depths of the existing gas lift mandrels as in the example shown below.

Enter the depth of all mandrels in the well, including those fitted with
dummy valves.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 372 PROSPER

PROSPER will select the best depths for the operating and unloading
valves from this list.

When more mandrels are available than needed for the current design,
PROSPER will automatically set dummies at the intermediate depths.

The valve type initially entered is unimportant.

PROSPER will overwrite the valve type when it performs the design.

This table is effectively a list of the potential valve depths and can be used to
prepare designs for new wells where equipment limitations determine the available
mandrel depths.

If entries are made in the Casing Pressure drop or Max. Gas Injected fields on
the mandrel depth screen shown in the figure above, these values will
overwrite the values entered on the main design screen.

Leave these fields blank to design using the same values of pressure drop
or gas injection for each unloading valve.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 373

The mandrel depths can be picked up from either Matching QuickLook or

Equipment Gas Lift using the Transfer button, or entered by hand. The
usual PROSPER editing facilities are available for manipulating the table
entries.

11.1.3.3Gas Lift Valve Selection

Having entered the mandrel depths, select a valve series using the navigator window
on the right, as for the Gas Lift Design (New well) case. This will define the set / type
of valves that will be used for design.

11.1.3.4Performing the Design (Existing Mandrels)

Click Continue to access the gas lift design calculation screen.

If a calculated rate design method has been selected, a screen similar to the
following will be displayed:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 374 PROSPER

Displaying the Well Performance Curves / Finding Design Rate (Existing)

Click Get Rate, and the program will calculate the Gas Lift Performance Curve and
determine the optimum gas injection rate and production rate for the well given the
available injection gas rate and pressure limits.

Performing the Design

To run the design, click on Design.
The design rate calculation begins by selecting a GLR Injected and a low
production rate.
A pressure traverse is calculated from the THP downwards using the gas
lifted GLR until the casing pressure equals the tubing pressure less the
Desired dP across valves.
A check is then made to find the next shallowest mandrel. The traverse is
calculated from the next shallowest injection mandrel depth down to the sand
face using the non-Gas Lifted fluid gradient.
The IPR and VLP pressures are compared.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 375

The rate is increased and the calculation repeated until an intersection with
the IPR (rate solution) is found.
The injection GLR is increased until the optimum production rate is found.
This procedure ensures that the available mandrel depths are honoured at
every calculation step.

Once the calculations have stopped, click Plot to make a plot of the production rate
Vs gas injected. It is similar to that of a new well design.

Calculating Mandrels with Valves / Displaying their Position

The design is performed for the target rate by clicking Design. Once the calculation
has finished, the design can be checked graphically by clicking the Plot button to
display a plot similar to the following:

The Design proceeds as follows:

The annulus pressure gradient plot begins at the design casing pressure and
traverses down to the first valve.
It is then shifted back as the casing pressure is lowered to close the unloading
valve. The annulus traverse is recalculated from surface with the reduced
pressure and continues down to the next valve and so on until the operating
valve depth is reached.
PROSPER will optionally check the design rate for conformance with the IPR
and reduce the design rate if necessary.
The design gradient plot shows the Actual design production and Gas Lift

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 376 PROSPER

injection rates together with the injection pressure at surface while injecting at
the orifice.

Calculating the Valve Test Rack Setting Pressures (Existing)

To display the valve setting calculations, click Results from the Design screen. Click
Calculate, and PROSPER will determine the dome pressures and test rack setting
pressure for the selected valves as in the following example:

Click Calculate to determine the Dome and the TestRack Opening pressure will be
updated for the new valve series.

To access parameters such as the transfer pressure and port size, click on
the scroll arrow at the bottom of the Input parameters panel.

To perform sensitivity calculations for the current design, the valve depths
must be transferred to Equipment Gas Lift before making calculations.
Based on flowing tubing pressures PROSPER determines the injection point
during production.

NEW!!! Design Sensitivity on Port Size

By selecting Change Valve it is possible to re-calculate the parameters
associated to the valve sizes.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 377

11.1.3.5Valve Spacing

Valve spacing is not affected by the choice of unloading method, but the trim size
selection depends on whether the well IPR is used for calculating the unloading rate
or not.

The following discussion refers to casing sensitive valves.

For the design rate and GLR injected, a pressure traverse is calculated from
the top node (including the flow line, if present) downwards using the gas
lifted flowing gradient.

The injection depth is the depth at which the flowing tubing pressure equals
the casing pressure gradient less the design dP loss across the orifice or the
Maximum Injection Depth (packer depth), whichever is the shallower. This
step establishes the flowing tubing pressure gradient to be used for valve
spacing.

The shallowest unloading valve is placed at the depth that balances the
tubing load fluid pressure with the casing pressure (less a 50 psi safety
margin) at that depth.

Further unloading valves are placed by traversing down between the load fluid
pressure gradient and gas lifted tubing pressure gradient (calculated for the
design gas lifted production rate) lines.

Valves are placed ever deeper until the inter-valve spacing equals the pre-set
minimum, or the maximum injection depth has been reached.

Once the first pass design is complete, PROSPER re-calculates the flowing
gradient tubing using the current operating valve depth. For casing sensitive
valves, the valve depths are re-calculated to allow for the casing pressure
drop to close valves. The process is repeated until the valve depths no longer
change.

When Check Rate Conformance with IPR is set to Yes, the solution rate is checked
to ensure that it can be achieved. PROSPER reduces the design rate if necessary
and repeats the spacing exercise.

11.1.3.6Designing with Tubing Sensitive Valves

Tubing sensitive valves operate with a constant casing pressure and rely on
increasing tubing pressure as the well unloads to close the unloading valve and
transfer injection to lower valves.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 378 PROSPER

To prepare a design for tubing sensitive valves, the required input is the same as for Casing
Sensitive valves except that instead of entering the casing pressure drop to close valves, the
percentage Pcasing - Pwh to close valves is r

11.1.3.7Spacing Procedure for Tubing Sensitive Valves

The injection point is found as for casing sensitive valves by finding the intersection
of the minimum tubing gradient line and the casing pressure gradient (less a 50 psi
safety margin).

The first unloading valve is spaced as for the casing sensitive case.

Intermediate unloading valves are spaced by traversing down using the load fluid
gradient from the transfer pressure to intersect the casing pressure gradient for the
operating injection pressure. The transfer pressure (tubing pressure at which the
unloading valve closes) is calculated using the value of % Pcasing -Pwh as follows:
The surface pressure corresponding to the specified % difference between the
operating tubing and casing pressures is calculated.
A straight line is extended from this point to intersect the tubing pressure at the
injection point. The valve transfer pressure is defined at any depth by this line.

A small value of % difference results in transfer pressures close to the flowing

tubing gradient. While this results in a design with few unloading valves, any
small increase in flowing tubing pressure may cause unloading valves to re-open.

A larger value of % Pcasing -Pwh will increase the transfer pressure further away
from the flowing tubing gradient. This provides a greater safety margin against
multi-point injection, but requires the unloading valves to be spaced more closely.
Selecting transfer pressures using only the % Pcasing - Pwh straight line can result
in shallow valves having a too conservative transfer pressure and the deeper valves
may transfer too close to the tubing gradient line. PROSPER adjusts the design
transfer pressures so that valves are spaced efficiently while at the same time
ensuring a good safety margin against multipoint injection.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 379

Having performed a design, it is recommended that the Matching Q

uicklook and Design Gas Lift Diagnostic sections be used to check your
design and examine the effect of varying design and producing conditions.

11.1.3.8Proportional Valves

Merla proportional valves are a hybrid of tubing- and casing- sensitive

characteristics. A design procedure and valve characteristics for the most common
proportional valves is currently under field testing.

11.1.4 Gas Lift Adjustments

The existing Gaslift Design sections allow the User to select and size gas lift
equipment for specified design conditions. Gaslift Adjustments provides additional
calculations for testing gas lift designs under operating conditions. Surface casing

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 380 PROSPER

pressures when re-starting production are presented in addition to input parameters

needed for setting up automatic well controllers.

To set up a Gaslift Adjustments calculation, enter the following items:

These are the required input data:

- Downstream Pressure Constraint
Surface pressure the well must flow against
- Kick off Casing Head Pressure
Absolute maximum available casing injection pressure
- Lift Gas Network Normal Pressure
Normal operating pressure of injection gas system
- Safety Margin For Lift Gas Control
Control pressure drop across gas injection choke
- Maximum CHP Under Normal Operation
Injection pressure available downstream of control choke. Difference of network and
control pressures.
- Min CP decrease to Close Last Unloading Valve
Specified pressure drop to close deepest unloading valve
- Lift Gas Temperature
Temperature of injected gas at the casing head
- Target Liquid Production Rate
Design production rate for Gaslift adjustments calculations.
- Water Cut

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 381

Design water cut for Gaslift adjustments calculations

- Production (Total) GOR
Solution and free gas production (does not include injection gas)
- Vertical Flow Correlation
Select appropriate correlation. Matched correlations should be used where available.
- Dome Pressure Correction (above 1200 psig)
When Yes is selected, an improved dome pressure correction is used. The API
temperature correction is always used below 1200 psi.

Once the input data entry is complete, the User has to make sure that the
correspondent valves are transferred. Select Valves and then Transfer to transfer the
valve info from Gas Lift Design or from QuickLook:

Once the gaslift equipment details are entered the flowing gradient or static gradient
can be estimated:

Flowing
Calculations are made for flowing conditions at the User-entered target production
rate. PROSPER calculates well performance curves for gas injection at each
mandrel depth. Production rates and pressures at surface and mandrel depth are
determined. Annulus volume and bottoms up times are also calculated. The flowing
gradient for the operating condition can be plotted with opening and closing
pressures for each unloading valve displayed.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 382 PROSPER

Static
Calculations are made for shut-in conditions. The static tubing gradient is
determined using the liquid density calculated for the producing water cut. When the
reservoir pressure cannot support a full liquid column, a gas gradient is used back to
surface.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 383

11.1.5 Gaslift Valve Performance

The Valve Performance Clearinghouse (VPC) is a non-profit making organisation formed by a
consortium of major oil companies. Its objective is to become a repository for the collection, analysis
and distribution of gas lift valve performance data and correlations to member companies and
licensees. This information has been made available to Petroleum Experts and a framework to utilise
it is included in Prosper in the Gaslift Valve Performance section.

The database required to implement this feature is not distributed by Petroleum Experts and must be
obtained from the VPC.
This implementation consists of two parts
Database inspection and valve performance curve calculation and display
Gaslift Design and QuickLook integration

Valve performance calculations will be used to determine the required port size or gas rate through a
given valve

11.1.5.1Valve Performance Clearinghouse (VPC)

Valve Performance Clearinghouse (VPC)
The Valve Performance Clearinghouse (VPC) is a non-profit making organisation formed by a
consortium of major oil companies. Its objective to become a repository for the collection, analysis,
and distribution of gas lift valve performance data and correlations to member companies and
licensees. Tests are conducted at the Southwest Research Institute compliant to the API 11V2 RP
specification. Test data and correlations are proprietary to member companies, and are licensed to
non-members for a fee on a per-valve basis.
This information has been made available to Petroleum Experts and a framework to utilise is included
in this version of PROSPER.

The database required to implement this feature will not be distributed with PROSPER by Petroleum
Experts and must be obtained from VPC.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 384 PROSPER

The Valve Performance Clearinghouse is a service offered by Decker Technology. Its objectives are
Establish an independent source for the collection, consolidation, and distribution of valve
performance data and correlations to members.
Perform tests on gaslift valves selected by the members using the API 11V2 RP
Develop correlations using the Decker Technology proprietary method to predict gas passage
for any pressure and temperature conditions with an accuracy of better than +/-20%.
Provide a Valve Performance Reference manual containing performance data and correlations
for all valves tested by the VPC.

Decker Technology, Inc.

2238 McCurdy Road
Stone Mountain, GA 30087
Phone: 770-496-9680
Fax: 770-496-9681
E-mail: decktech@bellsouth.net

11.2 Electrical Submersible Pump Design

The Design Electrical Submersible Pump section allows the User to design an ESP
installation.

The design is performed in two steps:

1. Determine the required pump head to achieve a specified production rate
2. Select a suitable combination of pump, motor and cable for the application.

ESP data entered in the System Electrical Submersible Pumps input menu is not
utilised by the ESP design section. The design results will overwrite this section.

In the main ESP Design screen the design parameters can be entered:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 385

The parameters are self-explanatory, except for the four parameters:

Gas Separator Efficiency
It represents the efficiency of separation of gas in case there is free
gas and a downhole separator is installed
Motor Power Safety Margin
This factor adds a safety margin to the power strictly necessary
to lift the design rate. For example, if the safety margin is 10%,
the pump power requirement will be increased of 10%
Pump Wear Factor
This factor takes in account of the deterioration of the pump
performance. A wear factor of 0.1 will scale the original head as
per performance curve of 10%
Gas DeRating Model
It allows selecting a User DeRating model. The Gas Derating
model will consider the reduction in the pump's performance
when free gas enters the pump. The Derating model represents
the relation between the quantity of free gas and the amount by
which the pump's performance reduces.
The User has the ability to import a DeRating model in the form

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 386 PROSPER

of a custom .dll file. This can be done by clicking on File | User

Correlation | HSP Gas Derating model. The model imported in
this section will also be applicable for ESP design.

Design procedure
Designing an ESP installation using PROSPER is divided into two phases. One is
where the head and power requirement calculations are made and the second part
is where on basis of the calculations, the equipment is selected.

The following description assumes that input of the well details and PVT data have
already been correctly completed and that where applicable, pressure drop
correlations have been matched to field data.

11.2.1 ESP Calculate

This section determines the head required to be supplied by the pump to achieve a
specified production rate.

From the main ESP Design screen select Calculate:

Clicking on Calculate the program calculates the pump duty necessary to achieve
the design production rate. PROSPER will display the pump duty solution, as shown
in the figure above.

PROSPER uses the IPR from System Inflow Performance to calculate the
flowing pressure at the sand face and the specified VLP correlation to find the

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 387

pump intake pressure for the design production rate.

The program then works down from the specified top node pressure to arrive
at the required pump discharge pressure.
The difference between the intake and discharge pressures represents the
required pump head.
PROSPER compresses the liquid and gas as the pressure increases across
the pump, so the volumetric rate will be less at the discharge than at the
pump inlet.
The mass flow rate and the required head are used to determine the pump
fluid power requirement.

Emulsions
If Emulsions have been selected on the Options screen, viscosity
corrections are applied to pump capacity and head. Otherwise, no ESP
viscosity corrections will be applied. If an Emulsion PVT model has been
built in the PVT section, then the emulsion viscosity can be optionally used
in the ESP calculations and elsewhere. As mentioned in the PVT section,
emulsion behaviour in oilfield systems analysis is poorly understood. The
emulsion PVT model provides the means to apply empirical corrections and
should be used with caution.

If an inlet gas separator is to be used, enter the separator efficiency before

carrying out the calculation. The program allows the percentage of free
gas set by the separator efficiency to be produced up the annulus, and the
remainder to be compressed through the pump. Hence, the PVT properties
of the well fluids can be different below and above the pump.

11.2.1.1Checking Suitability of Separator Efficiency

To check that the separator efficiency chosen in the input is acceptable for
the design case, the Dunbar Criterion may be used as showed below.

Click Sensitivity to display the intake pressure and intake GLR plotted over a range
of gas separator efficiency curves.
Check that the design operating point lies above the empirical limit represented by
the Dunbar Factor line.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 388 PROSPER

11.2.2 ESP Design (Pump, Motor and Cable Selection)

Having determined the required pump duty, click on Done to go back to the ESP
design screen.
The next step is to select the pump, motor and cable capable to provide the
calculated duty.

To do so, select Design: the program will display a pump design screen similar to
that shown below:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 389

In the Select drop-down boxes, PROSPER lists the equipment in its database that is
capable of meeting the design requirements.

Select Pump
PROSPER presents pumps that can meet the following criteria:

Inlet rate within range

Discharge rate within range
Head developed at design well rate is near pump's maximum efficiency point
Pump O.D. < Casing I.D.

The User must select a pump from those listed.

Select Motor
Once a pump has been selected, the pump efficiency is known; the motor power
requirement can now be calculated.

Proceed to the motor drop-down box and select a motor from those listed.

PROSPER lists pumps and motors on the basis of diameter and

performance characteristics.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 390 PROSPER

It is the User's responsibility to ensure that the pump selected is

coherent with the information provided by the manufacturer

It is the User's responsibility to ensure that the motor selected is

physically compatible with the pump and that the most economical
combination of operating voltage and current is chosen.

Select Cable
Once the motor power and voltage option have been determined, a suitable cable
must be selected.

PROSPER displays those cables capable of passing the required current.

11.2.2.1Checking the Pump Design

Click Plot to display the design operating point on the pump performance curve as
shown below:

Normally, the first pass design will have an operating point fairly close to
the selected pump's optimum efficiency. However, as well conditions
change with time, this may not be the best design for the life of the
installation

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 391

Different combinations of pump and motor can be quickly experimented with

in the ESP design section until an optimum design is obtained.
A report can be generated which gives details of the pump selection and
design conditions
The robustness of the first pass design must then be checked over the range
of expected well operating conditions by running sensitivities in the C
alculation menu
PROSPER allows sensitivities to be run on both well performance and pump
parameters such as pump setting depth and operating frequency.

The ESP system design process is completed by iterating between the Calculation
and Design sections until the final design is optimised over the projected pump run
life.

Viscosity corrections, where applicable, will be considered in choice of available

pumps and the number of stages required.

11.3 Hydraulic Pump Design

The Design Hydraulic Pump section allows the User to design a HSP installation.

The design is performed in two steps:

1. Determine the required pump head to achieve a specified production rate
(reservoir fluid + power fluid)
2. Select a suitable combination of pump and turbine for the application
HSP data entered in SystemHydraulic Submersible Pumps is not utilised by the H
SP design section and will be overwritten by the design.

In the main HSP Design screen the design parameters can be entered:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 392 PROSPER

The parameters are self-explanatory, except for the three parameters:

% Power Fluid of Reservoir Fluid
This factor represents the ratio (in %) between the power fluid
and the produced reservoir fluid. A value of 100% means that
the rate of power fluid is equal to the rate of produced reservoir
fluid
Pump Wear Factor
This factor takes in account of the deterioration of the pump
performance. A wear factor of 0.1 will scale the original head as
per performance curve of 10%
Gas DeRating Model
It allows selecting a User DeRating model. The Gas Derating
model will consider the reduction in the pump's performance
when free gas enters the pump. The Derating model represents
the relation between the quantity of free gas and the amount by
which the pump's performance reduces.
The User has the ability to import a DeRating model in the form
of a custom .dll file. This can be done by clicking on File | User

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 393

Correlation | HSP Gas Derating model.

Design procedure
The design of an HSP installation using PROSPER is divided into two phases. One is
where the head and power requirement calculations are made and the second part
is where on basis of the calculations, the equipment is selected.

The following description assumes that input of the well details and PVT data have
already been correctly completed and that where applicable, pressure drop
correlations have been matched to field data.

11.3.1 HSP Calculate

This section determines the head required to be supplied by the pump to achieve a
specified production rate.

From the main HSP Design screen select Calculate:

Clicking on Calculate the program calculates the pump duty necessary to achieve
the design production rate. PROSPER will display the pump duty solution, as shown
in the figure above.

PROSPER uses the IPR from System Inflow Performance to calculate the
flowing pressure at the sand face and the specified VLP correlation to find the
pump intake pressure for the design production rate.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 394 PROSPER

The program then works down from the specified top node pressure to arrive
at the required pump discharge pressure.
The difference between the intake and discharge pressures represents the
required pump head.
PROSPER compresses the liquid and gas as the pressure increases across
the pump, so the volumetric rate will be less at the discharge than at the
pump inlet.
The mass flow rate and the required head are used to determine the pump
fluid power requirement.

For certain configurations the produced and power fluids can be commingled above
the pump. Hence, the PVT properties of the well fluids can be different below and
above the pump.
Emulsions
If Emulsions have been selected on the Options screen, viscosity
corrections are applied to pump capacity and head. Otherwise, no HSP
viscosity corrections will be applied. If an Emulsion PVT model has been
built in the PVT section, then the emulsion viscosity can be optionally used
in the HSP calculations and elsewhere. As mentioned in the PVT section,
emulsion behaviour in oilfield systems analysis is poorly understood. The
emulsion PVT model provides the means to apply empirical corrections and
should be used with caution.

11.3.2 HSP Design (Pump and Turbine Selection)

Having determined the required pump duty, click on Done to go back to the ESP
design screen.

The next step is to select the pump, motor and cable capable to provide the
calculated duty.

To do so, select Design: the program will display a pump design screen similar to
that shown below:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 395

In the Select drop-down boxes, PROSPER lists the equipment in its database that is
capable of meeting the design requirements.

Select Pump
PROSPER presents pumps that can meet the following criteria:

Pump Speed within range

Discharge rate within range
Head developed at design well rate is near pump's maximum efficiency point
Pump and O.D. < User input maximum

The User must select a pump from those listed.

Select Turbine
Once a pump has been selected, the pump efficiency is known, so the turbine power
requirement can now be calculated.

Proceed to the turbine drop down box and select a turbine from those listed.

PROSPER lists pumps and motors on the basis of diameter and

performance characteristics.

It is the User's responsibility to ensure that the pump selected is

coherent with the information provided by the manufacturer

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 396 PROSPER

It is the User's responsibility to ensure that the motor selected is

physically compatible with the pump and that the most economical
combination of operating voltage and current is chosen.

11.3.2.1Checking the Pump/Turbine Design

Click Pump and Turbine Plot to display the design operating point on the pump
performance curve as shown below:

Normally, the first pass design will have an operating point fairly close to the
selected pump's optimum efficiency. However, as well conditions change with
time, this may not be the best design for the life of the installation.
Different combinations of pump and turbine can be quickly experimented with
in the HSP design section until an optimum design is obtained.
A report can be generated which gives details of the pump selection and
design conditions.

Important Note
The robustness of the first pass design must then be checked over the
range of expected well operating conditions by running sensitivities in the
System Calculation menu.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 397

To access the System Calculation, select the System button within

the HSP design section.
This is a specialized form of the calculation that ensures that the
power generated by the turbine is equal to the power required by the
pump. This is achieved by varying the power fluid injected until this
requirement is met. The calculation is therefore somewhat slower
than the normal system calculation.

The HSP system design process is completed by iterating between the Calculation
and Design sections, until the final design is optimised over the projected pump run
life.

Viscosity corrections, where applicable, will be considered in choice of available

pumps and the number of stages required.

11.4 Progressive Cavity Pump Design

The DesignProgressive Cavity Pump section allows the User to design a PCP
installation.

The design is performed in two steps:

1. Determine the required pump head to achieve a specified production rate
2. Select a suitable combination of pump and turbine for the application
PCP data entered in SystemHydraulic Submersible Pumps is not utilised by the
PCP design section and will be overwritten by the design.

In the main PCP Design screen the design parameters can be entered:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 398 PROSPER

This is the case of PCP with Sucker Rod. If the PCP is driven by a Downhole Motor,
the data to input are similar to the ones seen in the ESP.

All the parameters are self-explanatory on the basis of the previous sections.

Design Procedure
The design of an HSP installation using PROSPER is divided into two phases. One is
where the head and power requirement calculations are made and the second part
is where on basis of the calculations, the equipment is selected.

The following description assumes that inputs of the well details and PVT data have
already been correctly completed and that where applicable, pressure drop
correlations have been matched to field data.

11.4.1 PCP Calculate

This section determines the head required to be supplied by the pump to achieve a
specified production rate.

From the main PCP Design screen select Calculate:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 399

Clicking on Calculate the program calculates the pump duty necessary to achieve
the design production rate. PROSPER will display the pump duty solution, as shown
in the figure above.

PROSPER uses the IPR from System Inflow Performance to calculate the
flowing pressure at the sand face and the specified VLP correlation to find the
pump intake pressure for the design production rate.
The program then works down from the specified top node pressure to arrive
at the required pump discharge pressure.
The difference between the intake and discharge pressures represents the
required pump head.
PROSPER compresses the liquid and gas as the pressure increases across
the pump, so the volumetric rate will be less at the discharge than at the
pump inlet.

Emulsions
If Emulsions have been selected on the Options screen, viscosity
corrections are applied to pump capacity and head. Otherwise, no HSP
viscosity corrections will be applied. If an Emulsion PVT model has been
built in the PVT section, then the emulsion viscosity can be optionally used
in the HSP calculations and elsewhere. As mentioned in the PVT section,
emulsion behaviour in oilfield systems analysis is poorly understood. The
emulsion PVT model provides the means to apply empirical corrections and
should be used with caution.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 400 PROSPER

11.4.2 PCP Design (Pump and Rod Selection)

Having determined the required pump duty, click on Done to go back to the PCP
design screen.

The next step is to select the pump, motor and cable capable to provide the
calculated duty.

To do so, select Design: the program will display a pump design screen similar to
that shown below:

In the Select drop-down boxes, PROSPER lists the equipment in its database that is
capable of meeting the design requirements.
In the case of motor driven PCP, motor and cable will have to be selected.

PROSPER lists pumps and motors on the basis of diameter and

performance characteristics.

It is the User's responsibility to ensure that the pump selected is

coherent with the information provided by the manufacturer

It is the User's responsibility to ensure that the motor selected is

physically compatible with the pump and that the most economical
combination of operating voltage and current is chosen.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 401

As seen for ESP and HSP installations, the PCP design should be checked by
performing sensitivities in System Calculation, in order to verify the design against
the expected change of conditions along the life of the well.

11.5 Coiled Tubing GasLift Design

The DesignCoiled Tubing GasLift section allows the User to perform a design of
gas lift using coiled tubing.

Before performing the design, data concerning the gas lift gas and the coiled tubing
equipment should be entered in the Coiled Tubing Data screen, accessible from the
System menu:

Then select DesignCoiled Tubing GasLift:

The input data and the options to enter in this screen are exactly the same as for the

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 402 PROSPER

normal Gas Lift Design (design for a User Entered Rate, or for Maximum Production,
etc).
Please refer to section 11.1 for a detailed explanation.

To perform the Design, select Continue. This will access a screen similar to the Gas
Lift Design:

In the case of the figure above, select Get Rate to calculate the Gas Lift
Performance Curve and then Design to perform the design.
The program will determine the maximum injection depth, the rate produced and the
gas to inject.

The Plot feature allows visualising the design:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 403

11.6 Jet Pump Design

The Design Jet Pump section allows the User to design a Jet Pump installation.

The design is performed in two steps:

1. Determine the required pump head to achieve a specified production rate
2. Select a suitable pump for the application
Jet Pump data entered in SystemJet Pumps is not utilised by the design section
and will be overwritten by the design.

In the main Jet Pump Design screen the design parameters can be entered:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 404 PROSPER

The input data are self-explanatory.

As far as the loss coefficient are concerned, these coefficients are a measure of
the energy loss due to the friction in the above quoted sections of the pump.
The coefficients are provided by the Jet Pump manufacturers.

Design Procedure
The design of a Jet Pump installation using PROSPER is divided into two phases.
One is where the head and power requirement calculations are made and the
second part is where on basis of the calculations, the equipment is selected.

The following description assumes that inputs of the well details and PVT data have
already been correctly completed and that where applicable, pressure drop
correlations have been matched to field data.

11.6.1 Jet Pump Calculate

This section determines the head required to be supplied by the pump to achieve a
specified production rate.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 405

From the main Jet Pump Design screen select Calculate:

Clicking on Calculate the program calculates the pump duty necessary to achieve
the design production rate. PROSPER will display the pump duty solution, as shown
in the figure above.

PROSPER uses the IPR from System Inflow Performance to calculate the
flowing pressure at the sand face and the specified VLP correlation to find the
pump intake pressure for the design production rate.
The program then works down from the specified top node pressure to arrive
at the required pump discharge pressure.
The difference between the intake and discharge pressures represents the
required pump head.
PROSPER compresses the liquid and gas as the pressure increases across
the pump, so the volumetric rate will be less at the discharge than at the
pump inlet.
According to the Surface Fluid (the Power Fluid) Injection Rate and Injection
Pressure, the program will determine R (ratio between the areas of the nozzle
and of the throat), the diameter of the throat and the diameter of the nozzle
The jet pump design dialogue will show two columns of results: Desired and
Actual. The desired column data is the result from performing the design.
The actual column is the results from the given pump selected from the Select
Pump drop-down dialogue box
Comparing another jet pump from the select pump drop-down box with the
same R-Value will not change any results in the Actual results column, this is

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 406 PROSPER

because the same ratio of nozzle to throat area geometry is captured within
the R-value
Once a pump design and the given pump selected the robustness of the
first-pass design must be checked over the range of expected well operating
conditions and also to evaluate wich R-value and power fluid value will avoid
cavitating the pump

Emulsions
If Emulsions have been selected on the Options screen, viscosity
corrections are applied to pump capacity and head. Otherwise, no HSP
viscosity corrections will be applied. If an Emulsion PVT model has been
built in the PVT section, then the emulsion viscosity can be optionally used
in the HSP calculations and elsewhere. As mentioned in the PVT section,
emulsion behaviour in oilfield systems analysis is poorly understood. The
emulsion PVT model provides the means to apply empirical corrections and
should be used with caution.

11.6.2 Jet Pump Design (Pump Selection)

Having determined the required pump duty, click on Done to go back to the Jet
Pump design screen.

The next step is to select the pump suitable to provide the calculated duty.

To do so, select Design: the program will display a pump design screen similar to
that shown below:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 407

Select a pump from the database whose Actual performance (in green in the figure
above) is close to the Desired performance.

PROSPER lists pumps on the basis of diameter and performance

characteristics.

It is the User's responsibility to ensure that the pump selected is

coherent with the information provided by the manufacturer

As seen for ESP, HSP and PCP installations, the Jet Pump design should be
checked by performing sensitivities in System Calculation, in order to verify the
design against the expected change of conditions along the life of the well.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 408 PROSPER

11.7 Sucker Rod Pump Design

11.7.1 Background
General hints

The schematic of a conventional Sucker Rod Pump installation is sketched in the following figure along
with the downhole pump:

Working principle:

A prime motor moves the gearbox, which rotates the crank. The crank is attached to a counterweight
and is connected to the Pitman arm. The Pitman arm is then connected to the walking beam.

The rotary movement of the crank is propagated and translated into a reciprocating movement of the
rod connected to the downhole pump.

From the figure above it is possible to see that as the crank rotates, the rod shifts the plunger up
(upstroke) and down (downstroke) in the pump barrel.

The downhole pump is composed of a barrel with a ball-and-seat valve at the bottom (standing valve)
and a plunger with another ball-and-seat valve (traveling valve).

During the downstroke the plunger is lowered in the barrel, the traveling valve is opened and standing
valve is closed; in this way the fluid is displaced in the tubing above the plunger.

During the upstroke, the traveling valve is closed, whilst the standing valve is opened, letting the fluid
flow from the formation into the barrel. The fluid that was in the tubing in the previous step is pushed
towards the surface.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 409

Troubleshooting the performance of the Pump

It is possible to monitor the pump performance by measuring the variation of the rod load against the
position of the rod itself by means of a dynamometer.

The resulting plot is called "dynamometer card". This plot is a very useful method to verify that the
pump is working fine and to diagnose eventual problems.

The example reported below illustrates the shape of a dynamometer card for the ideal case of pump
and rod perfectly rigid, no friction, perfect pump action:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 410 PROSPER

With reference to the figure above:

- Point A: the plunger is in the lowest point. This is the starting point of the upstroke

- A-B: The traveling valve closes and the standing valve opens. As this is an ideal case, the total load
of the fluid above the plunger is taken over by the sucker rod

- B-C: The plunger travels all the way to the highest point the distance between points B and C
represents the stroke length

- C-D: The traveling valve opens and the standing valve closes. This is the starting point of the
downstroke. The rod unloads

- D-A: The plunger travels back to the lowest point of the stroke A

As mentioned above, the dynamometer illustrated in the figure represents an ideal situation. However,
the examination of actual dynamometer cards allows the Engineer to identify problems related to pump
operative problems, like leaking valves, fluid pounding, gas locking, etc.

Details about the use of dynamometers cards for pump performance diagnostics can be found in the
references reported in Appendix B.

Design

The design of a Sucker Rod Pump installation is a trial and error procedure that consists of:
- starting from assumptions on the pump hardware (pump and rod type, depth, size), flow
conditions and design stroke rate or production rate, and then
- determining the operating parameters, like: pump displacement, peak polished rod load,
minimum polish rod load, peak torque, polished rod horsepower, counterbalance effect (CBE)
etc.
- verifying how the pump installation behaves through the dynamometer card and torque chart

This is achieved by solving the wave equation:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 411

2 u(x, t) 2
2 u(x, t) u(x, t)
2
=a 2
-c +g
t x t
Solutions to this equation have been provided by Gibbs (ref. Appendix B).

The solutions to the equation above allow to determine the surface and downhole dynamometer card
and then a torque analysis can be performed to determine the torque.
These diagnostic plots can be used to verify the working conditions of the designed pump and sucker
rod and in the case the design can be reviewed by changing assumptions and restarting the design.

11.7.2 Design Sucker Rod Pump

The DesignSucker Rod Pump section allows the User to perform a design of a
sucker rod pump installation.

Also, along with the design, a series of diagnostic plots (the Dynamometer card, the
Torque and Rod Speed plot) are provided, which can be used to verify the actual
pump operating regime and in the case troubleshoot the design itself.

The design consists of the following steps:

1. Enter design input parameters (PVT, pump data, design input data)
2. Perform the design
3. Perform Rod Sensitivity

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 412 PROSPER

11.7.2.1Enter Design Parameters

The input parameters consist of:

PVT Data
These are the PVT data for the fluid

Calculation Mode
This option allows to select the design mode:
- Enter Stroke Rate, calculate Production Rate
- Enter Production Rate, calculate Stroke Rate

Pumping Unit and Rod Selection

These options allow to specify the pump and the rod specifications to use for
the design

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 413

Service Factor
- Non-Corrosive
- Salt Water
- Hydrogen Sulphide

Pump Intake Pressure

Allows to select the method used to calculate the pump intake pressure:
- Entered Value
- Calculated from IPR
- Calculated from Fluid Level

Design Input
These inputs specify the design operating conditions (flowing wellhead and
bottomhole temperature, wellhead pressure, pump characteristics and efficiencies,
pump position)

11.7.2.2Perform Design
After entering the input data, select Calculate to perform the design of the Sucker Rod Pump.

The program will calculate the production rate and all the information related to rod load, torque,
stress, etc.
On the right hand side of the screen the plots related to Rod Load, Torque and Pump velocity are
reported.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 414 PROSPER

The Top Rod Loading and Top Rod % Of Goodman Diagram are measurements of the stress in
the top rod based upon the peak polished rod load and the cross-sectional area of the top rod. The
API RP11BR discusses the Modified Goodman Diagram and its construction.
PROSPER is painting in red those parameters if they exceed 100% and there are basically 2 ways of
lowering those values below 100%, 1 is to increase the area of the sucker rods, 2 is to reduce the
peak load.

The Index of Torsional Effectiveness (ITE) is a measurement of the ability of the beam pump unit
type to smooth out and idealize the net crankshaft torque load (under normal conditions handling a full
pump barrel of incompressible fluid).
The ITE is ratio of the average net torque to the peak net torque expressed as percentage.
The higher the ITE the more effective the unit geometry in converting the polished rod load into a
smoother and more ideal torsional load.

ITE Beam Pump Unit Performance

Under 15% Very Poor
20-25% Fair
25-30% Average
30-35% Good
35-40% Very Good

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 415

11.7.2.3Rod Sensitivity
This option allows to perform design sensitivities changing the rod type, in other
words, verifying the impact of different rod types on the pump performance:

The Chart can be plotted in form of bars or pie and different visualisations are

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 416 PROSPER

available:
Production Rate by Rod Type
HorsePower Required by Rod Type
Production Rate Per HorsePower by Rod Type

11.8 Artificial Lift Database

The Artificial Lift Database contains all the information concerning the artificial lift
equipment used in PROSPER.

This is the content of the Database:

Gas Lift Valves
ESP pumps, motors, cables
HSP pumps and turbines
PCP pumps, sucker rods, motors, cables
Jet pumps
MultiPhase pumps
In the following sections there is a description of the information stored in the
Artificial Lift Database and how to update with new data.

To access the database select DesignDatabase.

The Options tab screen collect information on the location of the database and its
version:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 417

An initial database is distributed along with the software.

EQUIPMENT DATABASE DISCLAIMER

Every effort is made to ensure that the sample equipment databases
supplied are correct.
However, it is the Users responsibility to ensure they are both
accurate and up-to-date.
For critical design work, always refer to your equipment supplier for
the latest performance data.
To improve the quality of the Artificial Lift Database, Petroleum
Experts is more than happy to accept the contribution of Users who
have updated data

11.8.1 Gas Lift Valve Database

To perform a Gas Lift design, PROSPER must have appropriate valve data loaded in
its database. To enter and maintain the valve data that PROSPER requires for Gas
Lift design, the Gas Lift tab button in the Database:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 418 PROSPER

The database is completely editable: it is possible to Add, Amend or Delete any

record.
It is also possible to Export the database to different locations (file, spreadsheets,
etc.) or create an Import file.
The last option allows to create back-ups of the database in format .GLD, which can
be recalled by PROSPER to restore the database using the Import button.

11.8.1.1Adding a New Valve

To add a gas lift valve select Add. An entry screen is displayed, where the valve specs can
be entered:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 419

the data to enter are: manufacturer, valve type, Type, Specification, Port size, R value.

The sample gas lift valve database is provided to allow the User to
run the examples. Before designing for field installation, the User
must first ensure that the database contains current and accurate
valve characteristics.

11.8.2 ESP Database

The ESP Database contains the performance curves of pumps and motors and the
characteristics of the cables.

11.8.2.1Pump Database
Select the tab screen ESP in the Database to access the ESP database:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 420 PROSPER

The performance curves are provided in the form of coefficients for a polynomial
equation fitted to actual performance data.

The database is completely editable: it is possible to Add, Amend or Delete any

record.
It is also possible to Export the database to different locations (file, spreadsheets,
etc.) or create an Import file.

Selecting a pump and then Plot, the performance curve of the pump is plotted:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 421

Click Variables to select between Head, Horsepower and Efficiency for plotting.

11.8.2.1.1 Adding a New Pump

To add a new pump select Add and enter the required information:

Next step is to enter the performance data for head and power as per manufacturer
s performance curves and fit them to a polynomial. To do so, select Head
Coefficients and HP Coefficients and enter the data:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 422 PROSPER

Then Fit to regress and calculate the polynomial coefficients, then Done to go back
to the previous panel. The coefficients have been transferred:

The HP coefficients can be calculated in the same way.

To prevent errors, it is recommended that a plot be made and

checked against published curves whenever new data is entered or
alterations are made to existing entries.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 423

11.8.2.2Motor Database
To access the Motors section select the tab screen Motors:

Motor characteristics are entered in form of polynomials fitted to performance data.

Coefficients are required for Nameplate Amps, RPM, and Efficiency and Power
factor. Available horsepower and Power options are entered by clicking the relevant
Edit button.

As plotted, motor speed curves may exceed synchronous speed at low %

power values. This is a characteristic of the polynomial fitting technique
used. The accuracy of motor (and pump) performance curve fits is
optimised in the usable efficiency range.

An example of a motor efficiency plot is shown below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 424 PROSPER

11.8.2.2.1 Adding a New Motor

To add a new motor select Add and enter the required info in the Motor Data:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 425

Enter the data and fit the polynomials by selecting the buttons NamePlate AMPS,
Speed, Efficiency and Power Factor. Use Fit to determine the polynomial
coefficients.

On the right hand side of the screen above (Power Options) enter the different
Power, Voltage and Current the motor is compatible with.

11.8.2.3Cables Database
To access the Cables section select the tab screen Cables:

11.8.2.3.1 Adding a New Cable

Only a few data about the electric characteristic of the cable are required.

Select Add to add a new cable:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 426 PROSPER

Every effort is made to ensure that the sample equipment databases

supplied are correct.
However, it is the Users responsibility to ensure they are both
accurate and up-to-date.
For critical design work, always refer to your equipment supplier for
the latest performance data.

11.8.3 HSP Database

The HSP Database contains the performance curves of pumps and turbines.

11.8.3.1Pumps Database
Select the tab screen HSP in the Database to access the HSP database:

The performance curves are provided in the form of coefficients for a polynomial
equation fitted to actual performance data.

The database is completely editable: it is possible to Add, Amend or Delete any

record.
It is also possible to Export the database to different locations (file, spreadsheets,

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 427

etc.) or create an Import file.

Clicking on Plot displays the Pump performance curve:

11.8.3.2Adding a New Pump

To add a new pump or a turbine, the steps to follow are exactly the same seen for
ESP pumps. Please refer to the previous section for the details.

11.8.3.3Turbines Database
Select the Turbines tab button to display the Turbines Database:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 428 PROSPER

The performance data are provided as polynomials fitted to performance data.

11.8.3.4Adding a New Turbine

To add a new pump or a turbine, select Add and enter the required data:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 429

The Turbine performance is entered by selecting Add in the Turbine Settings area.
The steps to enter the performance data and fit them to a polynomial are the same
as seen in the ESP section. Refer to that section for details.

Every effort is made to ensure that the sample equipment databases

supplied are correct.
However, it is the Users responsibility to ensure they are both
accurate and up-to-date.
For critical design work, always refer to your equipment supplier for
the latest performance data.

11.8.4 PCP Database

The PCP Database contains data concerning the performance of pumps and the
characteristics of sucker rods, motors and cables.

11.8.4.1Pumps Database
Select the tab screen PCP in the Database to access the PCP database:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 430 PROSPER

In the database parameters concerning the pump configuration are stored.

The database is completely editable: it is possible to Add, Amend or Delete any

record.
It is also possible to Export the database to different locations (file, spreadsheets,
etc.) or create an Import file.
Clicking on Plot displays the Pump performance curve:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 431

11.8.4.1.1 Adding a New Pump

To add a new pump select Add and enter the required data as per manufacturers
specs:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 432 PROSPER

11.8.4.2Sucker Rods Database

Select the Sucker Rods tab button to display the correspondent database:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 433

11.8.4.2.1 Adding a New Sucker Rod

To add a new sucker rod select Add and enter the required data:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 434 PROSPER

As far as motor and cables are concerned, please refer to the ESP section for
details.

Every effort is made to ensure that the sample equipment databases

supplied are correct.
However, it is the Users responsibility to ensure they are both
accurate and up-to-date.
For critical design work, always refer to your equipment supplier for
the latest performance data.

11.8.5 Jet Pumps Database

The Jet Pumps Database contains the characteristics of the pumps.

11.8.5.1Pumps Database
Select the tab screen Jet in the Database to access the Jet Pump database:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 435

In the database parameters concerning the pump configuration are stored.

The database is completely editable: it is possible to Add, Amend or Delete any

record.
It is also possible to Export the database to different locations (file, spreadsheets,
etc.) or create an Import file.

11.8.5.1.1 Adding a New Pump

To add a new pump select Add and enter the required data as per manufacturers
specs (nozzle and throat sizes, minimum and maximum rates, etc.):

Every effort is made to ensure that the sample equipment databases

supplied are correct.
However, it is the Users responsibility to ensure they are both
accurate and up-to-date.
For critical design work, always refer to your equipment supplier for
the latest performance data.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 436 PROSPER

11.8.6 MultiPhase Pumps Database

The MultiPhase Database contains the characteristics of the FRAMO Pumps.

11.8.6.1Pumps Database
Select the tab screen MultiPhase in the Database to access the FRAMO Pumps
database:

In the database parameters concerning the pump configuration are stored.

The database is completely editable: it is possible to Add, Amend or Delete any

record.
It is also possible to Export the database to different locations (file, spreadsheets,
etc.) or create an Import file.
Clicking on Plot, the performance curves of the pump are displayed:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 437

11.8.6.2Adding a New Pump

To add a new pump select Add and enter the required data as per manufacturers
specs (nozzle and throat sizes, minimum and maximum rates, etc.):

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 438 PROSPER

Every effort is made to ensure that the sample equipment databases

supplied are correct.
However, it is the Users responsibility to ensure they are both
accurate and up-to-date.
For critical design work, always refer to your equipment supplier for
the latest performance data.

11.8.7 Sucker Rod Pump

The Sucker Rod Pumps Database contains the characteristics of pumps and sucker
rods.
11.8.7.1Pump database
Select the tab screen SRP in the Database to access the Sucker Rod Pump
database:

In the database parameters concerning the pump configuration are stored.

The database is completely editable: it is possible to Add, Amend or Delete any

record.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 439

It is also possible to Export the database to different locations (file, spreadsheets,

etc.) or create an Import file.
11.8.7.1.1 Adding a New Pump
To add a new pump select Add and enter the required information:

11.8.7.2Sucker Rods Database

Select the Sucker Rods tab button to display the correspondent database:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 440 PROSPER

11.8.7.2.1 Adding a New Sucker Rod

To add a new sucker rod select Add and enter the required data:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Design Menu 441

As far as motor and cables are concerned, please refer to the ESP section for
details.

Every effort is made to ensure that the sample equipment databases

supplied are correct.
However, it is the Users responsibility to ensure they are both
accurate and up-to-date.
For critical design work, always refer to your equipment supplier for
the latest performance data.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

Chapter

12
 Output 443

12 Output

The Output menu is used to report, export and plot input data entered into PROSPER
and the results generated by the various calculation options in the program:
Report
This option generates reports about input data and results
Export
This option transfers input data and results to different locations (printer,
spreadsheets, screen, etc.)
Plot
This option generates plots for input data and results
These functions are available also in any of the input/output screens of the program.

12.1 Report
The Report option is used to prepare reports and plots from a current analysis. This
section describes how to use the reporting system with the templates provided with
the system and how to customise these templates.

12.1.1 Setting Up the Reporting System

The set up of the reporting system begins with defining the default locations where the reports will be
created. To define the directories, select File|Preferences:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 444 PROSPER

In the File tab screen initialise the data relevant to the reporting system. Enter the
Location Of Report Output Files. This is the default directory where reports printed
to file are to be placed. Also enter the Location Of User-Created Reports. This is
the path to a directory where User-defined report templates are to be stored.

12.1.2 Reports
The reporting interface gives the User complete control over how the reports are
formatted and what information is utilised to make up the report. This is facilitated by
the use of report templates, which can be edited to suit the specific requirements. It
is possible to choose to use the default report templates provided with the system or
to choose to create slightly different versions of these reports. The selected
templates can then be used to generate the actual reports, which can be sent to a
variety of places (printer, file or screen). The report templates are displayed in a
hierarchy and all templates which have been selected (by double-clicking on it) show
an X in the check-box beside the template name.

To access the Reports area, select OutputReports form the menu toolbar.
There are two modes for the editing of report templates: System and User. System
mode does not allow the User to change any template whereas User mode allows
creating new User-defined templates from scratch or based on an already existing
system report template and also allows editing an existing User-defined report
template. Selecting User mode also makes the User Reports section of the template
hierarchy visible. The User Reports hierarchy contains all report templates which

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Output 445

have been tagged as being a derivation of a system report template as well as any
free standing User-defined templates.

The reporting main window consists of four main parts: The command segment at
the top of the dialogue containing the buttons, the report selection hierarchy, the
output device selection group and the template type selection group. The output
device group is only used when printing from selected report templates.

The available commands are:

OK Print the selected reports to the selected output device and terminate the dialogue
Cancel Terminate the dialogue
Help Bring up the on-line help window

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 446 PROSPER

Setup Select a printer

User Switches between System and User edit mode, This shows or hides the User
Reports section of the report hierarchy and enables or disables the Create and Edit
buttons. If in User mode this button shows the text System and vice-versa.
View View a previously saved native format file on-screen. This brings up a file selection
box for choosing the appropriate report and passes this file name to the Report
Executor
Print Print the selected reports to the selected output device
Create Create a new user report (only visible in User edit mode)
Edit Edit an existing user report template or create a new template from a system
template (only visible in User edit mode)
Group Allows the grouping of report templates references and the storing of the group
information in a file for later recall. This allows batch printing of reports for any
analysis

The available output types are:

Printer Sent the report to the current printer

Screen The reports are displayed on-screen in a report executor window
Native File The reports are saved as .FR files in the output reports directory
RTF File The reports are saved as .RTF files in the output reports directory
Text File The reports are saved as tab delimited text files for easy spreadsheet import

The native (.FR) file format can only be read by the reporting system whereas the
RTF format can be read by many Windows word processing applications. When
printing to file the User will be presented with the following dialogue:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Output 447

The default directory will be set to the default output directory but this can be altered
using the Select Directory button. This can then be applied to all output files by using
Change All. If it is necessary to change the output directory of one of the files, this
can be achieved by using the Browse button (button that shown on the right side of
the filename box) associated with each report. The filenames can themselves be
edited in the text box, which contains them.

For any given report in the system hierarchy the User can choose to view or print a
report using either the system report template provided or a User-defined report
template based on that system report template (or at least that position in the
hierarchy) or it is possible to choose a report grouping which can be made up from a
combination of User and system reports. Choose between these options using the
report template type selection group at the bottom right of the main window. If the
User report template option for any hierarchy position is selected and there are
multiple User-defined report templates for that position, then a dialogue appears
which allows selecting the desired template.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 448 PROSPER

Double clicking on any of the report templates (or selecting and pressing Ok) will
cause it to become the User-defined report template for that hierarchy position for
the current reports session. The default choice is the topmost user defined report
template. It is possible to stop a User-defined report template from being associated
with that hierarchy position by selecting it and then pressing Delete. This does not
actually delete the report template (it can still be seen within the User Reports
section of the hierarchy).

If a report grouping is selected, then a similar dialogue appears and the User can
select the appropriate group file. After selecting a file all the reports referenced in the
group will appear checked in the hierarchy and then it is possible to press print for
all of these reports to be sent to the selected output device.

Template Editor Commands

The template editor works on the principle of moveable fields or groups of fields
where the inputs to these fields can be any value from PROSPER. Headers and
footers can be defined, which can be shown on each page, have fields which have a
value which is the result of a calculation or even have groups of fields which are
displayed only if a condition is met.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Output 449

Data fields from PROSPER are added using the F2 key, selecting the data items
required and then pressing Ok when finished. The selected data items will then
appear as fields, one by one, as the left mouse button is clicked. The fields can be
roughly positioned in this way. The User is not limited to one pass at adding data
items to the report template. More items can be added at any time in the same
manner.

Once a field has been added to the report template the User can edit some of the
properties of the text which will be shown in the field and assign a group number to
the field by double clicking the left mouse button on it and the font properties can be
changed by double clicking the right mouse button on it. Other properties, such as
whether the field has a box around it, etc., can be changed through the menu
options, a full description of which are given below.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 450 PROSPER

The template editor commands can be selected by using the menu, toolbar or
keyboard shortcuts. Help can be obtained on any menu item by highlighting the
menu item and then pressing the F1 key or by consulting the index of help topics
under the help menu.

File Menu
This menu contains commands for saving the current report template file and
specifying the report template parameters.

Save:
Use this selection to save the current report template to the current file name. If a file
is not yet specified, the form editor will prompt for a file name. If a file extension is
not provided, the editor automatically appends an .FP extension to the report file. If a
file with the same name already exists on the disk, the form editor will save the
previous file with a backup extension (.RE).

Save As:
This selection is similar to Save File. In addition, it allows saving the report template

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Output 451

to a new file name.

Report Parameters:
This option allows setting certain report parameters. Firstly, it allows specifying the
name of the report. The margin for the printed page can be set. It is possible to
instruct the report executor to print trial records for adjusting forms such as labels
and invoices and set the default date format for input. The date format that specified
here will be enforced for parameter input during the report execution session, and
any date constant used in expressions.

Report Filter:
This option allows entering a filter criterion for the report. Each data record will be
tested with the expression provided here. A record is selected only if this expression
evaluates to a TRUE value. For example, if the expression was sales->amount>100,
then only the records with the sales amount more than 100 will be selected.

Printer Setup:
This option allows selecting a printer from a list of installed printers and invoking a
printer specific dialogue box for the selected printer. Select the parameters from a
set of printer specific options. These options include page size, page orientation,
resolution, etc. The printer options selected here determine the width and height of
the report.

Exit:
Use this function to exit from the form editor session. If the current file is modified, a
prompt will ask to save the modifications.

Edit Menu:
This menu contains commands to edit the report objects. One or more report objects
must be selected before using this option.

Cut:
Use this option to copy the current item or all the items in the current selection to the
clipboard. The copied items are deleted from the form.

Copy:
Use this option to copy the current item or all the items in the current selection to the
clipboard.

Paste:
Use this option to paste the items from the clipboard to the current form.

Position Text:
Use this option to position the text within the item boundaries. The text can be
justified on the left, right, top, or bottom edges or it can be centred horizontally or
vertically. This option is valid for the label and field type items only.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 452 PROSPER

Item Outlines:
Use this option to specify the item boundaries (left, right, top, and bottom) to draw for
one or more selected items. The colour and width of the boundary lines can be
specified too.

Item Background:
Use this option to set the background colour or pattern for one or more selected
items.

Centre Horizontally:
This option is used to centre horizontally one or more selected items. When more
than one item is selected, the form editor first centres the selection rectangle and
then moves the selected items such that the position of the selected items relative to
the selection rectangle does not change.

Delete Item:
Use this option to delete one or more currently selected items. If the current section
is being deleted, the program asks for confirmation before the deletion. All items
within the section are also deleted.

Fonts:
Use this function to change the font and colour for the text for one or more selected
objects. This option is valid for the field and label type objects only.
When selecting this option, the form editor shows the font and colour selection
dialogue box. The current font and colours are pre-selected in the dialogue box. Use
this dialogue box to specify the selections.

Snap to Grid:
This option allows turning on or off the invisible grid on the form. When the grid is
turned on and an item is moved, it automatically aligns to the closest grid location.
This option also allows setting the grid width.

Report Size:
The following options shrink or elongate the report in the horizontal or vertical
direction by the amount equal to the width or the height of the selection rectangle.

Expand Horizontally
Use this option to create horizontal space by moving items horizontally. For example,
consider three items, A, B, and C placed horizontally. If a new item between the
items A and B is to be inserted, it is possible to use this function to create the
desired space between these two items and place the new item in the newly created
space. To move the items B and C toward right, create a selection rectangle after
the item A and select this option. The width of the selection rectangle specifies the
movement of the items B and C toward right (noted that the selection rectangle does
not need to include all items to be moved). All items toward the right of the selection
rectangle and with the vertical placement between the vertical spaces spanned by

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Output 453

the selection rectangle are moved.

Expand Vertically
Use this option to create additional vertical space by moving the items downward.
For example, consider three items, A, B, and C placed vertically. If a new item
between items A and B is to be inserted, it is possible to use this function to create
the desired space between these two items and place the new item in the newly
created space. To move items B and C downward, create a selection rectangle
below the item A and select this option. The height of the selection rectangle
specifies the downward movement of items B and C (noted that the selection
rectangle does not need to include all items to be moved). All items below the
selection rectangle are moved.
This option also expands (vertically) the current section by the height of the selection
rectangle.

Compress Horizontally
Use this option to delete extra horizontal space by moving items horizontally. For
example, consider three items, A, B, and C placed horizontally. The User can use
this function to bring items B and C closer to the item A. To move items B and C
toward left, create a selection rectangle after the item A and select this option. The
width of the selection rectangle specifies the movement of items B and C toward left
(noted that the selection rectangle does not need to include all items to be moved).
All items toward the right of the selection rectangle and with the vertical placement
between the vertical spaces spanned by the selection rectangle are moved.

Compress Vertically
Use this option to delete vertical space by moving the items upward. For example,
consider three items, A, B, and C placed vertically. It is possible to use this function
to bring items B and C closer to the item A. To move items B and C upward, create a
selection rectangle below the item A and select this option. The height of the
selection rectangle specifies the upward movement of items B and C (noted that the
selection rectangle does not need to include all items to be moved). All items below
the selection rectangle are moved.
This option also shrinks (vertically) the current section by the height of the selection
rectangle.

Field Menu:
This menu contains options to insert, modify, delete and maintain fields.

Insert New Fields:

Data Field: This option is used to paste a new data field to the report template. This
option will display a list of data files and data fields to choose from. When selecting a
field, the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the
field rectangle and click any mouse button. The current field attributes can be
changed using the Edit Current Field Option.

Calculation Field: This option is used to paste a calculation field to the report

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 454 PROSPER

template. This option will prompt for the name of the field, and the field expression.
The field expression can contain any number of valid operators, functions, system
fields, dialogue fields, and data fields. The field type is determined by the result of
the execution of the field.
After entering the field expression, the form editor displays a positioning rectangle.
Use the mouse to position the field rectangle and click any mouse button. The
current field attributes can be changed using the Edit Current Field Option.

System Field: This option is used to paste a system field to the report template.
This option will display a list of system fields (date, time, page, etc.) to choose from.
When selecting a field, the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the
mouse to position the field rectangle and click any mouse button. The current field
attributes can be changed using the Edit Current Field Option.

Dialogue Field: This option is used to paste a dialogue field to the report template.
A dialogue field must have been created using the Edit Dialogue Field Table before
using this option. The dialogue fields are used to prompt the User for data during the
report execution session.
The option will display a list of dialogue fields to choose from. When selecting a field,
the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the field
rectangle and click any mouse button. The current field attributes can be changed
using the Edit Current Field Option.

Edit Current Field: This option is used to edit the field attributes for the current field.
This option is available only when a 'field' type object is selected.

Edit Field Expression: This option is used to edit the field expression for the current
calculation field. This option is available only when a 'calculation field' type object is
selected (see Insert Calculation Field). The option shows the existing calculation
expression and allows making any modifications.

Edit Dialogue Field Table:

Create: This option is used to create a new dialogue field. Once a dialogue field is
created, it can be inserted in the report by using the Insert Dialogue Field selection.
A dialogue field is used to prompt the User for data during report execution. For
example, it can allow the User to set the begin and end dates for the report. A
dialogue field can be used in the field expressions and can be inserted in the report
template for information purposes. A dialogue field in the report filter can be used to
reject records not meeting a specific User criterion.

Modify: This option is used to modify the User prompt, width and prompt order of a
dialogue field. The prompt order determines the order at which the dialogue fields
are presented to the User for data input.

Delete: This option is used to delete a dialogue field from the dialogue field table.
The User cannot delete a dialogue field that is being currently used in the report.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Output 455

Section Menu:
This menu contains commands to insert, edit and delete report sections.

New: This option is used to create a new section. A section is identified by the
section banner and the separation line at the bottom of a section. There are three
basic types of sections. A header section displays the data that remain constant or
changes only when a sort field changes. The detail section displays the transaction
record fields. A footer section is used to display totals and summary information.
ReportEase allows up to 9 header and footer sections. A higher numbered header
section is allowed only when all the lower numbered headers are already selected.
Similarly, a footer section is allowed only when the corresponding header section is
already selected.

Edit Current: This option is used to modify the properties of the currently selected
section. For the 'detail' section, the User can specify the number of records to print
across the page. This option can be used to print multiple address labels across the
page.

Sort Field: This option is used to specify a sort field for a header section. A sort field
is used to sort the data records.

Break Field: This option is used to specify a break field for a header section. The
break field is used to determine a sort break. Typically, the break field would be the
same as the sort field. However the break field can be specified differently from the
sort field. A calculation expression can also be specified for a break field.

Filter: This option is used to enter a filter criterion to print a section. Normally, every
section included in the report template is printed in its appropriate sequence.
However, if the User wishes to print a section depending upon a condition, he can
enter this condition expression using this option. The expression must evaluate to a
logical value (TRUE or FALSE). During the report execution, the section will be
printed only if the expression evaluates to a TRUE value.

Line: This menu contains commands to create and edit a line object:

Create a Line: Use this option to draw a line. When selecting this option, the form
editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the rectangle and
click any mouse key. The line will be drawn within the position rectangle. The line
size can be changed using the sizing tabs.

Edit Current Line: Use this option to edit the angle, colour, and thickness of a 'line' type
object.

Label: This menu contains commands to create and edit a label object:

Create a Label: Use this option to create a new label. When selecting this option,
the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 456 PROSPER

rectangle and click any mouse key. The 'label' object will be created within the
positioning rectangle. By default, the form editor inserts the text 'label' in the label
item. The label text can be edited in the editing window.

Edit Current Label: A label text can be edited by simply selecting the desired label
item and clicking on the edit window.
As the User inserts or deletes the text, the length of the label text changes. Normally,
the form editor will automatically adjust the item box boundaries to completely
enclose the new text. However, this automatic size adjustment ceases if the User
manually resizes the item boundary by pulling on the sizing tab. This feature can be
used to enclose the text in an item box larger than the default size.

Picture: This menu contains picture import functions:

Import Picture from Clipboard

Use this command to copy a picture bitmap from the clipboard.
When selecting this option, the form editor creates a positioning rectangle equal to
the dimensions of the picture. Use the mouse to position the picture rectangle and
click any mouse key. The picture will be placed within the position rectangle. The
picture size can be changed using the sizing tabs.

Import Picture from Disk File

Use this command to read in a picture bitmap from a disk file.
When selecting this option, the form editor creates a positioning rectangle equal to
the dimensions of the picture. Use the mouse to position the picture rectangle and
click any mouse key. The picture will be placed within the position rectangle. The
picture size can be changed using the sizing tabs.

Arrange:
This menu contains commands to align size and space a set of selected objects:

Alignment At:

Horizontal Top Edge:

Use this option to horizontally align the top edge of the selected items to the top
edge of the leftmost item in the selection.

Horizontal Bottom Edge:

Use this option to horizontally align the bottom edge of the selected items to the
bottom edge of the leftmost item in the selection.

Horizontal Centre Line:

Use this option to align the horizontal centre line (imaginary) of the selected items to
the centre line of the leftmost item in the selection.

Vertical Left Edge:

Use this option to vertically align the left edge of the selected items to the left edge of

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Output 457

the topmost item in the selection.

Vertical Right Edge:

Use this option to vertically align the right edge of the selected items to the right
edge of the topmost item in the selection.

Vertical Centre Line:

Use this option to align the vertical centre line (imaginary) of the selected items to
the centre line of the topmost item in the selection.

Even Spacing:

Horizontally:
Use this option to place the selected items horizontally at an equal distance from
each other. The inter-item distance is equal to the distance between the first two
leftmost items.

Vertically:
Use this option to place the selected items vertically at an equal distance from each
other. The inter-item distance is equal to the distance between the first two topmost
items.

Even Sizing:

Width:
Use this option to change the width of the selected items to the width of the topmost
item.

Height:
Use this option to change the height of the selected items to the width of the leftmost
item.

Undo Previous Arrangement Command:

Use this function to undo the previous arrangement command.

Report Executor Commands:The report executor allows viewing reports that have
been generated and saved to a native format file. It is invoked by using the View
option from the reporting main window and selecting a file from the file selection box.
The file selection box will point to the default data directory and will have the filter
extension set to the correct file type (.FR).

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 458 PROSPER

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Output 459

The options available on this window are:

Jump: Go to a particular page in the document.

Print: Send the document to the defined printer.
Preview: Look at the page layout of the document.
Save: Save the document to a file (native and RTF).
Exit: Quit the current window.

12.2 Export
An export can be made either directly from the individual sections of the program, or
from the Output | Export menu option. This section describes how to customise
exports.

12.2.1 Export Setup

Use the main menu Output | Export option to export data from a current analysis, or from a previously
saved .OUT file. When clicking Export a series of screens leads the User through the process of
selecting the data required for the export. To include a section of data, click the check box to the left of
a particular item and, depending on the selection, further input screens will be presented. This process
ensures that only relevant sections are exported. A sample export dialogue box is shown below:

After entering the choices, Click Done to return to the main export dialogue box. The
User must then select a destination for the export data. Clicking Print initiates
generation of the data and sends it to the selected destination. Setup accesses a
screen for selecting fonts, margins etc. as in the Plot menu (Section 12.1). The font
selections made for export data are independent of the plotting fonts.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 460 PROSPER

Exported data can be sent to the following locations:

Printer - the primary printer as set up under Windows.

File - Creates an ASCII data file and saves it. Clicking Print displays a
dialogue box that requests a file name and destination. Enter a suitable file
name (PROSPER automatically appends a .PRN extension) and click OK to
save the file. The Fixed Format option saves a file in a printer ready format that
can be imported into a DOS based word processor. Use the Tab Delimited
format to save a file suitable for importing directly into a spreadsheet such as
EXCEL.

Clipboard - Clicking Print after selecting this option copies the exported data
onto the Windows clipboard. From the Clipboard, the User can view, edit and
paste the data directly into another Windows application. e.g. a word
processing program.

Screen - Clicking Print after selecting this option allows viewing the
exported data on the screen. Scroll through the data using the scrolling
thumbs or arrows. When finished viewing, click OK to return to the main
menu.
Once a .PRN file has been saved, further copies of the exported data can be made
using a word processor from outside PROSPER. To ensure that printed exports are
correctly formatted, only non-Proportional fonts can be selected for export data. The
fonts on the export setup screen are independent of those selected on the plot setup
screen.

PROSPERs default font selection will give good results on most

printers. Choose another font if there are problems printing reports.

Calculation and Export Data LayoutScreen and hardcopy exports can be

customised to display only the required variables. For complex calculations, this can
save printing large amounts of irrelevant data and detailed reports can still be
produced when required. To use the Layout feature, firstly complete a set of
calculations. The following example is for PVT calculations.

Click the Layout button on the calculation results screen and select the variables to
display from the layout screen:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Output 461

Show All and Hide All buttons are used to make changes to the entire list of
variables. Individual variables can be selected or de-selected by clicking them
directly. When clicking OK, only the selected variables will be displayed on the
calculation screen.

In addition to the calculation results screens, Layout also controls the variables
displayed in Output Export (to file, clipboard, and printer).

12.3 Plot
A plot can be made either directly from individual parts of the program, or from the Output | Plot menu
option. This section describes how to customise plots for both the screen and hard copy. From the Plot
Output main Window select the plot to view by highlighting it in the list of available plots and then press
the Plot button or simply double-clicking on the appropriate plot

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 462 PROSPER

ZoomingPlots can be zoomed simply by placing the mouse pointer (which changes
to a pair of cross hairs over the active plot area) at the corner of the region to
enlarge, and then dragging until the area of interest is enclosed by the zoom box.
Release the mouse button and the outlined area will be zoomed to fill the entire plot
area.

12.3.1 Plot Command Summary

FinishReturns to the previous menu. Use Finish to close a plot.

Scales

PROSPER normally picks appropriate scales to display the data. Use Scales to enter
custom upper and lower limits for both X- and Y- scales. To display round numbers
on the intermediate grid lines, ensure that the span of the upper and lower plot limits
fits evenly with the number of plot blocks set in the Options menu.

Replot
Re-plots the graph using the original scales. Use this option to un-zoom a plot.

OutputSelects the output options menu. Plots can be output to the Windows

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Output 463

clipboard, a Windows metafile or a hard copy device in colour, grey scale or

monochrome formats. Plots can then be pasted directly from the clipboard into other
Windows applications such as a word processor. Windows metafiles can be saved
and read by a variety of applications. If hard copy is selected, the following hard copy
options screen will appear:

Select the desired plot options and click Print to output the plot. Depending on the
actual hard copy device connected, the User may need to experiment with font styles
and sizes. Note that some fonts cannot be rotated, and are unsuitable as a Vertical
font. If Y-axis labels are being plotted horizontally, try a different font selection.
Return to the plot menu by clicking OK.

ColoursThis option enables to customise the colour of any item on the plot. Note
that laser printers and monochrome monitors will often produce better results if
colour plotting is disabled. A sample colour customising screen is shown below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 464 PROSPER

OptionsThe Options button enables to customise the overall appearance of the plot
screen and select font type and size etc. A sample options screen is shown below:

Some plots include a results box on the screen. If the default position of the box
interferes with the plot, it can be moved by holding down the Shift key and using the
mouse to drag it to another location. The fonts selected on the Plot options screen
apply only to plots. The export data fonts are set up on a separate screen.

Variables
Use this button to select variables for plotting. The variables available change
according to the type of calculations that have been completed and the particular
plot type that has been selected. Where applicable, extended plot variables can be
selected.

Test Data

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Output 465

Clicking Test data displays a screen in which the User can enter up to 10 measured
data pairs. Once the test data has been entered, it can be displayed together with
the calculated data when the plot is re-drawn. If the current .OUT file is subsequently
saved, the test data will also be saved and will appear on subsequent plots.

Help
Accesses the on-line Help system. See Section 14 for more details of the Help
system.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

Chapter

13
 Units 467

13 Units

This chapter describes the system of units. The built in flexibility of the units system enables the
User to select any variable and define the unit of measurement to be used. This feature allows to
modify the units system so that it corresponds to data reports supplied by a service company or
customise the units system to suit the Users own personal preferences.

PROSPER always works internally in Field units. To facilitate data entry and output
display in any units system, PROSPER accepts data in the specified Input units and
converts it to Oilfield units for calculation. The results (in Field units) are converted
back to the specified Output unit set if necessary. By making selections from the
different categories, it is possible to work in the preferred units and save the results
in the units required by company policy.

The changes made to the units system are retained in the program memory and
apply to all files opened during the current processing session. The program allows
to create a custom units system.

13.1 Units Summary

To access the units system, select UnitsUnits form the menu toolbar. This will
display the Units Summary screen:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 468 PROSPER

The Units Summary screen is contains the list of parameters and their units options:

Units selection
Select the units for the input and output of the variables

Validation
Used to set up the error checking limits for each selected input variable.

Click on the Details buttons to the right of each variable name in order to view the
details of each particular variable.

13.1.1 Unit Systems

The User can change the units system form tool bar menu

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Units 469

The following default Units Systems are provided:

Oilfield Units
Norwegian S.I.
Canadian S.I.
German S.I.
French S.I.
Latin S.I.
Customised unit systems can be created and saved under new names. Different
units can be selected for both input and output.

13.1.2 Changing Unit Systems for some variables

For each variable, if the mouse points to the unit and right click, the unit system can
be changed; this option is available at screen for any input variable.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 470 PROSPER

13.1.3 Changing the Units

The Input and Output units for each variable on the list can be changed.

To change or customise the default Units System:

Scroll through the measurement variables list until the unit item to modify
is visible on the screen.
Select the unit category (Input and/or Output) to modify.
Select the unit field corresponding to the measurement item and click on
the arrow to its right to display the list of unit options.
Select the preferred measurement unit.

To save changes, click Save. A prompt will be displayed to enter a name for the
new Units System. This new system can now be recalled and applied to any file.
Custom unit sets can be erased by clicking the Delete button, then selecting the
unwanted units system. The ability to have separate input and output unit systems
allows the User to work with familiar units and to create reports or export data in any
required unit system. PROSPER calculates them internally in Oilfield Units. To
validate unit conversion factors, click the button located to the right of the particular
variable and the multiplier and shift used for unit conversion will be displayed.

Clicking Report Print will create a summary report of conversion factors in use.

If some particular units have been modified during the course of a PROSPER
session, the changes will be written into the .SIN file when the input data are saved.
Irrespective of the current units system settings, recalling a previously saved .SIN file
will cause PROSPER to revert to the units saved in the recalled .SIN file. To
permanently impose a new set of units on the recalled file, open a custom units file
(or use one of the internal unit sets) and then save the .SIN file. The new units
settings will be used whenever the .SIN file is loaded.

13.1.4 Validation Limits

To reduce the possibility of entering incorrect data, PROSPER checks that input data
falls within predetermined validation limits. For most purposes, the default validation
limits are adequate. For particular applications, the User can change the validation
limits if required by entering new values directly from the units definition screen.

Find the required variable by scrolling through the list, and then enter required
changes in the low and high validation limit boxes. Enter the custom validation limits
in the units currently in use. To permanently attach the new validation limits to a
custom units system, click Save before leaving the validation screen by clicking OK.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Units 471

13.2 Units Details

The purpose of the Units Details screen allows adjustment of the precision of data
display for both input and output to be adjusted individually for each unit type. To set
display precision, select Units Detailed. Scroll though the available units until the
required one is shown in the Current box as shown in the following example:

Input and Output units can be selected from this screen. Validation limits can be
entered for the selected units. The Options panel enables to set the number of
decimal places to display for each unit type.

13.3 Units Reset

Use this option to quickly reset the units system back to default values. To specify
what Units defaults are please go to the Units Tab in the Preferences screen (File |
Preferences).

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

Chapter

14
 Wizard 473

14 Wizard
This feature allows the User to set up models and perform certain tasks following a
pre-defined sequence.
The use of Wizards is of particular benefit to inexperienced Users, as it allows to
easily set up a model based on active wizard examples by advancing through the
input screens in the correct sequence and asking at any step the User for the
required information. In this way the User will familiarize with PROSPER windows as
well as with the essential steps required to set up, match and use the models.

14.1 Running the Wizard

A few wizard examples are available when installing PROSPER. These examples are
step-by-step guides to build typical models, like naturally flowing wells, ESP, etc.

In order to run wizard examples follow first of all select Wizard from the main menu
toolbar:

Then select the desired Wizard and click on Run to run it.
All that the User has to do is to follow the instructions that time to time are displayed
and complete the input screens with the required data.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 474 PROSPER

14.2 Creating/Editing a Wizard

From the main Wizards window it is possible to access a series of functions that
allow the User to create his own wizard or edit an already existing one.

To modify an existing wizard select Edit. This will access the wizard script window:

To create a new wizard select instead New. This will display an empty script window.

The script consists of a series of VB commands using OpenServer strings to set the
values of the input parameters, perform calculations, and retrieve results.
Please refer to the OpenServer User Guides for further details about the basic
OpenServer functions.

On the top part of the script window there is the Commands list window, which
provides immediate access to all the OpenServer variables. This window allows
selecting the desired variable and getting a copy of it, which can be pasted in the

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Wizard 475

script window below.

14.2.1 Notes of OS strings

A class of OpenServer strings - the so-called menu commands - allow displaying
each of the input screens. The structure of these commands is in general:

DoCmd(PROSPER.MENU.<tag>)

If <tag> is for example Options, the command will display the main PROSPER
options.

To display a plot, instead, the command is:

DoCmd(PROSPER.PLOT.<number>)

If <number> is 1, for example, the command will display the IPR plot.

14.2.2 Wizard examples

As above mentioned, a few Wizards are available along with the software. These
examples lead step-by-step the User through the screens in order to build typical
models.

The example scripts can also be used by experienced Users as templates to build
their own scripts.

Recommendation
Petroleum Experts recommends to set up the models according to the worked
examples shown in the Appendix A. This will allow the User to have a better
understanding of the physics that is behind the software and the importance of the
matching process.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

Chapter

15
 Help 477

15 Help

PROSPER has an on-line Help facility which enables the User to get information
quickly about a menu option, input field or function command. This facility enables to
display instructions for completing a particular task or input field without exiting from
the current screen. The help windows offer a list of topics which not only include
definitions and functions specific to PROSPER, but details on using some features of
Windows as well.

To use the PROSPER on-line help system, the help file must be located in the same
directory as the program. If the User is new to Windows, information on using the
Help system can be made available when selecting the Help option in the PROSPER
main menu and choosing 'Using Help'. This will display a help screen from which the
information required can be selected from a list of topics.

The Help facility has function buttons located at the top of the windows, which can
be used to navigate within the help system. If a particular feature is not currently
available, the button associated with that function is dimmed. Information on specific
help topics may lead to other related topics. Some words in the Help windows are
marked with a solid underline and appear in colour (green) if the User uses a colour
screen.

These words are called jump terms and can be used to move around Help more
quickly. When clicking a jump term, Help will move directly to the topic associated
with the underlined word(s).

15.1 Finding Information in Help

15.1.1 Use the Search feature in Help

This facility is useful for finding specific information about using the keyboard. For
example, the keys used for text selection. Type in the phrase "text selection" and
search the system for the phrase or select the topic from the list displayed.

15.1.2 Use the Help Index

This option is useful for viewing specific sections listed in the Help index. Go to the
topic or command of interest and select the item required.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 478 PROSPER

15.1.3 Context Sensitive Help

This feature can be used while working to give information about a particular menu
option.

15.2 Accessing Help

To get information quickly about a specific menu option or entry field in PROSPER,
the following methods will display the help facility:
15.2.1 Help Through the Menu
From the menu bar in PROSPER, click on Help (or ALT H) and select Index. From the
list of help topics, select the topics to see by pointing to the specific item.

15.2.2 Getting Help Using the Mouse

Press SHIFT+F1
The pointer will change to a question mark.
Choose the menu command or option.
or
Click the Menu command or option, and holding the mouse button down press F1.

15.2.3 Getting Help Using the Keyboard

Press the ALT key plus the first letter of the menu name, option and press F1.

15.2.4 To Minimise Help

If using the mouse, click the minimise button in the upper-right corner of the help
window. If using the keyboard, press ALT SPACEBAR N. This procedure will close
the help window, but keep the help icon on the Windows desktop.

15.3 Whats New

Click Help Whats New to display information about new features in the program
release in use.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Help 479

15.4 Flow Correlations

Click Help Flow Correlations to access a detailed generalised discussion about the
history and reasons behind flow correlations and issues that relate to their use in
PROSPER.

15.5 Open Server

Click Help/Open Server to access the complete lists of OpenServer variables,

commands and functions.

15.6 Help About PROSPER

Click Help About PROSPER and the following screen will be displayed:

If the User need to contact Petroleum Experts about a problem with the program, please
have the version number and creation date shown on this screen available should it
be required.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 480 PROSPER

15.7 Web Options

From the Help menu it is possible to access to the following on-line services:

Web Home Page. This option accesses the Petroleum Experts website www.
petroleumexperts.com
Web User Area. This options accesses a dedicated area of the Petroleum Experts
website containing technical information about the IPM Suite and news about the new
developments
Technical Support. This option accesses the section of the Petroleum Experts website on
which it is possible to post technical support requests to the Petroleum Experts Technical
Support Service

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

Chapter

16
 482 PROSPER

16 Appendix
16.1 A - Worked Examples
To help illustrate the power of PROSPER, examples are provided with the program. We
suggest to run through them to become familiar with the program and its various options.
These examples are in ~\samples\PROSPER directory. The location of this directory
depends on where the program has been installed.

A very useful Quick Start Guide will provide the User with an example showing how to build,
match and use a well model.

Example 1 - Gas Lift Design

Example 2 - Well and Flow line Modelling
Example 3 - Temperature Prediction
Example 4 - ESP Lifted Well
Example 5 - HSP Lifted Well
Example 6 - Jet Pump Design
Example 7 - Retrograde Condensate Well
Example 8 - Gravel Packed Gas Well
Example 9 - Horizontal Well - Friction dP
Example 10 - Multi-Layer dP Pressure Loss
Example 11- Multilateral well
Example 12 - Water injection well
Example 14 - PCP lifted well design
Example 15 - Condensate Black Oil Model Validation
Example 16 - Sucker rod pump
Example 17 - Analysis of a gas lifted well using VLP/IPR matching and QuickLook

16.1.1 Example 1 - Gas Lift Design

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/GL Design.out

The main objectives of this example are to:

Modify the oilwell.out example file (File: ~/samples/PROSPER/oilwell.out)
outlined in the Chapter 3 Quick Start Guide
Find the maximum production rate achievable using gas lift.
Determine the optimum lift gas injection rate and depth.
Design the operating and unloading valves.

This example demonstrates how to:

Setup the gas lift design parameters.
Calculate the design production and gas injection rates.
Space out the valves.
Determine the valve trim sizes and dome pressures.
Calculate production sensitivities using the gaslift design.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 483

The design assumes that the reservoir pressure will drop to 4000 psig and that the
water cut will rise to 80%.

This example will guide you through opening the existing OILWELL.OUT file,
changing the calculation options and reservoir conditions, performing the design and
finally saving the file under a new name.

16.1.1.1Model Set Up
Let's start by opening the file created in the Quick Start Guide "oilwell.out" which
correspond to a naturally flowing well.

Select the Options menu.

Change the Artificial lift method to Gas Lift (no friction loss in annulus)
Click Done to get back the PROSPER main section.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 484 PROSPER

16.1.1.2Edit IPR Model

The next step is to modify the inflow performance section to model future conditions
requiring gas lift.
Select the System Menu and click Inflow performance (the IPR screen
can also be activated by double clicking in the IPR section of the
PROSPER interface)
Change the reservoir pressure to 4000 psig. Click on Calculate | Finish |
Done to exit

16.1.1.3Setting up the Gas Lift Design Parameters

Click System Gas lift data and enter the following data:

Variable Value
Gas lift gas gravity 0.8
H2S 0
CO2 0
N2 0
GLR Injected 0

For performing a gas lift design, the gas lift method and GLR injected can be ignored
at this stage.
Click Done and leave the gas injection depth set to zero.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 485

Entering the gas lift design parameters:

From the main PROSPER menu select Design | Gas Lift | New Well
Select Valve type Casing sensitive
Enter Casing pressure drop per valve 50 psi
Select Design rate method Calculated from maximum
production
Set the Maximum liquid rate to 15,000 STB/day
Select Valve Settings All valve PVo= Gas pressure
Set Dome press. corr. above 1200 psi to Yes
Select Vertical Lift Correlation Petroleum Experts 2
Select Surface pipe Correlation Dukler Flannigan
Select Using IPR for Unloading Yes

Enter the gas lift design input data (Figure A.3):

Maximum gas available 5 MMscf/d

Maximum gas while unloading 5 MMscf/d
Flowing top node pressure 200 psig
Unloading top node pressure 200 psig
Operating injection pressure 1500 psig
Kick off injection pressure 1500 psig
Desired dP across valve 200 psi
Maximum depth of injection 11000 ft
Water cut 80 %

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 486 PROSPER

Minimum valve spacing 300 ft

Static gradient of load fluid 0.46
Minimum transfer dP 25 %
Maximum port size 32 (set by valve series selection)
Safety for closure of last unloading valve 0 psig
DeRating Percentage For Valves/Orifice 100 percentage
Valve Type Camco R-20 Normal

Determine the maximum gas lifted design production rate as follows:

Click Continue | Get Rate

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 487

Click Plot to display the performance curve.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 488 PROSPER

The program has found that around 1470 STB/d of oil could be produced with 5.0
MMscf/d of lift gas injected at the optimum depth of injection. Click on Finish to exit
the plot.

Next, determine the position of the Unloading and Operating valves:

Click Design - the program will iterate on the design depths

Click Plot (to display the valve depths)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 489

Note down the Actual Gas Injection rate, Actual Injection pressure and Actual
Liquid rate from the graph. Having determined the number of valves and their
depths, the next task is to calculate the valve test rack setting pressures as follows:
Click Results to display valve depths and pressures
Click Calculate to display the opening and closing pressures together with
the test rack setting pressures.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 490 PROSPER

The number of valves required to pass the design lift gas rate is shown at the left of
the screen. Click on the scroll arrows to see the selected port sizes, gas injection
rates, etc. Click Report to generate a hard-copy of the gas lift design then click M
ain to return to the main screen.

16.1.1.4Calculating Sensitivities

To run sensitivities on the design for e.g. different reservoir pressures, water cuts,
etc. the gas lift design must be transferred to the System Gas Lift equipment as per
the following procedure:
Return to the main menu
Click System Gaslift Data and select Valve Depths Specified as the
gas lift method.

Enter the following data:

Casing Pressure 1393.1 psig

dP Across Valve 200 psig

Click Transfer From Gaslift Design OK. The design valve depths will
appear.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 491

Click Done to return to the main menu.

PROSPER now has the valve depths and surface injection pressure, but since GLR
Injected is still set to zero, no gas is being injected in the calculations. The rate of lift
gas injection will be set using a sensitivity variable.

To calculate sensitivities, click Calculation System (Ipr + Vlp) 3 Variables then

select the following:
Top node pressure 200 psig
Water cut 80 percent
Surface equipment correlation Dukler Flannigan
Vertical lift correlation Petroleum Experts 2
Rate method Automatic Linear

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 492 PROSPER

Click | Continue and enter the following sensitivity variables.

For variable 1
- Select Gaslift gas injection rate
(Enter the Actual Injection rate that you have noted down
earlier)
For variable 2
- Select Water Cut
Enter 80%, 90%
For variable 3
- Select Reservoir Pressure
Enter 4000, 3500.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 493

Click Continue | Calculate to calculate system sensitivities.

When the calculations have stopped, Click Solution Details to examine the solution
for 80% water cut and 4000 psi reservoir pressure. Check that the system solution
rate is compatible with the Actual Liquid rate that you have noted down earlier.

Click through the solutions and check the solution for 90% water cut and 3500 psi
reservoir pressure. This design is still capable of injection at the deepest (orifice
valve) and the production rate is around 400 BOPD. The sensitivity calculations
show that the design is suitable for the expected future producing conditions.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 494 PROSPER

Save the file as GL Design.OUT.

16.1.2 Example 2 - Well and Flow line Modelling

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/flowline.out

The objectives of this example are to:

Model a flowline using PROSPER.
Apply the Rough Approximation temperature model.
Examine the effect of the flowline on production rate sensitivities.

To set up this problem, open GL Design.OUT and make the following changes:
Options Menu
Predict Pressure and Temperature on land
Temperature Model Rough Approximation

Click System | Equipment (tubing etc) | Surface Equipment, input the following
data:

Pipe Length 8-mile

Pipe I.D. 6-in
Temperature of Surroundings 600F
Overall HTC 7 BTU/h/ft2/0F

NOTE: Change the Pipe Length units to miles by right clicking on the pipe length
units

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 495

Click Done | Summary | Draw Surface and check the equipment data has been
correctly entered.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 496 PROSPER

Gaslift Data
Return to the main menu and click System Gaslift Data. Select Fixed Depth of
Injection as the gas lift method, and enter an injection depth of 7535 ft. The
injection gas gravity (S.G) should remain at 0.8.

When we use FIXED DEPTH OF INJECTION in PROSPER, this

option assumes that it is possible to unload the well down to the
operating valve and that sufficient casing pressure is available to
inject gas at the specified depth.

Click Done and return to the Main menu.

16.1.2.1Calculating the System Solution

To find the well flow rate, click Calculation System (Ipr + Vlp) 3 Variables. Enter
the following input data:

Top node pressure 100 psig

Water cut 80 percent
Surface equipment correlation Dukler Flannigan
Vertical lift correlation Petroleum Experts 2
Rate method User selected
Rate type Liquid rates

Use the Generate feature to enter the calculation rates, Click Generate and enter
100 and 15,000 STB/day for the minimum and maximum rates. Enter 20 for number
of rates and use Geometric spacing to propagate the table. Click Done and
PROSPER will fill in the rates table.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 497

Click Continue and enter the following sensitivity variables:

For variable 1
- Select Gaslift gas injection rate
Enter 1,2,3,4,5,6
For variable 2
- Clear any existing entries by Pressing Reset
For variable 3
- Clear any existing entries by Pressing Reset

Click | Continue, and | Calculate to start the calculations.

The long flow line will slow the calculations, so please be patient.

Once the calculation has stopped, click Sensitivity Variables and select Liquid rate
. Click Done to display the following plot:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 498 PROSPER

Note that the production rate is relatively insensitive to the volume of lift gas injection
and that the optimum injection rate has decreased from the optimum found in
Example 1 to around 4 MMscf/day. Click Finish and return to the Calculation S
ystem menu.

16.1.2.2Plotting the Temperature Profile

Click Sensitivity PvD and use the scroll arrows to select the solution rate for 4
MMscf/day. Select the Manifold as First node and the Casing at 11400 ft as the
last node. Click Continue Calculate to compute the gradient at the solution flow
rate. The pressure profiles for the flowline and tubing can be displayed on the same
or separate plots. Click Plot Variables and select Length (surface & down hole)
on the Y-Axis and Pressure and Temperature on the X-axis, then click Done to
plot the profiles in the tubing as follows:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 499

Note the change of slope of the pressure gradient at the depth of injection. The fluid
temperature approaches that of the surroundings about halfway along its length.
The pressure gradient in the flowline rapidly increases over its last third. This is due
to high flow velocities as ever increasing volumes of gas breaks out of solution.
Increased frictional pressure losses in the flowline account for the decrease in
optimum lift gas injection rate observed in this example.

Save the file as Flowline.OUT.

16.1.3 Example 3 - Temperature Prediction

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/enthalpy.out

This example shows how PROSPER's Enthalpy Balance temperature model can be
used to predict the wellhead flowing temperature (WHFT) of a high pressure / high
temperature oil well.

It is planned to drill an appraisal well to test the extent of a discovery. The objective
is to flow the well for four days at a rate of 10000 STB/d provided that the wellhead
flowing temperature remains below 200 degrees F.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 500 PROSPER

The objective of this example is to determine the WHFT profile versus time.

This example demonstrates how to:

Build a temperature prediction model for an offshore appraisal well
Predict FWHP and FWHT profiles for various rates
Generate a temperature gradient profile

16.1.3.1Temperature Prediction Model Set up

First start PROSPER and select File | New to clear any existing data. From the main
menu click on Options | Options and select the following data:

Fluid : Oil Predicting : Pressure and Temperature

(offshore)
PVT Method : Black Oil Temperature Enthalpy Balance
Model :
Equation Of Range : Full System
State :
Separator : Single-Stage
Emulsions : No
Hydrates : Disable Warning Steam Option : No Steam Calculations
Water Viscosity : Use Default Correlation
Water Vapour : No Calculations
Viscosity Model :Newtonian Fluid

Completion : Cased Hole

Gravel Pack : No
Flow Type : Tubing
Well Type : Producer Inflow Type : Single Branch
Gas Coning : No
Artificial Lift : None

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 501

Click Done.

From the main menu select PVT | Input Data

Solution GOR: 1500 scf/stb

Oil Gravity: 45 API
Gas Gravity: 0.6 s.g.
Water salinity: 100000 ppm
H2S mol%: 0
CO2 mol%: 0
N2 mol%: 0

Black oil correlations: Glaso and Beal

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 502 PROSPER

16.1.3.2Defining the Equipment Data

The well equipment, riser, surface environment and the properties of the formations
penetrated by the well must be specified to allow PROSPER to calculate heat
losses. This necessitates significantly more data entry than for predicting pressure
only applications.

Enter the well equipment details.

Click System Equipment

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 503

Click All | Edit this will go to all the sections automatically.

Type in the following deviation survey data:

Bottom MD (ft) TVD (ft)
0 0
14000 14000

Click Done

In this example as there is no surface equipment section to skip this section and
advance to the next section click on Cancel.

The next section is the down-hole equipment section.

Define the production string by entering the following:

Xmas tree 0 ft
tubing type mild steel tubing
measured depth 13600 ft
Inside diameter 4.778"
Outside diameter 5.5"
Roughness 0.0006

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 504 PROSPER

Click Done to move to the next section.

For the Temperature Data section the following information is available:

Next, enter the surface environment (Offshore) data:

Air temperature 50 degrees F
Humidity 60 percent
Mean sea level WRT origin 100 ft
Sea bed WRT origin 400 ft
Air velocity 4 ft/sec
Sea velocity 3 ft/sec

The User can enter a sea temperature gradient in the enthalpy balance model. We
are going to assume a linear change of temperature from the sea level (50 degree F)
to seabed (42 degree F). Hence, enter the following in the Sea Temperature
Gradient Table:

TVD from mean sea level (ft) Sea temperature (degree F)

0 50

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 505

300 42

The above data describes a drilling rig with a rotary table 100 ft above sea level
located in 300 ft of water.

Formation Formation
Measured Temperature
depth ft deg F
400 42
14000 290

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 506 PROSPER

Once the data has been entered click Done.

Define the drilling and completion by entering the drilling and completion data as
shown on the table below.
This describes a well with all casing strings hung off at the sea bed and the well is
tied back to surface using a 30" riser.

Here, we are assuming that the annulus is filled with mud. The users can also
customize their own completion liquid or gas type if the appropriate fluid data is
available.

Click Done.

Define the lithology by entering the data shown on the screen below:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 507

Click | Done when finish.

In the Database section the conductivity of the different materials could be modify, in
this case will use the default values.

Click Done| Done to return to the main section.

Define the reservoir inflow model by clicking System Inflow performance. Select PI
Entry IPR and enter the following:
Reservoir pressure 6100 psig
Reservoir temperature 290 degrees F
Water cut 0%
Click on the | Input Data button and enter a PI of 8 BOPD/psi

Click | Calculate and an AOF around 28660 STB/day will be calculated. Click Main
and return to the Main menu.

16.1.3.3Calculation Section

The objective of the calculation is to determine the well head pressure and well head
temperature and check whether the wellhead flowing temperature will rise above 200
degrees F within 4 days whilst flowing at a constant rate of 10000 STB/d.

In order to achieve that we can perform a gradient calculation, for that we will need

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 508 PROSPER

the bottom hole pressure.

From the IPR section we can see that a flow rate of 10000 stb/day can be achieved
with a bottom hole pressure of 4789 psig.

From the main section select Calculation | Gradient (Traverse)

For an Enthalpy balance model the gradient calculations are perform on the direction
of the flow, so for a producing well the calculations are perform from bottom to top.

Enter the flowing bottom hole pressure as first node pressure (4789 psig), the first
node temperature is the reservoir temperature.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 509

Click Continue

In the sensitivity section select as variable 1 "Time since production started" with
values of 1, 5 and 100 days as shown in the next screen shot:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 510 PROSPER

Click Continue | Calculate

Click on Plot to inspect the gradient

We can see that the WHP is approximately 1867 psig and the well head temperature
increase through time from 174 F to 198 F from 1 day to 100 days of flow.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 511

Let's perform a Calculation | System | 3 variables

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 512 PROSPER

Click Continue and select "Time since production started" as sensitivity variable
selecting values of 1, 5 and 100 days.

Click continue and Calculate

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 513

Select Sensitivity

Click on Variables and select Well head temperature vs time.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 514 PROSPER

Save the file as Enthalpy.OUT.

16.1.4 Example 4 - ESP Lifted Well

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/espwell.out

The objectives of this example are to:

Determine the pump duty required to meet a specified off-take rate at
future water cut condition.
Select a suitable combination of pump, motor and cable for the service
Determine the maximum water cut at which the pump can still operate
with the design off-take rate.

This example demonstrates how to:

Use existing PVT and VLP data as the basis of a new analysis
Calculate pump intake and outlet pressures
Design an ESP system
Evaluate pump operating point sensitivities
Calculate a flowing gradient for an ESP equipped well.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 515

16.1.4.1Model Setup

From the main menu, click File New and reinitialise the program input and output
files. Open the file OILWELL.out from the Quick start guide and make the following
changes to set up an ESP example:

Click Options and select Lift method - Electric Submersible Pump

Edit the System Equipment (Tubing) description to include the annulus
dimensions as per the following input screen:

Set the tubing O.D. to 4.5 inches and the casing I.D. to 6.184 inches.
Return to the main menu.

For designing a new ESP installation, go directly to Design | Electrical

Submersible Pump | Design

Enter the following design specifications:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 516 PROSPER

Pump depth 8000 ft

Operating frequency 60 Hz
Maximum OD 5.7 inches
Length of cable 8100 ft
Gas separation efficiency 0 percent
Design rate 12000 STB/d
Water cut 80 percent
Top node pressure 250 psig
Motor power safety margin 0 percent
Pump wear factor 0 percent
Pipe correlation Dukler Flannigan
Tubing correlation Petroleum Experts 2

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 517

16.1.4.2Designing the pump

Click Calculate to display the pump duty calculation screen. Click Calculate again
to find the pump duty as per the following example:

There is free GOR at the pump intake, so it is possible to check if a gas separator is
required. Click on Sensitivity to check the Dunbar plot which can be used to
estimate the separator efficiency required to reduce the intake free GLR to an
acceptable level.

This is an empirical correlation where the operating point (blue square) should lie
above the red curve labeled Dunbar factor. If the operating point lies below the red
curve a gas separator should be installed and the efficiency of the separator required
depends on the quality line at which the point is located.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 518 PROSPER

Click | Done and | Design and PROSPER will display the ESP Design screen.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 519

In the Input data section the design calculation has been transferred into this section
where several parameters are displayed such as (average down-hole rate, pump
intake pressure, pump discharge pressure, etc) .
A centrifugal pump can be selected from the Select Pump drop down menu. The list
of pumps available has been automatically filtered for those pumps that can deliver
the conditions specified above in the Input data section.

For this example, select the Centrilift KC12000 pump from the list of suitable pumps.
The pump needs 71 stages and will require 395 HP at the design rate
.
From the list of suitable motors, select a 400 HP Centrilift 544 - Standard motor with
2225 Volt windings.

Select a #1 Copper cable.

Click Plot to display the design operating point superimposed on the pump
performance curve:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 520 PROSPER

The operating point (red square) should lie between the minimum and maximum
operating range of the pump performance curve to ensure an acceptable run life
specially in floating impeller pumps.

If it is necessary the user can select another pump and cross check with the
performance curve plot which pump has the operating point close to the best
efficiency line.

Return to the main section by clicking on Finish in the plot Done | Done. PROSPER
automatically transfer the ESP designed into the System | Electrical Submersible
Pump section.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 521

16.1.4.3Checking the design for different conditions.

Now, we must check whether this design will be able to cope with expected
variations in the well conditions expected to occur over the next few years. This is
done using the Calculation System section to compute sensitivities as follows:
Click Main to return to the main menu
Click Calculation System - 3 Variables and enter a top node
pressure of 250 psi and a water cut of 80%
Check that Petroleum Experts 2 is selected for the vertical lift
correlation
Select Rate Method Automatic - Linear
Click Continue and enter the following sensitivity variables:
For variable 1
- Select Water cut

Enter 80, 90
For variable 2
- Reservoir Pressure

Enter 4200, 4500, 4982

For variable 3
- Select Operating Frequency

Enter 60, 65, 70

Click Continue | Calculate to perform the sensitivity calculations.

The solution of the system is shown in the right hand side and in order to see the
solution for each sensitivity variable we can scroll down using the little arrows next to
each sensitivity.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 522 PROSPER

Click on Plot select Variables and select VLP and Pump discharge pressure. In an
ESP well the solution of the system is given by the intersection of the VLP and the
pump discharge pressure.
This is the main difference with respect to a naturally flowing well. The Pump
discharge pressure PDP includes the IPR, pressure drop in the casing and pump
duty. The VLP includes the first node pressure and pressure drop in the tubing/pipe
from the first node to the pump depth.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 523

Click on finish in the Plot.

Click Solution Details, In this section we can inspect all the parameters related to the
pump and motor at the current operating condition.

Plot the sensitivities by clicking Pump Plot from the pump solution screen as follows.

Here the operating points at different conditions can be inspected with respect
to the performance curve of the pump selected.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 524 PROSPER

Save the file as ESPWELL.OUT.

16.1.5 Example 5 - HSP Lifted Well

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/hspwell.out

The objectives of this example are to:

Select a suitable combination of pump and turbine.

This example demonstrates how to:

Use existing PVT and VLP data as the basis of a new analysis
Calculate pump intake and outlet pressures
Design an HSP system
Evaluate pump operating point sensitivities

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 525

16.1.5.1Model Set up

From the main menu, click File New and reinitialise the program input and output
files. In order to be consistent with the previous examples and be able to compare
the requirements, we will be using the same example. Open the file OILWELL.out
from the Quick Start Guide and make the following changes to set up an HSP
example:
Click Options and select Lift method Hydraulic Drive Downhole
Pump with type method Commingled Annular Supply.
Enter the Power fluid (water) salinity as 10000 ppm.
Revert to unmatched PVT correlations by clicking Correlations Reset
All. Return to the main menu by clicking | Done twice.
Edit the System Equipment (Tubing) description to include the annulus
dimensions as per the following input screen:

Set the tubing O.D. to 4.5 inches and the casing I.D. to 6.184 inches.
Return to the main menu.
Lower the reservoir pressure by clicking on | System Inflow performance and
setting the reservoir pressure to 4500 psi.
Change the water cut and Total GOR to 80% and 300 scf/stb respectively.
Leave the other parameters at their original values and click on CALCULATE

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 526 PROSPER

to generate the IPR. Return to the main menu.

For designing a new HSP installation, do not enter any HSP System data - go
directly to | Design | Hydraulic Pump | Design and enter the following design
specifications:

Pump Depth: 8000 (feet)

Pump Maximum Allowable OD: 6.1 (inches)
Turbine Maximum Allowable OD: 6.1 (inches)
Design (Liquid) Rate: 6000 (STB/day)
Water Cut: 80 (percent)
Top Node Pressure: 50 (psig)
Pump Speed: 6000 (rpm)
Total GOR: 300 (scf/STB)
% Power Fluid of Reservoir Fluid: 50 (percent)
Pump Wear Factor: 0 (fraction)
Surface Equipment Correlation: Dukler Flannigan
Vertical Lift Correlation: Petroleum Experts 2

16.1.5.2Designing The Pump

Click | Calculate to display the pump duty calculation screen. Click Calculate again
to find the pump duty as per the following example:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 527

Click | Done and | Design and PROSPER will display the HSP Design screen.

For this example, select the Weir TP115AH(4250-12325) rpm from the list of suitable

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 528 PROSPER

pumps. The pump needs 72 stages and will require 244 HP at the design rate.
From the list of suitable turbines, select a weir T55-B.

Click Pump Plot to display the design operating point superimposed on the pump
performance curve:

This pump is operating close to its optimum efficiency line.

16.1.5.3Checking the Design for Changed Conditions

Now, we must check whether this design will be able to cope with expected
variations in the well conditions expected to occur over the next few years. This is
done using the Design | Hydraulic Pump | System section to compute sensitivities
as follows:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 529

Enter a top node pressure of 50 psi and a water cut of 80%

Check that Petroleum Experts 2 is selected for the vertical lift correlation
Click | Continue and enter the following sensitivity variables:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 530 PROSPER

For variable 1
- Select Water cut
Enter 80, 95
For variable 2
- Reservoir Pressure
Enter 4000, 4500
For variable 3
- Select pump speed
Enter 5000-6000-7000
Click | Continue | Calculate to perform the sensitivity calculations.

Once the calculations have been completed, click | Solution Details, select the
design case variables of 80% water cut, 4500 psi reservoir pressure and 6000 rpm
pump speed by clicking on the variable arrows. The calculated liquid off-take rate is
close to 6000 STB/day.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 531

Plot the sensitivities by clicking | Pump Plot from the pump solution screen as
follows:

Save the file as HSPWELL.OUT.

16.1.6 Example 6 - Jet Pump Design

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/Jet pump.out

The Jet pump design section calculates the pump duty required to achieve a given
design rate. According to the input data such as power fluid information the program
calculates the ratio between the nozzle and throat area and calculates the nozzle
diameter and throat diameter. A pump is then selected from the user-defined
database of jet pump characteristics.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 532 PROSPER

16.1.6.1Model Set up
Start a new instance of PROSPER by clicking in the PROSPER main menu on File |
New

From the main menu click on Options and make the following selection:

Artificial lift: Jet Pump

Type: Tubing injection - Annular production

16.1.6.2PVT Section
In a Jet Pump system two fluids have to be characterized: The Power Fluid and the
reservoir fluid.
The PVT properties of these fluids should be known in order to calculate the mixture
properties to calculate the pressure drop in the well.

Therefore in the PVT section we have to define and match both the power fluid &
the reservoir fluid.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 533

1. Characterization of the Power Fluid

From the main screen of PROSPER, select PVT | Input Data.

In this example the power fluid is 30 API oil with 20 cp viscosity at standard
conditions. Therefore the Power Fluid must be specified as Other Fluid in the drop
down box.

Furthermore the Viscosity of the Power fluid must be defined with changing pressure
and temperatures (for the expected conditions). To generate the viscosity tables with
the appropriate correlation the following procedure must be completed:

Select Other Fluid in the drop list box and enter the density of the power fluid
in the input box.

In the input parameters section, input the power fluid parameters:

GOR: 0 scf/stb
Oil Gravity: 30 API (power fluid density)
Gas gravity: 0.7 (It is not used since GOR=0)
Water salinity: 100000 ppm (Not used)

Match data input screen. In this section enter the viscosity of the power fluid
at the measured temperature. (Up to 5 tables for different temperatures can
be input).

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 534 PROSPER

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 535

Perform a regression to match all the viscosity correlations with the match
data.

Review and select the viscosity correlations that need the least correction
factors (Multiplier and shift). For this particular case Beal et.al. requires the
least correction 0.98 and -0.21.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 536 PROSPER

Select the most appropriate correlation from the drop down menu in the main
PVT section.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 537

Click on Properties button and Generate.

Enter the range of temperature and pressure data then click Generate to
calculate the table.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 538 PROSPER

Click Plot to visualize the power fluid viscosities vs. pressure at different
temperatures.

PVT Power fluid properties

The reason of entering the power fluid in the PVT section as well as in the
match data was to match the viscosity correlations for the power fluid. One
of the viscosity correlations has to be selected (the most close correlation
to the match data). The viscosity tables for different temperatures were
created using the matched correlation.

Once the viscosities tables for the power fluid have been generated, the
regression parameters must be reset. To do this, select Correlations | Reset
all.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 539

2. Characterization of the Reservoir fluid.

Main PVT parameters of the reservoir fluid.

GOR Oil Gravity Gas Gravity Water Salinity

(scf/stb) (0API) (ppm)
100 20 0.7 100000

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 540 PROSPER

For this example, PVT matching parameters for reservoir fluid are also available.
Enter these in the Match Data Section.

Temperature : 150F

Bubble Oil
Point GOR FVF OIL VISC
psig scf/stb rb/stb cp
820 100 1.08 11.1

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 541

Perform the regression analysis and select the correlations that need the least
correction. In this particular case Standing for bubble point, solution GOR and
formation volume factor and Petrosky et al for the oil viscosity.

16.1.6.3Inflow performance relationship

The following information is available to model the inflow performance relationship:

Reservoir Pressure: 1800 psig

Reservoir Temperature: 150 F
Water cut: 0 %
GOR: 100 scf/stb
Productivity index: 0.45 stb/day/psi

From the main menu in PROSPER click on System | Inflow performance and enter
the information given.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 542 PROSPER

Click on the Input Data button on the right hand side to enter the PI of the well and
hit Calculate to inspect the IPR plot.

16.1.6.4Downhole Equipment
The following data is available to model the down-hole equipment section:

Deviation: Vertical well (0 to 4100 ft)

Packer depth: 4000 ft

Tubing ID: 2.441 in

Tubing OD: 2.875 in

Casing ID: 6.36 in

Temperature at the well head: 60F

Temperature at 4100 ft 150F

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 543

Overall heat transfer coefficient: 8 BTU/h/ft2/F

16.1.6.5Jet Pump Design Calculation

To access this section into the main menu bar and select Design | Jet Pump

In this section the user has to define the design conditions of the jet pump:

Pump depth (Measured) 4000 feet

Maximum OD 6 inches
Design Liquid rate 500 stb/day
Water cut 30 %
Total GOR 100 scf/stb
Top node Pressure 100 psig
Surface injection rate 1000 stb/day
Surface injection Pressure 1500 psig
Nozzle Loss coefficient 0.15
Suction Loss coefficient 0
Throat Loss coefficient 0
Pipe Correlation Beggs and Brill
Tubing correlation Petroleum Experts 2

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 544 PROSPER

Click Calculate | Calculate. The program will calculate the pump duty required
based on the inflow performance relationship, the pressure losses in the tubing and
the entered well head pressure. Based on the power fluid injection rate and
pressure PROSPER will calculate R (ratio between nozzle and throat area), the
diameter of the throat and the diameter of the nozzle.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 545

The next step is to choose a jet pump that best-fits the calculated data, select Done |
Design

The column labeled Desired shows the calculated jet pump design results. The
selected jet pump calculated values from the defined user database (selected from
the drop list box) must closely match the theoretical calculated results.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 546 PROSPER

After the jet pump design has been completed, a System analysis calculation can be
performed.

From the main menu bar click Calculation | System | 3 Variables

Enter the following sensitivity values:

Top node pressure: 100 psig

Water cut: 30 %
Total GOR: 100 scf/stb
Vertical lift correlation: Petroleum Experts 2

Click Continue | Continue | Calculate and to plot the system analysis result click Plot

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 547

From the plot main menu bar select Variable and then: VLP curve and Pump
discharge pressure. The solution of the system is given by the intersection of these
two variables as shown in the next plot.

Save the file as Jet pump.OUT.

16.1.7 Example 7 - Retrograde Condensate Well
File: ~/samples/PROSPER/condex.out ( EOS)
File: ~/samples/PROSPER/condex2.out ( BLACK OIL)

A retrograde gas condensate well example will be computed using the Equation of
State PVT method.

The objective of this example is to show:

How the EOS can be imported into PROSPER.

How to calculate PVT tables and a phase envelope

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 548 PROSPER

Perform Gradient Calculation and Calculation System to obtain the

response to the well.

16.1.7.1EoS Condensate model

16.1.7.1.1 Entering EOS PVT

To set up this problem, first open the PROSPER file CONDEX.OUT located in the
Sample folder usually located under c:\Program Files\Petroleum Experts\IPM6.0\
Samples\PROSPER

Options Menu
Select Options and ensure the following options are set:

PVT Method Equation of State

Fluid Retrograde Condensate *
Separator Multi-Stage
Flow type Tubing flow
Eq. of State Peng-Robinson
Well type Producer
Predicting Pressure only
Completion Cased hole
Gravel pack No

* Defining the correct fluid at this stage is important, since calculations

cannot continue unless the EOS detected fluid type agrees with the
user-selected fluid.

Click | Done, then PVT Input to display the PVT input screen:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 549

The EOS input data is intended to be loaded from an external PVT simulation
program file using the Import button.

To ensure that all the data has been correctly entered, and to check the type of fluid
described by the pseudo components entered.
You can do so by pressing the Phase Envelope button and hitting plot.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 550 PROSPER

Phase envelope plot:

Once the input data has been specified, the user has the option of selecting

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 551

Calculation type. The options are:

o Calculated From EOS Model
In this option PROSPER will calculate the fluid properties from the EOS
data entered, using flash process, whenever it needs it.
o Interpolated From Generated Tables
In this case the User generates the tables from the EOS in PROSPER
and then PROSPER during calculations, uses these tables for property
evaluation. This makes the calculations faster.
For this example, we selected the first option.
In order to use the entered EOS to generate tables, enter a range of pressures and
temperatures.
Click on Generate and | Calculate again check the EOS PVT values.
The saturation pressure at 300 degrees F should be 4596 psig.

Click Properties, and PROSPER will display the equivalent Black Oil
PVT properties for the reservoir fluid.

Click OK to return to the PVT calculation screen.

16.1.7.1.2 Matching Menu / Correlation Selection

Perform Correlation Comparison entering the following Data:

THP THT WGR Gas Gauge Gauge Reservoir GOR

Rate Depth Pressure Pressure

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 552 PROSPER

[psig] [deg [STB/MMSCF] [MMscf/d] [ft] (psig) [scf/STB]

F] [psig]

4000 180 0 84 12000 6875 8000 7432

Select Point 1 | Correlation Comparison | OK.

On the Tubing Correlation Comparison Screen select the following correlations:

Petroleum Experts 2
Duns and Ros Original
GRE (modified by PE)
Petroleum Experts 4
OLGAS 2P.
and click on Calculate | Calculate | Plot

Petroleum Experts 4 mechanistic model is the closest to the test point.

The Petroleum Experts 4 bottom hole pressure for the correlation

comparison case is: 6783.27 psig,

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 553

Predicted by the EOS method.

Perform | Calculation System and use the following data

First Node Pressure: 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000 (psig)

Water to Gas Ratio: 0 (STB/MMscf/d)
Tubing / Pipe diameter 4.78, 6.18 (in)

Click Continue | Continue | Calculate | Plot | System Plot to produce a system

analysis plot similar to that below:

The calculations could take some time, so please be patient.

16.1.7.2Black Oil Condensate PVT

An identical well example as the previous one will be computed using the black oil
condensate PVT model.

The objective of this part is to show:

How the data input for black oil condensate PVT works

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 554 PROSPER

Comparison of the solution results from the other PVT methods.

To set up this problem, firstly clear the existing calculations by clicking File New.
Recall the condensate example by clicking File Open and double clicking on the
filename of the previously saved condensate example (CONDEX.OUT).

16.1.7.2.1 Selecting the Options

Select Options and ensure the following options are set:
PVT Method: Black Oil
Fluid: Retrograde Condensate
Separator Multi - Stage
Flow type Tubing flow
Well type Producer
Predicting Pressure only
Completion Cased hole
Gravel pack No

Click | Done, then commence entry of the PVT data by clicking | PVT Input data.

Enter the data as on the following screen:

Note that the above properties have been derived from an EOS calculation using the
Properties function.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 555

16.1.7.2.2 Matching/ Correlation Selection

Click Matching Correlation Comparison. Leave the analysis variables set as for the
other PVT methods and repeat the computations selecting the Petroleum Experts 4
mechanistic model Once the calculations have stopped, click | Plot to display the
following:

The bottomhole pressure calculated is 6825.07 psig.

The Petroleum Experts 4 bottom hole pressure for the correlation

comparison case is:

6783.27 psig, Predicted by the EOS method.

6825.07 psig, Predicted by the Condensate Black Oil Method.

This is in close agreement (0.5% difference) with that obtained from compositional
modelling - even though the liquid dropout values have not been matched in the
Black Oil model.

Click Main to return to the main menu.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 556 PROSPER

For condensate wells, the flow regime is normally mist. Prediction of

slip requires the phase volumes (hold-up) and densities. In mist flow,
the slip between liquid and gas is minimal. Even in this example the
flow regime is slug - but there is little slip between the phases for the
flow rates modelled. Provided that the mixture density is accurate,
lack of precision in the proportion of oil and gas will cause little error
in pressure loss calculations.

For condensate wells, the black oil PVT method can be recommended for:
Accuracy of mixture density calculations
Simplicity
Speed of calculation
Accuracy of pressure calculations

Calculating the System Solution

To perform the systems analysis, click Calculation System. Check that the
calculation setup is unchanged from the previous PVT case.

Proceed to the calculation screen and click Calculate. The solution rates are shown
on the following plot:

The above condensate example has shown how to set up the PROSPER
calculations for the different condensate PVT methods. It also illustrates that the

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 557

Black Oil PVT method is capable of accurate well pressure prediction and is more
computationally efficient than more complex PVT methods.

Save the file as condex2.OUT.

16.1.8 Example 8 - Gravel Packed Gas Well
File: ~/samples/PROSPER/gravel pack.out

The objectives of this example are to:

Design a gravel packed completion for a high rate gas well
Determine the allowable off-take for a specified drawdown on the formation

This example demonstrates how to:

Enter the gravel pack and completion parameters

Calculate sensitivities on gravel pack and perforation variables
Calculate the pressure loss across the completion and thereby determine the
drawdown at the sand face.

16.1.8.1Gravel Pack model Set Up

From the main menu, click on | File New to reset input, analysis and output data.
Set up a new problem by making the following selections on the | Options menu:
16.1.8.2Options Menu

Fluid: Retrograde condensate

PVT Method: Black Oil
Separator Multi-Stage
Flow type Tubing flow
Well type Producer
Predicting Pressure and temperature (offshore)
Model Rough approximation
Completion Cased hole
Gravel pack Yes

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 558 PROSPER

16.1.8.3PVT menu

Click | Done and enter the following data on the PVT Input screen:
Separator pressure 1200 psig
Separator temperature 120 deg F
Separator GOR 25,000 scf/STB
Separator gas gravity 0.7 specific gravity
Tank GOR 1 scf/STB
Tank gas gravity 0.7 specific gravity
Condensate gravity 55 API
Water to gas ratio 4 bbl/MMscf
Water salinity 10,000 ppm
Dew point at reservoir temp. 4500 psig
Reservoir temperature 220 degrees F
Reservoir pressure 5000 psig

Select the Lee et al gas viscosity correlation, then click | Done to return to the main
menu.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 559

16.1.8.4System Menu (Equip & Inflow)

Equipment Data
Click System Equipment All Edit and enter the following equipment description:
Deviation Survey

Bottom MD TVD
(ft) (ft)
0 0
10000 10000
Enter NO surface equipment. (Click on Cancel to continue)

Enter the tubing string details as follows under down hole section:

Bottom MD ID Roughness
(ft) (ins) (ins)
Xmas tree 0
Tubing 500 3.958 0.0006
SSSV 3
Tubing 9800 3.958 0.0006
Casing 10000 8.681 0.0006

Enter the flowing temperature survey data in the Geothermal gradient section:

Bottom MD Formation temperature

(ft) (deg F)
0 60
10000 220
Overall heat transfer coefficient 4.0 BTU/hr/ft2/F

Leave the default values for the average heat capacities.

Click on Summary | Draw down-hole to inspect diameters and depths of the

down-hole equipment section.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 560 PROSPER

Well Inflow and Gravel Pack Input

Click System | Inflow Performance

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 561

Define the well inflow performance as follows:

IPR method: Petroleum Experts
Mechanical / Geometrical skin method Karakas & Tariq
Deviation / Partial penetration skin Cinco / Martin-Bronz
Reservoir pressure 5000 psig
Reservoir temperature 220 deg F
Water / Gas ratio 4 BBL/MMscf

Click on the | Input data button on the top right hand corner of the window. In the
reservoir model data entry screen, enter the following:
Reservoir permeability 300 mD
Reservoir thickness 100 ft
Drainage area 640 acres
Dietz shape factor 31.6
Well bore radius 0.51 ft
Perforation interval 50 ft
Reservoir Porosity 0.2 fraction
Time 100 days
Connate water saturation 0.2 fraction
Non-Darcy coefficient Calculated

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 562 PROSPER

Permeability entered Total permeability

Then click on the | Mech./ Geom. skin tab and enter the following:
Perforation diameter 0.5 ins
Shots per foot 6 1/ft
Perforation length 12 ins
Damaged zone thickness 12 ins
Damaged zone permeability 150 mD
Crushed zone thickness 0.2 ins
Crushed zone permeability 75 mD
Shot phasing 60 degrees
Vertical permeability 30 mD

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 563

Click on the | Dev/PROSPER skin tab, and enter the following:

Deviation 0 degrees
Penetration 0.5

Click on the | Gravel pack tab and define the gravel pack parameters as follows:
Gravel pack perm 40000 mD
Gravel pack length 1.3 ins
Perforation efficiency 1
Click | Calculate and the program will calculate an AOF of approximately 116
MMscf/day display the IPR on a plot. Click | Main and return to the main menu.

16.1.8.5Sensitivity Calculation Menu

To evaluate the sensitivity of the well to completion parameters such as:

perforation density
gravel pack permeability

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 564 PROSPER

Click | Calculation System (Ipr + Vlp) | 3 Variables.

Select Dukler Flannigan as the surface equipment correlation and Duns and Ros
Modified for the VLP correlation.

Leave the rate method set to Automatic linear. Set the top node pressure to 1200
psig and the water/gas ratio to 4 bbl/ MMscf.
Click Continue to display the sensitivity variables screen.

To perform the design sensitivity calculations, enter the following sensitivity

variables:
For variable 1
- Select Shots Density
Enter 4, 8, 12
For variable 2
- Select Gravel pack permeability
Enter 10000, 40000, 80000
For variable 3
- Select First node Pressure
Enter 1200, 2000, 3000
Click | Continue.
Calculate to perform the system sensitivity calculations.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 565

The results for the different sensitivity variables can be seen by scrolling down on the
little arrows on the top right hand side.

From the calculation screen select Sensitivity to plot the sensitivity data select V
ariables and select dP Completion as the Y-axis variable, Shots per foot for the
X-axis and gravel pack permeability for the parameter variable.
Plot the results for 1200 psi top node pressure.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 566 PROSPER

Note that when the sand face pressure drops below the dew point,
liquid dropout occurs. The Petroleum Experts IPR reduces the relative
permeability to gas when liquids are being produced.

In this producing area, field trials and lab tests have established that gravel pack
failure should not occur provided that the total pressure drop across the
completion is less than 430 psi (for purposes of illustration only)
By inspection, the above sensitivity plot shows that 12 shots per foot perforations
and a gravel pack permeability of 40 Darcies will be required to ensure that the
well will not have to be choked back unnecessarily.

Return to the calculation screen and click on | Solution Detail, then select the
solution for

12 SPF, 40000 mD and 1200 psi.

From the solution summary, we know that the pressure drop across the completion
is almost all due to the gravel pack. In excess of 88 MMscf/day can be safely
produced with this completion design.

To determine the allowable rate

if the well had been perforated at 8 SPF

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 567

Make a sensitivity plot with dP completion on the Y-axis, First node pressure on the
X-axis and Gravel Pack Permeability as the parameter variable. Shot density = 8 / ft

Assume that the gravel pack has 40000 mD permeability. Zoom on curve 1 (8 SPF)
near where it is around 400 psi dP completion and read off the First Node Pressure.
You should get around 2500 psi.

Click | Finish and | Done to display the Select variables screen.

To calculate the gas production rate for 400 psi dP completion, use the Co
mbinations option on the Select variables screen. Enter the following for
combination Case 1:

Shots per foot 8 1/ft

Gravel pack permeability 40000 mD
First node pressure 2500 psig

Leave the rate field blank. Click | Continue and then | Calculate. PROSPER will

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 568 PROSPER

calculate the system solution. Click | Solution details and check that the well can
flow at 63 MMscf/day with a THP of 2500 and a dP across the completion of around
410 psi. Note that the allowable rate at 8 shots per foot is more than 20 MMscf/day
lower than the allowable with 12 shots per foot.

Click | Main to return to the main menu.

Save the file as GRAVEL PACK.OUT .

16.1.9 Example 9 - Horizontal Well - Friction dP

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/hwell.out

The example shows how to set up the input data for a Horizontal well - Friction dP
IPR model. It is based on the OILWELL example file.
Note that the reservoir permeability must be increased from 50 in the base
example to 500 millidarcies in order to see the friction pressures drop along the
well bore.

16.1.9.1Horizontal well Model Set Up

From the main menu, click File New to reset input, analysis and output data. Click F
ile Open and select OILWELL.OUT from the SAMPLES sub-directory. This will
avoid the need to enter down hole equipment or PVT data.

16.1.9.2Horizontal well IPR Data

Click System | Inflow Performance and enter the following:

IPR Method Horizontal Well - dP Friction loss
Reservoir Pressure 5,000 psig
Reservoir Temperature 210 deg F
Water Cut 0 percent
Click on the | Input data button, and enter the following data for the reservoir and
horizontal well.
Horizontal Well Model Kuchuk and Goode
Reservoir Permeability 500 mD
Reservoir Thickness 200 feet
Horizontal Anisotropy 1 fraction
Vertical Anisotropy 0.2 fraction

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 569

Well Length 1,000 feet

Reservoir Length 10,000 feet
Reservoir Width 5,000 feet
Length distance to reservoir edge 2,000 feet
Width distance to reservoir edge 1,000 feet
Bottom of reservoir to well centre 100 feet

Next, set up the well completion details i.e. zone data.

This well has alternating perforated and blank sections, which are identical.
We will enter the data for two only two zones, one blank one producing.
Then we will use the editing features to copy identical data to the other zones.
For the first zone enter the following:
Zone Type Perforated
Skin Method By Hand
Gravel Pack This will be automatically skipped
Zone Length 100 feet
Zone Permeability 500 mD
Flowing Radius 0.15 feet
Zone Roughness 0.001 inches

Click the Zone Data button and enter the following:

Skin 2
Well bore Radius 0.354
Click | Done
Enter the following for the second Zone:
Zone Type Blank
Zone Length 100 feet
Flowing Radius 0.15 feet
Zone Roughness 0.001 inches
Copy the data for Zone 1 (perforated) and 2 (blank) to other layers as follows:
Select the layers by clicking the select button to the left of the screen for
Zone 1.
Hold down the Control key and select Zone 2 also.
Click Copy to copy the elected layers into memory.
Click the select button for Zone 3, then Paste to transfer Zone 1 and 2 data
to zones 3 and 4.
Select Zone 5 and repeat the Paste process.
Work through to Zone 9 to complete the data input for all 10 zones.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 570 PROSPER

Click Calculate to get the Inflow performance relationship plot.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 571

16.1.9.3Coning Calculations for Horizontal Wells

PROSPER has some Steady-State gas / water coning models implemented

specifically for horizontal oil wells to estimate the critical rates for coning.

These calculations also calculate the pressure loss along the well bore and allow
the user to display the pressure profiles.

To access these calculations, click Coning, and enter the following:

Rate 40,000 STB/day
Reservoir Porosity 0.2 fraction
Coning Calculation Water Coning

All the IPR input must have been defined before performing the
coning calculations.

Click | Calculate, and the breakthrough time and critical rate estimates will be
displayed.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 572 PROSPER

To calculate and display the horizontal well pressure profile and production
contribution from each zone for the entered rate, click Plot. PROSPER will display a
graph similar to the following:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 573

The source of inflow can be plotted by clicking Variables and selecting Rate per Unit
Length. As shown in the following plot, more production enters at the heel of the
well than the toe:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 574 PROSPER

Click | Finish | Done to return to the IPR calculation screen.

When one clicks | Calculate from this screen, PROSPER calculates the entire IPR
curve and finds the AOF. Click | Main, and you are returned to the main PROSPER
screen.

Once the Horizontal well dP friction IPR, has been calculated, System calculations
can be carried out as normal. If you need to calculate a wide range of sensitivity
cases, the dP friction model could be used to prepare a table of test data points to
be entered in one of the fast-calculating multi-rate IPR models.

Save the file as HWELL.OUT.

16.1.10Example 10 - Multi-Layer dP Pressure Loss
File: ~/samples/PROSPER/mlayer.out
The example shows how to set up the input data for a Multi-Layer IPR model. It is
based on the OILWELL example file.

Then we will use the well model created to obtain the total production and
contribution of each producing zone when the well is flowing with a well head

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 575

pressure of 250 psig.

Multilayer Dp Loss Model Set up

16.1.10.1

From the main menu, click File New to reset input, analysis and output data. Click F
ile Open and select OILWELL.OUT from the SAMPLES sub-directory. This will
avoid the need to enter down hole equipment or PVT data.
Multilayer Dp Loss IPR Data Input
16.1.10.2

Click System Inflow Performance and enter the following:

IPR Method Multi-layer - dP loss

Reservoir Temperature 210 deg F
Relative Permeability No

Click on | Input data, and the layer data entry screen will be displayed.

The following description shows how to set up a well model with two layers
separated by 100 feet.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 576 PROSPER

16.1.10.2.1 STEP1: Defining the top of the multi-layer system

Enter the location of the top of the producing zone - measured depth 11,400, TVD
10,430. This is the deepest depth in the deviation survey table.

16.1.10.2.2 STEP2: Defining the to Top Producing layer

Enter the following data for Layer 1 (Top Producing Zone):

Layer type Perforated
Layer IPR model Darcy
Layer skin model By hand
Measured depth 11,500 feet
True vertical depth 10,500 feet
Layer pressure 5000 psig
Layer flowing radius 0.25 feet
Layer roughness 0.001 inches

Click the Layer PVT data button and enter the following:
Layer formation GOR 820 scf/STB
Layer oil gravity 34 API
Layer gas gravity 0.7 s.g.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 577

Layer water cut 0 percent

Click | Done.

Click on Layer model data button and enter the following:

Layer permeability 100 mD
Layer drainage area 640 acres
Layer Dietz shape factor 31.6
Layer well bore radius 0.354 feet
Click | Done.

Click on Layer skin data button and enter a skin of 2.

The layer flowing radius is the radius of the pipe connecting the layers i.e., 0.5 x tubing I.D.
The wellbore radius (rw) is the radius of the drill bit.

16.1.10.2.3 STEP3: Defining the non producing zone

Layer 2 is the section of blank pipe that separates the two producing layers. Enter
the following for Layer 2.
Layer type Blank
Measured depth 11,600 feet
True vertical depth 10,600 feet
Layer flowing radius 0.25 feet
Layer roughness 0.0006 inches
The layer flowing radius is the radius of the pipe connecting the layers i.e., 0.5 x tubing I.D.
The wellbore radius (rw) is the radius of the drill bit.

16.1.10.2.4 STEP4: Defining the to Bottom Producing layer

Enter the following for Layer 3:

Layer type Perforated
Layer IPR model P.I. Entry
Measured depth 11,700 feet
True vertical depth 10,700 feet
Layer pressure 4800 psig
Layer flowing radius 0.25 feet
Layer roughness 0.001 inches
The layer flowing radius is the radius of the pipe connecting the layers i.e., 0.5 x tubing I.D.
The wellbore radius (rw) is the radius of the drill bit.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 578 PROSPER

Click the | Layer PVT data button and enter the following:
Layer formation GOR 820 scf/STB
Layer oil gravity 34 API
Layer gas gravity 0.7 s.g.
Layer water cut 30 percent

Click | Done.

Click Layer model data button and enter

PI 5 stb/day/psi

Calculate and PROSPER will calculate the composite IPR, the reference depth for
the composite IPR is at the TOP node (11400 ft MD) which should correspond with
the deepest point entered in the down-hole equipment section.
In the IPR plot click on Variables and select Layer's IPR.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 579

Note: The IPR for each layer is referenced to the Top of each layer. The composite
or total IPR (green curve) is referenced to the Top node (e.g. 11400 ft MD).

Click Results to see the layer pressures and production contributions. Crossflow into
a layer appears as a negative production value as in the following example:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 580 PROSPER

This will finish the set up of the IPR Section.

In this case the Down-hole equipment section has already been completed, so we
can use the well model to perform some calculations.

Multilayer Dp Loss Calculation System

16.1.10.3
The objective is to obtain the total production rate and contribution of each layer
when the well is flowing with a well head pressure of 250 psig.

From the main menu in PROSPER click on Calculation | System (Ipr+Vlp) | 3

Variables.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 581

We can notice that in this section is not possible to select a Water cut and GOR like
in the example OILWELL.out.

If we select a Multilayer IPR model the Water cut, GOR, Reservoir pressure, etc
should be modify for each layer in the IPR section. (The reason behind that each
layer will have different values).

Click Continue | Continue | Calculate.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 582 PROSPER

On the right hand side we can read the results. Clicking on Solution Details button.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 583

Then select Inflow Layer Details to inspect the contribution of each layer.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 584 PROSPER

Save the file as Mlayer.OUT.

16.1.11Example 11-Multilateral well

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/Multilateral.out

A multilateral well is a well that has more than one branch going out of the bore hole
and connecting the well with the reservoir.
One of the main objectives of a multilateral well is to produce a larger drainage area
than a single mono-bore. This give a great benefit on the production, especially in
faulted reservoirs .

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 585

The multilateral wells are common in offshore environment, where a limited space in
the platform with a limited well slots available may encourage this type of completion.

The main objectives of this example are to:

Create a gas well which is producing from two branches producing from
the same reservoir.
Then use the PROSPER well model to find the gas production rate for a
well head pressure of 200 psig.
Determine the contribution of each branch.
Determine the pressure drop in each branch.

This example demonstrates how to:

Setup a multilateral IPR well model.
Calculate the intersection of the IPR and VLP.
Inspect the results for each branch of the multilateral well.

Options
16.1.11.1
From the main menu click on File | New to re-initialize PROSPER.

Click Options | Options to set up the type of well model according to the following
table:

Fluid : Dry and Wet Gas

PVT Method : Black Oil

Separator : Single-Stage
Hydrates : Disable Warning
Water Viscosity : Use Default Correlation
Water Vapour : No Calculations
Viscosity Model : Newtonian Fluid

Flow Type : Tubing

Well Type : Producer

Predicting : Pressure and Temperature (offshore)

Temperature Model : Rough Approximation
Range : Full System

Completion : Cased Hole

Gravel Pack : No

Inflow Type : MultiLateral Well

Note: This section is used to determine the type of well to be modeled. (Gas, Oil,
artificially lifted, etc). The next sections will be adapted according to the options

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 586 PROSPER

selected here. A good methodology to complete the input data in PROSPER is to use
the main menu bar and go to the sections from left to right and from top to bottom.

PVT section
16.1.11.2
The information in the next table describes the PVT properties of the fluid.

Reservoir Fluid : Dry and Wet Gas

Separator : Single-Stage
Gas Gravity : 0.63 (sp. gravity)
Separator Pressure : 500 (psig)
Condensate To Gas Ratio : 0 (STB/MMscf)
Condensate Gravity : 50 (API)
Water To Gas Ratio : 2 (STB/MMscf)
Water Salinity : 100000 (ppm)
Mole Percent H2S : 0 (percent)
Mole Percent C02 : 0.15 (percent)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 587

Mole Percent N2 : 3.6 (percent)

Gas Viscosity Correlation : Lee et al

From the main menu select PVT | Input Data to enter the properties.

PVT Match data:

Temperature 65 deg F

Pressure Gas viscosity Z factor Gas FVF

[psig] [cP] [ft3/scf]
100 0.0109 0.9815 0.1271
225 0.01109 0.9613 0.0595
350 0.01127 0.9412 0.0383
475 0.01147 0.9213 0.0279
600 0.01171 0.9017 0.0218

Equipment Data
16.1.11.3
The next section (moving from left to right in the main menu) is the System | E
quipment section where we need to specify the deviation survey, equipment
information (tubing, casing depths and diameters), etc.

In the case of a Multilateral well in this section we are going to describe the well from
the top node (well head or manifold) to the Tie point (depth in the well where the first
branch is going out of the main well-bore).

In the following diagram the blue part is entered in the System | Equipment section.
The rest of the well including the reservoir will be modeled in the Multilateral IPR
section.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 588 PROSPER

From the main menu select System | Equipment and click on All | Edit to complete all
the section (deviation survey, down-hole equipment, etc).

The deviation survey is given in the following table:

Measured True Vertical

Depth Depth
(feet) (feet)
0 0
900 900
1068 1062.3
1188 1164.1
1285 1237.7
1360 1288.8
1516 1374.1
1578 1398.4

Once the deviation survey is entered click on Plot to inspect the deviation survey.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 589

Click Finish on the plot and Done to continue.

The next section is the Surface Equipment section, as we are modeling the well from
the well head (no surface equipment) click on Cancel to continue.

In the Down-hole Equipment section we can enter the configuration of the well from
the well head to the Tie point.

Tubing
Measured Inside
Type Depth Diameter
(feet) (inches)
Xmas Tree 0
Tubing 260 6
SSSV 4.5

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 590 PROSPER

Tubing 1577 6

In the next screenshot we can see the data entered in the down-hole equipment
section.

Click Done to move to the next section.

The temperature of the surroundings of the well is given in the next table, let's
assume an overall heat transfer coefficient of 3 BTU/h/ft2/F.

Formation
Measured Formation
Depth Temperature
(feet) (deg F)
0 40
1578 62

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 591

Click Done | Done and return the PROSPER main section.

Multilateral IPR
16.1.11.4
From the main menu click on System | Inflow Performance to access the IPR
section.

In the IPR section the multilateral section of the well is modelled. The data required
is the description of the well from the Tie point (deepest point of the Down-hole
equipment section) to the reservoir.

Therefore we need to model the branches (In this case 2 branches) and the
information related to them (deviation survey, tubing/casing depths and diameters,

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 592 PROSPER

perforation interval, etc) and the reservoir (or reservoirs, in case of multiple layers).

In the next plot we have a graphical representation of the situation that we would like
to model:

Red square represent the Tie point

Blue rectangle represents the reservoir layer.
The pink line from the red square (tie point) to the green circle (joint) is a piece of
casing.
The yellow sections represents the perforation interval of the branches. (Branch 1
right hand side, Branch 2 left hand side).

Available data from the Tie point to the reservoir:

Tie point data

Measured Depth 1577(feet)

True Vertical Depth 1398.4(feet)

For Element T1, i.e. the pipe between Tie Point Data to Joint 1.

Deviation survey:

True
Measured Vertical
Depth Depth Azimuth
(feet) (feet) (degrees)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 593

1577 1398.4 0
1650 1424.3 230.6

Equipment data:

Tubing Tubing
Equipment Measured Inside Inside
Type Depth Diameter Roughness
(feet) (inches) (inches)
Tubing 1650 7 0.0006

Joint data

Measured Depth 1650(feet)

True Vertical Depth 1424.3(feet)

Branch 1 data

Well bore radius: 0.354 ft

Dietz shape factor: 31.6

Branch 1 deviation survey:

True
Measured Vertical
Depth Depth Azimuth
(feet) (feet) (degrees)
1650 1424.3 230.6
1701 1437 243
1840 1449.3 264.9
1940 1450.9 269.8

Branch 1 equipment data:

Tubing Tubing
Equipment Measured Inside Inside
Type Depth Diameter Roughness
(feet) (inches) (inches)
Tubing 1900 3.5 0.0006

Branch 1 perforation data:

Perforation Perforation Perforation Perforation

Interval Interval Interval Interval
MD MD TVD TVD Skin Non-Darcy
Start End Start End Value Factor
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (1/(Mscf/day))

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 594 PROSPER

1650 1900 1424.3 1450.3 0 2.80E-10

Branch 2 data

Well bore radius: 0.354 ft

Dietz shape factor: 31.6

Branch 2 deviation survey:

True
Measured Vertical
Depth Depth Azimuth
(feet) (feet) (degrees)
1650 1424.3 230.6
1710 1430.1 231.3
1784 1432.7 239.2
1908 1432.2 257.6
2024 1438.5 267.1
2155 1447.9 256.6
2290 1445.8 248.1
2395 1449.8 238.8
2436 1449.9 235
2483 1449.8 231

Branch 2 equipment data:

Tubing Tubing
Equipment Measured Inside Inside
Type Depth Diameter Roughness
(feet) (inches) (inches)
Tubing 2483 4 0.0006

Branch 2 perforation data:

Perforation Perforation Perforation Perforation

Interval Interval Interval Interval
MD MD TVD TVD Skin Non-Darcy
Start End Start End Value Factor
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (1/(Mscf/day))
1670 2483 1426.23 1449.8 0 2.80E-10

Reservoir data

Reservoir model: Petroleum Experts

PVT data:

Reservoir Pressure 557(psig)

Reservoir Temperature 65(deg F)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 595

Condensate Gravity 45(API)

Reservoir Gas Gravity 0.63(sp. gravity)
Reservoir Water Salinity 10000(ppm)
Water Gas Ratio 2(STB/MMscf)
Condensate Gas Ratio 0(STB/MMscf)

Petrophysical parameters:

Reservoir Permeability 244(md)

Reservoir Thickness 50(feet)
Drainage Area 100(acres)
Reservoir Top Depth (TVD) 1400(feet)
Reservoir Vertical Permeability 25(md)
Time 100 (days)
Reservoir Porosity 0.28(fraction)
Connate Water Saturation 0.25(fraction)

16.1.11.4.1 Multilateral IPR Input section

Drawing the model

The IPR interface consist in a Network section where we can draw the situation of
the example using the short cut icons.

Select the fist short cut icon, or click on the drop down menu and select "Add Tie-
point" as shown in the next screen shot.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 596 PROSPER

Click somewhere else in the screen to add a Tie point and for label called it "Tie
point"

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 597

Right clicking on the Tie point red square added will allow the user to (Change label,
delete the icon).

The next short cut icon (Going from left to right) is the Add Junction.

Select Add Junction and click somewhere else in the screen to add the junction, call
it "Joint".

Then select the Add Completion and click in the screen to add a completion, label it
"Branch 1".

Click somewhere else in the screen to add a second completion, named it "Branch
2".

Then select Add Reservoir from the drop down menu and click on the screen to add
a Reservoir icon.

We should have an schematic similar to the next screen shot.

From the drop down menu select the command "Move" and then click on a added
objects like the "Reservoir" to move it and re-locate the icons.

The next step is to connect the different objects together, so we can select the

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 598 PROSPER

command "Add Link" from the drop down menu.

Then click on the Tie point and drag it to the Joint, this will create a connection
between them.

Repeat the process of linking the following items:

Joint to Branch 1
Branch 1 to Reservoir
Joint to Branch 2
Branch 2 to Reservoir

Entering the data

Tie point

At this stage we need to start entering the data for the different sections.

Double click on the Tie point added icon to access the input panel.

Enter the depths of the Tie point as shown in the next snap shot.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 599

Click Done to exit this section and keep the changes.

Casing from Tie point to Joint

Double click on the next element called "T1" which is a piece of casing going from
the Tie point to the joint where the branches are separated.

In this section enter the well bore radius as shown in the next picture and then click
on Input data.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 600 PROSPER

In this section there are two tabs to be completed, deviation survey and equipment.

Deviation survey tab:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 601

Equipment Tab:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 602 PROSPER

Once the two tabs are completed click on Done.

Joint

Double click on the Joint icon.

In this section the data has been transferred automatically from the deepest point of
the previous element.

On the right hand side we can see a that the elements that need to be completed
are marked with a red x.

Click Done.

Branch 1

Double click on Branch 1 to access the input panel of the completion element.

Enter the well-bore radius and Dietz shape factor as shown below.

Click Input Data.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 603

In the Input data section there are 3 tabs to complete (Deviation, Equipment,
Perforation Details).

The 3 section are shown below in the following screen shots:

Deviation:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 604 PROSPER

Equipment:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 605

Perforation Details:

Click Done to exit and save the changes in this section.

Branch 2

Double click on the Branch 2 to start entering the information for this icon.

Enter the well-bore radius and Dietz shape factor, then click Input data to move to
the next section.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 606 PROSPER

In the Input Data section there are 3 tabs to enter the data:

Branch 2 Deviation:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 607

Branch 2 Equipment:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 608 PROSPER

Branch 2 Perforations:

Click Done to exit and save the results.

Reservoir

Double click on the blue reservoir icon to enter the data for the reservoir.

Select the Petroleum Experts Reservoir model on the left hand side, enter the PVT
data for the reservoir and click on Input Data.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 609

In the Input Data section enter the reservoir parameters as shown in the next
snapshot.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 610 PROSPER

16.1.11.4.2 Multilateral IPR calculations

Once the information has been entered, it is possible to perform a quick visual
inspection to check that the deviation surveys and the equipment data have been
entered correctly and the perforations are actually in the reservoir.

From the main menu of the IPR section select Visualise | All

This option will display the Network window (where we have constructed the model)
and different views (Front, Side, Top) of the system where we can check that the
perforations (yellow curves) are inside the reservoir (blue area).

In this case we can see the two branches producing from the same reservoir.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 611

To perform a calculation in order to check the reservoir deliverability click on Analyze

| Calculate | Calculate

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 612 PROSPER

In this section we are calculating a curve (e.g. 20 values of pressure, ranging from
10 psig to 557 psig).

In conductivity switch the default option is "Finite conductivity", this option will
calculate and consider the pressure drop across the branches and casing and it will
include the interference of the branches as they produce from the same reservoir.

The "Infinite Conductivity" option does not considers the pressure drops in the
pipes, therefore this option can be used to obtain the reservoir deliverability
neglecting the pressure drop in the wellbore, from the reservoir to the Tie point.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 613

In this case using "Finite Conductivity" as shown in the screenshot above we have
obtain the following IPR plot:

Note: The IPR plot obtained is referenced at the Tie point and it considers the
pressure drop across the pipes. In other words, the IPR curve represents the
relationship between the gas flow rate produced and the Tie Point Pressure.

The IPR plot curve is calculated for 20 values of pressure and calculating the
corresponding 20 values of rate.
In this IPR plot we can see that at very high flow rates (close to the AOF) the IPR
curve goes backward.
The reason of this behavior can be explained by the fact that at low Tie Point
Pressures, the expansion of the gas in the wellbore causes high gas velocities that,
on their turn, produce high pressure drops along the well. The higher pressure drops
cause a reduction in the production itself, therefore the "knee" in the curve.

Usually this behaviour will not affect the performance of the well as the intersection
of the VLP/IPR is rarely close to the AOF.

Click Finish in the Plot.

Click Done and Finish to go the main section of PROSPER.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 614 PROSPER

Multilateral Calculation System

16.1.11.5
One of the objectives of the exercise is to obtain the production rate when the well
head pressure is 200 psig.

In order to achieve this objective from the main menu select Calculation | System | 3
variables

Enter a Top node pressure of 200 psig

Click Continue | Continue | Calculate

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 615

The total gas rate production rate is close to 60 MMscf/day.

Click Plot to inspect the intersection of the VLP/IPR.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 616 PROSPER

Click Finish in the plot to go back to the results section.

Click on Solution Details button.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 617

Click Inflow Layer Details

In this section under Branch Summary we can see the contribution of each branch.

In this case we can see that Branch 1 is contributing 16.4 MMscf/day and Branch 2
is producing 44.3 MMscf/day.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 618 PROSPER

In the Segment Details by Branch we can select a Branch to inspect the pressure
drop, and rate contribution.

Clicking on Plot and Variables will allow us to select different variables such as
Pressure and Cumulative Rate that can be analyzed within selected Branch.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 619

In this example we have seen how to create a Multilateral well model for a two
branch system. We have obtained the total gas rate for a given condition of well
head pressure and the contribution of each branch.

Let's save this example as Multilateral.OUT.

16.1.12Example 12 - Water injection well

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/waterinjection.out

This example shows how to set up a water injection well model in PROSPER

Here are listed all the inputs needed to build the model:

The water salinity is 100,000 ppm

The well is vertical, down to 11,500 ft (which is the top of the perforation

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 620 PROSPER

interval)
The completion details consist in a piece of tubing that runs down to 11,000 ft
(2.9 ID) and the casing below (6 ID)
The temperature of the reservoir is 250 F
The temperature of the environment at the wellhead is 50 F
The Overall Heat Transfer coefficient is assumed to be 8 Btu/hr/ft2/F
The temperature of the water injected (at the wellhead) is 60 F
The reservoir pressure is 4,000 psig
The Injectivity Index is 4 stb/day/psi

Open a new PROSPER instance and Select File | New

Go to Options | Summary, and select the water injection option, as

illustrated below:

The rest of the options are set by default.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 621

Click Done, and the all the PROSPER screens are customized to receive input
data in regards to a water injector well.
We will use the same procedure to enter the inputs as if we were dealing with a
producer.

Enter the PVT section (PVT | Input Data)

Enter the water salinity as shown below, Click Done.

Enter the Equipment section (System | Equipment (Tubing etc))

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 622 PROSPER

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 623

Access the Deviation Survey and enter the deviation survey. Click Done:

No Surface Equipment is modeled; the system will only model the injector from the
wellhead.
Access the Downhole Equipment section and enter the completion details given.
Keep the roughness by default and Click Done:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 624 PROSPER

Access the Geothermal Gradient section and enter the temperature of the
surroundings given. Enter the Overall Heat Transfer coefficient as given by input #6
and Click Done:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 625

Keep the Average Heat Capacities per default.

Eventually, still under the Equipment section, enter the Injected Fluid Temperature
given. Click Done:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 626 PROSPER

The Equipment section is completed.

Enter the IPR section (System | Inflow Performance)

Select the PI Entry model (because the information we have is the injectivity
index).
Enter the Reservoir Pressure and Reservoir Temperature given. It will be noticed
that the Water Cut and Total GOR inputs can be ignored because the well is a
water injector. Values are however required to validate the model.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 627

Click Input Data.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 628 PROSPER

Enter the Injectivity Index given .

Click Calculate to calculate the IPR curve:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 629

Click Done. The IPR section is completed.

The Water Injector well has now been built and we can use the PROSPER file to
perform a Calculation for different Well head injection pressures to check the
intersections of the VLP and IPR.

From the main menu select Calculation System (Ipr+vlp) | (3 variables)

Enter a Top node pressure of 500 psig.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 630 PROSPER

Click Continue.

Select First Node Pressure as sensitivity variable and enter values of 500, 1000 and
1500 psig as shown in the next screen shot.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 631

Then select Continue | Calculate | Plot.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 632 PROSPER

From this plot we can obtain the intersection of the VLP/IPR.

Save the file as waterinjection.OUT.

16.1.13Example 13 - Multilateral oil well

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/Multilateral oil well.out

The objective of this exercise is to construct a multilateral oil well with two branches
producing from the same reservoir.
The idea is to evaluate the contribution of the branches for different azimuth angles
such as 180 degrees, 90 degrees, 45 degrees and finally only 1 branch.

With this exercise we can evaluate the interference of the branches in the reservoir
and the contribution of each branch.

Stat PROSPER and open the Oilwell.out created in the Quick Start Guide section or
from the Sample folder.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 633

The following schematic represents the situation to be modeled where there are two
branches in the reservoir at 180 degrees.

In the following tables is the data required to represent the branches and the
reservoir.

Tie point data

Measured Depth 11400 (feet)
True Vertical Depth 10430 (feet)

T1 data:

Deviation Survey
True
Measured Vertical
Depth Depth Azimuth
(feet) (feet) (degrees)
11400 10430 0
11450 10480 0

Equipment data
Tubing Tubing Tubing Tubing Casing Casing
Equipment Inside Inside Outside Outside Inside Inside
Measure
d
Type Depth Diameter Roughness Diameter Roughne
Roughnes Diameter ss
s
(feet) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches)
Tubing 11450 3.9 0.0006

Well-bore Radius 0.354(feet)

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 634 PROSPER

C1 data:
Deviation Survey
True
Measured Vertical
Depth Depth Azimuth
(feet) (feet) (degrees)
11450 10480 0
11850 10480 0

Equipment data
Tubing Tubing Tubing Tubing Casing Casing
Equipment Measured Inside Inside Outside Outside Inside Inside
Type Depth Diameter Roughness Diameter
RoughnesDiamete Roughne
s r ss
(feet) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches)
Tubing 11850 3.9 0.0006

Perforation details

Perforation
Perforatio
n
Interval Interval Perforation
Perforatio Gravel
n
Measured Measured Interval Interval Gravel Pack
Depth Depth TVD TVD Skin Pack Non-Darcy
Start End Start End Value Skin
Factor
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (1/(STB/day))
11450 11850 10430 10430 0

Dietz Shape Factor 31

Well-bore Radius 0.354(feet)

C2 data:
Deviation survey
True
Measured Vertical
Depth Depth Azimuth
(feet) (feet) (degrees)
11450 10480 0
11850 10480 180

Equipment data
Tubing Tubing Tubing Tubing Casing Casing
Equipment Measured Inside Inside Outside Outside Inside Inside
Type Depth Diameter
Roughnes Diameter Roughnes Diamete Roughne
s s r ss

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 635

(feet) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches)

Tubing 11850 3.9 0.0006

Perforation details
Perforation Perforation
Interval Interval
Perforatio Perforation
n
Measured Measured Interval Interval Gravel Gravel Pack
Depth Depth TVD TVD Skin Pack Non-Darcy
Start End Start End Value Skin
Factor
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (1/(STB/day))
11450 11850 10480 10480 0

Dietz Shape Factor 31

Well-bore Radius 0.354(feet)

Reservoir data

Reservoir Pressure 5000 (psig)

Reservoir Temperature 210 (deg F)
Oil Gravity 34 (API)
Reservoir Gas Gravity 0.833 (sp.
gravity)
Reservoir Water Salinity 150000 (ppm)
Water Cut 0 (percent)
Total GOR 820 (scf/STB)

Darcy Method (Oil)

Reservoir Permeability 100 (md)
Reservoir Thickness 100 (feet)
Drainage Area 500 (acres)
Reservoir Top Depth (TVD) 10430 (feet)
Reservoir Vertical Permeability 10 (md)

Model Set up Multilateral oil well

16.1.13.1
In the Options menu select as Inflow Type "Multilateral Well"

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 636 PROSPER

In PROSPER from the main menu select System | Inflow Performance

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 637

In this section will be follow the next work flow:

a- Draw the layout of the multilateral system.

b- Enter the data in the different sections.
c- Calculate the response of the system.

a- Draw the layout of the multilateral system

Using the short cut icons in the menu bar the different components can be added in
the system.

Starting from left to right, select the first short cut icon called "Tie-point" and click
somewhere else in the screen to add it.

Add a name (e.g. Tie point)

The Tie point is the depth at which the pressure of the IPR plot is reported. The Tie
point should be equal to the deepest point of the down-hole equipment section.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 638 PROSPER

Continue drawing the lay out of the system using the icons from left to right (juction,
completion and reservoir) to create a schematic as shown in the next screen shot:

In the schematic shown above we have the following elements:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 639

- Tie point (Connection point between IPR and down-hole equipment section).

- T1: A section of casing.

- J1: A joint.
- C1: One multilateral branch.
- C2: Second multilateral branch.
- R1: Reservoir.

b- Enter the data in the different sections

Double click on the Tie point and enter the data for the tie point.

The depths in this section should be the same as the deepest point entered in the
down-hole equipment section.

Click Done.

Double click on the next icon "T1"

T1 is an horizontal 50 ft long casing going from the Tie point to the joint where the
branches are split.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 640 PROSPER

Enter the well bore radius and click Input data

There are two tabs that should be completed.

Deviation tab:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 641

Equipment tab:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 642 PROSPER

Once the data is entered click Done.

Click Done.

The next equipment is J1, which correspond to a joint where the branches split.
Double click on J1.

The data is automatically transfer to this section.

Click Done.

The next equipment is C1 or "completion 1".

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 643

Click on Input Data

In this section 3 tabs should be fill in.

Deviations survey tab

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 644 PROSPER

Equipment tab

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 645

Perforation details tab

Once the data has been entered click Done.

The same procedure should be used to enter the data in the completion 2 "C2".

Completion C2 has the same input data as completion C1, except for the azimuth in
the deviation survey tab.

In the deviation survey section the azimuth is 180 degrees rather than zero.

Once all the tabs are completed select "Done".

The next icon is the reservoir "R1".

Double click on the R1 icon and enter the reservoir properties according to the next
screenshots:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 646 PROSPER

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 647

Calculations Multilateral oil well

16.1.13.2
Once the data has been entered, from the main menu in the IPR section select
Visualise | All

Here we can inspect if the two branches (yellow lines) are inside the reservoir (blue
rectangle). This is useful to spot typos in the deviation surveys and reservoir depths.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 648 PROSPER

From the main menu in the IPR section select Analyse | Calculate

In this section we can perform two types of calculations

1. Curve
2. Point

1. A curve is a calculation with up to 20 pressure points (pressure defined at the tie

point) where the model would gives the solution rate for each value of pressure.

The curve option is used to calculate an IPR curve.

Click "Calculate" to perform a calculation of the IPR.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 649

2. The point calculation is used to analyze the pressure drop in the branches and
contribution of the branches.

For example, selecting "One Point" then we need to specify the pressure at the Tie
point (e.g. 3000 psig)

Then click Calculate. The solution rate for that pressure is approximately 40300
STB/day.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 650 PROSPER

Clicking on the "Details" button we can inspect more information for the calculated
conditions such as:

- Contribution of the branches

- Pressure drop in the branches
- Rate per segment in the branches.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 651

Using the model modify the Azimuth of the second branch can be changed in order
to compare the results.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 652 PROSPER

Liquid produced Total Liquid Rate vs branches angular position

[STB/day]
45000

40000

35000

30000

25000

20000

15000

10000

5000

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 2
Azimuth ang

Save the file as Multilateral oil well.OUT.

16.1.14Example 14 - PCP lifted well design
File: ~/samples/PROSPER/PCP well.out

In this example we will perform a design of a PCP (Progressive cavity pump) in an oil
well.

The objectives of this example are:

In this example it will be demonstrated how to enter PCP pump data in the
database section
To perform a Design of a PCP to increase the oil production.
To perform a Calculation System using a PCP lift system.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 653

PCP lifted well design Model Set up

16.1.14.1
From the main menu in PROSPER click on File | New to re-initialize all the inputs and
outputs.

The following steps will be carried out during this exercise:

- Set up a naturally flowing well and perform a Calculation System to obtain the
solution of the system.

- Input a PCP pump in the database. (By default the PCP database is in blank and
the user should enter the pump data according to the vendors information).

- Perform a design of a PCP.

- Use the designed PCP model to perform Calculation Systems.

We shall initially evaluate the performance of a naturally flowing well, and then look
at increasing the performance by adding a PCP in the well.
PCP lifted well design Input data
16.1.14.2
From the main menu click Options | Options

The following options are selected

Fluid : Oil
PVT Method : Black Oil
Equation Of State :
Separator : Single-Stage
Emulsions : No
Hydrates : Disable Warning
Water Viscosity : Use Default Correlation
Water Vapour : No Calculations
Viscosity Model : Newtonian Fluid

Steam Option : No Steam Calculations

Flow Type : Annular

Well Type : Producer

Artificial Lift : None

Lift Type :

Predicting : Pressure and Temperature (offshore)

Temperature Model : Rough Approximation
Range : Full System

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 654 PROSPER

Completion : Cased Hole

Gravel Pack : No

Inflow Type : Single Branch

Gas Coning : No

From the main menu select PVT | Input data

The following information is available from a PVT report.

Reservoir Fluid : Water and Oil

Separator : Single-Stage
Solution GOR 100 (scf/STB)
Oil Gravity 13 (API)
Gas Gravity 0.67 (sp. gravity)
Water Salinity 10000 (ppm)
Mole Percent H2S 0 (percent)
Mole Percent CO2 0 (percent)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 655

Mole Percent N2 0 (percent)

Pb, Rs, Bo Correlation Glaso
Oil Viscosity Correlation Beal et al

Then from the main menu select System | Equipment and click on All | Edit to
complete all the sections.

The following information is available for this section.

The well is a vertical well, well head located at 0 ft and going down to 4000 ft.

There is no surface equipment data, the well is modelled from the well head to the
perforations.

The tubing is going down to 3900 ft ID 2.89" OD 3.5". Casing ID 7".

The ambient temperature is approximately 60 F and the reservoir temperature is 159

F, the overall heat transfer coefficient is 8 BTU/h/ft2/F.

The following screen shots represents the above data:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 656 PROSPER

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 657

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 658 PROSPER

From the main menu select System | Inflow Performance

Enter the following data and click Calculate to display the IPR.

Reservoir Model PI Entry

Relative Permeability No

Reservoir Pressure 1900 (psig)

Reservoir Temperature 159 (deg F)
Water Cut 30 (percent)
Total GOR 100 (scf/STB)

Productivity Index 1 (STB/day/psi)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 659

16.1.14.2.1 PCP lifted well Calculation System

A naturally flowing well has been set up.

Let's perform a Calculation | System with a well head pressure of 120 psig to inspect
the solution of the system.

From the main menu in PROSPER select Calculaiton | System | 3 variables

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 660 PROSPER

Enter the Top node pressure and click on Continue | Continue | Calculate.

The solution liquid rate obtained is 146 stb/day.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 661

The objective is to increase the liquid production rate to 700 stb/day using a PCP.

PCP lifted well Database

16.1.14.3
The PCP database is empty and it should be fill in with PCP pump data in order to
use the PCP option.

In this section we will see how to enter PCP data in the database.

In PROSPER from the main menu click on Design | Database

Select the PCP tab, select the Pumps tab and Click on Add to access the input
section and enter the following data:

Manufacturer : PCM
Pump Series : 4"
Pump Model : 400TP1350

Pump Size : 4.72 (inches)

Maximum Head : 4430 (feet)

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 662 PROSPER

Reference Speed : 500 (rpm)

Reference Rate : 2534 (STB/day)
Pump Volume : 34 (in3)
Pump Length : 28.5433 (feet)
Stator Pitch : 15.2756 (inches)
Specific Rotor OD : 1.49606 (inches)
Rotor Elements : 1

Hydraulic Flow Required Shaft

Head Rate Speed Power
(feet) (bbl/day) (rpm) (hp)

4430 2152 500 110

3000 2342 500 83
1500 2456 500 50

In following screen shot we can see the data of a PCP pump.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 663

The pump performance curve can be display by clicking on "Plot"

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 664 PROSPER

Click Done.

Now we can see in the list a PCP pump, ideally we should enter several PCP pumps
so we can compare the performance of different pumps and select the most
appropriate pump during a design.

For this example with only one pump in the database is enough.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 665

Select the Sucker Rods tab, then click Add

The following information can be used to fill in the input boxes:

Rod Manufacturer : Test

Rod Name : Rod 1

Rod Inside Diameter : 1 (inches)

Rod Outside Diameter : 1.5 (inches)
Rod Linear Density : 16 (lb/ft)
Young's Modulus : 30602964 (psi)
Thermal Expansion : 7.78E-06 (1/deg F)

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 666 PROSPER

PCP lifted well Design

16.1.14.4
PCP well lifted Design

In this section we will see how to set up the model to perform a PCP design.

From the main section in PROSPER select Options | Options

For the Artificial lift method select: Progressive cavity pump

Type: Sucker rod drive

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 667

From the main menu click on System | Equipment | Down-hole equipment

Enter the tubing outside diameter: 3.5 inches and casing inside diameter 7 inches.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 668 PROSPER

From the main menu in PROSPER select Design | Progressive Cavity Pump

Enter the following data:

Pump Depth (Measured) : 3900 (feet)

Maximum OD : 7 (inches)
Gas Separator Efficiency : 0 (percent)
Pump Wear Factor : 0 (fraction)
Design Rate : 700 (STB/day)
Water Cut : 30 (percent)
Total GOR : 100 (scf/STB)
Top Node Pressure : 100 (psig)
Total Rod Length : 3900 (feet)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 669

Click Calculate | Calculate

In this section PROSPER is calculating the pump duty required, pump intake and
pump discharge pressure and PVT properties of the fluid.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 670 PROSPER

Click Done | Design

In this section we can select PCP pump from the drop down menu (Pumps entered
in the database will be available to select).

Once the pump is selected PROSPER will calculate the rotational speed required,
power required, etc.

Click Done | Done

This will automatically transfer the PCP design into the System | Progressive Cavity
Pump section

PCP lifted well Calculation System

16.1.14.5
Calculation System

Using the PCP designed we can use PROSPER to perform some Calculation System
in order to analyze the well performance.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 671

From the main menu in PROSPER click on Calculation | System (Ipr+Vlp) | 3

Variables.

Enter a well head pressure of 100 psig, water cut of 30% and click Continue.

In the sensitivity variable section select for variable 1 the "Pump speed" and enter
values ranging from 100 to 200 rpm as shown in the next screen shot:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 672 PROSPER

Click Continue | Calculate

The solution of the system can be check on the right hand side and scrolling up and
down by clicking on the little arrows next to the Pump Speed (top right hand side) the
different solutions can be seen.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 673

Click Plot

In the case of a PCP well the solution node is located at the discharge of the pump.
Therefore to inspect the solution of the system we should at the intersection of the
VLP and Pump discharge pressure.

In this plot we can see that in order to achieve the target liquid rate the pump speed
should be close to 170 rpm.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 674 PROSPER

Save the file as PCP well.OUT.

16.1.15Example 15 - Condensate Black Oil Model Validation
Condensate black oil models in PROSPER should never be matched using the
previously described matching method for oils. This is because the black oil model
for condensate in PROSPER uses a mathematical model and matching could throw
the model out of bounds.

Black oil modelling is a technique that works back from values of density and GOR
measured at known surface conditions to predict properties at other points in the
system and the technique is fast and accurate when applicable. The black oil
condensate model is preferential to use as the computational time is significantly
faster than using an EOS PVT approach. The matched EOS can be used to validate
the black oil condensate model.

The use of Volume Shift as an EOS match parameter will inevitably cause mass
balance errors in the EOS if used for multiple temperature and pressures (like a
pressure gradient calculation) and will adversely impact the results in PROSPER.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 675

Objectives
16.1.15.1

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/condvalid.out

The main objectives of this example are to show:

How to use a gradient calculation to compare pressure loss using different
PVT methods
How to compare a PROSPER matched EOS gradient traverse calculation
result to validate using the black oil gas condensate model

Model Set Up
16.1.15.2

Begin by opening the above PROSPER file and from the main menu select PVT |
Input Data to access the PVT section or double click in the PVT window section of
the main PROSPER interface.

A matched EOS can be passed to PROSPER via the ImportPRP button, from PVTP
for example.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 676 PROSPER

PROSPER will use the EOS data to generate condensate black oil model data.
Select Generate to activate the EOS Calculation Range dialogue:

The temperature corresponds to the reservoir temperature and the pressure values
range from initial reservoir to depleted reservoir conditions.

Select Calculate | Calculate to generate the black oil properties:

The saturation pressure shown in the figure above is the dew point pressure
required for the black oil model.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 677

Select OK | OK | Properties to generate the black oil fluid properties from the EOS
flashed through the separator stages down to standard conditions. At this point we
have all the properties to build a black oil fluid model:

Gradient Traverse Calculation using the EOS

16.1.15.3
Prior to using the black oil condensate model is it important to see how the PVT
using the EOS model impacts pressure losses in the tubing. A gradient calculation
will be done so solution points can be used from the EOS gradient calculation to
review the applicability of the black oil model pressure loss predictions.

From the main PROSPER menu select Calculation | Gradient Traverse and input
the values as shown below.

No sensitivity variables will be used in the calculation and the Petroleum Experts 4
mechanistic model will be used.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 678 PROSPER

Select Continue | Continue | Calculate

Record a fewcalculated measured depth vs. pressure values from the gradient
traverse calculated tabular data:

Enter them in the gradient traverse plot Test Data section (Figure A15-6) found on
the gradient plot main menu bar

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 679

The gradient traverse plot will now look like the following:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 680 PROSPER

Black Oil Model Validation

16.1.15.4

From the Options menu select the black oil fluid model options then enter the
previously calculated black oil data in the PVT section.
Repeat the gradient calculation and plot the data to see if the EOS test points are
still valid using the gas condensate black oil model:

Zooming in to investigate the off-set gradient point shows that the error is
approximately 60 psig (1.2 % difference) indicating that for this case the black-oil
condensate model is valid with the EOS gradient predictions.

Save the file as Condvalid.OUT.

16.1.16Example 16 - Sucker rod pump

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/Sucker Rod Example.out

Statement of the problem:

Given the data listed below, it is intended to install a sucker rod pump in the well
SRP#1.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 681

The aim is to produce at least 200 stb of liquid per day with the pump installation.
You are supposed to design a Sucker Rod Pumping system for the well and assess
the impact of the pump speed on the well performance.

PVT Data

Solution GOR: 160 scf/stb

Oil Gravity: 25 API
Specific gas gravity: 0.68 (Air =1)
Water salinity: 80000 ppm
Pb at 130 degF: 1300 psig
Bo @ Pb and 130 degF: 1.06 rb/sb
0 @ Pb and 130 degF: 8.87 cp

System equipment Data

Deviation Survey

Measured Depth in ft True Vertical Depth in ft

0 0
3500 3500

Down hole Equipment

Type Measure Tubing Tubing Tubing Tubing Casing Casing

d Depth ID Inside OD Inside ID Inside
Roughnes Roughnes Roughnes
s s s
Ft inches inches inches inches inches inches
Xmas 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Tubing 3500 2.441 0.0012 2.625 0.0012 6.3 0.0012

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 682 PROSPER

Geothermal Gradient

Measured Depth in ft Static Ambient Temperature

0 60
3500 130

Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient: 8 Btu/h/ft2/F

Inflow Performance Data

Reservoir model: PI Entry

Reservoir pressure: 1500 psig
Reservoir Temperature: 130 degF
Water Cut: 80 %
Total GOR: 160 scf/stb
Compaction Permeability model: NO
Relative Permeability: NO
Productivity Index: 0.25 stb/d/psi

Pumping Unit Data

Pump Speed: 8 strokes per minute

Rod type: Steel rod
Proposed Pumping Unit: Lufkin C-320-305-100 LC044
Rod Type: Steel Rods
Rod Number: ROD54/07
Rod Grade: D
Pump Intake Pressure (Entered Value): 600 psig
Pump Depth: 3500 ft
Pumping Unit: Conventional Clockwise
Anchored Tubing: Yes
MidPoint Perforation Depth: 3500 ft

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 683

Pump Depth: 3500 ft

Pump Volumetric Efficiency: 80%
Pump Unit Efficiency: 75%
Pump Diameter 2 inches
Surface Stroke length: 90 inches
Bottom hole Temperature: 130 degF
Well Head Flowing Temperature: 90 degF
Well head Pressure: 100 psig
Gas Anchor Efficiency: 80%

Step-by-step approach

Step 1: Select |Options|Options and make the following choices:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 684 PROSPER

Note that the Sucker Rod Pump option has been selected as Artificial lift method.
Select |Done to proceed to the next step.

Step 2: Select |PVT|Input Data and make the following entries:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 685

Select |Match Data to continue the model set-up:

Step 3: You enter the PVT Match data as below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 686 PROSPER

Step 4: You select |Done|Regression and Match All and this is what you would get:

Now you select |Done|Done and save the file to preserve all changes made so far.

Step 5: You select |System|Equipment|All|Edit and this takes to the deviation survey

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 687

screen:

You select |Done and |Cancel to move to the down hole equipment description
screen. Here the following entries need to be made:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 688 PROSPER

Select |Done to proceed to the next step.

Step 6: You enter the geothermal gradient and the overall heat transfer coefficient
as below:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 689

Select |Done|Done|Summary|Draw Downhole and this is what can be seen:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 690 PROSPER

Select |Main|File and |Save to secure all changes made so far.

Step 7: To enter the Inflow Performance Data, select |System|Inflow Performance

and then make the following entries

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 691

Note that the default Inflow model is PI Entry. It is the first choice in the list of IPR
model. This is why there is no need to make a selection for the reservoir model
here.
To complete the IPR data entry, select |Input Data and enter the well productivity
index of 0.25 stb/d/psi:

To complete select |Calculate and this is what can be see as IPR:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 692 PROSPER

Please select ||Main and save the file again.

Step 8: To proceed with the pump design, select |Design|Sucker Rod Pump an
enter the following input data:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 693

Step 9: To proceed with the design, select |Calculate and the program computes
and displays the rod load plot, the torque plot and the rod speed as below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 694 PROSPER

Note that one can here sensitize on different rods. For this, select |Rod
Sensitity|Calculate and this is what can be seen:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 695

Now select |Done|Done and save the file to secure the changes made so far.

Step 10: Entering the gas anchor efficiency.

For this select |System|Sucker Rod Pumps and make the following changes:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 696 PROSPER

Gas Anchor Method: Entered

Efficiency: 0.7 (fraction)

You select |Done and |File|Save |Yes to secure all changes made so far.

Step 11: Running sensitivity with a sucker rod pumping well.

You select |Calculation|System(3 Variables) and make the following entries:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 697

You select | Continue, select the desired variable (here, Pumping Speeed) and then
enter the desired values of 6 and 8 spm as below

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 698 PROSPER

You proceed by selecting |Continue|Calculate|OK|Plot and this is what can be seen:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 699

These examples shows that the installed pump can produce 260 stb/d at a speed of
8 spm.
The rate would be reduced to 225 stb/d if the pumping speed is decreased to 6
spm.

This completes this tutorial.

16.1.17Example 17 - Analysis of a gas lifted well using VLP/IPR matching
and QuickLook
File: ~/samples/PROSPER/Gasliftedwell_Initial.out

This example consist of a gas lifted well, several well test that has been carried out
through time are available.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 700 PROSPER

The objectives of this example are:

Analyze different well test using the VLP/IPR matching section and the Quicklook
section.
Identify and troubleshoot inconsistencies between the model and the
assumptions/data.
Update the model accordingly

Gas lift well analysis Model

16.1.17.1
Model Description

From the main menu, click File New to reinitialize the program input and output files.
Open the file Gasliftedwell.out located in the Sample folder.

Let's perform a quick review of the model to familiarize ourselves with this specific
system.
This is a an horizontal well assisted with gas lift, let's inspect the different sections of
the model:

PVT
The PVT is described using black oil correlations (Glaso and Beal) and there is no
match data available.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 701

We can use the PVT calculator to estimate the bubble point pressure at the reservoir
temperature, in this case the bubble point pressure is 2241psig.

System Equipment section

- Deviation Survey

The deviation survey represents an horizontal well.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 702 PROSPER

- Downhole Equipment description

The downhole equipment consist of tubing of 3.92 in ID and some restrictions as can
be seen in the next diagram.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 703

- System | Gas lift Data

In this section the operating valve is located at 7763 ft and it is modeled as fixed
depth of injection.
This well has also unloading valves located at 2520 ft, 3562 ft, 5672 ft which during
normal operation should remain close and the gas lift should be injected through
deepest operating valve.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 704 PROSPER

IPR
The IPR is modeled using the Horizontal well Dp friction loss in wellbore model with
an horizontal well length of 2870 ft.
The initial reservoir pressure was 2498 psig in January 2001 and it has been
declining since then.

Gas lift well analysis VLP/IPR matching

16.1.17.2
Matching VLP/IPR quality check section

From the main menu click under Matching | Matching | VLP/IPR (Quality Check).

In this section 4 well test were entered for different periods since January 2001 to
November 2002.

There is a column to enter the reservoir pressure and we can see that is declining
from the initial value 2498 psig to 2305 psig for the last well test.

The assumed injection depth for all cases is 7763 ft.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 705

To analyze the well test we will use a the Correlation comparison and Quicklook
options.

Analyzing Test point #1

- Correlation Comparison

Select the first well test by clicking on the row number 1 (left hand side).

Click on Correlation Comparison

In this section 3 multiphase flow correlation are selected:

- Fancher Brown (No slip correlation that will calculate the minimum pressure drop)
- Duns Ros Modified (This correlation will over-predict the pressure drops in an oil

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 706 PROSPER

wells if the flow regime is slug flow).

The above mentioned correlations are used as Quality Check/Quality control. If the
measured test point lies outside of the above correlations that indicates some
inconsistency in the data.

The 3rd correlation selected is Petroleum Experts 2 that was given good results for
the wells in this field.

Clicking on Calculate | Plot will display the gradients (Pressure vs depth) for the
selected well test for the 3 correlations. From this plot we can see that the test point
(blue square) lies between the quality check correlations (green and red curve) and it
is quite close to blue curve (Petroleum Experts 2 correlation).

Click Finish | Done | Done to return to the VLP/IPR matching section.

- QuickLook

Another way of analyzing the test point is by using the QuickLook section.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 707

Select the test point #1 click on QuickLook Calculate | Calculate | Plot

The Quicklook consist of two gradients, the green curve correspond to the upward
gradient which start at the flowing bottom hole pressure which is derive from the IPR
section using the well test rate.

The blue curve is a downward gradient which starts at the well head pressure of the
well test. If all the assumptions in the model and data entered are correct these two
gradients should be overlaying one on the top of each other. If there is an
inconsistency in the model then the gradients will be separated.

In this case the two gradient are on the top of each other and the data seems to be
consistent, square symbol represents the gauge pressure which is also consistent
with the gradients.

The same procedure can be apply to analyze well test #2.

Analyzing Test point #3:

Selecting test point #3 and performing a correlation comparison we can see that the
test point lies between the Quality Check correlations.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 708 PROSPER

However the test point is deviating from the correlation that was giving good result in
the previous test points.

Analyzing test point number 3 in the QuickLook section we can see that Upward
gradient and Downward gradient are not overlaying. That indicates an inconsistency
in the data or in the assumptions of the model.

The square (Gauge pressure) is over the green curve (upward gradient) therefore
something should be corrected that can modify the blue curve (downward gradient).

To make the downward (blue curve) gradient to shift to the right to meet the upward
gradient (green curve) the modification should cause a higher pressure drop.

There are lot of variables that affect the pressure drop, let's assume that the PVT,
down-hole equipment description and measured values from the well test are
correct.

We can think that the we are really injecting a lower amount of gas lift, this will
increase the production fluid density causing a higher pressure drop in the well which
can displace the downward gradient to the right. Another possibility is that we are
actually injecting higher up in the well in one of the unloading valves. Let's analyze

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 709

this last option.

In the QuickLook section we can modified the assumed Injection depth to the last
unloading valve. (Tip: clicking on Valves button will display the depths of all the
unloading Valves).

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 710 PROSPER

Re-Calculate to refresh the results and Plot.

We can see that with the assumption of injecting the gas at 5672 ft rather than 7763
ft the Quicklook match.

The QuickLook tool can help us to diagnoses if the well have a problem and we can
try to identify the source of the problem.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 711

Note: The casing pressure is not transferred, therefore the correspondent value
should be entered by hand if necessary. (In this example the Casing pressure is left
constant).

In the VLP/IPR section the gas lift gas injection depth for test point #3 should be
updated as shown in the next screen shot.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 712 PROSPER

Performing a correlation comparison with the corrected gas lift injection depth the
test point lies over the Petroleum Experts 2 multiphase flow correlation.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 713

Another well test is carried out at the end of the month (Well test #4) to confirm the
production loss due to injecting gas lift gas higher up in the well.

Following the same procedure we can check that for Test point#4 the gas lift gas
injection depth is also 5672 ft (last unloading valve) rather than the firstly assumed
value 7763 ft (operating injection depth).

Gas lift well analysis Calculation System

16.1.17.3
Calculation System

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 714 PROSPER

Using the VLP/IPR matching menu and performing Correlation comparisons and
Quicklook analysis we have determine that in the last two test points the gas lift gas
was being injected in the last unloading valve located at 5672 ft instead of injecting
in the operating valve located at 7763 ft.

Now we have corrected our mathematical model by modifying the gas lift injection
depth to the "true injection depth" and it is representing the reality that we have in
the field.

We the updated model it could be useful to know how much oil we could increase if
we restore the situation with a slick line operation.

From the main menu let's click on Calculation | System | 3 variables

We can enter operating conditions similar to the last test point.

In the sensitivity section we can enter two variables:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 715

- Gas lift gas injection rate with a value similar to the last test point

- Injection depth with values of 5672 ft (last unloading valve) and 7763 ft (operating
valve).

From the results we can see that 330 stb/day can be increase if the gas lift is
injected at the deepest operating valve instead of injecting at the unloading valve.
Based on this analysis this well can be included in the "intervention list" for slick line
operations.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 716 PROSPER

Another calculation that we might perform is sensitivity analysis to the gas lift gas
injection rate (we can add a range of gas lift injected as shown in the next screen
shot). This can determine the optimum gas lift gas injection rate for the well for a fix
well head pressure.

In the results section there is a button called "Sensitivity"

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 717

In this plot we can see the Liquid rate vs the gas lift injected for two curves (Injecting
at 7763ft and injecting at 5672 ft).

This can determine the optimum gas injection rate and the difference between
injecting in the operating point or injecting in the last unloading valve.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 718 PROSPER

This completes this tutorial, the file can be saved as Gasliftedwell_final.OUT.

16.2 B - References
16.2.1 PVT Calculations

1 Sutton, R.P. 'Evaluation of Empirically Derived PVT SPE Reservoir Engineering,

& Farshad, Properties for Gulf of Mexico,' (Used for Glaso, (Feb. 1990), 79-86.
F.F. Lasater, Standing & Vazquez-Beggs)
2 Beal, C. 'The Viscosity of Air, Water, Natural Gas, Crude Trans., AIME (1946) 165,
Oil and its Associated Gases at Oil Field 94-98.
Temperatures and Pressures,'
3 Beggs, H.D. 'Estimating the Viscosity of Crude Oil Systems,' JPT (Sept. 1975),

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 719

& Robinson, 1140-1144.

J.R.
4 Carr, N.L., et 'Viscosity of Hydrocarbon Gases Under Trans., AIME (1954),
al Pressure,' 264-268.
5 Eilerts et al 'Phase Relations of Gas Condensate Fluids,' Monograph 10, U.S. Bureau
of Mines, Washington D.C.
(1957).
6 Brinkman, 'Equilibrium Ratios for Reservoir Studies', SPE (Nov. 1959), SPE
F.H. & reprint series No. 15,
Sicking, J.N. 240-246.
7 Katz, D. & 'Retrograde Condensation', Ind. Eng. Chem. (June,
Kurata, F. 1940) 32, No. 6, 817-827.
8 Katz, D., 'Surface Tension of Crude Oils Containing Trans., AIME (1943), 1624,
Monroe, R. & Dissolved Gases,' 285-294.
Trainer, R.
9 Lee, et al 'The Viscosity of Natural Gases' Trans., AIME (1966),
997-1002.
10 Lohrenz et al 'Calculating Viscosities of Reservoir Fluids From JPT (Oct. 1964), 1171-1176.
Their Compositions'
11 Coats, K.H. 'An Equation of State Compositional Model' SPE 8284 SPE ATCE, Las
Vegas, Nevada, Sept.
23-26, 1979.
12 Nghiem, L.X., 'Compositional Modelling with an Equation of SPE 9306 SPE ATCE,
Fong, D.K. & State' Dallas, Texas, Sept. 21-24,
Aziz, K. 1980.
13 Winkler, H.W. 'Algorithm for More Accurately Predicting SPE 18871 SPE POS,
& Eads, P.T. Nitrogen-Charged Gas-Lift Valve Operation at Oklahoma City, March
High Pressures and Temperatures' 13-14, 1988.
14 Peng, D.-Y. 'A New Two-Constant Equation of State' I.&E.C. Fundamentals
and (1976) 15, No.1, 59-64.
Robinson,
D.B.
15 Bradley et al 'Effect Of Pressure On The Viscosity Of Water' Petroleum Engineering
Handbook. SPE 1987
16 Bukacek, 'Equilibrium Moisture Content Of Natural Gases' Research Bulletin Vol 8,
Richard F. Institute of Gas Technology,
Chicago USA, 1955.
17 Muhammad "PVT Correlations for Middle East Crude Oils" JPT (May 1988), 650-666
All
Al-Marhoun
18 E. O. "An Improved Temperature-Viscosity Journal of Petroleum
Egbogah & J. Correlation For Crude Oil Systems" Science and Engineering, 5,
T. Ng (1990), 197-200

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 720 PROSPER

16.2.1.1CO2 Injection
The best approach to model CO2 Injection is to use fluid type "Retrograde Condensate" and not "Dry
And Wet Gas". The reason behind this is that the "Dry And Wet Gas" models considers the fluid as a
single phase throughout the entire system and modifies the gas properties to account for the
condensate. The "Retrograde Condensate" model assumes multiphase flow modelling allowing for gas
and/or liquid phases to be present anywhere in the system (depending on the prevailing pressure and
temperature).

N.B. In CO2 Injection, depending on the conditions of pressure and temperature, it is possible to have
phase changes somewhere in the system (Gas-.Liquid->Gas)

The Gray (and Modified Gray) correlation uses its own internal PVT calculator that overrides the
Prosper-calculated pvt properties and therefore this should not be used to model CO2 Injection.

16.2.1.2PVT Separator Pressure

The dry-wet gas model in PROSPER assumes that the condensate drops out at the separator
assuming single phase (gas) in the tubing. (Besides any possible water produced which will give
two-phase flow).

The objective is to obtain the properties of the Well stream gas from the separated gas, tank vented
gas and condensate. (Please see next diagram).

The ideal way to do this is to perform a compositional analysis where the composition of the gas
separated, condensate and the gas vented are known. Then these fluids are recombined to get the
well stream composition and properties.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 721

However most of time the compositions are unknown, and also the quantity and gas specific gravity of
the stock tank gas vented are often not measured.

In those cases, correlations can be used to calculate the gas specific gravity and the GE (Gas
equivalent) or VEQ (volume equivalent).

The VEQ or GE represents the volume of gas vented in the tank plus the volume in scf that would be
occupied by a barrel of stock-tank liquid if it were gas.

PROSPER is using a correlation that depends on the separator pressure to calculate the GE.

The GE is added to the gas rate and used to calculate the pressure losses in the tubing using the
energy balance equation.

In fact from the diagram above we can see the separator pressure dependency, for instance if the
separator pressure is 0 psig, the tank vented gas will be zero, if the separator pressure is higher then
more gas will pass in solution with the liquid towards the tank. So the separator pressure has an
impact on GE.

Other correlations of GE available in the literature that depends on the separator pressure can be
found in the following references: An Improved method for the determination of the Reservoir gas
specific gravity for retrograde gases Gold et.al., also the in the book The properties of Petroleum
Fluids W. McCain (Chapter 7: Properties of Wet Gases) explains and show some these correlations
available.

16.2.2 IPR Calculations

1 Dietz 'Determination of Average Reservoir Trans., AIME.(1965).

Pressure From Build Up Surveys,'
2 Fetkovich M.J. 'The Isochronal Testing of Oil Wells,' SPE 4529 SPE ATCE, Las
Vegas, Sept. 30-Oct. 3.
3 Forcheimer et al Zeits V. Dutching, (1901), 45,
1782-1786.
4 Goode P.A. & 'Inflow Performance of Horizontal Wells,' SPE Reservoir Engineering
Kuchuk F.J. (Aug. 1991) 6, No. 3, 319-323.

5 Jones L.G., 'Use of Short Term Multiple Rate Flow SPE 6133 SPE ATCE, New
Blount, E.M. et al Tests to Predict Performance of Wells Orleans, Oct. 3-6.
Having Turbulence,'
6 Vogel J.V. 'Inflow Performance Relationships for JPT (Jan. 1968), 83-92.
Solution Gas Drive Wells,'
7 Houz, O.P., 'Infinite Conductivity Vertical Fracture in a SPE 12778 SPE Regional
Horne, R. & Reservoir with Double Porosity Behaviour' Meeting, Long Beach,
Ramey, H.J. Jr. California, April 11-13, 1984.
8 Karakas, M. & 'Semi-Analytical Productivity Models for SPE 18271 SPE ATCE,
Tariq, S. Perforated Completion' Houston, Texas, Oct. 2-5,
1988.
9 Dikken, B.J. 'Pressure Drop in Horizontal Wells and its Journal of Petroleum
Effect on Their Production Performance' Technology, November, 1990;
Trans., AIME, 289.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 722 PROSPER

10 Chaperon, I. 'Theoretical Study of Coning Towards SPE 15377 SPE ATCE, New
Horizontal and Vertical Wells in Orleans, Oct. 5-8.
Anisotropic Formations'
11 Goode, P.A. & 'Inflow Performance of Partially Open SPE 19341 1989 SPE Eastern
Wilkinson, D.J. Horizontal Wells' Region Meeting, Morgantown,
WV, Oct. 24-27. Also JPT,
August 1991, pp 983-985.
12 Papazatacos, P., 'Cone Breakthrough Time for Horizontal SPE 19822 SPE ATCE, San
Herring, T.R., Wells' Antonio, Texas, Oct. 8-11.
Martinsen, R. &
Skjaeveland, S.M.
13 Cinco-Ley, H., 'Transient Pressure Behaviour For a Well SPE 6014 SPE ATCE, New
Samanieogo, F. & With a Finite-Conductivity vertical Orleans, Louisiana, Oct 3-6
Dominguez, N. Fracture ' 1976
14 Mavor, M.J. & 'Transient Pressure Behaviour of SPE 7977 California Regional
Cinco Ley, H Naturally Fractured Reservoirs' Meeting SPE, Ventura,
California, April 1979
15 Wong, D., 'Application of the Pressure Derivative SPE 13056 SPE ATCE,
Harrington, A. & Function in th Pressure Transient testing Houston, Texas, Sept. 16-19,
Cinco Ley, H of Fractured Wells' 1984
16 Warren, J.E. & 'The behaviour of Naturally Fractured SPE 426, SPEJ (Spet 1963),
Root, P.J. Reservoirs' 245-255
17 Hegre, T.T. & 'Productivity of Multifractured Horizontal SPE 28845 SPE European
Larsen, L. Wells' Petroleum Conference,
London, UK, October 1994
18 Urbanczyk, C.H, & 'Optimization of Well Rates under Gas SPE Advanced Technology
Wattenbarger, Coning Conditions.' Series, Vol. 2, No. 2, April
R.A 1994.
19 Larsen, L. 'Productivity Evaluations of Wells in Long
Rectangular Drainage Areas.'
20 H. Cinco, F. G. 'Unsteady-State Pressure Distribution SPE 5131
Miller, H. J. Ramey, Created by A Directionally Drilled Well'
Jr.

16.2.3 Multiphase Flow Calculations

1. Anand, et al, Predicting Thermal Conductivities of Formations from Other Known
Properties, JPT (Oct. 1980).

2. Ashford, F.E, and Pierce, P.E.: The Determination of Multiphase Pressure Drops
and Flow Capacities in Downhole Safety Valves (Storm Chokes), paper SPE 5161
presented at the 1974 SPE Annual Fall Meeting, Houston Oct. 6-9.

3. Beggs, H.D. and Brill, J.P.: A Study of Two Phase Flow in Inclined Pipe, JPT (May
1973), 606-617.

4. Churchill-Chu, Correlating Equations for Laminar and Turbulent Free Convection

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 723

from a Horizontal Cylinder, International Journal Heat Mass Transfer (1975) 18,
1049-1053.

5. Fancher, and Brown, G.G.: Prediction of Pressure Gradients for Multiphase Flow in
Tubing, SPE Journal (Mar. 1963), 59-64.

6. Fortunati, Two Phase Flow Through Well-head Chokes, paper SPE 3742
presented at 1972 SPE European Spring Meeting, Amsterdam, May 17-18.

7. Hagedorn, A.R. and Brown, K.E.: Experimental Study of Pressure Gradients

Occurring During Continuous Two-Phase Flow in Small-Diameter Vertical Conduits,
JPT (Apr. 1965), 475-484.

8. Mandhane et al, A Flow Pattern Map for Gas-liquid Flow in Horizontal Pipes,
International Journal Multiphase Flow, 1, 537-541.

9. Moody, Friction Factor for Pipe Flow, Trans., AIME (1944), 66, 671-675.

10. Mukherjee, H. and Brill, J.P.: Liquid Holdup Correlations for Inclined Two-Phase
Flow, JPT (May 1983), 1003-1008.

11. Oranje, Condensate Behaviour in Gas Pipeline is Predictable, Oil and Gas Journal
(July 1973), 39-43.

12. Orkiszewski, Predicting Two Phase Pressure Drop in Vertical Pipes, JPT (June
1967), 829-833.

13. Duns, H. Jr and Ros, N.C.J.: Vertical Flow of Gas and Liquid Mixtures in Wells,
Proc., Sixth World Petroleum Congress, Frankfurt (1963) 451.

14. Tansev, E. Startzman, R.A. and Cooper, A.M.: Predicting Pressure Loss and Heat
Transfer in Geothermal Wellbores, paper SPE 5584 presented at the 1975 SPE
Annual Fall Meeting, Dallas, Sept. 28-Oct. 1.

15. Gould, T.L, Tek, M.R. and Katz, D.L.: Two-Phase Flow Through Vertical, Inclined,
or Curved Pipe, JPT, August, 1974, 915-925.

16.2.4 Temperature Calculations

1 Chiu, K. and 'Modeling of Wellbore Heat Losses in SPE 22870 1991 SPE Annual Fall
Thakur, S.C. Directional Wells Under Changing Meeting, Dallas, Oct. 9-9. pp 517 -
Injection Conditions,' 528.
2 Hasan, A.R. 'Heat Transfer During Two-Phase Flow SPE 22866 1991 SPE Annual Fall
and Kabir, in Wellbores: Part I - Formation Meeting, Dallas, Oct. 9-9. pp 469 -
C.S. Temperature,' 478.
3 Hasan, A.R. 'Heat Transfer During Two-Phase Flow SPE 22948 1991 SPE Annual Fall
and Kabir, in Wellbores: Part II - Wellbore Fluid Meeting, Dallas, Oct. 9-9. pp 695 -
C.S. Temperature,' 708.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 724 PROSPER

4 Carslaw, H.S. 'Conduction of Heat in Solids,' Oxford Science Publications, Oxford,

and Jaeger, U.K., 1959.
J.C.

16.2.5 Artificial Lift Design

1 Gibbs 'Predicting the Behavior of SPE 588 SPE Rocky Mountain Regional
S.G. Sucker-Rod Pumping Systems' Meeting, May 27-28, 1963, in Denver, Colorado,
769-788.
2 Schmidt 'System Analysis for Sucker-Rod SPE 15426 SPE ATCE, October 5-8, 1986, in
Z., Doty Pumping' New Orleans, Louisiana, 125-130.
D.R.
3 Gibbs 'Computer Diagnosis of SPE 1165 SPE Annual Fall Meeting, October
S.G., Down-Hole Conditions in Sucker 3-6, 1965, in Denver, Colorado, 91-98.
Neely Rod Pumping Wells'
A.B.
4 Patton 'A Computer Technique for SPE 1986 SPE 38th California Regional
L.D. Analyzing Pumping Well Meeting, October 26-27, 1967, in Los Angeles,
Performance' California, 243-249.
5 Jennings 'Design of Sucker-Rod Pump SPE 20152 Petroleum Technology in the Second
J.W. Systems' Century, October 16-19, 1989, in Socorro, New
Mexico, 77-87.
6 Gibbs 'A Review of Methods for Design SPE 9980, December 1982, 2931-2942.
S.G. and Analysis of Rod Pumping
Installations'

16.3 C - Equations
16.3.1 Black Oil Model for Condensate

PSEP
TSEP

ggtot TANK

g gsep g gtnk
GOR sep GOR tnk

Total GOR is the total of separator and tank GOR.

Rtot = Rsep + Rtnk

Feed gas gravity (

g gtot ) is the weighted average of separator and tank gas gravities.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 725

(g g sep Rsep + g g tnk Rtnk )

g g tot =
Rtot

16.3.1.1Mass Balance Calculations

Based on the principles of mass balance the following equations can be derived.

Known Parameters:

Produced Gas Gravity ggt

Condensate specific gravity c
The condensate to gas ratio CGR STB/SCF
Air Mol. Wt. 28.966 lb/lb.mol
Water density 62.43 lb/cu.ft
Air density @ SC 0.0764 lb/Scf
Mol.wt of condensate Mc lb/lb.mol

Basis of calculations : 1 SCF of Produced gas.

The gas gravity of the mixture g can be evaluated using the following equation

Total inlet mass calculation:

Mass of Produced gas = Vol of gas @SC x Density of gas @SC

= Vol of gas @SC x Gas gravity x Density of air @SC

Mass of Condensate = Vol of Cond @SC x Density of Cond. @SC

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 726 PROSPER

= Vol of Cond.@SC x sp.gravity x Density of water @SC

Thus, Total mixture mass =Mass of Produced gas + Mass of

Condensate

Total inlet moles calculation:

Moles of Produced gas = Mass of gas/ Mol.Wt.of gas

= Mass of gas / Gas gravity x Mol.Wt. air

Moles of Cond. = Mass of Cond./ Mol.Wt.of Cond

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 727

Thus, total mixture moles = Moles of Produced gas + Moles of

Condensate

Thus the gas gravity of the inlet mixture is

This expression thus gives, the average gas gravity of a mixture, which
has a condensate to gas ratio of CGR STB/SCF, with the gas having a
gas gravity of ggt and the condensate having a specific gravity of c and
molecular weight of Mc.
This also can be used to work out the condensate to gas ratio of a
mixture gas if the gas gravity is known as shown in the following
equation.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 728 PROSPER

16.3.1.2Using the mass balance results to define Condensate Model

Based on this formulation based on the separator gas gravity and the average total
gas gravity, the effective CGR vaporised in separator gas is estimated as follows

g g sep - g g tot
CGR sep =
4588 .3 g c - 132904 g g sep g c /M c

Separator liquid/gas ratio ( ) referred to separator liquid.

Also assuming that the condensate is above dew point, the initial CGR under
reservoir conditions is,
1
CGR res =
Rsep + Rtnk

Thus, the gas gravity under reservoir conditions can be found as

g g tot + 4588 .3 g c CGR res
g g res =
1 + 132904 g c CGR res / M c

Thus, we can have two independent equations, which are

At Reservoir conditions:
g g t + 4588 g csc CGR res
g g res =
1 + 132904 g csc CGR res / M c

At Separator Conditions:
g g sep - g g tot
CGR sep =
4588 .3 g csc - 132904 g g sep g csc /M c

NOTE:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 729

ggt > ggsep CGRsep negative

At and above Dew Point:

1
CGR res =
Rsep + Rtnk
The CGR at pressures lower than dew point is estimated by a second degree
polynomial as shown
2
P f
CGR = CGR + (CGR - CGR min ) -
min res P 1 - f
dewpoint

where
Pmin being the maximum liquid dropout pressure and a function of the dewpoint
pressure.
i.e.
Pmin = F (Pdewpoint )
Pdew is an input to the model.
The vaporised CGR curve as a function of pressure looks as below:

comp

f
P 1
Pdew

f is from maximum liquid dropout or mix condensate in solution.

CGR = CGR min + (CGR res - CGR min )

*
2
P
- f
P
dewpo int
1- f

16.3.1.3Estimation of CGRmin

First calculate condensate mole fraction:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 730 PROSPER

7.08
f = 0.15 + + 1.45 * % Condensate
TRES - 161
(From Eilerts et al)
Bg
CGR min = CGR res - Lmax
561 .5 Bo

Where
Lmax is the maximum liquid dropout percentage.

Thus we need to estimate Bo and Bg to find CGRmin from the following equation

=
CGR res - Lmax B g
CGR min
561 .5 Bo

16.3.2 Multiphase Pseudo Pressure

k P
q o = 2prh o *
m o r
k g P
q g = 2prh *
m
g r
k P
q w = 2prh w *
w r
m
Total Mass Flow Rate:
k kg k P
m r = 2prh r o o + r g + rw w
mo mg mw r

Change of Mass Flow Rate Across Annulus:

m r
ko kg k P

= 2ph r r o + rg + rw w
r r m m m r

o g w ......................1

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 731

Change in Mass Flow Rate = Change in Density / Mass accumulation in Annulus

m r r
= 2prh f
r t ..............................................................2
r = So ro + S g r g + S w r w

ko kg k P
r
r r o + rg + rw w = rf
r mo mg mw r
t
1 and 2 .....................3

By Definition:

Equation 3 becomes:

ro rg r P _
P
r k o + kg + kw w = rf r c
r mo mg
m w r t

To Linearise this Equation:
p
ko rg r
m( p ) = r o
mo
+ kg
mg
+ k w w P
m w
0
p
k o k g mo k m
= m r + r g + w o r w P
o k m ko m w
0 o o g
p
ko q q
= r o + g r g + w r w P
0
mo qo qo
p
ko GOR out B g WOR out Bw
= r o + rg + r w P
0
mo Bo Bo
Combining we get:
m( p ) rf r c m o m( p )
r ko = *
r r F t

Where
GOR out Bg WOR out Bw
F = ro + rg + rw
Bo Bo

2 m( p ) 1 m( p ) _
m m( p )
2
+ =fc o
r r r Bo t

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 732 PROSPER

So ro + S g r g + S w r w
C = c
F
For Condensates:
2 m( p ) 1 m( p ) m g m( p )
+ = fc
r 2 r r kg t
So ro + S g rg + S w r w
C=c
Fg
Bo CGR out B WGR
Fg = ro + r g + w rw
Bg Bg

16.3.3 Temperature Models

16.3.3.1Rough Approximation Temperature Model

The ambient temperature at point x is:

which implies that the rate of change of temperature with depth

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 733

The fluid temperature at point x is then found from

Where:
Ta1 = Ambient temperature at L1
T1 = Fluid temperature at entry
T(x) = Fluid temperature at current location
q = Deviation angle
= Fluid mass flow rate

Cp = Specific heat capacity

U = Overall heat transfer coefficient referred to pipe inside diameter
D = Pipe inside diameter
G = Geothermal gradient
W = Product of phase mass flow rates and heat capacities o Cpo + w C
pw + gCpg

16.3.3.1.1 Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient

This value is used to calculate heat loss in surface or downhole pipe work This should not be confused
with the thermal conductivity for a particular type of pipe. The overall heat transfer coefficient accounts
for the heat flow through the pipe, annulus (in a well) and insulation (if present) to the surroundings.
Heat transfer by forced and free convection, conduction and radiation must all be accounted for in the
value of the overall heat transfer coefficient. Insulated buried flowlines can have heat transfer
coefficients as low as 0.1 (BTU/hr/F/ft2) whereas uninsulated, unburied flowlines can be higher than
100. Typical values for individual flowlines are :-
1.0 Buried Carbon Steel Flowlines
16.0 Unburied Carbon Steel Flowlines
18.0 Carbon Steel Risers in Water
5.6 Carbon Steel Risers in Air
2.8 Flexible Pipe in Water
The overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) used to determine the heat exchange in the Surface
Equipment (Xmas Tree to Manifold) is entered in the Surface Equipment section of the Equipment
Data input area.

The overall heat transfer coefficient entered in the Geothermal Gradient section is the one used to

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 734 PROSPER

determine the heat exchange in the Downhole Equipment (Xmas Tree downward).

The U values entered in the two sections mentioned above will be used throughout the model when
running a calculation like System, Gradient, VLP calculation, or also the VLP matching itself.

During the VLP/IPR matching process the U value can be tuned in order to match the observed
temperature profile (using the feature Estimate U value in the VLP/IPR matching screen).

As rule of thumb we suggest to use as starting values of U the following:

- In the case of dry gas fluid: 1-3 BTU/(hrft2F)

- In the case of retrograde condensate fluid: 5-7 BTU/(hrft2F)

- In the case of oil fluid: 8-9 BTU/(hrft2F)

The values of the heat transfer coefficient above reported are the ones that we suggest to use as
starting point during the temperature matching process, as we found out that in many cases they are
not too far from the actual values.

Please, note that the heat transfer coefficient, which accounts at the same time for the different
mechanisms of heat transfer, may have very different values, depending on all the factors affecting
the heat transfer (the packer fluid, fluid characteristics, flow regime, type of completion, materials
used, thickness of tubing and casing etc.).

Again, if a measurement of wellhead temperature is available along with the well test, it is possible to
get the correct estimation of the U value.The overall heat transfer coefficient is referenced to the
pipe inside diameter

16.3.3.2Enthalpy Balance
Enthalpy Balance temperature model in PROSPER applies the general energy
equation for flowing fluid:

In terms of Enthalpy

this is written:

In other terms:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 735

If heat transfer with the surroundings (Q) is neglected, the usual pressure equation
solved in multiphase flow results. PROSPER solves the general energy equation by
considering the enthalpy balance across an incremental length of pipe. The
enthalpy term includes the effects of pressure (including Joule-Thomson effect) and
phase changes.
The algorithm commences by calculating the enthalpy
at the known pressure and temperature of the first
calculation node. i.e. H1 at (T1,P1)

For a given pipe increment, the enthalpy (H2) at the

other end of the pipe is estimated. The difference (H2-H
1) is compared to DH.

Where

If previous calculations exist, then:

dt
P2 = P1 - GDL ; T2 = T1 - DL
dz
to give the first estimate of H2

We now deal with a piece of tubing of pipe length L,

and
P1 + P2 T1 + T2
P= ; T=
2 2

The total heat transfer coefficient is estimated for the T, P of the iteration step to
calculate the heat exchanged. Using the energy equation, we can find dh. If dh
does not equal H2-H1, the iteration continues until convergence. The Enthalpy
Balance method solves the energy equation simultaneously for both temperature
and pressure. The solution temperature at the downstream side of the pipe
increment is therefore the value of T2 when the iteration has converged.

The heat transfer coefficient is used to calculate dQ within the enthalpy balance
iterations and not the temperature.

The heat transfer coefficient is itself a function of the temperature of both the fluid
and the surroundings; therefore iteration is required to find both the heat transfer

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 736 PROSPER

coefficient and the enthalpy balance. The formation is a thermal sink at temperature
Te. The temperature profile near the wellbore is dependent upon producing time and
the thermal diffusivity of the formation. The heat diffusivity equation accounts for
localised heating (or cooling) of the formation by the well fluids.

For a pipe increment, the heat flow is calculated using:

Where: is the temperature difference between the fluid and the formation at
infinity.

is the effective thermal conductivity of the formation (including allowance for well
fluids in porous formations)

is the solution of the heat diffusivity equation

The exact solution of heat diffusivity equation is:

(Carslaw and Jaeger Page 336)

This integral poses numerical problems as u0 and is slow. This equation is

evaluated for very early times only.

For intermediate times, PROSPER uses a fit of the TD vs tD generated using the
exact solution. At later times a logarithmic approximation is used:

Where thermal diffusivity

This formulation approximates the exact solution with less than 1% error. (From
Kwan-Chu and Subash Thakur).
is the overall heat transfer coefficient.

The overall heat transfer coefficient takes into account forced convection inside the

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 737

pipe and free convection outside the pipe plus radiation and conduction.

Heat transfer from the pipe is in three terms:

Conduction

Forced Convection

Free Convection

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 738 PROSPER

and Radiation

Now, let us examine the components of the overall heat loss coefficient individually:

is due to forced convection inside the pipe

Where k is the average conductivity.

= mixture Reynolds number (depends on VLP correlation

used)

i.e. mixture Prandtl number

In the annulus, the free convection term is:

where: i.e. mixture Grashof number

and mixture density

thermal expansion coefficient

The convection terms are themselves a function of temperature. Iteration is

therefore required to find the annulus temperature for the convection term and
determine the overall heat transfer coefficient

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 739

H2

H1

rti H1 P1 , T1
rto
rci
rco

rcem

The radiation term is given by:

where is the Stefan-Boltzman constant and is emissivity.

The Conduction Terms. An example is for the tubing, where:

Similar expressions are used for each casing string and each term combined to find
the total conductivity term .

16.3.3.2.1 Default Thermal Properties Database

The data listed below is at standard conditions. Correlations are used to estimate thermal properties
at other temperatures and pressures.

Dry Rock Properties

Cp Conductivity Specific Gravity

BTU/lb/deg F BTU/hr/ft/deg F
Sandstone 0.183 1.06 2.64
Shale 0.224 0.7 2.4
Limestone 0.202 0.54 2.71
Dolomite 0.219 1.0 2.87
Halite 0.219 2.8 2.17
Anhydrite 0.265 0.75 2.96
Gypsum 0.259 0.75 2.32
Lignite 0.3 2.0 1.5
Volcanics 0.2 1.6 2.65

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 740 PROSPER

Rock In Situ Fluids

Cp Conductivity
BTU/lb/deg F BTU/hr/ft/deg F
Water (Low salinity) 1.0 0.35
Water (High Salinity) 1.02 0.345
Heavy Oil 1.04 0.34
Medium Oil 0.49 0.083
Light Oil 0.5 0.0815
Gas 0.26 0.0215

The dry rock properties are modified to wet rock properties using the in-situ porosity, permeability and
rock consistency.

Downhole Equipment

Conduction Emmissivity
Heat Transfer
Coefficient
BTU/ft/hr/deg
F
Mild Steel Tubing 26 0.65
Plactic Coated Tubing 20 0.65
Stainless Steel (13%) 18 0.4
Stainless Steel (15%) 15 0.3
Line Pipe 27 0.9
Plactic Coated Pipe 20 0.9
Flexible 0.3 0.95
Bitumen 0.6 0.95
Foam 0.02 0.8
Concrete 0.1 0.9

16.3.4 Choke Calculation

From Bernoulli:

From Mass Conservation:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 741

In the throat, the maximum velocity is the speed of sound. Under critical conditions,
the choke becomes independant of the downstream pressure and temperature.

Vms : 2 phase sound velocity from FORTUNATI, Vms will be much lower than the
velocity of either phase. Critical conditions are reached at much lower velocities.

For a mono phase

16.3.5 Multi-Phase Flow Correlations

- For deviated wells, the Beggs and Brill hold up correction is used.
- To determine interfacial tension, the Parachor technique is used.
- Petroleum Experts correlation uses the Gould et al Flow Map and for the various
flow regimes we use the following:

Bubble flow: Wallis and Griffith

Slug flow: Hagedorn and Brown
Transition: Duns and Ros
Annular Mist flow: Duns and Ros

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 742 PROSPER

16.4 D - Dietz Shape Factors

In bounded reservoirs 1

2 4.86
31.6

1
2.07
30.9 2

1
4 2.72
31.6
1
4 0.232
27.6
1
4 0.115
60 27.1

1
3 21.9 3.39
1

1 1
22.6 3.13
2 2

1 1
5.38 0.607
4 2

1 1
5 2.36 0.111
2

4
3 0.098
12.9
In water-drive reservoirs

4.57 19.1

1 In reservoirs of unknown
10.8 production character
2 25

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 743

16.5 E - File Formats

16.5.1 Introduction
This appendix contains examples of some file formats used by PROSPER. For
further details and advice regarding interfacing PROSPER with other applications,
please contact Petroleum Experts Limited customer support.

16.5.2 External PVT Tables

PROSPER can directly import proprietary PVT table files generated by Petroleum Experts
PVT Package. The following file format description can be followed to re-format
PVT tables obtained from other sources.

* TEST EXAMPLE OF AN OIL PVT TABLE IMPORT FILE

* (BLANK LINES AND LINES WITH AN ASTERISK (*) IN COLUMN 1
* ARE IGNORED)

*
* UNITS for the imported PVT variables must be defined in field units

* NUMBER OF TABLES (MAX 10)

5

* DATA COLUMN IDENTIFIERS

* - CAN BE IN ANY ORDER
* - COLUMNS CAN BE MISSING
* - ANY INDIVIDUAL ITEM > 3.4e35 = missing item
*
*
* PRES - Pressure
* GOR - Gas-Oil Ratio]
* OFVF - oil Formation Volume Factor
* OVIS - oil Viscosity
* ODEN - oil Density
* OCOM - oil Compressibility
* GFVF - gas Formation Volume Factor
* GVIS - gas Viscosity
* WVIS - water Viscosity
* WCOM - water Compressibility
* ZFAC - Z Factor
* GDEN - gas density
* CGR - Reservoir CGR
*
OFVF GOR OVIS ODEN PRES

*
* TABLE IDENTIFIER RECORD
*
* N LINES TEMP BP
*
* N - Table Number
* LINES - Number of lines in the table (max 15)

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 744 PROSPER

* TEMP - Table Temperature

* BP - Table Bubble Point Pressure (Dew Point for condensate)

1 3 100 1300
1.21 453 .99 46 2000
1.31 454 .98 47 2010
1.41 455 .97 49 2020
2 3 200 1310
2.21 553 .89 56 3000
2.31 554 .88 57 3010
2.41 555 .87 59 3020
3 3 300 1390
3.21 653 .79 76 4000
3.31 654 .78 77 4010
3.41 655 .77 79 4020
4 3 400 1400
4.21 753 .69 86 5000
4.31 754 .68 87 5010
4.41 755 .67 89 5020
5 3 500 1800
5.21 853 .59 96 6000
5.31 854 .58 97 6010
5.41 855 .57 99 6020

Note:
Import table units must be defined in field units. Once the data has been imported
the PROSPER units system can be used to display the values in any desired units.

16.5.3 Lift Curves

The following is an example of a flowing well lift curve in ECLIPSE format:
-- VFP TABLE for PRODUCER --
VFPPROD
1 10430 'LIQ' 'WCT' 'GOR' /
100 1000 10000 /
114.696 514.696 5014.7 /
0 0.5 0.9 /
0.8 1 5 /
0 /
1 1 1 1 2002.17 1258.71 2733.66 /
1 1 2 1 1479.42 1083.09 2655.25 /
1 1 3 1 413.537 806.953 4503.13 /
1 2 1 1 3948.98 2376.35 3439.27 /
1 2 2 1 3619.42 1985.43 3270.18 /
1 2 3 1 494.134 928.339 3352.16 /
1 3 1 1 4913.94 4485.14 4672.16 /
1 3 2 1 4895.27 4343.38 4563.92 /
1 3 3 1 3925.4 2141.93 3460.48 /
2 1 1 1 3629.53 2559.11 3358.56 /
2 1 2 1 3539.7 2209.16 3216.7 /
2 1 3 1 1098.95 1408.86 4038.35 /
2 2 1 1 4817.47 3863.58 4190.39 /
2 2 2 1 4746.81 3540.81 3985.01 /
2 2 3 1 1916.92 1594.64 3434.72 /
2 3 1 1 5347.77 5166.94 5283.46 /
2 3 2 1 5337.64 5102.83 5210.6 /
2 3 3 1 5138.74 3590 4155.85 /
3 1 1 1 8202.54 8206.84 8494.42 /
3 1 2 1 8081.09 8085.64 8397.43 /
3 1 3 1 7436.73 7142.24 8450.65 /
3 2 1 1 9393.27 9014.22 9196.49 /
3 2 2 1 9308.64 8911.21 9105.01 /
3 2 3 1 8567.24 7774.64 8436.27 /
3 3 1 1 9912.37 9798.83 9952.61 /
3 3 2 1 9906.65 9776.86 9924.11 /
3 3 3 1 9813.74 9404.22 9463.37 /

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 745

Gas Lifted Well (4 Variable) Lift Curves

-- VFP TABLE for PRODUCER --
VFPPROD
1 10430 'LIQ' 'WCT' 'GOR' /
100 1000 10000 /
114.696 1014.7 /
0.5 0.9 /
0.82 5 /
0 0.2 0.5 /
1 1 1 1 4236.42 2633.35 3373.19 /
1 1 1 2 3825.95 2143.51 3274.85 /
1 1 1 3 3124.78 1852.12 3267.76 /
1 1 2 1 679.721 1006.21 3341.52 /
1 1 2 2 663.546 996.833 3405.81 /
1 1 2 3 641.284 977.228 3341.56 /
1 2 1 1 4983.68 4569.28 4613.82 /
1 2 1 2 4855.84 3445.19 4260.77 /
1 2 1 3 4234.42 2708.11 3888.35 /
1 2 2 1 4324.78 2288.63 3403.99 /
1 2 2 2 3770.29 1978.18 3361.59 /
1 2 2 3 2893.22 1811.06 3390.73 /
2 1 1 1 5416.3 4901.7 4903.34 /
2 1 1 2 5416.24 4900.79 4902.04 /
2 1 1 3 5416.15 4899.42 4900.17 /
2 1 2 1 4853.52 2622.82 3962.47 /
2 1 2 2 4853.36 2606.9 3962.25 /
2 1 2 3 4853.12 2591.41 3961.94 /
2 2 1 1 5925.14 5771.07 5819.76 /
2 2 1 2 5925.09 5770.6 5819.25 /
2 2 1 3 5925.01 5769.9 5818.5 /
2 2 2 1 5814.71 4954.63 4912.08 /
2 2 2 2 5814.64 4953.02 4911.18 /
2 2 2 3 5814.53 4950.61 4909.88 /

16.5.4 IPR
*
* This is an example IPR input file
*
The format is pressure, rate, curve value
*
The numbers can be space, tab or comma delimited
* Up to twenty points per curve, up to five curves
*
*Blank lines or lines with an asterisk (*) in the first
* column are ingored.
*

0 5000 1000
1000 4000 1000
2000 3000 1000
3000 2000 1000
4000 1000 1000
5000 0 1000

*
* Next curve
*

0 3000 2000
1000 2000 2000
2000 1000 2000
3000 0 2000

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 746 PROSPER

16.5.5 ESP PUMPS

* Blank lines or lines begining with an asterisk are ignored.
* The format for the pump data is
* Line 1 Manufacturer pumpname size (ins) frequency(hz) Min. rte Max. rate No. of Stages
* Line 2 six coefficients for head curve (ft of water)
* Line 3 six coefficients for power curve (HP)

* Curves are polynomials of the form

* Y = AO + A1*x + A2*x*2 + A3*x**3 + A4*x**4 + A5*x**5

****************************
****************************
****************************
*** CENTRILIFT PUMPS ***
****************************
****************************
****************************

CENTRILIFT DC-800 3.38 60 550 950 1

* A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
-1.695826E-14 3.474714E-11 -3.873426E-08 8.776504E-06 -7.290256E-04 2.06500E+01
3.389608E-16 -6.347699E-13 1.397720E-10 1.695927E-07 1.838891E-05 9.70000E-02

CENTRILIFT DC-1000 3.38 60 700 1300 1

0.0000000000 1.629606E-13 -3.038773E-09 -4.764406E-07 -2.538143E-03 2.05000E+01
-1.535787E-17 8.375897E-14 -1.485183E-10 4.492726E-08 1.474800E-04 8.501001E-02

16.5.6 ESP MOTORS

*Manufacturer

Reda

* Number of motors, rpm, frequency

2 3450. 60.0

*Series OD
456 4.56

*amps
6.53822E-01 -1.34128E+00 8.86349E-01 -1.06114E-01 5.61883E-01 3.43896E-01 *
*rpm
-6.24718E+01 2.04999E+02 -3.03911E+02 1.45552E+02 -1.15803E+02 3.58291E+03 *
*efficiency
-5.57129E-01 1.60591E+00 -7.30540E-01 -1.98693E+00 2.49918E+00 1.91886E-03 *
* power factor
-5.44220E-01 2.16557E+00 -2.81504E+00 7.11957E-01 1.04810E+00 2.49609E-01 *

*Series OD
540 5.4

*amps
-2.16508E-01 6.79101E-01 -5.79651E-01 3.59379E-01 5.24583E-01 2.26834E-01 *
*rpm
-2.14557E+01 8.55182E+01 -1.66122E+02 9.44086E+01 -1.44510E+02 3.58175E+03 *
*efficiency
3.67150E-01 -1.64327E+00 3.01018E+00 -3.02514E+00 1.72215E+00 4.17187E-01 *
* power factor
4.64765E-01 -2.48102E+00 5.12024E+00 -5.23541E+00 2.71560E+00 2.75835E-01 *

*Series Type HP VOLTS AMPS

456 S 100.0 1075 51
456 S 100.0 1355 46
456 S 100.0 2205 29

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 747

456 S 110.0 1190 60

456 S 120.0 1255 70
456 S 120.0 1295 59
456 S 120.0 2245 35
456 T 200.0 2710 46
456 T 220.0 2380 60
456 T 240.0 2250 70
456 T 240.0 2590 59

540 S 180.0 945 120

540 S 180.0 1945 59
540 S 200.0 1100 115
540 S 200.0 2140 54
540 S 225.0 1135 127
540 S 225.0 2235 64
540 T 450.0 2270 127
540 T 480.0 2475 122
540 T 480.0 3345 89
540 T 540.0 2835 120
540 T 600.0 3300 115

16.5.7 ESP CABLES

* Cable Type
* Volt drop coefficient Maximum ampage
#1 Copper
0.26 115
#2 Copper
0.33 95
#4 Copper
0.53 70
#6 Copper
0.84 55
#8 Copper
1.32 50
#10 Copper
2.08 50
#12 Copper
3.32 50

#1 Aluminium
0.33 95
#2 Aluminium
0.53 70
#4 Aluminium
0.84 55
#6 Aluminium
1.32 50
#8 Aluminium
2.08 50
#10 Aluminium
3.32 50

16.5.8 HSP PUMPS

*
* H Y D R A U L I C D R I V E D O W N H O L E P U M P S* ================= =========
=============== =========

* This is a sample pump import file. Blank lines or lines begining

* with an asterisk are ignored. The format for the pump data is
* Line 1 Manufacturer pumpname size (mm) reference Speed(rpm) Min.
* operating rate Max. operating rate No. of stages Max no. of Stages Min
* Speed Max Speed
* Line 2 six coefficients for head curve (ft of water) (a0 to a5)
* Line 3 six coefficients for power curve (HP) (a0 to a5)

* This data is supplied FOR EXAMPLE PURPOSES ONLY

********** DO NOT USE FOR SYSTEM DESIGN

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 748 PROSPER

* Contact your pump supplier for current performance data

****************************
****************************
****************************
*** WEIR PUMPS ***
****************************
****************************
****************************

WEIR TPL115 118 11500 2000 12200 1 18 3825 11500

439.726 -0.0145605 1.7487e-7 -4.0609e-11 -1.2e-15 6.7794e-20
15.0445 0.00470131 -8.1656e-7 9.018e-11 -5.0595e-15 9.7463e-20

16.5.9 HSP TURBINES

Turbine Manufacturer
WEIR* Number of Turbines1***************** ** WEIR T30 **
****************** Turbine TypeT30* Reference Speed (rpm)
15000.0

* Maximum Speed (rpm)

15000.0

* Maximum Test Pressure (psi)

8910.00

* Maximum Working Pressure (psi)

5940.00

* Maximum Stage Pressure (psi)

370.00

* Maximum Number Of Stages

50

* Maximum Turbine Supply Flow (bbl/day)

3911.67

* Maximum Total Shaft Torque (lb.ins)

843

* Maximum Stage Torque (lb.ins)

128

* Turbine Casing OD (inches)

3.46

* Max. Velocity Over Turbine Casing (ft/sec)

25.000

* Number of Settings
4

* Setting should be an alphanumeric string with NO embedded spaces (up to 8 characters)

* Setting Efficiency Mininum Maximum Head Head Head Power Power Power
* Rate Rate (a1) (a2) (a3) (a1) (a2) (a3)
* (percent) (bbl/day) (bbl/day)

A 52.750 1235.26 2038.18 0.000311733 -0.53145 447.209 2.2765e-6 -0.00245738 0.551433

B 56.000 1523.49 2460.23 0.000146428 -0.163852 184.132 1.6612e-6 -0.00126675 -0.431372
C 60.460 1873.48 3232.27 0.000116043 -0.281785 395.769 1.8284e-6 -0.0037038 2.46547
D 64.000 2367.59 3788.14 6.97987e-5 -0.150449 243.193 2.0903e-6 -0.00670166 7.15005

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 749

16.6 F - Glossary

Bottom Hole Flowing Pressure measured at the producing formation. Intake node pressure.
Pressure
Formation Gas-Oil Quantity of oil dissolved in 1 stock tank barrel of oil at prevailing pressure
Ratio and temperature. Solution GOR. See GOR Definitions
Formation Volume Volume occupied by 1 barrel of stock tank oil and its associated solution
Factor (Bo) gas at a given pressure and temperature.

Retrograde Hydrocarbon existing as a gas at reservoir conditions from which liquid

drops out as the pressure drops. The liquid may evaporate as the
Condensate
pressure drops further.
Ratio of the gas density to density of air. Equal to ratio of molecular weight
Gas Gravity
to that of air (28.97).
Rate of increase in earth temperature with depth. One example: 1.8
Geothermal Gradient
degrees F per 100 feet of TVD.
When oil is brought to surface conditions it is usual for some gas to come
out of solution. The gas/oil ratio (GOR) is the ratio of the volume of gas that
comes out of solution, to the volume of oil. A point to check is whether the
volume of oil is measured before or after the gas comes out of solution,
since the oil volume will shrink when the gas comes out. In fact gas
dissolution and oil volume shrinkage will happen at many stages during the
GOR path of the hydrocarbon stream from reservoir through the wellbore and
processing plant to export. For light oils and rich gas condensates the
ultimate GOR of export streams is strongly influenced by the efficiency with
which the processing plant strips liquids from the gas phase. Reported
GORs may be calculated from export volumes which may not be at
standard conditions.Can refer to solution GOR or Total GOR (i.e. including
free gas production). See GOR Definitions

Heat Transfer Coefficient describing the total resistance to heat loss from a producing
pipe to its surroundings. Includes heat loss by conduction, convection and
Coefficient (HTC)
radiation.
(Liquid holdup). Proportion of pipe area occupied by liquid. Equal to 1.0
Holdup
for single phase liquid and 0.0 for single phase gas.
A fictitious gas that obeys the equation of state PV=RT/m where V is
specific volume, T is absolute temperature, R is the universal gas constant
Ideal Gas
and m id the molecular weight. Real gases deviate from ideal behaviour at
atmospheric pressures.
A volume ratio that indicates the deviation of the actual volume from that
Compressibility which has been determined by the Ideal Gas Laws. The Compressibility
Factor is a multiplier
The relation between reservoir pressure, flowing bottom hole pressure and
Inflow Performance production rate. Can be calculated from reservoir properties (reservoir
Relationship (IPR) pressure, permeability, skin) or fitting an empirical relation to measured
pressures. See IPR Definition
Gas injected into a reservoir for pressure maintenance. Not to be
Injection Gas
confused with gas lift injection.
Slope of inflow performance relation for injection. Expressed as injection
Injectivity Index
volume per unit of injection pressure. (BBL/psi, Sm3/Bar).

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 750 PROSPER

The Joule-Thomson effect, or Joule-Kelvin effect, is a process in which

the temperature of a real gas is either decreased or increased by letting the
gas expand freely at constant enthalpy (which means that no heat is
transferred to or from the gas, and no external work is extracted). It's
named after James Prescott Joule and William Thomson, 1st Baron
Kelvin who established the effect in 1852 following earlier work by Joule
on Joule expansion in which a gas expands at constant internal energy.
The relationship between temperature, pressure and volume of a gas is
simply described by the various gas laws. When volume is increased in an
irreversible process, the gas laws do not uniquely determine what happens
to the pressure and temperature of the gas. Reversible adiabatic
expansion, in which the gas does positive work in the process of
expansion, always causes a decrease in temperature. However, when a
real gas (as differentiated from an ideal gas) expands freely at constant
enthalpy, the temperature may either decrease or increase, depending on
the initial temperature and pressure. For any given pressure, a real gas
has a Joule-Thomson (Kelvin) inversion temperature, above which
expansion at constant enthalpy causes the temperature to rise, and below
which expansion at constant enthalpy causes cooling. For most gases at
atmospheric pressure, the inversion temperature is fairly high (above room
temperature), and so most gases at those temperature and pressure
conditions are cooled by isenthalpic expansion.
The change of temperature with respect to a change of pressure in a
Joule-Thomson process is the Joule-Thomson (Kelvin) coefficient

Joule-Thomson
Coefficient

Definition of the Joule-Thomson Coefficient

The value of depends on the specific gas, as well as the temperature and
pressure of the gas before expansion. For all real gases, it will equal zero
at some point called the inversion point and the Joule-Thomson
inversion temperature is the temperature where the coefficient changes
sign (i.e., where the coefficient equals zero).
In any gas expansion, the gas pressure decreases and thus the sign of dP
is always negative. The following table explains when the Joule-Thomson
effect cools or heats a real gas
If the gas then is since dP is dT must be so the gas
temperature
is
below the
always
inversion positive negative cools
negative
temperature

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 751

above the
always
inversion negative positive heats
negative
temperature

It should be noted that is always equal to zero for ideal gases (i.e., they
will neither heat nor cool upon being expanded at constant enthalpy).
Depth measured along the flow path from the depth reference to a point in
Measured Depth
the well.
A reference point in the well. A calculation node is inserted whenever there
Node
is a change of I.D., deviation angle or temperature gradient.
Permeability (commonly symbolized as , or k) is a measure of the ability
of a material (typically, a rock or unconsolidated material) to transmit fluids.
It is of great importance in determining the flow characteristics of
hydrocarbons in oil and gas reservoirs. The intrinsic permeability of any
porous material is:
k = C * d2
where
k is the intrinsic permeability
C is a dimensionless constant that is related to the configuration of the
flow-paths
d is the average, or effective pore diameter
Permeability needs to be measured, either directly (using Darcy's law) or
through estimation using empirically derived formulas.
A common unit for permeability is the darcy (D), or more commonly the
Permeability
millidarcy (mD) (1 darcy @10- 12m). Other units are cm and the SI m2.
Permeability is part of the proportionality constant in Darcy's law which
relates discharge (flow rate) and fluid physical properties (e.g. viscosity), to
a pressure gradient applied to the porous media. The proportionality
constant specifically for the flow of water through a porous media is the
hydraulic conductivity; permeability is a portion of this, and is a property of
the porous media only, not the fluid. In naturally occurring materials, it
ranges over many orders of magnitude. For a rock to be considered as an
exploitable hydrocarbon reservoir, its permeability must be greater than
approximately 100 mD (depending on the nature of the hydrocarbon - gas
reservoirs with lower permeabilities are still exploitable because of the
lower viscosity of gas with respect to oil). Rocks with permeabilities
significantly lower than 100 mD can form efficient seals. Unconsolidated
sands may have permeabilities of over 5000 mD.
Calculation of well pressure vs depth by integrating the pressure gradient
Pressure Traverse
for increments of pipe.
A homogeneous body of material which differs in its intensive properties
Phase
from that of its neighbouring phases. e.g. Gas, liquid.

Produced Gas/Oil Gas production divided by oil production. Includes gas in solution and any
free gas production. Excludes lift gas returned to surface with the
Ratio
produced fluids.
Measure of a well's ability to flow. Expressed in bbl/psi (Sm3/day / Bar) of
Productivity Index (PI)
drawdown. Applies above the bubble point.

Pseudo-Critical The Critical Temperature is defined as the highest temperature at which a

gas can be liquefied. When calculated for a mixture it is called the
Temperature
Pseudo-Critical Temperature.

Pseudo-Critical The Critical Pressure of a gas is defined as the saturation pressure at the

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 752 PROSPER

Critical Temperature. It is the highest vapour pressure the liquid can

Pressure exert. Critical conditions must be determined experimentally for each gas.
When calculated for a mixture, it is called the Pseudo-Critical Pressure.
Quality Weight percent of vapour present in a two-phase mixture.
Reduced pressure and Ratio of pressure in a system to the critical pressure (or pseudo-critical
temperature pressure) of the system.
Reservoir Accumulation of hydrocarbon in permeable rock.
Liquid remaining in a PVT cell at the completion of a differential liberation
Residual Oil
experiment.
Saturated Oil Oil in equilibrium with its vapour at a specified temperature and pressure.
Pressure at which vapor and liquid are in equilibrium. For oils, equivalent
Saturation Pressure
to bubble point.. For condensates, the dew point.
Decrease in volume of oil from reservoir conditions to the stock tank.
Shrinkage
Shrinkage occurs as oil gives up solution gas and temperature drops.
Shrinkage Factor Reciprocal of Formation Volume Factor.
Solution Gas Gas dissolved in oil at elevated pressure and temperature.
Solution Gas Oil Ratio Volume of gas dissolved in stock tank unit of oil at saturation pressure
(Rs) (scf/STB, Sm3/Sm3). See GOR Definitions
Ratio of fluid density to that of water at 60 degrees F. For gases, ratio of
Specific Gravity
gas density to that of air at standard conditions.
Static Reservoir Stabilised reservoir pressure if all wells were shut in and built up.
Pressure
STB Stock Tank Barrel.
A state of the system in which none of the variables (such as pressure,
Steady-State
temperature, flow rates) varies with time.
Oil in equilibrium with its surrounding conditions of temperature and
Stock Tank Oil
pressure.
True Vertical Depth Vertical displacement from reference depth to a point in a well.
Oil capable of dissolving additional gas at a specified temperature and
Under Saturated Oil
pressure. i.e current pressure is above the fluid's bubble point.
Empirical inflow performance relation that accounts for reduced oil
Vogel Equation
permeability when producing below bubble point due to gas breakout.
Ratio of water production to total fluid production. (Water Rate) / (Oil Rate
Water Cut
+ Water Rate)
Water Formation Volume occupied at prevailing pressure and temperature by 1 stock tank
Volume Factor (Bw) unit of water.
Water / Oil Ratio Ratio of oil production to water production (stock tank conditions)
(WOR)
The temperature at which the vapour will start to condense. Dew point of a
Dew Point gas mixture is the temperature at which the highest boiling point
constituent will start to condense.
Any gas or gas mixture which contains no water vapour, and where all of
Dry Gas the constituents are substantially above their respective saturated vapour
pressure at the existing conditions.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 753

A substance's capacity, either latent or apparent, to exert a force through a

Energy
distance.
The sum of the internal and external energies. Enthalpy is defined as
H = U + P*V
where U is the energy of a system, P the pressure, and V the volume. At
Enthalpy
constant volume and temperature, the differential change in enthalpy as
pressure and entropy S are varied is therefore
dH = TdS + VdP
A measure of the unavailable energy in a substance. The concept of
entropy in thermodynamics is central to the second law of
thermodynamics, which deals with physical processes and whether they
occur spontaneously. Spontaneous changes occur with an increase in
entropy. Spontaneous changes tend to smooth out differences in
temperature, pressure, density, and chemical potential that may exist in a
system, and entropy is thus a measure of how far this smoothing-out
process has progressed. Entropy change is defined as a change to a more
Entropy disordered state at a molecular level. In recent years, entropy has been
interpreted in terms of the "dispersal" of energy. Entropy is an extensive
state function that accounts for the effects of irreversibility in
thermodynamic systems.
Quantitatively, entropy, symbolized by S, is defined by the differential
quantity dS = Q / T, where Q is the amount of heat absorbed in a
reversible process in which the system goes from one state to another, and
T is the absolute temperature. Entropy is one of the factors that determines
the free energy of the system.
The energy represented by the product of pressure and volume. It may be
External Energy regarded as the energy a substance possesses by virtue of the space it
occupies.
The energy transferred because of a temperature difference. There is no
Heat
transfer of mass.
The energy which a substance possesses because of the motion and
Internal Energy
configuration of its atoms, molecules and sub atomic particles.
Isentropic Process A process during which there is no heat added to or removed from the
(Adiabatic) system.
Isothermal Process A process during which there is no change in temperature.
Kinetic Energy The energy a substance possesses by virtue of its motion or velocity.
Partial Pressure The absolute pressure exerted by a constituent portion of the mixture.
The energy a substance possesses because of its elevation above the
Potential Energy
earth or above some chosen datum plane.
The ratio in absolute units of the actual gas pressure to the critical
Reduced Pressure
pressure of the gas.
The ratio in absolute units of the actual gas temperature to the critical
Reduced temperature
temperature of the gas.
The pressure existing at a given temperature in a closed volume containing
Saturated Vapour a liquid and a vapour from that liquid after equilibrium conditions have been
Pressure reached. It is dependent only on temperature and must be determined
experimentally.
The ratio of the density of a given gas to the density of dry air, both
Specific Gravity
measured at the same specific conditions of pressure and temperature.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 754 PROSPER

These conditions are usually 14.696 psiA and 60F, or 1 barA and 0C.
The rate of change in enthalpy with temperature. It may be measured at
Specific Heat or Heat
constant pressure or at constant volume. The values are different and are
Capacity
known as Cp and Cv, respectively.
The volume of a given weight of gas usually expressed as cubic feet per
Specific Volume
pound, or cubic meters per kilogram (cubic centimeters per gram).
The property of a substance which gauges the potential or driving force for
Temperature
the flow of heat.
Any gas or gas mixture in which one or more of the constituents is at its
Wet Gas saturated vapour pressure. The constituent at saturation pressure may or
may not be water vapour.
The energy transition and defined as force times distance. Work cannot be
Work
done unless there is motion.
Dimensionless Dimensionless fracture conductivity is a key design parameter in well
Fracture Conductivity stimulation that compares the capacity of the fracture to transmit fluids
(FCD) down the fracture and into the wellbore with the ability of the formation to
deliver fluid into the fracture.

16.7 IPM Equation of State and Steam PVT

16.7.1 Equation of State Modelling

Equations of State were developed to give a mathematical relationship between
pressure ,volume and temperature. They were originally put forward as a method of
interpreting the non-ideal nature of many pure substances. With time, this role has
been extended successfully to predicting the properties of simple and complex
mixtures.

The equations used in PVT are derived from Van der Waals Equation and in
common with it represent the total pressure as a summation of an attractive and a
repulsive element:

P total = P repulsive - P attractive

The classic Van der Waals equation describes this relationship as

RT a
P= - 2
v-b v
where b represents the hard-sphere volume of the molecules and
a the intermolecular attraction.

The two cubic Equations of State which are available within

the PVT package are

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 755

1) the Peng-Robinson (PR)EoS:

RT a(T )
P= -
v - b v (v + b ) + b (v - b )
and,

2) the Soave-Redlich-Kwong(SRK)EoS:

RT a(T )
P= -
v - b v (v + b )

All cubic Equations of State can be rewritten as a function of the compressibility

factor Z e.g. the Peng Robinsen equation becomes

Z 3 - (1 - B) Z 2 + ( A - 3B 2 - 2 B) Z - ( AB - B 2 - B 3 ) = 0
and for SRK

Z 3 + Z 2 + ( A - B - B 2 ) Z - AB = 0

where

a(T ) P
A=
( RT ) 2

bP
B=
RT
and

bP
B=
RT
see also:
Binary Interaction Coefficients
Acentric Factors
Volume Shift
LBC Viscosity Model
Interfacial Tension
16.7.1.1Binary Coefficients

The cubic equations of state were originally developed for pure substances. With

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 756 PROSPER

time their use was extended to mixtures. This extension required some method of
introducing a measure of the polar and other interactions between pairs of dissimilar
molecules. The binary interaction coefficient was put forward.
This variable enters the calculation as a component in the intermolecular attraction
a.
For mixtures :
N N
a = xi x j aij
i =1 j =1

where
xi
and
xi
are mole fractions of components i and j, respectively and :

a = ai a j (1 - k ij )

k ij
is the binary interaction coefficient.
The attraction functions
ai
and
xi
represent the a(T) functions for each individual component. (see acentric factor
help)

Binary Interaction Coefficients represent a flexible way of molding the ideal Equation
of State to match the non-ideal reality of many mixtures.
The PVT package offers the user a variety of correlations for Binary Interaction
Coefficients as well as the opportunity to enter values manually.
This flexibility ,however, brings with it the problem of where to start when
characterizing a mixture. Hint on Binary Interaction Coefficients puts forward a
possible approach.
The manipulations of
k ij
are carried out within the BI Coefficient Dialog:

see also:
Equation of State
Volume Shift
Accentric Factors
LBC Viscosity Model
Interfacial Tension

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 757

16.7.1.2Accentric Factors

The acentric factor was put forward as a means of representing the non-sphericity
and polarity of many compounds. The original Equation of State PV=nRT was based
on a model of hard spheres which behaved in a classical and predictable fashion.
The vast majority of compounds are, unfortunately, far from ideal and far from
spherical. The acentric factor provides a number which can be used in the equation
of state to match predicted PVT behavior with reality.
To quote the authors in
Molecular Thermodynamics of Fluid-Phase Equilibria by J Prausnitz and R. D.
Lichtenthaler.
"Acentric Factors are arbitrary and chosen for convenience"
Based on deviation of some fluids from that predicted by what the corresponding
states theory suggests for simple fluids, Pitzer proposed an experimental method for
determining the acentric factor.
It had been observed for simple fluids that for simple fluids that the following
relationship held i.e..
As the Temperature (T) approached 7/10 of the critical temperature (Tc) the
measured saturation pressure(Ps) approached 1/10 of the critical pressure(Pc).

Ps 1
=
Pc 10 when
T 7
( = )
Tc 10

Pitzer's proposal was to use the logarithmic deviation from this relationship as a
measure of acentric factor
w

Ps
w - log 1 0( ) T / Tc =0.7 - 1.0
Pc
The acentric factor enters the equation of state as a component which describes the
change in the intermolecular attraction component with temperature a(T) .
The Peng Robinson Equation is
RT a(T )
P= -
v - b v (v + b ) + b (v - b )
with

a(T ) = a(Tc )a (TR , w )

where the a(T) function at the critical point is given by the empirical relationship

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 758 PROSPER

R 2TC2
a(Tc ) = 0.45724( )
PC
and
a (TR , w ) is a function of the reduced temperature T/Tc and the acentric factor as
follows

a = (1 + b (1 - TR0.5 ) 2
w is an empirical quadratic or cubic of the acentric factor
At values of
w less than 0.49 the equation is quadratic:
b = 0.37464 + 1.54226w - 0.2699w 2
The estimation changes to a cubic at other values of
w :
b = 0.379642+ 1.485030w - 0.164423w 2 + 0.016666w 3
In addition the repulsive factor b within PR is given by:
RTC
b = 0.0778( )
PC
Soave Redlich Kwong varies from PR in the constants within the empirical functions
i.e..
R 2TC2
a(Tc ) = 0.427( )
PC
b = 0.480 + 1.54w - 0.176w 2
and
RTC
b = 0.08664( )
PC
Table 4.1 shows some typical acentric factors. Note that the value increases with the
size of the molecule and its polarity.

Table 4.1 Common Acentric Factors

Compound Acentric Factor

Nitrogen N2 0.039
Carbon Dioxide CO2 0.239
Methane C1 0.011

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 759

Ethane C2 0.099
Butane nC4 0.199
Hexane C6 0.299
Octane C8 0.398
Decane C10 0.489

see also:
Equation of State
Volume Shift
Binary Interaction Coefficients
LBC Viscosity Model
Interfacial Tension

16.7.1.3Volume Shift
Volume Shift arises from an inherent weakness in the 2 parameter(a and b)
Equations of State in estimating liquid densities.
The Peng Robinson variant is
RT a(T )
P= -
v - b v (v + b ) + b (v - b )
In the 3 parameter version
a is replaced by a corrected version
x2 where
v s = v + cv
c is the third parameter and is the sum of the individual
xi ci
N
c = xi ci
i =1

Since this correction is done after the flash equilibrium calculations, the component
K values,saturation pressure and phase envelope are not affected.
What is changed is the compressibility Z and anything derived from it i.e..
Density,GOR,FVF,Relative Volume etc.
The use of Volume Shift seems to be very attractive,since it corrects a known
problem.
However , there can be problems associated with such a powerful regression option.
This method can result in very significant errors as the fluid is transported through a
range of temperatures. This can result in such a significant material balance error
that a program such as Prosper becomes unuseable.
Volume shift within the Petroleum Experts IPM suite is based on a method from

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 760 PROSPER

Jhaveri and Joungren (SPE 13118,1988)

In this method
ci = bi S i
where the Vol Shift S factor Si is taken from a database or calculated from the
molecular weight of the component by
d
Si = 1 - ( )
MWtie
The volume shift parameter
fj
is the match variable that is listed as a column in the composition table.

The use of Volume Shift seems to be very attractive,since it corrects a known

problem.
However , there are very significant problems in using this method eg.:
1) The Equation of State is non predictive . Matching must be used to model real
fluid behaviour.
Volume Shift can be used to make up for bad data or inadequacies in the matching
methods. This can be very dangerous particularly as there is no real control or limit
to the value of c . In our experience nearly all fluids can be matched without volume
shift using the methods outlined in EOS : Step by Step Guide of the PVTP program.
For this reason this method is not recommended until all other approaches have
been exhausted.
2) The Volume Shift approach is a fairly crude correction factor which solves the
difficulty of matching density.It does ,however, introduce other problems by breaking
up the continuity of the original equation. It is not a temperature dependent function.
Matching a c at one elevated temperature may cause difficulties with matching and
the material balance at another. lower temperature

see also:
Equation of State
Binary Interaction Coefficients
Accentric Factors
LBC Viscosity Model
Interfacial Tension
OmegaA and OmegaB
16.7.1.4OmegaA and OmegaB
Within the 2 most common Equations of State i.e.. Peng Robinson and Soave
Redlich Kwong OmegaA and OmegaB are empirically derived constants .
How these variables fit into the overall equation is given in the help on Acentric
Factors.
In the Peng Robinson(PR) equation the a(T) function at the critical point is given by
the empirical relationship

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 761

R 2TC2
a(Tc ) = 0.45724( )
PC
The constant 0.45724 is the OmegaA parameter.
In addition the repulsive factor b within PR is given by:
RTC
b = 0.0778( )
PC
The constant 0.0778 is the OmegaB parameter.
The equivalent values for the Soave Redlich Kwong(SRK) equation are 0.427 for
OmegaA and 0.08664 for OmegaB.
A methodology has developed within the industry to treat OmegaA and B as
variables for use within the matching process.
This is really an alternative to using individual components Tc and Pc properties.
One advantage of this approach is that it leaves measured properties such as the Tc
and Pc of methane untouched while giving additional parameters to match with.
This methodology is particularly important if a corresponding states model for
viscosity or thermal conductivity is to be used.

see also:
Equation of State
Binary Interaction Coefficients
Accentric Factors
LBC Viscosity Model
Interfacial Tension
16.7.2 LBC Viscosity Model
This model (ref 1) is probably the most commonly used for hydrocarbon mixtures. Is
is an adaptation of a model proposed by Jossi et al (ref 2). The main property used
is the component crtical volume. At the core of this model is a fourth-degree
polynomial in reduced density.
2 3 4
[(h - h*)x + 10-4 ]1 / 4 = a1 + a 2 r r + a3 r r + a 4 r r + a5 r r
where a1 = 0.10230
a2 = 0.023364
a3 = 0.05833
a4 = -0.040758
a5 = 0.0093324
h * is the low-pressure gas mixture viscosity and is determined by the method
proposed by Herning and Zippener
N N
* 1/ 2
h* = z h MWi
i i / z i MWi1 / 2
i =1 i =1
the individual component viscosities are given by the following expressions

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 762 PROSPER

* 1 0.9 4
h i = 34x10-5 Tri
xi for
Tri < 1.5

* 1
h i = 17.78x10-5 (4.58Tri - 1.67) 5 / 8
xi for
Tri > 1.5
g 2 is the component viscosity-reducing parameter.
For a mixture this variable is determined as follows:
1/ 6 -1 / 2 -2 / 3
N N N
x = z i Tci i z MWi i ci
z P
i =1 i =1 i =1
g 2 in equation 1 is the mixture density divided by the critical density of the mixture.

r
rr =
rc
The variation introduced by Lohrenz et al was in the calculation of the critical
density.
This variable was rewritten in terms of the critical volumes of the mixture
components.
-1

1 N
rc = = ( z iVci ) + z c 7 +VcC7 +
Vc i =1
i C 7 +
The origins of the LBC model lies in gases rather than liquids. Its dependence on the
density term causes inaccuracies with viscous fluids.

References
1) Lohrenz,J.,Bray,B.G., and Clark, C. R.," Calculating Viscosities of Reservoir Fluids
from Their Compositions",J.Pet.Technol.,Oct.1964,pp 1171-1176
2) Jossi,J.A.,Stiel,L.I.,and Thodos,G.,"The Viscosity of Pure Substances in the
Dense Gaseous and Liquid Phases",AIChE J.,8,1962,pp 59-63

see also:
Equation of State
Binary Interaction Coefficients
Accentric Factors
Interfacial Tension

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 763

16.7.3 Interfacial Tension

Parachors and Interfacial Tension

The interfacial tension of a pure substance is given by the equation:

4
rl - r g
s = P
M
where is the interfacial tension , P is the parachor and M is the molecular weight of
the substance. l and g are the densities of the liquid and gas.
This equation can be extended to mixtures of hydrocarbons and becomes:
4
rl r g
s = Pj x j - yj
j Ml M g

Ml and Mg are the molecular weight of the gas and liquid at equilibrium. P x and y
are the component parachors, liquid and gas mole fractions respectively.

Reference:
Weinaug, C.F. and Katz,D.L.:- "Surface Tension of Methane-Propane Mixtures," Ind.
Eng. Chem. (1943) 35,239-242
16.7.4 Hydrate Modelling
Hydrate calculations are included within the Phase Envelope calculation and as a
warning within IPM.
See
Background to Hydrates
Hydrate Models
Hydrate Inhibition
Hydrate Reference List

16.7.4.1Background to Hydrates
This help is not intended to be a comprehensive guide to the subject of hydrates.
A detailed explanation of hydrates is available in references 1-4 of the Hydrate
Reference List.
Gas Hydrates are solid meta-stable compounds which form at higher temperatures
than that expected for pure water ice.
Gas hydrates can be referred to as compounds because they have a fixed
composition.
However, a hydrate is a particular type of compound which derives its formation not
from covalent bonds but from weak van der Waals attraction forces.
Within a hydrate, water molecules form a cage with spaces(cavities). If a gas
molecule is of the right size it can occupy a cavity and weakly bond to the
surrounding water molecules.
This bonding makes the overall energy of the hydrate lower than that for the

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 764 PROSPER

molecules in non-hydrate form and acts as the thermodynamic driving force for
hydrate formation.
The compounds formed by this type of loose entrapment are termed Clathrates.
Water has been identified as forming three types of hydrates VIZ. I ,II and H (ref.1,2)
For the purposes of this program we will consider only the more common I and II
forms.
The differences between the two structures derive from the number of molecules
which make up a single unit.
Both types of hydrate contain a variety of small and large cavities.
The number and size distribution of the cavities within a hydrate determines the
types and amount of gas molecules which can be held.
Not all cavities need to be filled to form a stable hydrate.
Typical of the data supplied for the two hydrate types:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------

Property Hydrate I Hydrate II

Number of water molecules per unit 46 136
cell
No. of small cavities 2 16
No of large cavities 6 8
Small diameter Angstrom 7.95 7.82
Small diameter Angstrom 8.6 9.46
Potential guest molecules-small C1 C1
cavity CO2 C2
N2 CO2
H2S N2
H2S
Potential guest molecules-large C1 C1
cavity CO2 C2
N2 C3
H2S C4
iC4
CO2
N2
H2S

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------

With a small number of potential guests and two possible structures, the calculation
of hydrate formation can be dealt with by the application of statistical mechanics (van
der Waals and Platteeuw ref. 5)
Estimating hydrate formation is explained in more detail in Hydrate Modelling.
Inhibitors
Since hydrate formation is can be an expensive process problem ,much work has
been carried out to engineer its reduction or prevention.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 765

The most common methods involve any or all of the following:

a) Keeping the temperature higher than the hydrate formation temperature.
b) Adding bulk inhibitors such as methanol or sodium chloride which will shift the
hydration curve downwards to lower temperatures and
c) Adding "kinetic" inhibitors which act to slow down the formation of hydrate crystals
The modelling of inhibitors is dealt with in Hydrate Inhibition.
16.7.4.2Hydrate Models
The user is encouraged to read references 1 or 2 to get a more in-depth view of this
subject.
The thermodynamic modelling of gas hydrates is normally considered to consist of 2
steps.

pure water (state 1) -> empty hydrate lattice(state 2) -> filled hydrate lattice(state H)

State 2 is really hypothetical , only being used to make the calculation practical.
Written in terms of chemical potentials the transition becomes.
m H - m1 = ( m H - m 2 ) + ( m 2 - m1 )
The
m H - m1 term represents the gain from adsorption of the gas molecules.
It is this difference that is a measure of the weak van der Waals forces which are
giving the energy advantage to forming the structure.
The estimation of this term is treated as a statistical gas adsorption problem and the
varying aproaches to its solution make up the majority of the differences between the
model options (see Hydrate Formation Pressure and Minimum Inhibitor
Concentration).

The difference between the chemical potential of pure water and the filled hydrate is
given by

m H - m1 = - RT nci ln(1 - y ji )
i j
where
nci
is the number of cavities of type i
and
y ji
is the probability that cavity of type i is occupied by gas molecule of type j (see
table in Background to Hydrates).

The important term

y ji
is calculated from Langmuir adsorption theory and is given by:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 766 PROSPER

C ji f j
y ji =
(1 + Cki f k )
k
where
fj
and
fk
are the fugacities forgas molecule j and k calculted by the Equation of State
Model.
nci
is a temperature-dependent Langmuir adsorption constant whose value is
calculated differently for the various models.

The
C ji
term is commonly determined using the Lennard-Jones-Devonshire spherical
cell model.(ref 1).
This model requires an estimation of the potential function describing the interaction
of guest molecules and the water molecules at any distance r within the cage.
The lower the potential , the higher is the probability of finding a guest gas molecule
at this position. Of the alternative methods for calculating potential the most
commonly used is the Kihara (see ref 1 and 6 for more details).
In the Sloan option (ref 1) within the program the adsorption constant
nci
is derived as follows:

4p R w (r ) 2
C ji = exp(- )r dr
kT 0 kT
where R is the cavity radius and r is the distance from the cavity centre.
The experimentally fitted Kihara cell potential
w (r ) is calculated from :

s12 10 a 11 s 4 4 a 5
w (r ) = 2 ze 1 1 (d + d ) - 5 (d + d )
R r R Rr R
........eqn 1
and
1 r a -N r a -N
dN = (1 - - ) - (1 + - )
N R R R R
where N = 4,5,10 or 11 as in eqn 1
z = the coordination number of the cavity
R = the free cavity radius

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 767

r = distance from the cavity centre

the parameters
e,
a ,and
s are experimentally derived parameters which are unique to every guest molecule.

This model outlined in the Petroleum Engineer's Handbook (ref 4) uses a simplified
fit for the adsorption constant VIZ.
A B
C ji = exp( )
T T
where A and B vary for the gas molecule , the hydrate and the type of cavity.(see
Background to Hydrates)

This model from reference 3 uses a function for

nci
of the type shown for the model above , but with different values for A and B.

The total chemical potential equation takes the form:

m H - m1 Dm w (T0, P0 ) T Dhw P Dv
w
= - 2
dT + dP + ln a
RT RT T0 RT P0 RT
where
Dm w (T0, P0 )
is the chemical potential at the chosen reference state with temperature
T0
and pressure
T0

Dhw
is the specific enthalpy difference and
Dvw
is the specific volume difference going from
T0
to T

The models used vary a little in the experimentally determined values for
Dm w (T0, P0 )
,
Dhw
, and
Dvw
. Model details are available within the references quoted.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 768 PROSPER

a is the activity of water within the system. The value of pure water is taken as 1.
When an inhibitor is used the value of a is adjusted to include the inhibition effect.
See Hydrate Inhibition for more details.
16.7.4.3Hydrate Inhibition

There are 2 types of hydrate inhibitor i.e. kinetic and thermodynamic.

Kinetic inhibitors are designed to slow down the rate of hydrate formation by blocking
or stopping crystal growth.
These agents,fatty acids,amines and fatty alcohols do not stop hydrate formation,
they ony shift it to a different time and place.
Kinetic inhibition is outwith the scope of the IPM suite of programs at present.
Thermodynamic inhibitors disrupt the order within water produced by its hydrogen
bonding.
This disruption reduces the activity of the water, making it less likely to form
hydrates.
There are two main types of thermodynamic inhibitor VIZ. alcohols (methanol,glycol)
and electrolytes (NaCl,ZnCl etc.).
The chemical potential water molecules in the presence of alcohols decreases
because hydrogen bonds form between the water molecules and water.

H2O + CH3OH H O .H O CH3

With electrolytes the water molecules form a coat of many layer around the ions in
solution.
This destroys the normal liquid crystal structure of water making it more difficult for
the ordered hydrate structure to form.
Both mechanisms result in a lowering of the water activity term a in the hydrate
modelling equation.

m H - m1 Dm w (T0, P0 ) T Dhw P Dv
w
= - 2
dT + dP + ln a
RT RT T0 RT P0 RT

Activity correlations are found in references 1,2 and 7 for the inhibitors supported
16.7.4.4Hydrate Reference List

1) Clathrate Hydrates of Natural Gases by D.S.Sloan :-Marcel Dekker Inc., New York
(ISBN: 0827 99372)
2) Hydrates of Hydrocarbons by Yuri F. Makogon :- PennWell Publishing Company,
Tulsa,Oklahoma
3) Properties of Oils and Natural Gases by K.S.Pedersen,A.Fredenslund and
P.Thomassen :- Gulf Publishing Company.Houston

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 769

4) Petroleum Engineers Handbook :- Society of Petroleum Engineers

,Richardson,Texas.
5) Platteeuw. J.C. and van der Waals. J.H. : Thermodynamic Properties of Gas
Hydrates II. Phase Equilibrium in the System, Rec. Trav. Chem.(1959),78,126-133
6) J.M. Prausnitz , R.N. Lichtenthaler,E. Gomesde Azevedo :- Molecular
Thermodynamics of Fluid-Phase Equilibria 2nd Ed. ,Prentice-Hall ,New Jersey
(ISBN: 0-13-599564-7)
16.7.5 Wax modeling
Hydrate calculations are included within the Phase Envelope calculation and as a
warning within IPM.
See
Wax Models
Wax Model Details
Wax Reference List

16.7.5.1Wax Models

Won (ref 1) originally proposed a model for wax formation based on an ideal
solution.The derivation of the basic equation is as follows:
The problem is analysed in terms of a subcooled liquid and a thermodynamic cycle
(see diagrams below). This analysis is outlined more fully in Prausnitz (ref.2).
The fugacity of the solid is equal to that of the solute in liquid and for the system at
position 2 is given by:

f solid = g 2 x2 f 20
................eqn. 1
where
T0
is the mole % solute in the solvent or solubility,
g 2 is the liquid-phase activity coefficient and
f 20 is the standard state fugacity.
if it is assumed that the solvent and solute are very similar making
g 2 =1 and equation 1 becomes
P1( pure _ solid )
x2 =
P2 ( subcooled _ liquid )
with P being the vapour pressure and
x2 now referred to as the ideal solubility

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 770 PROSPER

{bmc WONDIAGRAM2.WMF}

The problem can be more generally solved using the thermodynamic cycle shown in
figure 2.

{bmc THERM_CYCLE2.WMF}

ASSUMPTION 1 Assuming negligible solubility of the solvent in the solid then

equation 1 can be written as

f 2s
x2 =
g 2 f 2L
ASSUMPTION 2 It is assumed that the fugacities depend only on the solid forming
component and are independent of the nature of the solvent.
The thermodynamic cycle allows the ratio of the two fugacities to be calculated. The
change in Gibbs free energy going from a to d is given by:
f 2L
D G = RT ln( S )
a ->d f 2 ...............eqn2
In addition the energy change can be written as:

D G = D H - TD S
a ->d a ->d a ->d
Using the thermodynamic cycle a->d is replaced by a->b->c->d . enthalpy becomes:
D H =D H +D H +D H
a ->d a - >b b - >c c ->d
This can be rewritten in terms of the Heat of Fusion(Melting) and the specific heats
in going from temperature T to the triple point.
T Pt t P
dDv
D H = Dh f + DC p dT + T ( )dP - DvdP
a ->d
Tt P
dT P
ASSUMPTION 3 The volume change at the melting point is assumed to be
negligible and these terms are ignored,giving:
T
D H = Dh f + DC p dT
a ->d
Tt
The entropy cycle can be written as:

D H =D H +D H +D H
a ->d a - >b b - >c c ->d

which in a similar way to enthalpy becomes

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 771

T Pt
DC p dDv
D S = DS f + dT - dP
a ->d T Tt P
dT
ASSUMPTION 3 again the volume change is assumed to be negligible giving
T
DC p
D S = DS f + dT
a ->d
Tt
T
The entropy change at fusion is defined as:
DH f
DS f =
Tt
Substituting the results of the cycle in eqn 2 and rearranging gives the equation
which acts as the fundamental for many wax models:

f 2L DH f Tt Dc p Tt Dc p Tt
ln( S ) = ( - 1) - ( - 1) + ln( )
f2 RTt T R T R T
ASSUMPTION 4 for most materials the melting point line is nearly parallel with the
Pressure axis allowing the triple point temperature to be replaced with the melting
point.

f 2L DH f Tmelt Dc p Tmelt Dc p Tmelt

ln( S ) = ( - 1) - ( - 1) + ln( )
f2 RTt T R T R T .................eqn 3
ASSUMPTION 5 Implicit in the use of this equation is that the thermodynamics of a
pure substance in an ideal solution can be extended to a mixture where the solvent
is non-ideal and the solid is neither ideal nor a pure single species
Some points to note about this equation is that it is dominated by the Melting Point
value.In essence this value determines when the solid may start to form. The other
important term is the Heat of Melting which plays a role both in the formation
temperature and the amount of solid formed. In its simplified form,this equation as
used by Won overestimates both the Wax Appearance Temperature and the amount
of wax formed.The various models question the assumptions built into this model
extending the equation in various ways to remove these errors.
How this equation is used and adapted within the various models is given in Model
Details
16.7.5.2Wax Model Details
WON ORIGINAL
This model is outlined in reference 1 .
Won derived the equation 3 (Wax Modelling) and expressed it as follows:
P
si g iL DH T Dc T T Dv
K i
SL
= = ( S ) exp[ f (1 - ) + p (1 - melt + ln( melt ) + dP]
xi g i RTt Tmelt R T T 0
RT

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 772 PROSPER

.......4
where
xi
and
xi
are the mole fractions of i in the liquid and solid respectively.
Won simplified this equation by assuming the second and third terms were equal to
zero and the ratio of activity coefficients
gL
( iS )
g i was equal to 1.
This leaves a fairly simply equation which unfortunately exaggerates both the Wax
Appearance Temperature and the amount of wax formed.
si DH f T
K iS L = = exp[ (1 - )]
xi RTt Tmelt

Within the model the required values for Melting Points and Heats of Melting are
taken from the following correlations
20172
Tmelt = 374.5 + 0.02617.M i -
Mi
and
DH f = 0.1426.M iTi m
where
xi
is the molecular Weight of component i

WON WITH SOL PARAMS

This model is outlined in reference 4 .
In an effort to overcome the weaknesses in his original model above Won suggested
that the assumption that
gL
( iS )
g i was equal to 1 was in valid as it lead to and overestimation of the solubility of
C5 to C10 in the solid solution.
Instead the author proposed an estimation of the activity coefficients based on
modified regular solution theory.
This gives a method of estimating the activity ratio based on solubility parameters.
:
g iL vi - -

S
= exp[ {(d - d i ) L - (d - d i ) 2S }]
2

gi RT
where
ai
is the molar volume given by :

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 773

Mi
vi =
d 2L5
xi
is the molecular Weight of component i and
L
d 25 is the liquid density of the component at 25 degrees C estimated by:
L
d = 0.8155+ 0.6272e - 04M i - 13.06 / M i
25
The paper gives estimates of the solid and liquid solubility parameters
d up to C40
-
d is the average solubility parameter for the respective phase
Within this model the author uses the correlations outlined in his original model for
estimating melting points and heats of melting.
CHUNG ORIGINAL
This model is outlined in reference 5 .
This model is very similar to Won with Sol Params above.The difference lies in the
assumption that the all the species in the solid are very similar and that the activity
coefficient of the solid can therefore be set to 1.
Equation 4 in Won Original above is modified by the introduction of solubility
parameters to be:

SL si DH f T vi - v v
K i = = exp[ (1 - )+ (d - d i ) 2L + ln( i ) + 1 - ( i )]
xi RT Tmelt RT Vm Vm
with
Vm = xi vi
Within this model the author uses the correlations outlined in won original for
estimating melting points and heats of melting
In addition the following correlations are suggested for molar volume and liquid
solubility parameter.
13.06
vi = M i /(0.8155+ 0.6272e - 04M i - )
Mi
and
d iL = 6.993 + 0.781b - 0.049b 2 - 10.235 / b
where
b = ln(M i )
and
T0
is the molecular Weight of component i
CHUNG MODIFIED
This model is outlined in reference 5 .
This model is very similar to Won with Sol Params above.The difference lies in the
correlations listed below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 774 PROSPER

DH f = 0.9Ti m ( M i0.55 )
vi = 3.8( M i0.786 )
and
d iL = 6.743 + 0.938b - 0.0395b 2 - 13.039 / b
PEDERSEN WAX
This model is outlined in reference 3 .
The model is derived from the simplified version of equation 3 (Wax Modelling) used
by Won i.e..
f 2L - DH f T
ln( S ) = (1 - melt )
f2 RTt T
Substituting fugacity coefficients for fugacities,this equation becomes:

- DH f T
f i = xifi p exp[ (1 + )]
RTt Tmelt
where
x2 is the fugacity of component i in the solid phase
f iL
is the liquid fugacity coefficient of component i
fk
is the solid phase mole fraction of component i
and
p is the pressure
The basis for the model is the presumption that not all the high molecular weight
material can form waxes.
The fraction which is allowed to do so within the model comes from an empirical
relationship :
S total p - pip C
z =zi i [1 - ( A + B - M i).( p ) ]
pi
where
ziS
is the fraction of
total
z i allowed to become wax,
x2 is the C7+ molecular weight
g 2 is the SG of component i
and
r ip
is the SG of an equivalent paraffin given by:
p
r = 0.3915+ 0.0675ln(M i )
i

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 775

A B and C are constants with the following values

A = 0.8824 , B= 0.0005354 and C=0.1144

The component melting points and heats of melting are calculated using
correlations proposed by Won(ref 1)

20172
Ti m = 374.5 + 0.02617.M i -
Mi
and
DH im = 0.1426.M iTi m
16.7.5.3Wax Reference List

1) Continuous Thermodynamics for Solid-Liquid Equilibria: Wax Formation from

Heavy Hydrocarbon Mixtures by K.W. Won March 26 1985. ,Paper 27A presented at
AIChE Spring National Meeting. Houston,TX.
2) J.M. Prausnitz , R.N. Lichtenthaler,E. Gomesde Azevedo :- Molecular
Thermodynamics of Fluid-Phase Equilibria 2nd Ed. ,Prentice-Hall ,New Jersey
(ISBN: 0-13-599564-7)
3) Prediction of Cloud Point Temperatures and Amount of Wax Formation by K.S.
Pedersen SPE Production & Facilities Feb. 1995 ,46-49
4) Thermodynamics for Solid Solution-Liquid-Vapor Equilibria: Wax Phase Formation
from Heavy Hydrocarbon Mixtures. by K.W. Won , Fluid Phase Equilibria,30 (1986)
265-279
5)Thermodynamic Modelling for Organic Solid Precipitation by T H Chung,SPE
24851
16.7.6 Separator K Values

Kvalues are the ratio of the mole fraction of component i in the gas yi to the mole
fraction of i in the liquid xi.

K Values are used as an alternative to multiple flashes to calculate the component

separation that occurs by passing a fluid through a separator train.By avoiding the
need for a flash they allow the EoS PVT calculations to proceed faster.The values
are used to calculate any property that requires a path to surface to be defined i.e.
GOR,CGR,Bo.The GOR etc. calculated using K values will be accurate where the

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 776 PROSPER

working composition is closest to the composition used to derive the K Values.

Two types of K Value are available:

o K values for each separator stage
o One set of values that represent the total separator train

The single set covering all separator train will caculate faster but not be as accurate
at lower pressures.
Having a set for each separator is slower but more accurate over a wider range.
K Values can be used to represent complex separation processes or surface
facilities. They will however require periodic update as the plant and the feed
compositions evolve.

K Values can be viewed and produced within PVTp from the Separator Calculation
Analysis Display,.

In addition the K value dialog allows the user to enter,edit import and export K
Values.

Within the IPM suite the K value option is initiated within the Main Options Dialog.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 777

For each defined separator stage there is a K Value for each component.

The K Values can be

Entered in the table provided

Imported in a *.pks file format using the Import K Vals button
Imported from another IPM suite program using the *.prp format
Transferred from the PVTp separator calculation via the separator analysis dialog

If multi-stage K values are used separator pressures and temperatures are required
for each stage. If overall K values are used the pressure and temperature of stock
tank conditions should be entered as shown below

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 778 PROSPER

16.7.6.1K Value Import Export Format

K Values are used as an alternative to multiple flashes to calculate the component
separation that occurs by passing a fluid through a separator train. They can be
exported and imported into all compositional IPM programs using the I*.pks format.
An example of the ASCII file format is given below.
NOTE
1) The file has a version number #1 to allow future upgrades
2) All separator temperatures and pressures are output in field units
3) Stages where no separation occurs are marked by zero K Values

*
* Petroleum Experts - PKS Separator K Values Export File
*
*
*Export File Signature
*#PetexPKS
*Export File Version

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 779

*#1
*
* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! FILE DETAILS !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
* FILE NAME : C:\PVTp_Files\SpeedUpEoS\K Value Test\Heavy Oil.pks
* Exported : Thu Apr 15 13:52:34 2004
* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
*
*
*
* Number of Components
*
12

*
* Number of Separators
*
5
* Press(psig) Temp(deg F)
* --------------- --------------
100 176
55 158
10 95
0 85
0 60
*
*
* KVal Stage 1 KVal Stage 2 KVal Stage 3 KVal Stage 4 KVal Stage 5 Component
* ------------- ------------- ------------- ------------- ------------- -------------
*

79.4653 129.57 345.699 573.654 0 "N2"

11.8237 17.1818 29.8777 45.6997 0 "CO2"

5.74145 8.16493 13.2977 20.0985 0 "H2S"
35.379 55.4653 129.672 209.9 0 "C1"
4.33171 6.02048 9.22303 13.7735 0 "C2"
2.04756 2.7173 3.51073 5.0754 0 "C3"
3.28627 4.42557 6.8563 10.2465 0 "IC4"

1.76212 2.307 2.81598 4.02689 0 "NC4"

1.82152 2.37614 2.8624 4.08232 0 "IC5"
1.48696 1.90983 2.17889 3.07514 0 "NC5"
0.820698 1.00098 1.0013 1.37697 0 "C6"
1.12141e-006 6.05775e-007 3.26366e-008 2.57221e-008 0 "PS-1"
*
*# End of file
*

16.7.7 Main Dialogs

The main Dialogs within the Equation of State DLL are as follows:
Composition Entry Dialog (MBAL,GAP)
Composition Entry Dialog (PROSPER)
Options Dialog
Phase Envelope Calculation
Equation of State Calculation Range

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 780 PROSPER

Equation of State Calculation Results

Binary Interaction Coefficient Dialog
Properties Dialog
Target GOR Dialog

16.7.7.1Composition Dialog (MBAL,GAP)

This dialog is used to enter/edit/view a fluid composition. This main dialog allows you
to enter the number of components as well as their names. One can then enter the
various properties per component. There are additional dialogues which can be
accessed from this screen.

The description of the composition will be displayed in the window title. The critical
volume is the main variable used in the LBC Viscosity Model.The parachor is the
main variable used in calculation of Interfacial Tension. Volume Shift can be
switched on/off from the main options dialog. OmegaA and OmegaB are normally
constants within the equation of state but they become variables when used as
match parameters. Boiling temperature is used as an indicator of the general
characteristics of a component. As such it is used as a key in the creation of various
correlations. Other keys include specific gravity and molecular weight. For example
all three of these key variables are used in the correlation which calculates the ideal
enthalpy of a pseudo component within the EoS DLL.
See also:-
Accentric Factors
Equation of State Model
LBC Viscosity Model

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 781

Interfacial Tension
Volume Shift
OmegaA and OmegaB

OPTIONS

The major equation of state options are set within the main options screen of the
individual IPM suite program. Only one set of options is allowed for each system.
Included in the options are:
Equation type: Peng Robinson or Soave Redlich Kwong
Optimisation mode
Volume Shift mode
Definition of path to surface: straight to stock tank, through a separator train,
using K Values

BI Coeffs
Click this button to enter/edit/view the binary coefficients of the fluid composition via
the binary interaction coefficient dialog.

Phase Env
Click this button to calculate and plot the phase envelope for the current
composition.

Import
Click this button to import a fluid composition from a PRP file. This file type can be
exported by the Petroleum Experts PVT program.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 782 PROSPER

Export
Click this button to export the current fluid composition to a PRP file.

Generate
Click this button to generate a table of fluid properties for the current fluid
composition using the EoS selected. A range of temperatures and pressures may be
entered and the properties calculated for each combination of temperature and
pressure. See help for Calculation Range Display. The calculation done is a constant
composition expansion.

Fill in Table
Not all properties used within the composition may be available from the PVT match
source. When this button is clicked the program will try and estimate the missing
properties.This operation is always carried out prior to any equation of state
calculation. This operation makes these automatic selections visible.

Reset
Click this button to delete the current composition.

Properties
Click this button to send the fluid through the defined separator train and determine
its black oil properties and more useful data. See help on Properties Dialog

Target GOR
Click this button to call the Target GOR Dialog. See also help on Options Dialog

OK
This option saves any changes that have been made and closes down the dialog.

Cancel
This option closes down the dialog without saving any changes..
16.7.7.2Composition Dialog (PROSPER)
This dialog is used to enter/edit/view the fluid composition. Called from the PVT
section of PROSPER this dialog allows you to enter the number of components as
well as their names. One can then enter the various properties per component.
There are additional dialogs which can be accessed from this screen.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 783

The critical volume is the main variable used in the LBC Viscosity Model. The
parachor is the main variable used in calculation of Interfacial Tension. Volume Shift
can be switched on/off from the main options dialog. OmegaA and OmegaB are
normally constants within the equation of state but they become variables when
used as match parameters. Boiling temperature is used as an indicator of the
general characteristics of a component. As such it is used as a key in the creation of
various correlations. Other keys include specific gravity and molecular weight. For
example all three of these key variables are used in the correlation which calculates
the ideal enthalpy of a pseudo component within the EoS DLL.

See also:-
Accentric Factors
Equation of State Model
LBC Viscosity Model
Interfacial Tension
Volume Shift
OmegaA and OmegaB

OPTIONS

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 784 PROSPER

The major equation of state options are set within the main options screen of
PROSPER. This can accessed by clicking on the Change button. Only one set of
options is allowed for each file.
Included in the options are:
Equation type: Peng Robinson or Soave Redlich Kwong
Optimisation mode
Volume Shift mode
Definition of path to surface: straight to stock tank, through a separator train,
using K Values

Calculation Type

This option allows the user to choose between having all the calculations being done
as the come up with the EoS or by interpolating from a set of stored tables.

Reservoir Temperature
This value is used at various points in the program. Since PROSPER has a phase
fixed within the options, the program checks routinely if this phase setting is valid.
This calculation is done for the reservoir temperature entered here.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 785

Salinity
This value of water salinity is used for all water PVT calculations.

BI Coeffs
Click this button to enter/edit/view the binary coefficients of the fluid composition via
the binary interaction coefficient dialog.

Phase Env
Click this button to calculate and plot the phase envelope for the current
composition.

Import
Click this button to import a fluid composition from a PRP file. This file type can be
exported by the Petroleum Experts PVT program.

Export
Click this button to export the current fluid composition to a PRP file.

Generate
Click this button to generate a table of fluid properties for the current fluid
composition using the EoS selected. A range of temperatures and pressures may be
entered and the properties calculated for each combination of temperature and
pressure. See help for Calculation Range Display. The calculation done is a constant
composition expansion.

Fill in Table
Not all properties used within the composition may be available from the PVT match
source. When this button is clicked the program will try and estimate the missing
properties.This operation is always carried out prior to any equation of state
calculation. This operation makes these automatic selections visible.

Reset
Click this button to delete the current composition.

Properties
Click this button to send the fluid through the defined separator train and determine
its black oil properties and more useful data. See help on Properties Dialog

Target GOR
Click this button to call the Target GOR Dialog. See also help on Options Dialog

OK

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 786 PROSPER

This option saves any changes that have been made and closes down the dialog.

Cancel
This option closes down the dialog without saving any changes..
16.7.7.3Options Dialog
This dialog is called from the various options screens within the IPM suite of
programs

PROSPER

GAP

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 787

MBAL

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 788 PROSPER

A typical dialog looks like this

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 789

Only one set of options are allowed within an IPM suite EoS system.
The main option are made up of:

Equation of State:Peng Robinson or Soave Redlich Kwong

Optimisation Mode: none,low or medium
Use of Volume Shift ; on or off
Injection gas Source (MBAL only): see below
Separator Train | Path to Surface : see below

INJECTION SOURCE(MBAL ONLY)

This option dictates the composition of the gas which will be returned for recycling if
this operation is selected within MBAL.
The main options are to use a fixed composition which is entered within the PVT
section of MBAL or to use the composition which results from the separator
calculation. This composition is recalculated and may change with every MBAL

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 790 PROSPER

timestep. The separator composition may be that accumulated from the total
separator train or taken up to a specified stage.

If the latter is selected an edit box appears to designate the final stage.

SEPARATOR TRAIN | PATH TO SURFACE

This option dictates the pat taken be the oil and/or gas to surface. It therefore sets
the calculation method for all path sensitive variables such as:

o GOR
o CGR
o Oil FVF
o Oil API
o Separator Gas Gravity
o Accumulated Gas Composition
o Stock tank oil API

The user can select either a straight flash to stock tank or to send the fluid through a
train of up to 10 separators.
The final option is to replace the separator train with a set of overall or stage K
Values. See K Value help for more information.

TARGET GOR METHOD

This option appears if GAP or PROSPER is calling this dialog

See help on Target GOR for more information.

MOLECULAR WEIGHT PHASE CHECK(GAP ONLY)

As a quick measure of phase the average molecular weight of a fluid is calculated

and compared a test value. If the molecular weight is less than the test the fluid is
assumed to be a gas. The test value can be entered on a file by file basis using the

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 791

edit box provided.

BLENDING OPTIONS(GAP AND MBAL)

These options give the user some control of the stream blending that occurs within
compositional IPM. Component pairs can be taken as selected for blending based
on their NAMES only or on a combination of their NAMES and PROPERTIES. The
property principally considered is the Molecular Weight of the individual
components.

Traditionally when using GAP in compositional mode, it was required that all the
fluids have the same number of components. The blending of the streams was then
done sequentially through the components.
It is now possible to model a situation where there are unequal number of
components in the fluids. The blending of the components would then be performed
based on the option selected in the 'Match Components By' section.

The 'Use Number of Components as Key' option is used in a situation when the
fluids each have the same number of components, but the properties of these fluids
are different. This requires that the each of the components be treated separately in
the combined fluid. In this case, the Use Number of Components as Key must be
switched to 'NO'. This can be further explained with the following example.

Let us say we have three wells producing into the separator. The wells have the
following compositions.

Well1 Well2 Well3

A1 A4 A7
A2 A5 A8
A3 A6 A9

If the 'Use Number of Components as Key' is set to 'YES' the blended stream will
have only three components. If this option is set to 'NO' then the blended stream will
have nine components.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 792 PROSPER

16.7.7.4Phase Envelope Calculation

This dialog is called by clicking on the Phase Env.. button within the main
composition display.The envelope is automatically calculated when the display is
initiated. As part of the calculation the program detects the phase of the fluid at
reservoir temperature and displays the result.The mixture critical point is also
calculated and displayed. Please note that some fluids may not have a critical point
within the temperature and pressure range of the calculation. If none is found the
values will be set as undefined.

Plot
Click this button for a graphical representation of the phase envelope at 100 percent
vapour fraction and 100 percent liquid fraction.

Copy to Clipboard
Click this button to send all data to the clipboard. This includes phase envelope and
solid calculation results as well as profile data if it exists

View Profile
An option exists to plot a temperature|pressure profile on the phase envelope plot.
The values can be entered or imported within the Plot Profile Dialog. Whether the
points are displayed can be set by the Show Profile Points combo.

FLUID TYPE

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 793

The program can work out the fluid type for the user. This requires a reference
temperature which would normally be the reservoir or layer temperature. This
reference is not always available within the IPM suite, but where it is the value will be
passed up into this display as the Local Reference Temperature. The value can be
changed by the user and the fluid type reassessed by clicking on the Recalculate
Envelope button. Note that any changes made to this temperature will not be
passed back down to the calling program. When the composition dialog is closed
down the value will be lost.

SOLIDS

The program can be instructed to calculate the hydrate formation pressure curve and
the wax appearance temperature of the mixture. The calculations can be initiated by
selecting yes on the appropriate combo box and clicking on the Calculate
Hydrate...Wax button. The hydrate values reported are the the lowest calculated
between Hydrate I and Hydrate II forms. The curve appears on the phase envelope
plot along with a line representing the wax appearance temperature. The effect of
hydrate inhibitors can be found by entering a percentage inhibitor and selecting the
inhibitor type from the combo box provided.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 794 PROSPER

16.7.7.4.1 Phase Envelope Plot

This display can be initiated by clicking on the Plot button within the Phase Envelope
Calculation Dialog.
If a hydrate curve or wax appearance temperature values exist these will appear on
the plot. In addition a set of profile points can be entered or imported which will

To rescale your plot, select the Scales option. You will need to enter new minimum
and maximum values for the X and Y axes.

To change the plot labels, use the Labels option.

If you wish to view a particular section of your graph more closely, you can magnify
or zoom in on any portion of the plot. To magnify, first place the plot cross-hair
cursor over the area of interest. Next , press down the mouse left hand button and
keep the button depressed. A rectangle will appear which you can "stretch" or drag
over the area you want to magnify. Release the mouse button and you will
automatically zoom in on the area inside the rectangle. To return to the original plot,
click on Replot.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 795

When selecting the area to magnify, first place the cross-hair cursor on any outside
corner of the box you wish to draw, drag the mouse in the diagonally opposite
direction. When the magnifying rectangle is large enough, release the mouse
button.

16.7.7.4.2 Plot Profile Dialog

This dialog is called from the Phase Envelope Calculation Dialog by clicking on the
View Profile button.
The values entered will appear as curve on the phase envelope plot. If the points fall
within the danger area for hydrates or waxes the curve points change colour.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 796 PROSPER

Export...Import

The profile points can be exported and imported as an ASCII file with the *.pxprof
extension.
The format is a simple table as shown below:
*
* Petroleum Experts - pxprof P T Profile Export File
*
*
*Export File Signature
*#PetexPROF
*Export File Version
*#1
*
* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! FILE DETAILS
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
* FILE NAME : C:\Temp\2.pxprof
* Exported : Fri Aug 13 15:42:37 2004
*
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!
*
*
*
* Number of Points
*
60
* Press(psig) Temp(deg F)
* --------------- --------------
36.25 1000
37.5625 1100
39 1200
40.5625 1300
42.25 1400
44.0625 1500
46 1600
48.0625 1700
50.25 1800

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 797

52.5625 1900
55 2000
57.5625 2100
60.25 2200
63.0625 2300
66 2400
69.0625 2500
72.25 2600
75.5625 2700
79 2800
82.5625 2900
86.25 3000
90.0625 3100
94 3200
98.0625 3300
102.25 3400
106.563 3500
111 3600
115.563 3700
120.25 3800
125.063 3900
130 4000
135.063 4100
140.25 4200
145.563 4300
151 4400
156.563 4500
162.25 4600
168.063 4700
174 4800
180.063 4900
186.25 5000
192.563 5100
199 5200
205.563 5300
212.25 5400
219.063 5500
226 5600
233.063 5700
240.25 5800
247.563 5900
255 6000
262.563 6100
270.25 6200
278.063 6300
286 6400
294.063 6500
302.25 6600
310.563 6700
319 6800
327.563 6900
*
*
*
*# End of file
*

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 798 PROSPER

16.7.7.5Equation of State Calculation Range

This dialogue is used to enter the temperature and pressure ranges for the
calculation of fluid parameters from the equation of state.
Enter the lowest temperature required in the From field and the highest in the To
field. Then enter the number of points required. Note that if only one temperature is
required then enter the same value in the From and To field.
Repeat for the pressure.
Then click on the Calculate button to calculate and view the results within the
calculation results display. A row or fluid parameters will be generated for each
combination of temperature and pressure.

Generate Tables for PROSPER

Use this option to generate look up tables. Ensure that the range of temperatures
and pressures will span that required by your application. A maximum of 1000
points are allowed in the calculated PVT table. Fluid property data can be calculated
for a specified range of temperatures and pressures. Plots of fluid properties versus
temperature or pressure can be generated. The program will determine whether the
composition describes a Dew Point System or a Bubble Point System and display
the result accordingly in the box at the top right of the screen.
The calculated data can be displayed on a plot. The variables which are plotted are
defined under the Variables option on the plot.
The program will determine the equivalent Black Oil properties by flashing the fluid to
atmospheric (i.e. standard) conditions.
These equivalent Black Oil properties can be important if you require to do sensitivity
analysis later on and wish to vary fluid properties ( i.e. vary GOR , CGR etc ).
This would not be possible with the Equation of State PVT model.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 799

16.7.7.6Equation of State Calculation Results

This dialog is called from the calculation range display. If results already exist they
will be displayed when the dialog is called.
Note that the results displayed are from a Constant Composition Expansion done on
the selected composition.

Calculate
Click this button to calculate and display the fluid properties in the grid using the
Peng-Robinson equation of state.

Plot
Click this button to display the fluid properties in a plot. Each property may be plotted
against pressure or temperature.

Clipboard
Click this button to display the send all data within the table to the clipboard.

To change the pressure and temperature ranges, click OK to go back to the ranges
dialog.

NOTE
To ensure that the table is useable for interpolation the saturation pressure for each
temperature is automatically calculated and inserted into the results.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 800 PROSPER

16.7.7.7Binary Interaction Coefficient Dialog

This dialog is called by clicking on the BI Coeffs button within the Composition
Dialog.
A typical display looks like this:

The grid is symmetrical. Only one set of values need be entered. Note that IPM only
stores and exports non-zero binary interaction coefficients.
16.7.7.8Properties Dialog
This dialog is called by clicking on the Properties button within the Composition
Dialog.
A typical display looks like this:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 801

Clicking on the More button gives all the data calculated, including compositions for
the stock tank oil and the accumulated gas.

Clicking on OK returns to the Properties Dialog

Clicking on Clipboard sends the data in tab delimited form to the clipboard for copy
into excel etc.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 802 PROSPER

16.7.7.9Target GOR Dialog

This dialog is called from the composition dialog. A typical display is shown below:

A single composition will only provide a single value of GOR through a defined
separator train. There are applications when other GOR values are required e.g.. in
the production of lift curves. This calculation takes the gas and oil derived from the
fluid and recombines them until it reaches the target value. This calculation is used
automatically at various points within the IPM suite. This display allows the user to
investigate the use of this methodology and if required prepare new fluid
compositions (see Accept Composition below).
Working and Original Compositions
A composition is created within the IPM suite by either a) importing a *.prp file or b)
entering the values into the composition dialog. When this operation is complete the
composition is stored in two places VIZ the working and original versions. At this
point both sets of mole percents are the same. All subsequent IPM EoS calculations
with the exception of the target GOR will be done on the working composition. If a
target GOR is done within IPM the new composition overwrites the working
composition with the calculated version. Holding an original composition ensures that
the program can reestablish the originally entered values. The table within this dialog
shows the working and original compositions as well as the values that have been
calculated using the target GOR Calculate facility. Compositions can be moved
between the two stores using the Copy Original To Working and Copy Working
To Original buttons,

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 803

By default, the target GOR calculation uses the original composition as a source of
the gas and oil compositions which are subsequently mixed to the target. This drop
down list allows the user to select either the working or original composition as the
source.

When a new composition has been calculated this button allows the user to
overwrite the working composition with the calculated version. Note that this option is
only available if the composition to be written to is one that can be edited. This would
normally be an input composition within the IPM suite. Compositions which are part
of any results display cannot be edited and as a consequence this button is not
enabled.

OPTIONS

The major equation of state options are set within the main options screen of the
individual IPM suite program. Only one set of options is allowed for each system.If
the calling program is prosper, a Change button will allow the user to go directly to
the options dialog. With the other program the user must go to the programs main
screen and access the options from the requisite menu.
Included in the options are:
Equation type: Peng Robinson or Soave Redlich Kwong
Optimisation mode

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 804 PROSPER

Volume Shift mode

Definition of path to surface: straight to stock tank, through a separator train,
using K Values

The display and entry mode for the dialog can be swapped from GOR to CGR by
selecting the required mode from the show combo box.

There are two methods available to the user. The difference between them lies in
the source of the gas and liquid to be mixed. The option is set for the whole system
within the main options dialog.
Method 1 Use Separator fluids uses the dead oil and accumulated separator gas to
create the mixture.
Method 2 Use fluid from PSAT finds the saturation pressure of the fluid. The
program then flashes just below PSAT to get an oil and gas composition. These are
mixed to achieve the target GOR. It should be noted that this restricts any target that
can be found to the RS of the oil below PSAT and the GOR of the equivalent gas.
Although more restricted, this mixture better reflects the case of an oil entraining gas
cap gas etc. The limits on the GOR target are displayed as the min and max GOR.
A reservoir or layer temperature is required for this method. The PSAT is found at
the entered temperature.

To initiate the calculation, enter a target GOR and click on calculate. If successful
the resulting composition will be displayed. The final GOR will also be calculated and
displayed.

This input allows the user to adjust how accurately the calculation is to be done. The
final value calculated must be less than the entered precision to be successful. Note
that the IPM programs have internal precisions for the Target GOR which are
changed by any entry made in this dialog.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 805

This feature allows the user to investigate the results that can be found using the
three compositions. Select the composition and call the required dialog. The Phase
Env.. button will call the Phase Envelope Dialog while the Properties button will call
the Properties dialog. The latter dialog gives comprehensive information on the
results of a separator calculation using the selected fluid.

16.7.7.9.1 Target GOR Method

This option is available for change from within the Main Options Dialog. Only GAP
and PROSPER use the target GOR facility.
A single composition will only provide a single value of GOR through a defined
separator train. There are applications when other GOR values are required e.g. in
the production of lift curves. This calculation takes the gas and oil derived from the
fluid and recombines them until it reaches the target value.

There are two methods available to the user. The difference between them lies in
the source of the gas and liquid to be mixed.

Method 1 Use Separator fluids uses the dead oil and accumulated separator gas to
create the mixture.

Method 2 Use fluid from PSAT finds the saturation pressure of the fluid. The
program then flashes just below PSAT to get an oil and gas composition. These are
mixed to achieve the target GOR. It should be noted that this retricts any target that
can be found to the RS of the oil below PSAT and the GOR of the equivalent gas.
Although more restricted, this mixture better reflects the case of an oil entraining gas

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 806 PROSPER

cap gas etc.

See also
Target GOR Dialog

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 807

####################################
16.7.8 Plotting
Plots can be called from the Calculation Results Display or the Phase Envelope
Calculation dialog.
A typical results plot is shown below

Two variables can be plotted at the same time. Click on the Variables menu option
to call the Variables Selection dialog.
A typical display would be

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 808 PROSPER

To rescale your plot, select the Scales option. You will need to enter new minimum
and maximum values for the X and Y axes.

To change the plot labels, use the Labels option.

If you wish to view a particular section of your graph more closely, you can magnify
or zoom in on any portion of the plot. To magnify, first place the plot cross-hair
cursor over the area of interest. Next , press down the mouse left hand button and
keep the button depressed. A rectangle will appear which you can "stretch" or drag
over the area you want to magnify. Release the mouse button and you will
automatically zoom in on the area inside the rectangle. To return to the original plot,
click on Redraw.

When selecting the area to magnify, first place the cross-hair cursor on any outside
corner of the box you wish to draw, drag the mouse in the diagonally opposite
direction. When the magnifying rectangle is large enough, release the mouse
button.

The plot window is composed of:

MENU
With SUBMENUS

1) File

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 809

Printer Setup standard Windows Printer Setup display

Print
Exit

2) View

This menu allows the user to adjust what is seen within the display. Clicking on the
menu item will toggle off and on the particular option. The options are stored on a file
by file basis.

3) Fonts...
This bring up the Fonts dialog

4) Redraw
This reinitialises and redraws the entire plot

5) Display

Scales Set the axes scales

Labels Set the Axes Label and Plot Title Text
Colours Select the colours of the various Plot Elements and sets pen size

6) Variables
Brings up Variables dialog which allows the user to select the variables to be
plotted

TOOLBAR

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 810 PROSPER

A toolbar with buttons for

vfont
vcolour
vPrinting
vScales
vLabels
vHelp
vExit

16.7.8.1Changing Plot Colours

This dialog is called by clicking on the above icon or using the display|colours..
menu option within any equation of state plot. This option allows the user to change
the colours used in the plot and set the default for all new composition plots. This
screen allows the user to select the colour for each of the text plot components
listed. First select the colour scheme to be applied to the plot i.e. Colour, Gray Scale

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 811

or Monochrome. Next select a plot component by clicking on a name in the list. The
sample panel will show the current colour. Press Change General Colour to bring
up the standard color selection dialog. Choose the colour that you require and press
OK. The sample panel will show your choice.

The two variables plotted can have their colours individually adjusted by clicking on
the Change Plot Colour n button and following the same procedure. The line width
can also be set up on this display . To change a line width press on the required
check box and press Exit. Thicker lines are useful when printing out plots
particularily for Fax use.

Pressing Apply will change the plot without closing the window.
Pressing on Exit will store the options and close down the dialog.
Clicking on Save Colours will save all the colour selections to disk to be applied as
default to all new plots.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 812 PROSPER

16.7.8.2Changing Plot Scales

This dialog is called by clicking on the above icon or using the display|scales..
menu option within any equation of state plot.
Enter the new scales for x axis or y axis variable 1 or 2 and click on OK.

16.7.8.3Changing Plot Fonts

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 813

This dialog is called by clicking on the above icon or using the Fonts... menu option
within any equation of state plot.
This dialog allows the user to select a font for each of the text plot elements listed.
First select a plot element by clicking on a name in the list, then use the Font, Style
and Size combo boxes to choose the text characteristics that you require. An
example of your choice is given in the dialog panel.

Clicking on Exit and Save will change the font in the plot being viewed and close
down the selection window. This change will only last as long as the plot is kept
open.
Pressing Apply will change the plot without closing the window.
Selecting Cancel will close down the display without implementing the changes.
Clicking Save as Defaults will make the change permanent for all plots in the
composition section of the program.

16.7.8.4Changing Plot Labels

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 814 PROSPER

This dialog is called by clicking on the above icon or using the display|labels..
menu option within any equation of state plot.
Enter the labels for x axis or y axis variable 1 or 2 and click on OK.

16.7.9 Import|Export a PRP File

The *.prp export or import is called from the main EoS composition dialog. This file
format is the main means for transferring EoS data around the Petroleum Experts
IPM suite of programs.
A composition (including binary coefficients and seperator conditions) can be
imported from a PRP file. This file can be created by Petroleum Expert's PVT
program or as an export from any IPM suite program with an equation of state model
enabled.
The file is in ASCII format and an example of the current version is included in this
help.

Warning:-

The prp fomat has been evolving as the options within the IPM suite have
increased. The file format includes a version number which indicates which
options should be read. he program maintains compatibility with old file versions
but some properties or options may not be set.
The file signature #PetexPRP is required as a comment. The program requires
this to identify the file as being the correct type
All data transfers using this format are done in field units only.
No spaces are allowed within the component names
From version 9 only non-zero BICs are exported and Costald Variables have
been added(see example output).

As the file is imported the main equation of state options are compared with those
stored within the *.prp file.
If the values do not match the options compare dialog is loaded and the user is
required to accept or reject the changed values.

The differences between the data sets will be highlighted in red as shown below.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 815

16.7.9.1PRP Export File Example

Below is an example of the export file produces by the IPM EoS Composition Export
Option within PVTp
NOTES
1) the options read are dictated by the file version number. The program maintains
compatibility with old file versions but some properties or options may not be set
2) the file signature #PetexPRP is required as a comment. The program requires this
to identify the file as being the correct type
3) all variables are exported and imported in field units only.
4) no spaces are allowed within the component names.
5) In version 9 the format for outputting Binary Interaction Coefficients(BICs) has
been changed. Only non-zero BICs are exported. Each value includes two indices to
indicate the components associated with the value. The first component has the
index zero the last has the index n-1, where n is the number of components(see the
example below). Since the BIC array is symmetrical only one half is exported.
6) Costald Volume and Acentric Factor were also added for version 9.

*
* Petroleum Experts - PRP Export File
*
*
*Export File Signature
*#PetexPRP
*Export File Version
*#9
*
* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! FILE DETAILS !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
* FILE NAME : C:\PVTp_Files\Samples\EXAMPLE2.prp
* Exported : Mon Dec 04 10:33:57 2006

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 816 PROSPER

* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
*
*
* Equation Type 0 - Peng Robinson 1 - SRK
0
*
*
*
* Number of Components
*
10
*
*
* Mole Critical Critical Accentric Molecular
Specific Critical Volume Boiling Parachor OmegaA
OmegaB Costald Costald Component
* Percent Temperature Pressure Factor Weight
Gravity Volume Shift Point
Volume Accentric Fact Name
*
* percent degrees F psig lb/lb.mole
Gravity l/kg.mole degrees F
l/kg.mole
* ------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------------
--------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------------
--------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------
*

0.31 -233.104 477.326 0.039 28.01

1.026 89.8 0 -320.35 60.4 0.457235529
0.0777960739 90.1499018 0.0357998013 "N2"
2.33 87.692 1058.26 0.239 44.01
1.101 93.9 0 -109.21 78 0.457235529
0.0777960739 93.8299 0.23725 "CO2"
68.73 -103.696 615.435 0.011 16.04
0.415 99.2 0 -258.79 70 0.457235529
0.0777960739 99.3900001 0.0074 "C1"
12.37 20.8862 635.504 0.099 30.1
0.546 148.3 0 -127.39 115 0.457235529
0.0777960739 145.750001 0.0983000025 "C2"
5.01 23.275 335.154 0.153 44.1
0.585 203 0 -43.69 155 0.457235529
0.0777960739 200.080007 0.153200001 "C3"
2.71 434.927 385.869 0.199 58.1
0.6 255 0 31.19 200 0.457235529
0.0777960739 254.390001 0.200800002 "NC4"
1.4 445.806 385.403 0.251 72.2
0.63 304 0 96.89 245 0.457235529
0.0777960739 311.320007 0.252200007 "NC5"
0.96 429.709 370.622 0.299 86.2
0.664 370 0 155.75 282.5 0.457235529
0.0777960739 368.200004 0.300700009 "C6"
3.4272 476.312 496.024 0.290418 121.581
0.762835 463.597 0 228.122 369.594 0.457235529
0.0777960739 502.959285 0.290418 "C7::12"
2.7528 906.135 262.76 0.623226 252.73
0.869181 1000.66 0 590.241 653.935 0.457235529
0.0777960739 1019.60128 0.623226 "C13::C35"
*
* Binary Interaction Coefficients
*
* Only non-zero BICs are exported and imported
*
* Number of non-zero BICs to be written or read
*

1
* Only first half of array is exported - values will be copied to second half
*
9 2 0.0272647
*
* Separators T, P
*
3 0
100 500

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 817

90 100
60 0
*
* Volume Shift Flag
*
0
*
* Reference Temperature
*
255
*
*# End of file
*

16.7.10Steam Calculations
A set of dialogs are provided to give access to the properties of steam and pure
water. The calculations can be generated directly or in the case of the PVTp
program interpolated from a calculated or imported table.

See help for:

Main Steam Dialog
Steam Range Dialog
Steam Results Dialog
Steam Single Point Dialog

Main Steam Dialog

16.7.10.1
For the IPM programs the steam calculations are controlled by the dialog shown
below

Clicking on Calculate Range calls the Calculate Range Dialog. This allows the user
to calculate a full range of steam properties for a range of temperatures and
pressures. Clicking on Calculate Single calls the Single Point Dialog. This
calculates the fluid status and properties based on an input of pressure and
enthalpy.

With PVTp interpolation options are provided as shown below:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 818 PROSPER

The Interpolate Range option is the equivalent to the Calculate Range above. It is
controlled from the Calculate Range Dialog.
The Import Table button allows the user to load a previously stored ASCII file which
will act as the basis for the interpolation. The equivalent export facility is available
from the Steam Results Dialog.
View Table makes the results used for interpolation visible within the Steam Results
Dialog.
View Inter Results calls the Steam Results Dialog with any results that have been
stored after interpolation.

See also:
Steam Range Dialog
Steam Results Dialog
Steam Single Point Dialog

Steam Range Dialog

16.7.10.2

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 819

This dialogue is used to enter the temperature and pressure ranges for the
calculation of steam and pure water properties.
Enter the lowest temperature required in the From field and the highest in the To
field. Then enter the number of points required. Note that if only one temperature is
required then enter the same value in the From and To field.
Repeat for the pressure.
Then click on the Calculate button to calculate and view the results within the
steam calculation results display. A row or fluid parameters will be generated for
each combination of temperature and pressure.

The calculation includes the following

Saturation Temperature
Saturation Enthalpy(liquid and Vapour)
Quality
Enthalpy(liquid and Vapour)
Density(liquid and Vapour)
Specific Volume(liquid and Vapour)
Viscosity(liquid and Vapour)
Specific Heat(liquid and Vapour)
Compressibility(liquid and Vapour)
JTCoefficient(liquid and Vapour)
Thermal Conductivity(liquid and Vapour)

Generate and InterpolateTables for PVTP

PVTp allows for the generation of tables for subsequent interpolation. The range
dialog becomes:

Use this option to generate look up tables. Ensure that the range of temperatures
and pressures will span that required by your application. The range can be split to

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 820 PROSPER

allow more values at the bottom end of the pressure range. It is in this region where
values change more rapidly and higher accuracy is required. Clicking on the Default
Table button populates the dialog with the values displayed above. This range is
currently used within Reveal.

See also:
Main Steam Dialog
Steam Results Dialog
Steam Single Point Dialog

Steam Results Dialog

16.7.10.3
[****]

This dialog is called from the steam range display. If results already exist they will be
displayed when the dialog is called.

The calculation includes the following

Saturation Temperature
Saturation Enthalpy(liquid and Vapour)
Quality
Enthalpy(liquid and Vapour)
Density(liquid and Vapour)
Specific Volume(liquid and Vapour)
Viscosity(liquid and Vapour)

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 821

Specific Heat(liquid and Vapour)

Compressibility(liquid and Vapour)
JTCoefficient(liquid and Vapour)
Thermal Conductivity(liquid and Vapour)

Calculate
Click this button to calculate and display the fluid properties in the grid using the
Peng-Robinson equation of state.

Plot
Click this button to display the fluid properties in a plot. Each property may be plotted
against pressure or temperature.

Clipboard
Click this button to display the send all data within the table to the clipboard.

To change the pressure and temperature ranges, click OK to go back to the ranges
dialog.

When this dialog is called be PVTp more options are available as shown below:

The Export button saves the results as an ASCII file which can be later imported
and used for interpolation.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 822 PROSPER

The Save Table button saves the results internally for use later when interpolating

See also:
Main Steam Dialog
Steam Range Dialog
Steam Single Point Dialog

16.7.10.3.1 Steam Layout Dialog

This display is called by the steam results dialog and would typically look like this:

To select or deselect a column click on its name.

The columns selected will be displayed, sent to clipboard and exported(in the case
of PVTp).

Select All
Switches on all available columns

Select None
Clears all the selections

OK
Records all selections and returns to the Steam Results Dialog

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 823

Steam Single Point Dialog

16.7.10.4
This display is called from the main steam dialog. A typical display would be:

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 824 PROSPER

To initiate a calculation enter a pressure and enthalpy for the fluid and click on
Calculate.
The results above are typical for a solution found in the two phase area. If the
solution is found to be single phase the results will be like those shown below:

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 825

See also:
Main Steam Dialog
Steam Range Dialog
Steam Results Dialog

16.8 H - Importing Data from Text Files

This Section describes how to Import Data from a text file to a PROSPER model.

It is assumed that the data to be imported is saved in a text file. It is also assumed
that the data is imported for the tables in PVT section of PROSPER.

1) After clicking on the Import tab, select the particular text file where the data is
saved.

2)
3) When the import file is selected, select the particular File format in which the
data is saved. The following example is for a Comma Separated format.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 826 PROSPER

4)
5) To select a particular column for a Field Name, one can directly click on the
column and this will assign that column to that field.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 827

6)
7) This can also be checked by the column number that is appended to the field
name.

8) Make sure that the units for each column are correctly selected according to
the input data.

9) The procedure can be repeated for all the columns.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 828 PROSPER

10)
11)By selecting continue, PROSPER will update the data in the corresponding
columns in the tables.

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 Appendix 829

12)

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

Chapter

17
 PROSPER Online Help 831

17 PROSPER Online Help

17.1 Commands
File
Options Screen
PVT
System
Matching
Calculation
Design
Output
Units
Wizards
Help

17.1.1 System
Enter topic text here.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited

 832 PROSPER

17.1.1.1Single Well Inflow

17.1.1.1.1 Inflow Performance (Gas and Condensate)

Thirteen inflow options are available. The choice depends upon the available information and the type
of sensitivities that you wish to run. If multi-rate test data is available it can be input so that the
modeled inflow matches the actual measured inflow in the well.

The average reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature must be entered for all inflow performance
models, however both the Multi-rate C and n and Multi-rate Jones models can be used to calculate the
reservoir pressure. For multi-layer reservoirs only the temperature is entered as reservoir pressure has
no meaning.

Mechanical/geometrical skin can be either entered or calculated using Locke's, MacLeod's or Karakas
and Tariq's method. Deviation/partial penetration skins can be calculated separately, using the
Cinco/Martin-Bronz or Wong-Clifford approaches.

To select the IPR method click on the arrow to the right of the IPR input field and choose one of the 10
methods available. The technique you select will determine the subsequent IPR screens displayed.
You will only be shown the screens, options and fields necessary for your selection.

The following list of correlations is available for Inflow Performance in GAS and CONDENSATE.
Jones
Forcheimer
Back pressure
C and N
Multi rate C and n
Multi rate Jones
External entry
Petroleum Experts
Hydraulically Fractured Well
Horizontal Well - No Flow Boundaries
Multi Layer reservoir (up to 50 layers and 2 choices of layer model)
Horizontal Well with friction dP loss along the tubing
SkinAide ( due to ELF Aquitaine)
Dual Porosity
Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fractures
Multi Layer model with pressure loss between layers
Modified Isochronal
Forcheimer with Pseudo Pressure
Multirate Forcheimer with Pseudo Pressure

Skin models
Gravel pack models
Shape factor model

17.1.1.1.1.1 Forcheimer with Pseudo Pressure

NEW!!!
This IPR model is based on the Forcheimer IPR using pseudo-pressure function instead of
pressure:

y R -y wf = aQ + bQ 2

PROSPER Manual May, 2008

 PROSPER Online Help 833

where the pseudo-pressure function Y is defined as:

Pi P
i = 2 dP
0 Z

a and b are the input parameters for the IPR model.

NOTE: The a and b parameters for the Pseudo Pressure Forcheimer IPR are not the same
as the a and b parameters used in the pressure squared Forcheimer IPR.
17.1.1.1.1.2 Multirate Forcheimer with Pseudo Pressure
NEW!!!
This IPR is based on the Forchheimer IPR with pseudo-pressure (refer to previous section):

YR2 - Yw2f = a Q 2 + b Q

The a and b parameters are here determined by means of multi-rate tests data.

1990-2008 Petroleum Experts Limited